Home

Setup

1. Before creating a schedule refer to the appropriate chapter to make sure you have completed the prerequisites For example if you want to create a schedule for a lobby door first complete the Doors form for this lobby door and complete all the prerequisites for doors What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to create modes how to change your system to a different operating mode by schedule or command and how to schedule events within a mode Creating Modes The Normal operating mode is already entered into the system You can create additional modes as necessary using the Mode Creation form These modes and those that you create will appear on the Mode picklist for the various Events forms Modes must contain scheduled events either Runtime see Runtime Events on page 16 11 or Start End see Start End Events on page 16 12 Only the events scheduled for a mode will occur while in that mode so it is important to make sure all necessary events are scheduled Modes can be changed either by command using Mode Command or by schedule using Mode Event See Changing Modes on page 16 7 Normal Mode Your Normal mode usually does not require any start end events to be scheduled A start end event is something you schedule to happen once not subject to weekly or 24 hour cycles Use runtime events to schedule the necessary cycles You do not need weekend or evening modes sin
2. 18 11 Recovering the Entire System ccccseeseeeeees 18 13 19 History Reports cccceeecssseeeseeeeeeeeees 19 1 Overview nemame annan ea tagabedkhea tina ss 19 1 What You Will Be Dot es cassis ccansetearmarnst ie 19 1 Controlling Which Activities Go to History 19 1 The History EOL iaietc sash hr anrea e aE 19 2 The Report Menu s s ssssesessssesesisesresesesrsssresesiseenen 19 2 The Type Meit iecenis ninenin a weaente 19 5 The Source Men Uivcascisescsideceriruhedarasnciaesan 19 5 The Format Menu cccccccccccsssssseessssssceessssseeees 19 6 The Execution Menu a daniwssiudldaniicadenSss 19 13 Th Font Men eninin anaa 19 13 The Home Icon Button sseoeeseeeeeeeeesereseserrsererrrssrreess 19 13 Up Down Buttons sesessssesssesieiesssesesesesresesesessssesese 19 13 Viewing a History ReEporbaionsdcuacedatenahomevcdiiads 19 14 Printing a History Report vai accicnanttianncnaanitioen 19 16 Saving a History REPOLCbws sivssrvaisindrvussreriarontataraneann 19 16 Scheduling a History Report ssssssssssesssseressessesee 19 16 SetU para resins taeda eea vanes E aoaea vides 19 17 The Report Events Form vcaciseavtissassmgetieues 19 17 xX Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Contents 20 SQL ReEPorts ccceseeeeeseseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 20 1 OV CLVICW sinker eS 20 1 PPPORO GUISES sisi semi iea E Tia 20 1 What You Will Be Doing scansaadwwesctealorn doen caiacevas 20 1
3. gt Q e 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 39 Doors NOTE f NOTE the door strike Select a door strike output that is wired to the same micro as the associated door sensor input The system displays a popup message to the operator if an output point is selected on the wrong micro Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist By default the door record will be assigned the same facility as the micro to which the door is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign a door s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles M2MR Output Click the M2MR Output button to display a list box from which you may optionally select an output to associate with a warning device such as a horn or strobe light The device is used by Modified Two man Rule with Door Control to notify the team members in an area that a person desiring access has presented a badge at the reader The M2MR output is a digital output DO point configured to control the warning device The value in the drop down list may only be changed by an operator with Occupancy Control permission granted When the warning device is triggered team members in the area should
4. What would change add delete etc in future editions of this book Please return this form to Attn Technical Writing GE Interlogix 791 Park of Commerce Blvd Boca Raton FL 33487 or e mail your comments to bctdocs ge com Despite rigorous product testing some problems cannot be detected in advance Please let us know if you discover any defects in our soft ware We value your feedback and want to ensure that our software meets your expectations Software Defect Report Date First Name Last Name Company Name Phone e mail CASI RUSCO Business Partner Contact Application Software Version HW Model OS Version Hardware Platform _ intel Pc Rs 6000 Problem Description Operating System CI Windows 0 UnixWare C aix 0 Linux Severity 0O Cosmetic 0O Inconvenience 0O Function Loss 0O System Crash O Data Loss Replication O Every Time CI Frequently CI Intermittent CI Rarely CI One Time Only Please be as specific as possible and explain what you were doing when the problem occurred Please fax this form to GE Interlogix Customer Support 561 998 6233
5. Q c D 5 Database Space Monitor Database Space Monitor The Database Space Monitor detects when a database space reaches a maximum usage level When it reaches this level the Monitor notifies the operators on the system using a popup message similar to the one below and an alarm is generated Once the operator is notified the system administrator will need to take the necessary steps to resolve the problem lynx 0 orion Figure D 2 Database System Monitor Notification Message By default the Database Space Monitor is configured to check all of the database spaces on the system once an hour at 5 minutes past the hour If a database space reaches 90 usage a popup message will be displayed on all terminals in the terminal table The following files are used in the configuration of this feature cas bin chkdbspace sh A shell script that determines if any database space exceeds a given usage percentage The output is written to cas log chkdbspace 1log To run this script log in and type chkdbspace sh followed by the database space names If no database space is specified it will check cas db text chkdbspace cfg If no database space is specified in chkdbspace cfg the default will be to check all database spaces cas db text chkdbspace cfg A configuration file containing the following parameters D 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Table D 4 Database System Monitor Confi
6. N D h U e D 3 o The Watchlog function in the Diagnostics subsystem menu displays error and information messages from the transaction processing system TPS See the error messages chart for a list of the most common error messages and what they mean Use the Diagnostic and the Status functions to troubleshoot problems that may occur See the troubleshooting chart for problems and possible solutions Press 1 to obtain Help for the currently highlighted selection in any of the menus or submenus What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to use the CMENU utility how to handle error conditions and how to troubleshoot problems Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 1 Conventions Conventions Terms such as SYN ACK ENQ appear in all caps in this chapter just as they appear in the Watchlog See the Glossary for a definition of these terms The term TPS Transaction Processing System appears without the article the Terms such as ACK daemon and packet are followed with a short definition in parentheses A more detailed definition appears in the Glossary Using the CMENU Utility The Picture Perfect Utilities Menu Figure 33 1 is the menu for all the system diagnostic utilities in the CMENU program To display the Utilities Menu type cmenu at the command line prompt and press or click the middle mouse button and select Cmenu from the Programs Menu P
7. 2 Type your password after the prompt and press The password does not display After the system loads the Main Menu appears The icons that appear in the Main Menu represent the Picture Perfect functions you are authorized to use See Figure 3 3 Main Menu and Submenus on page 3 5 3 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Log Out CAUTION A Getting Started 3 i It is important to log out of the system when you leave your workstation This protects the system from unauthorized use and also requires the next operator to log in If you are not familiar with mouse functions such as point click and drag see Using a Mouse on page 3 14 If you are not familiar with the root window see Using a Window on page 3 15 You can also use the Auto Logout feature Appendix D Advanced Configuration gt To log out 1 Close all open forms by clicking on the Quit button for that form 2 Click and hold down the right mouse button in the Workspace window the background area of the screen 3 Select the logout function Point and drag mouse pointer to select Log out 4 To exit the Picture Perfect Logout Confirmation window you must quit the Window Manager Select Continue Logout or click Exit on the Front Panel as shown in the next figure Using the Common Desktop Environment A ja ma e m ee Ral Of Figure 3 2 Front Panel gt To display the Pictu
8. BACKUP_DIR Specifies the default directory that stores backups This directory must exist and should be set up to have Sufficient space to hold backup files For example BACKUP_DIR cas backup BACKUP_EXT Specifies the defaults file extension that the file selection dialog matches for backup files For example BACKUP_EXT bak gt Q lt o O D Q O Q c D 5 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide D 3 File System Monitor File System Monitor The File System Monitor detects when a file system reaches a maximum usage level When it reaches this level the Monitor notifies the operators on the system using a popup message similar to the one below and an alarm is generated Once the operator is notified the system administrator will need to take the necessary steps to resolve the problem msewell triton Tue Oct 13 12 51 02 EDT 1998 One or more file systems has exceeded 90 usage on triton e Please contact your system administrator See below or check cas log chkfs log for a list of file systems 93 Icas ok Figure D 1 File System Monitor Notification Message By default the File System Monitor is configured to check the cas log file system every 10 minutes If the cas 1log file system reaches 90 usage a popup message will be displayed on all terminals in the terminal table The following files are used in the configuration of this fea
9. i Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 2 7 What s New NOTES 2 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started Chapter Overview This chapter familiarizes you with the techniques required to interact with the Picture Perfect system This includes information on using the mouse and using the various icons and windows as well as system startup shutdown and login procedures In addition this chapter lists the preferred order of tasks required for setting up your Picture Perfect system System Startup To start Picture Perfect power on your system Follow the power on procedures outlined in your owner s manual Wait for the Picture Perfect login screen Figure 3 1 to appear on the terminal Welcome Picture Perfect e iy ES gt fo wn er gt gt a Please enter your user name a 7 OK Start Over Options Help Figure 3 1 Login Screen Log In To operate the system you need to log in Your login ID combined with your password tells the system who you are and which functions you are authorized to perform based on your operator permissions Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 1 Log In CAUTION Both of these fields are case sensitive so enter the information appropriately For A instance if your login ID is dennis but you type Dennis or DENNIS the system will not recognize you The login ID cons
10. m v7 UV D o 3 m v fe 3 a 3 a Please enter your new I Cancel Figure 6 9 Change Password Window NOTE When adding a new operator in Linux you must enter a password before saving the F record NOTE Foreign language characters for example etc cannot be used within F passwords Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 6 11 Operators Set Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles 6 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarml Activity Monitor Chapter Routing Overview This chapter describes the Alarm Activity Monitor Routing feature and applies only to X Terminal and X emulation workstations and not to Web browser workstations The Picture Perfect administrator may configure the system such that one set of alarms and activity is routed to a given terminal while another set of alarms and activity is routed to a different terminal This allows Picture Perfect operators to monitor alarms and activity that affect their own areas For example assume a Picture Perfect site consist of two buildings Building A and Building B In each of these buildings there is a terminal at an alarm monitoring station Terminal A and Terminal B During th
11. 1 Backup and Restore 18 i Backup Events bctandromeda Figure 18 5 Backup Events Form W iz x i o Q A O 2 paN fe o Select Schedule then Backup Events to display the Backup Events form Type in the description of this backup Enter the time according to the format on the Control Parameters form this report is to run and select the days on which it is to run Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Use the radio buttons to specify whether the backup media is Tape Diskette or Disk File Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 18 9 Restoring the Database 6 Use the toggle buttons to select one or more of the backup types Badge Base History or any option shown on the form and then click Save NOTE When the Disk File option is selected the file name is required If the file name does not specify the path the default location for the file is the cas 1log directory m A scheduled backup event overwrites existing files of the same name Restoring the Database There are two methods of restoring your database e The Restore feature in Picture Perfect e The command line option cbr Using the Picture Perfect Restore Function The Restore function a
12. 5 re 2 There is no limit on the amount of data returned by the select statement and the bottom right of the window shows how many data records are in the report When there are more than 1000 rows it also shows you the current page and the total number of pages If there are more than 1000 rows found the first 1000 can be viewed using the scroll bars press the Next Page button to see more To view the previous 1000 rows press Prev Page Press the Go to Page button to access a particular page Report Permission Group Click this button to display all of the defined report permission groups that the operator may associate to the report The current report permission group that the report is assigned to will be displayed next to the button These two items will be displayed only if enforcement of report permissions is enabled through the Control Parameters form Otherwise the report will be assigned to the special report permission group No Report Perm Group By default all reports existing prior to Picture Perfect 1 7 are assigned the permission group No Report Perm Group Only operators with All Groups Allowed report permission will be able to access these reports and assign new report permission groups to them To display a pull down menu of the menu bar left click on the menu name and hold down the mouse button To select an option drag the mouse to the desired option and then release the button The next section Pictu
13. An entry is required in this field for the input and output buttons to be displayed on the configuration screens If no entry is made an error message will display when the record is saved If an invalid entry is made the default will be used The default number of floors is the maximum number set in the Control Parameters form Floor Labels The default floor labels are Floor 1 through Floor x where x the maximum number of floors There are two ways to edit the floor labels 1 Type directly in the text box 2 Click the Increment Floors or Decrement Floors button to display a form allowing you to specify a Starting Floor Number and either an Increment Value or Decrement Value in order to change a range of floor labels See the following examples 22 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control 22 i Example 1 To set up an elevator that will only access floors 20 through 40 and the name of floor 20 is Lobby 2 1 Type inidesenipilen 3 Enter Starting Floor Lobby 2 Number 2 Floor Desc fitions Increment Number of Floors 4 Starting Floor Number gt Floor1 Lobby 2 a Increment Value 19 Floor 2 OGL a Floor 3 Floor 4 OoN 2a OK j Cancel Floor 19 4 Enter Increment Value 19 This will result in Floor 2 Floor2i Floor 2 displaying a description of ates Floor 21 19 2 Floor 22 Floor 20 Note that these floor numbers Increment Floors Decrem
14. Micro 5 Micro 5 PX Micro 5 PXN Micro PX 2000 Micro PXN 2000 Support for Readers Alarms Scheduler During normal operation these micros use their resident databases to make local access control decisions In the event of communication failure with the host these Micros control and store reader and alarm activity and also implement scheduler events Global Antipassback Supported Any reader on any Micro 5 Micro 5 PX Micro 5 PXN Micro PX 2000 Micro PXN 2000 except a dial up Micro can be configured as an antipassback reader Keypad Reader Support for PIN Entry Keypad reader support is provided to enhance security Optional Features The fully integrated Alarm Graphics System allows you to develop alarm maps that display in real time when an alarm occurs The Import Export program enables the transfer of Picture Perfect database information to and from external databases such as a personnel database The import export utility allows other applications to interface with the Picture Perfect database The Redundant System option allows two host systems primary and backup to operate in a fault tolerant configuration The Imaging option allows a picture of the badgeholder to be displayed on screen as well as Swipe and Show 2 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide System Overview 2 l e The Enterprise option allows several hosts to operate together in a network environment e The Guard Tours option allo
15. The first two badge holders to enter a controlled space must be Team Members and at least two Team Members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Modified Two Man Rule with Door Control The first two badge holders to enter a controlled space must be Team Members and at least two Team Members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Additionally before any subsequent badge holders are allowed entry a Team Member within the controlled space must press a door release button The door release button must be pressed within the time specified in the Door Release Timeout field on the Areas form or the door will not be unlocked pue ajny UeN OML z 2 O a z lo z fe A D A warning device such as a horn or a strobe light can be activated to notify the team members in an area that a person desiring access has presented a valid badge at the reader and is awaiting entry A digital output DO point is configured to control the warning device through the Doors form by selecting an M2MR output When the warning device is triggered team members in the area press the door release button before the door timeout has elapsed to cause the door to unlock and allow entry to the area Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 21 5 How to Set Up a Two Man Rule 2MR Controlled Space How to Set Up a Two Man Rule 2MR Controlled Space gt To set up the ar
16. Use Permissions to control e Which facility profiles are assigned to an operator e Which functions find update and delete an operator is permitted to use in each menu e Which categories an operator is permitted to assign to areas and badges e Which areas an operator is permitted to assign to readers and doors e Which reports an operator is permitted to access What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to create Permission Groups set up Permissions and authorize individual operators to log in and use the functions associated with their Operator Permission Oo D e n U D 3 N 2 gt n f gt Q Permission Groups There are two types of permission groups Area Category and Report An Area Category permission group defines the categories and areas that an operator is permitted to assign The system requires at least one permission group in addition to the default permission group All Groups Allowed The All Groups Allowed permission group gives an operator full access to all Category groups and all Area groups Each permission group created with the Area Category type will appear on both the Area permission group and Category permission group picklists of the Permissions form along with the default All Groups Allowed A Report permission group can be assigned to reports if the Enforce Report permissions option is enabled through the Control Parameters form This off
17. 5 a fo a D 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 29 Door Events Door Events When you want to change the characteristics of a single door rather than a group of doors in an area use a door event instead of an area event Use the Door Events form Figure 16 14 to define door events for each mode Defining an event requires you to select a mode set the time of the event specify a door and change one or more of the operating characteristics of the door NOTE Do not set up the Door Events form to match the fields on the Door form Fields that do not need to be scheduled should not be selected that is if the door is already unlocked do not select Unlocked on the door schedule Setup gt To create a door event 1 2 Select Schedule then Door Events Enter a description for this event Set the time for this event to occur either by selecting days of the week and typing a time or by selecting At Mode Start or At Mode End Click the Select Mode button to display the Modes picklist Select the desired mode for this event then click Ok Click the Select Door button to display the Doors picklist Select the door at which this event should occur then click Ok In the Door section change the fields that describe how the door is to operate after this event occurs Unchanged fields retain the previously existing values Click Save Click New to add another door event or Quit to exit the
18. Changing a Badge Status to Deleted on page 14 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 1 Issuing a Permanent Badge Four Methods 1 Remove badges See Removing Badge Records on page 14 7 and Badge Removal Command Line Tool on page 14 9 1 Complete the Badges form See The Badges Form on page 14 10 Issuing a Permanent Badge Four Methods There are four ways to issue a badge using the Badges form 1 Using a console reader 2 using the keyboard manual 3 using the Auto Generate function or 4 using the Seed Counter function Depending on the Badge Encode permissions selected on the Permissions form an operator may or may not have access to the Reader Issue button and or a display of the badge ID number see Permissions on page 6 4 Console Reader Method gt To issue a badge using the Console Reader method 1 Select Access then Badges 2 Click New 3 Click the Reader Issue button 4 Swipe the badge in the console reader assigned to the terminal The badge ID number will appear in the Badge Encode Number box 5 Complete the Badges form For details on completing each field see The Badges Form on page 14 10 6 Click Save Manual Method You can approach the manual badge issue method in three different ways 1 using a badge that is already encoded and you type the encode number 2 assigning an encode number to an unencoded badge and then encodin
19. Double Badge Reporting 26 2 Download Upon Save 14 17 Dump PC Main Utilities Menu 33 4 Duration Time for Elevator Access 22 6 Duress Code 4 32 E eFlash 11 8 Elevator Access 22 6 Elevator Control Configuration 22 7 Embedded Variables 20 18 Emergency Modes 16 3 Encryption 10 28 Error and Warning Messages 32 16 Events 16 2 Execution Menu 19 13 F Facilities 15 5 Facility 4 38 6 3 6 5 6 12 7 4 7 6 8 3 8 5 8 9 9 3 9 7 12 7 12 14 13 15 13 23 Index 1 13 40 14 16 16 6 16 7 16 10 16 17 16 27 16 32 16 35 16 39 16 43 18 9 19 18 20 25 22 20 Facility Profile 6 1 6 8 Find 3 9 FIREWALL 4 17 firewall 10 3 Flags Column Values 20 21 Flash Download Utility 11 3 FlashTool 11 6 Font Menu 19 13 Force Download See Download Upon Save 14 17 Format Columns Window 19 8 Format Menu 19 6 Format Page Window 19 9 Format Summary Window 19 11 Forms 3 6 Alarm Events 16 34 Alarms 8 6 Area Events 16 16 Areas 13 14 Backup Events 18 9 Badge Formats 4 26 Badges 14 11 Badges Card Trace Setup 25 2 Badges Customization 31 1 Badges Keypad Alarm Response 23 7 Badges User Fields 31 2 Categories 13 7 Category Floors 22 21 Control Outputs 29 2 29 4 Departments 4 37 Departments User Fields 31 3 Door Events 16 31 Doors 13 35 Doors Elevator Setup 22 22 Doors Keypad Alarm Response 23 6 Doors Pre Alarm Setup 24 3 24 4 Generator 15 4 History 19 2 Input Groups 9 5 Input Groups Events 16 38 Inputs 12 10
20. Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 Figure 12 1 Operator FOM ena rancatanana aeaa 5 20 Example Facility Y Menu Options 0 005 5 20 Example Global Facility Menu Options 5 20 Example All Facilities Menu Options 5 5 21 Relationship Between Permissions and Permission Grou c cee eceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseeaeees 6 2 Perm Group Form cceeeeeeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeens 6 3 Permissions FOr ccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeees 6 5 Permissions Form with Picklist for Badge Admine Alae pene te eeherermere rere nee eter prem eres 6 7 Faclity Profile PickliSt scriti akei 6 8 Operators Form a a a a a 6 9 Country PIORIS T Aaa 6 10 Permission Picklist 2 eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 11 Change Password Window s es 6 11 Route Definitions FOrm ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteees 7 3 Route Points Form eccecceceeeeeeeeeseeseeseaeees 7 5 Messages FOrM ceeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeentaeeeseeeneeeeeeenaaes 8 3 Responses FOr cceeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseennaeees 8 4 Alarms FOM ee a eea aa aae a E a 8 6 Alarms Form with Color Palette Alarm Instructions and Alarm Routing Picklist 0 eeceeeteeeeeeeeee 8 10 Alarm Color Window cecceeeeeeeeeeeteeneeaeees 8 12 OutGroupS Foresman a a 9 2 INGrOUPS FOr ae ea a aaa ate aae aa aaraa 9 5 Example of a Par
21. GE Interlogix CASI Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide GE Interlogix CASI Division 791 Park of Commerce Boulevard Suite 100 Boca Raton Florida 33487 561 998 6100 Part Number 460202006B September 2003 This publication may contain examples of data reports used in daily business operations Examples include fictitious names of individuals and companies for illustration only any similarity to names and addresses of actual business enterprises and persons is entirely coincidental This document is distributed on an as is basis without warranty either expressed or implied Successful implementation depends solely upon the customer s ability to integrate each product into the total inventory of in house products While each offering has been reviewed for its compatibility and maintainability no assurance of successful installation can be given The customer accepts full maintenance responsibility A full scope of software and hardware maintenance contracts are available to the customer Copyright 2003 GE Interlogix All Rights Reserved Printed in the USA Picture Perfect is a trademark of GE Interlogix AIX AIX Windows IBM IBM Multiport Adapter IBM 7855 Modem Model 10 RS 6000 and Token Ring are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation Informix is a registered trademark of Informix Software Inc Linux is regist
22. Micros 10 i Micros orion galaa n Pres Nert Figure 10 11 Micros Form Right Times in Seconds Upstream Retries Enter the number of times the micro will try to contact its upstream micro before triggering the Upstream Communications Failure input group normally set to 3 See Create Input Groups for Micro Error Conditions on page 10 10 Upstream Retry Interval Enter the number of seconds between each upstream retry normally set to 2 seconds SOJDIIN Downstream Retries Enter the number of times the micro will try to contact its downstream micro before triggering the Downstream Communications Failure input group normally set to 3 See Create Input Groups for Micro Error Conditions on page 10 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 25 Dynamic Configuration Downstream Retry Interval Enter the number of seconds between each downstream retry normally set to 2 Host Micro Retries Enter the number of times the host will try to contact this micro before triggering the Upstream Communications Failure input group normally set to 3 See Create Input Groups for Micro Error Conditions on page 10 10 Host Micro Retry Interval Enter the number of seconds between each host to micro retry normally set to 2 seconds for direct connect micros and 8 seconds for dialup micros Polling Interval Enter the number of days hours minutes and or seconds that must elapse w
23. The Alarms Flags Devices Counts screen Figure 33 5 shows information that is less likely to change over a period of time The display is updated every second 33 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide In Case of Problems 33 Picture Perfect Alarms Flags Devices Counts History m Configured Devices pr Diagnostics Alarm Micros 1 Main daemon N Badge Async Ports 1 Receive manager N Operator Operators 0 Send manager N Hosts 3 Database manager N Tape drives 0 Printer manager N History Counts Floppy drives 0 Badge manager N Modems 2 Alarm manager N Alarm 729 r Operator manager N Badge 14 Alarms Schedule manager N Operator 196 Receive driver N Last input ID 0 Send driver N Last alarm ID 0 Resend manager N Number active 15 Micro reset N Number pending 93 Status manager N Modem driver N Routing to log N Figure 33 5 Alarms Flags Devices Counts Alarms The Alarms block shows the ID of the last input tied to an alarm the ID of the last alarm the number of active alarms and the number of pending alarms Flags Two sets of flags are monitored on this display History flags and Diagnostics flags History flags are set briefly while full history tables are swapped with empty tables The flags are used to prevent the various managers from writing to them until the exchange has been completed Diagnostics flags indicate which process diagnostics are being currently routed to the d
24. Without the Keypad Alarm Response feature the access violation would end when the door closes With Keypad Alarm Response the violation ends when a valid keypad response is entered after the door closes When the violation ends the violation s input group along with the associated alarm and outputs are reset NOTE Ending the violation is not the same as completely responding to the violation s alarm The alarm response is not complete until the violation is ended by a keypad rl response and the operator has fully responded to the alarm on the Alarm Monitor Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 23 1 Violation Notification Violation Notification Keypad When a violation starts the host displays an alarm on the Alarm Monitor The Condition field on the Alarm Monitor indicates alarm When the violation ends the alarm changes to reset state The access violation alarms must be routed to the Alarm Monitor for Keypad Alarm Response to function properly Response Alarm response at the Badge and Keypad reader requires an alarm response code a badge swipe and a PIN or duress code The alarm response code is entered on the keypad as the first activity The required order of activity is outlined below 1 Press or enter the Alarm Response Code then press 2 Swipe the badge 3 Press O or enter the PIN or Duress Code then press When the reader is configured for double transaction the first
25. e Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 41 Doors NOTES 13 42 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Chapter 14 Overview Categories assigned to the badge allow the badgeholder access to areas that have the same categories assigned When the badgeholder attempts to access an area and at least one category on the badge matches at least one category of that area the system grants access if the badgeholder attempts to access an area and no categories on the badge match any categories of that area the system denies access Information on the Badges form identifies the badgeholder by name employee number address and badge ID and also controls the function and capabilities of the badge Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites Forms Purpose PERMISSION GROUPS To authorize operators to issue badges and PERMISSIONS assign certain categories to badges OPERATORS DEPARTMENTS To allow departments categories and CATEGORIES personnel to be available for selection from PERSONNEL TYPE picklists on the BADGES form What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to 1 Issue permanent badges See Issuing a Permanent Badge Four Methods on page 14 2 1 Issue temporary badges See Issuing a Temporary Badge on page 14 4 1 Change badges See Changing a Badge on page 14 5 1 Change a badge status to deleted See
26. gt D Q D o v 5 a z fo a f 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 3 Creating Modes Table 16 2 Example of Fire Mode Settings Event Form Schedule Turn Siren On Outgroup E vents Time Unlock All Doors Area Events At Mode Start Lock All Doors Area Events At Mode End Turn Lights On Outgroup Events Time Holiday Modes Create Holiday modes to handle access requirement changes during scheduled holidays Define the mode on the Mode Creation form using a description such as Holiday or Vacation Holiday modes are usually activated automatically by scheduling them using Mode Events and typically use start end events Remember that most mode start events require parallel mode end events Be sure to schedule the start of a Holiday mode so that its events are timed properly in regard to events of the normal operating mode For example a setting of Holiday mode may be to leave the lobby doors locked Normal mode however always unlocks the lobby doors at 7 AM If Holiday mode starts on Monday morning at 8 AM and no schedule has been created to lock the doors when the Holiday mode starts the lobby doors will already have been unlocked by Normal mode an hour before therefore the lobby doors will remain in an unlocked state throughout the Holiday mode One way to keep the doors locked is to schedule Holiday mode to start when the doors are still in a locked state prior to
27. press the button means to use the mouse or the keyboard to press a designated button on the screen To press a button with the mouse point then click the left button To press a button with the keyboard use the key and press or Spacebar Command The word command indicates a command which should be typed as specified Toggle The word toggle indicates that user should turn an option on or off The state of the toggle button determines whether or not the option is turned on or off If the toggle button is pushed in darkened the option which it represents is turned on If the toggle button is not pushed in lightened it is off 1 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Using This Manual 1 i Notational and Typographical Conventions This manual uses certain notational and typographical conventions to make it easier for you to identify important information Item Example Titles Menu Items Field Names Forms Administration Keys Keyboard keys appear as graphics For example denotes the key labeled Enter or Return etc indicate the function keys across the top of the keyboard Keys that display on the screen as push buttons appear in bold such as Save Ok Close Operating Systems Picture Perfect 2 0 runs on two operating systems IBM s AIX and Red Hat Linux When the documentation differs depending on the operating system in u
28. responsible for the allows update access on all records assigned to Facility X on all forms system administrative on all forms functions for Facility X View Global This combination allows operator J ohn Smith to view all records assigned allows View only to the Global facility on all forms access on all forms Jane Doe Badge Administrator Update Badges Facility Y This combination allows operator J ane Doe to update all records allows update access assigned to Facility Y on the Badges form o records on the Badges form View Operator Global This combination allows operator J ane Doe to view all records assigned allows view access to to the Global Facility on the Operator form records on the Operator form 5 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Facilities and Facility Profiles 5 How to Link Facilities Facility Profiles Permissions and Operators Perform the following steps to link the facilities facility profiles permissions and operators 1 Define the facilities in your system using the Facility form to describe the group of records For example Facility X Facility Y and Facility Z NOTE If your system consists of a single facility you do not need to create additional facility records 2 Define facility profiles using the Facility Profile form to describe the level of access the operator will have For example Full access View only Insert only or Monitor 3 Define the permission records
29. 5 a i D pl To Figure 4 9 Routings Form Description Describe the type of messages that will be routed For example Badge Activity Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 21 Routings Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Route To One or more Route To destinations may be selected A single routing Description can include multiple routing Destinations as shown in Table 4 5 Table 4 5 Routing Descriptions and Destinations Description Destination ALL Printer History Log Monitor Email BADGE ACTIVITY History Log Monitor OPERATOR MESSAGES History Log DAYTIME ALARM MESSAGES History Log Monitor OVERNIGHT MESSAGES Printer History Log Monitor Printer Select Printer to route messages to a printer Click the Select Printer button at bottom of screen to display the available printers Select the desired printers from the picklist then click Ok 4 22 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i mi new z save view help ka find quit Record le of 14 Found Prev Next Route To W Printer W History Log R Monitor J Ena Printer Routi
30. 8 Use the arrow keys to move to the desired micros for flash download 9 Press or to select or deselect a micro All micros in a micro line must be selected individually use the left and right arrows to reach them Result When a micro is selected it appears in boldface The system determines whether the micro is direct dial up or network so no communication specification needs to be made 11 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Flashing Micros 11 i 10 When all desired micros have been selected press sc to display a listing of hex files available for download MICRO MAP EPROM Update ttyD000 h Download bctmicro1 betmicro16 ttyso ttys1 m5017 m501 50 m5p17 0 m5p190 m5p190 ee PXN Application Ver i ae Figure 11 3 Available Hex Files 11 Cursor to the desired hex file then press to select it and start the download If you need to manually enter the hex file and path name do not select a file from the list Instead press again type the path name then press to start the download Result The download will begin and progress will be displayed e The Status column indicates the action taking place on the highlighted micro of each micro line selected The status messages include maint polling erase sending connecting connect restore and ignoring An asterisk beside the sending status message indicates that the file being downloaded is the optimized version of the hex
31. Badge swipe 3 PINor Duress code NOTE On badge and keypad readers shunt codes duress codes and alarm responses may be entered by either or both transactions For example the first 7 transaction may shunt the reader s door while the second transaction responds to an alarm on that door Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 26 1 Double Badge Reporting The separate transactions comprising a double transaction may use the same or different categories while gaining access through the reader Each double badge reader must have an Interval Time defined on the Devices Readers form This specifies the number of seconds allowed between stages of the transaction If during the processing of a transaction there is no reader activity for the specified interval time period the transaction times out and is considered at an end The next reader activity will be considered as the start of a new transaction Time outs are not reported to users Double Badge Reporting All reader transactions are tracked by two separate reports one for each component transaction These reports are presented in the Activity Monitor and or Badge History Each transaction reports whether it is the first or second activity on a single or double transaction reader When both transactions are valid each transaction reports that access was granted When both transactions fail each transaction reports its individual reason for failure When
32. Figure 19 9 is only available if the history Source is set to Database and at least one sort field is specified in the Format Column window It lets you select which sort fields to summarize and how they should be formatted When you have completed this window click Ok Format Summary ma Summary By Badge Encode Number Badge Encode Number Number m Detail Indent a M Repeat Column Headers Summary Indent 0 fe Apply Cancel Help Figure 19 9 Format Summary Window Text Blocks The text blocks across the top and bottom of the window represent six different placements for summary text on the report relative to the detail lines as designated by the graphic symbol above each The three blocks across the top will place the summary text above the detail lines with the first block using flush left text the second using centered text and the third using flush right text The three blocks across the bottom will place the summary text below the detail lines with the first block using flush left text the second using centered text and the third using flush right T a o 5 z p D 5 34 n Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 19 11 The History Form text Type text in each block or leave it blank The summary text will appear on the report with the proper justification Summary By A toggle button is assigned to each sort column of the report up to eight Set this to On for each sort field that
33. For details on each field see The Readers Form on page 13 22 4 Click Save 5 Click New to add another reader The Readers Form The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence for you to follow Refer to Figure 13 9 for the top left hand portion of the Readers form Description Type a reader Description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long for example 00 1 00 LOBBY DOOR Readers bctandromeda amp S 8 3 2 3 8 b Pre Neal 00 1 00 READER Figure 13 9 Readers Form Top 13 22 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 Board Type the board number of the reader board where this reader is connected See Table 12 3 Micro 4 Wiring Chart Inputs on page 12 11 and Table 12 4 Micro 5 Wiring Chart Inputs on page 12 12 of Chapter 12 Inputs and Outputs Address Type the physical address of this reader on its reader board See Table 12 3 Micro 4 Wiring Chart Inputs on page 12 11 and Table 12 4 Micro 5 Wiring Chart Inputs on page 12 12 of Chapter 12 Inputs and Outputs Interval Time Type the maximum number of seconds allowed to elapse between stages of a transaction such as entering a PIN number in a keypad reader after a badge swipe and or between separate badge tran
34. For example when you power up the system after initial setup use the Watchlog utility to view messages that verify whether the system loaded properly After the TPS messages display they spawn the TPS managers such as the badge manager bdgmgr and the operator manager oprmgr About 20 seconds after TPS starts the first polling loop starts If the system has loaded correctly the polling message is the last TPS or TPS manager message that displays If the system is working correctly more information messages may appear when operators log in addelo and the system adds displays addisp 5 O w n p h U ie z 2 3 2 Micro Utilities The Micro Utilities Menu Figure 33 13 provides access to utilities that enable the operator to view and change the logical state of any attached micros The logical state is the state of the micro that TPS currently identifies Picture Perfect Release 1 7 1 4 01 Support Utilities Menu Copyright C 1990 1995 Casi Rusco Inc Picture Perfect Utilities Menu Diagnostics Diagnostics Subsystem Menu Micro Utilities Menu Status Status information from micros Printer Printer Utilities Menu Micro Utiliti Bee Current logical state Offline Set micro state to offline Online Set micro state to online Reset Reset micro Figure 33 13 Micro Utilities Menu Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 17
35. French text is in cas nls src fr FRand cas help fr_ FR English French Spanish Portuguese and Italian subdirectories contain a subdirectory called devel This subdirectory holds the text as provided by GE Interlogix CASI Do not change the devel subdirectory or its contents Doing so will make it impossible for a patch or upgrade to correctly modify text Translations should only be made in the language s base directory Also do not adda devel directory to any language directory not provided by GE Interlogix CASI The createlang command creates language subdirectories and copies English text into the subdirectories Note that it copies the English text provided by GE Interlogix CASI it does not copy any local modifications that may have been made to English Invoking createlang requires root permission Its calling convention is createlang locale orientation Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 32 7 Language Translation where locale is the locale identifier of the language being created orientation is the direction from which the language is read It is left for left to right languages such as English To create text for Swedish translation enter createlang sv_SE left Do not use createlang with locales that have already been created Doing so will replace that language s source text files with English This could result in the loss of translated text Only the locale for English in US en_US is cr
36. If the No option is selected there is no need to select an existing permission group and this picklist will become Grayed Out making it unselectable Area Categories If the Increased Category feature was selected during installation 32 area categories may be assigned to an area record Otherwise 10 area categories may be assigned to an area record The Category window becomes available for selection and is required when the Generate New Area using Master Yes option is selected If the No option is selected there is no need to select categories since they already have been selected for the existing areas This field will become grayed out making it unselectable Manage Click Manage to display the Category Manager window from which you may add remove or replace a category in a slot The selected categories will be used for the newly generated area record For more information on category management see Managing Category Assignment on page 13 8 15 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Generator 15 j Generating Records You have the option of generating area records from the master records information or from existing information entered on other forms depending on your answer to the Generate New Area using Master question If the answer is Yes the Generator form is used to enter the required information and a new area is generated and assigned to the reader If the answer is No
37. M5 E or M5 P e Error checking of the parameter block entries such as the network IP addresses and phone number e Option of acquiring new firmware through the Internet or diskette with the firmware automatically installed in the correct directory e Online Help Limitations e Micro must be in maintenance mode during the flash download Operation gt To flash a micro using MicTool 1 Launch the Micro Installation Tool FlashTool by choosing one of the following a Running or setting up a shortcut to flash exe in your FlashTool directory b Clicking the flash icon El while running MICTOOL Test Result The MicTool FlashTool main screen will display 11 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Flashing Micros 11 Figure 11 4 MicTool FlashTool Main Screen Micro Installation Tool FlashTool E loj xj H File Help r Options m Automatic Firmware Flash Micro Status Micro Status Picture Perfect rev 1 60 Micro Type MSF2 Boot Code D Update Secure Perfect rev 2 112 App Code Secure Perfect 2 112 Micro Flash ntry Perfect gitar lt Ok i Parameters Secure Perfect rev 3 000 Wrap Plug NOT Present Dial a Micro Origin Comm Port 1 Tn Baud Rate 9600 Q cem g Micro Ready Sills R5232 I Search for Line of Micros To IV Syntax Checking S ie 7 2 The automatic flash buttons allow you to flash a micro with the lat
38. Status Information from Micros State The Current logical state selection prompts the user for a micro ID Enter a valid micro ID or the letter a for all and press to display a detailed description of all states that apply and also any messages on the resend list for the selected micro Offline The Set micro state to offline selection places a micro offline The transaction processor does not attempt to send messages to an offline micro Setting the micro offline also prevents these messages from being stored on the resend list If a micro is going to be out of service for a long time take the micro offline to preserve shared memory Online The Set micro state to online selection forces the micro to the online state Any messages accumulated on the resend list are removed and a mandatory reset RST message is sent Reset The Reset micro selection sends a mandatory reset message to the specified micro Status Information from Micros The Status Information From Micros menu Figure 33 14 allows the operator to obtain current area badge and door records from a selected micro Picture Perfect Release 1 7 1 4 01 Support Utilities Menu Copyright C 1990 1995 Casi Rusco Inc Picture Perfect Utilities Menu Diagnostics Diag Status information from micros Micros Mir Status Stat IDEMS Alarms on Micro Printer Prin Areas Areas on Micro Badges Badge on Micro Inputs Inputs on Micr
39. The alarm response code must be different from the shunt code assigned to that micro Failure to define an alarm response code prevents Keypad Alarm Response from working on any of the micro s doors AA 0 N lt 38 5a o gt ny 3 See The Micros Form on page 10 18 of Chapter 10 Micros Figure 23 1 Alarm Response Code Field on Micros Form Defining a Reader Use the Devices Readers form Figure 23 2 to define a reader as a Badge and Keypad reader Keypad Alarm Response only works with doors associated with Badge and Keypad readers Once the reader is defined you then associate it with a door that has Keypad Alarm Response enabled See The Readers Form on page 13 22 of Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors PhysicaMSgader Type _ Badge Only _ Badge and Keypad _ Keypad Only _ Badge or Keypad Figure 23 2 Badge and Keypad Field on Readers Form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 23 5 Keypad Alarm Response Configuration Enabling Keypad Alarm Response Use the Devices Doors form Figure 23 3 to enable Keypad Alarm Response This feature can be enabled or disabled for individual doors and status requests on doors will show this The door must be associated with a Badge and Keypad reader You will be warned if the door is not associated with at least one Badge and Keypad reader connected to a micro with an alarm response code You may save the door informa
40. Tracing A Badge ieenninernanniieni e 25 1 xii Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Contents 26 Double Badge Transaction 26 1 OVERVIEW Ai Gis dis Ree aa Ma eA ae 26 1 Double Badge Function ccccccsscessscsseesseessesseeees 26 1 Double Badge Reporting scssincissicnsstassestsascisesnesonses 26 2 Double Badge Configuration cccceeeeeteeees 26 3 27 Monitoring Alarms cccccsseseeeeeeees 27 1 OVELVICW ooeccccccccsssssssccsscsccsesssssseceesscceesessssaeeeessecsesenses 27 1 Prerequisites aiana iea a 27 1 O What You Will Be Doing si aasscsscsctensccuincstersectenesessue 27 2 S The Alarm Monitor secaciasiaasssaeiucdedosorasdvenieaadnaaadueacres 27 2 2 Notification of AlarMS eeeeeeseeeesseeeseseersereerssrressrees 27 2 a Responding to An Alarm ssecscsisintsdsnensentsastnateteassconsas 27 4 Removing A Single Alarm sssssssssesessssesssseeresesesess 27 6 Purging A Single Alarm ssessssssesesssesessesesesesrssssesese 27 7 Removing All AlarmS s ssesessssesssesisessssesseseeresesesees 27 7 Controlling Alarm Outputs s ssesesesseeesesesesssseseseseeses 27 8 28 Monitoring Activity ccccccsssseeeeeeees 28 1 CDV CI eW E a A e a O 28 1 Prerequisites renean e aE E ER 28 1 What You Will Be Doing sesessesesssseieresisisrsreresseenene 28 1 Bade Monito snnseria nauenean amia 28 2 Operator Monitor ssssssssssssesesssesesesssssesssssenesssenessnese 28 5 Sw
41. attached is sent Only one broadcast message is sent to each port where a micro is configured Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 15 Diagnostics Subsystem Like the receive manager only an acronym showing the message type being sent is logged during normal operation If a port is known to be malfunctioning or the destination micro is offline the message is not sent and an entry is made to this effect Entries are also made for each instance of an invalid micro address such as an address that has not been loaded by TPS Badge The badge manager receives all badge BDG messages from the receive manager for purposes of logging them to the history tables The receive manager passes all badge swipes except those generated by a console reader when the badge program is waiting for a badge swipe from that reader The badge manager diagnostics show the badge ID and the type of badge transaction Resend The resend manager resends all non ACK packets until the destination micro responds or is placed offline through use of the mstate command The resend manager also generates SYN and ENQ messages which act together to help determine whether a micro is still running Since a SYN message is ACKed by the port group leader it alone is not enough to make this determination A SYN message immediately followed by an ENQ message serves two purposes 1 to synchronize the micro s clock and 2 to cause the destination micro to originat
42. enter the PIN or Duress Code then press e Alarm Response Code 1 Press or enter the Alarm Response Code then press 2 Swipe the Badge 3 Press or enter the PIN or Duress Code then press Badge or Keypad The reader can be used either as a badge reader or a keypad If Badge is selected then the reader is used only to read badges using a badge swipe If Keypad is selected the badge encode number is entered using the keypad in lieu of a badge swipe Press or enter the badge encode number then press Reader Control sealy solobaye9 Ps D f Q D W f 5 Q s e Use the radio buttons to specify the reader control setting for each of the following items Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 27 Readers Physical State Enabled means this reader is allowed to read badges Disabled means the reader cannot read badges NOTE If a reader is not operational set physical state to Disabled F Logical State Online permits the normal operating mode for this reader Offline means the reader is allowed to read badges pass badge data route and archive access messages and activate associated alarms but is not allowed to unlock associated doors Shunting Enabled means this reader allows the use of keypad override of shunt time Disabled means the reader will not allow shunting When enabled the Alarm Shunting feature allows a valid badgeholder to keep a
43. first name department description Dept Description issue date Click Execute Select The new heading appears in the report title bar and the selected data appears under the corresponding column headings LAST NAME FIRST NAME DEPT DESCRIPTIONISSUE DATE 9 Select Save As from the pull down Reports menu type the name of the report and click Ok Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 13 SQL Clauses SQL Clauses In an SQL select statement only the SELECT clause and the FROM clause are required The other clauses are optional SQL is case sensitive For example if you specify Door the query finds anything with the word Door in initial caps but does not find the word DOOR in all caps To include both WHERE description Door OR DOOR The SQL database stores information in tables A table is a collection of information organized into columns and rows Each table contains one or more columns A column contains one specific type of information such as last_name Each row contains all the data about one of the records the table describes A row contains one or more columns In your SQL select statement the SELECT clause limits the columns and the WHERE clause limits the rows You can create direct relationships between tables when you query a database to generate a report The report displays data from several different tables as if the data belongs to a single table See Logical Operators on p
44. monitor on weekends another alarm event F at 17 00 can start routing this alarm to the log and to the printer On Monday scheduled alarm events begin to repeat the cycle 16 36 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 InGroup Events You can use an input group event to place an input group online or offline and to control what output groups or alarms trigger when this input group activates Use the Ingroups Events form Figure 16 16 to define input group events for each mode Defining an event requires that you select a mode set the time of the event and specify one or more changes to the input group Setup gt To create an input group event 1 Select Schedule then Ingroups Events 2 Enter a description for this event 3 Set the time for this event to occur either by selecting a time by selecting days of the week and typing a time or by selecting At Mode Start or At Mode End 4 Click the Select Mode button to display the Modes picklist Select the desired mode for this event then click Ok 5 Click the Input Group button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the input group that this event should control then click Ok 6 Specify whether the input group should be Online or Offline 7 Click one or more of the five Output Group buttons First Second etc to add or change an output group for this input group event Remember that output groups are position sensitive
45. root system m 57347 Ox00abacab 9 rw rw rw root system Semaphores s 0 0x710588c6 ra ra ra root system s 32769 0x52564801 ra ra informix informix s 2 Ox6205f0b0 ra r r root system s 28675 0x52564802 ra ra informix informix Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started s 28676 0x52564803 ra ra informix informix s 24581 0x00000401 ra ra ra root system s 6 0x0105f042 ra root system s 7 0x03141592 ra ra root system s 3031120x00abacab ra ra ra root system s 57353 0x00abacac ra ra ra root system s 57354 O0x00abacad ra ra ra root system s 57355 Ox00abacae ra ra ra root system s 57356 Ox00abacaf ra ra ra root system Shared Memory Segments key shmid owner perms bytes nattch status 0x00000000 0 root 600 1056768 9 dest 0x00000000 7110657 root 600 520192 9 dest 0x00000000 7143426 root 600 33554432 9 dest 0x00000000 131075 apache600 46084 9 dest 0x52564801 6881284 root 660 33554432 6 0x52564802 6914053 root 660 33554432 6 0x52564803 6946822 root 660 33554432 6 0x52564804 6979591 root 660 30400512 6 0x52564805 7012360 root 660 33554432 6 0x52564806 7045129 root 660 33554432 6 0x00000000 6848522 root 666 16384000 1 dest O 0x00000400 7077899 root 666 16384000 25 eames Semaphore Arrays a key semid owner perms nsems status i 0x00000000 327680 apache 600 1 o 0x00000000 262145 root 660 7 0x00000401 294914
46. same micro 5 Under Reader Control Number of Badges verify that all area readers are set to Single 6 Optional If you want to activate a DO such as a blinking light between the first and second required badge swipes under Two Man Rule click the 2MR Output button and select the output to be triggered 7 Save and exit the Readers form gt To setup the area doors Each door sensor input exit button input M2MR output and door strike output in the area must be unique and they all must be physically connected to the same micro 1 From the Main menu select Devices Doors 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the door record you wish to set up 3 Under Inputs click on Door Sensor and select the appropriate input from the list displayed 4 Define an M2MR output on each door to the area that will be used for entry APB IN or T amp A IN Under Two Man Rule click the M2MR Output button and select an output to associate with a warning device such as a horn or strobe light 5 Define an input as the exit button Under Inputs click Exit Button and select an input to associate with the exit button 21 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Two Man Rule and Modified Two Man Rule 21 i 6 Under Door Control click Exit Button Asserts Strike Enabled NOTE The input selected as the Exit Button input must be set to the following On the Inputs form under Input Control Setup the Input Enabl
47. then Report Events to display the Report Events form Type the description of this report Enter the time this report is to run and select the days on which it is to run Click the Ppsql button to display a picklist of SQL Reports If Enforcement of Report Permission is enabled through the Control Parameters form only those reports that the operator has permission to access will be displayed Select the desired report then click Close A History report may also be selected to run at the same time and to the same printer 6 Click the Printer button to display a picklist of printers Select the printer where this report should print then click Close Remember to consider the width specifications of the report when choosing a printer 7 Click Save 20 24 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 i The History Report Form Report Events bctandromeda syioday 10S Figure 20 13 Report Events Form History Definition Type the description of this report Time Enter the time this report is to run and select the days on which it is to run Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 25 Scheduling an SQL Report
48. type of micro you will be flashing NOTE Any micro that is downline from a Network micro is considered a Direct micro Result A window similar to the following will display Filter icasiflash eflashimSnp oe e eF lash file names reflect the micro type mS5npet70 enl and firmware version number and have cas flash eflashi m5npe190 efl a file extention of efl for example m5npe indicates a network Micro 5 190 indicates the firmware version ef1l1 indicates an eFlash file kI i E jie Selection icasiflashieflash Figure 11 6 Network eFlash File Popup 6 Under Files select the firmware hex file to be used for flashing Result The path and filename will display in the Selection window 11 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Flashing Micros 11 i 7 Click OK to return to the main eFlash window 8 Click the Flash button at the bottom of the window to begin the flash procedure Result A dialog similar to the following will display the default files that will be used for Direct or Network If you specified a different file it will be displayed Flash files Direct casMash eflash m5pe1 70 efl Network casMash eflash mSnpe1 90 efl Cancel u w N z io 2 s 77 Figure 11 7 Default eFlash File Popup 9 Click OK Result The flash procedure will begin and the micros being flashed will be highlighted in yellow spg Line 02 0001 0002 10 Wa
49. zi Configuration i Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide D 7 Resend List State saveresend This option can be set to auto or manual e auto The resend list will be saved automatically when Picture Perfect is brought down e manual The resend list will be saved only if the r parameter is used with the command re pperf For example re pperf k r restoreresend This option can be set to auto or manual e auto The resend list will be restored automatically when Picture Perfect is brought up e manual The resend list will be restored only if the r parameter is used with the command re pperf For example re pperf s r resendfile This option can be used to override the default file cas log tps resend which stores the resend list One reason for overriding the default would be to eliminate problems associated with disk space If there is not enough free disk space to write out the resend list its contents will be lost ignore By default the following message types will not be saved or restored OUT STS MNT SYN ENQ These messages are not saved or restored because they do not update the micro s database The ignore option can be used to override the default list of ignored messages The list of messages must be separated by spaces and can be in text or numeric form Knowledge of the Picture Perfect message types is required to use this option Log Messages The follow
50. 1 From the Main menu select Access Areas 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the area records to be controlled 3 Under Categories click a Cat button to assign an M2MR category to the area 4 Save and exit the Areas form 5 From the Main menu select Access Badges 6 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the badge records requiring access to the controlled area 7 Under Badge Categories click a Cat button to assign an M2MR category to the badge 8 Save and exit the Badges form 21 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Two Man Rule and Modified Two Man Rule 21 Table 21 1 Badge Transactions for Occupancy Counting and Two Man Rule Features 2MR Mode Badge Event Description Badge Transaction Generated DISABLED Invalid badge swipe Invalid badge Occupanc Sse Unknown badge swipe Badge Unknown enabled Valid badge swipe on IN reader door NOT Valid no passage opened Valid badge swipe on IN reader door IS APB T amp A IN occupancy count opened incremented by one Valid badge swipe on OUT reader door Valid no passage NOT opened Valid badge swipe on OUT reader doorIS APB T amp A OUT occupancy count opened decremented by one STANDARD Invalid badge swipe Invalid badge 2MR Unknown badge swipe Badge Unknown pue ajny ue OM fo 2 D a lo z D 5 A D Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 21 13 How t
51. 18 Stopping Picture Perfect 3 21 Structured Query Language 20 1 Submenu 3 3 3 4 Support Services 2 5 Swipe and Show 19 1 28 1 28 2 28 7 28 8 Swipe and Show Activity Message 28 7 Swipe and Show Control 13 26 16 29 Swipe and Show Monitor 28 6 System Configuration Standards 22 7 System Startup 3 1 T Table Backup Window 18 6 Table Selection 31 6 Temporary Categories Form 14 21 Terminal Records 33 12 Terminals 4 2 Terminals Form 4 2 Text Boxes 3 6 Time Format 4 31 Title Bar 3 15 Toggle Buttons 3 7 Trace Card or Badge 25 1 Tracing a Badge or Card 4 29 14 17 25 1 Transaction History Processing 2 4 Translating Text 32 8 Translations 32 12 32 14 Troubleshooting Guide 33 22 Type Menu 19 5 nixWare 2 2 p Down Buttons 19 13 sage Count 13 29 14 18 ser Customization Window 31 4 ser Fields in Departments Form 31 3 ser Fields Window 31 2 sing a Mouse 3 14 sing a Window 3 15 tilities Menu 33 2 lt Coe e oa ea es Variables Picklist 19 12 vi Editor E 1 View 3 11 Viewing a History Report 19 14 Viewing Status By Area 30 3 Violation Notification 23 2 Ww WatchLog 33 17 Window Frame 3 16 Window Menu 3 18 Index 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Customer Survey Title of this book Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide My overall rating of this book I Excellent Very good 1 Good J Satisfactory J Fair 1 Poor What I liked most about this book
52. 37 47 Searching alarm history please wait There are currently 8774 alarm history records capacity is 10000 start date 10 31 2002 15 51 21 end date 11 07 2002 16 41 00 Searching tour history please wait There are currently 0 tour history records capacity is 1000 start date 00 00 0000 00 00 00 end date 00 00 0000 00 00 00 Searching visitor history please wait There are currently 0 visitor history records capacity is 0 start date 00 00 0000 00 00 00 end date 00 00 0000 00 00 00 ees lt RETURN gt to quit Figure 18 1 History Dates Window w o 2 c o a A p 7 er fe 1 gt gt To review the temporary tables 1 Click the middle mouse on the root window background area of the screen to display the Programs menu 2 Select the option Archive Dates Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 18 3 Performing an Archive Help his program reports the exact number of records in each of the istory temp tables and reports the earliest and latest dates and times Temp tables may be archived at any time here are currently 58 badge history records to be archived start date 11 01 2002 08 18 33 end date 11 05 2002 09 45 25 Searching operator history please wait There are currently 3752 operator history records to be archived start date 10 31 2002 15 45 18 end date 11 05 2002 14 25 00 Searching alarm
53. 4 i records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Email Use the Email form Figure 4 8 to add e mail addresses within the system for the routing of alarms When an alarm is generated a message will be e mailed to the address listed in the Email Address field Each time an alarm is set or reset another message will be sent NOTE In order for the Email feature to work properly the Sendmail subsystem must be properly configured See your System Administrator or your IS department for m assistance Setup gt To define an Email record 1 Select Control then Email 2 Complete the Email form For a description of each field see The Routings Form on page 4 21 3 Click Save gt To setup an alias 1 Open anew terminal window 2 Change tothe root user by typing su 3 Using an editor suchas vi add the new alias to the etc aliases file Each alias must be unique and must start on a new line Aliases are in the form alias name somedomain com name2 someotherdomain net For more information at the command prompt type man aliases 3 2 ie r kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 19 Email The Email Form Email betbart Bpa 2 2 28 Record O of None Found Fav sent Facility Select One Facility Select Facility OK Refresh Cancel Help Figure 4 8 Email Form with Facility
54. 5 carat crtaes aeatiesdivasetabpiesseiracunu ni 33 17 Micro Utilities ns ierenenton e ae a 33 17 Statene a E N a bei axe loeeies 33 18 COLT TIVE occa reads en a e a E 33 18 One eenaa aa en shen a eais 33 18 xiv Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Contents R Set omana n a aa a 33 18 Status Information from Micro cccccesceeeeeeeeees 33 18 IAEE E a a EENE E EE AE E OT 33 19 ATOAS sess e ost ae a E E N 33 19 Bad g Srpsniiieiinsiesineniakiiiai 33 19 HEL SUUES ests enclaves a n e a e E 33 19 TAPUTGrOUpPS sie i E ER 33 19 Mode ee nee ri Sr a tech eea a Taa aaa 33 20 OQ MPUIS ai oaa a N RRA 33 20 O Qutp t Group sss sissid eiris eriein 33 20 2 Outputs dbus ma idinasinua donee a SA 33 20 o IRo L EEE AE E AA EA EA 33 20 a TDOOUS E EEE E E EEE es 33 21 Printer UGES nanne e a ea 33 21 o e U a E KESAREA EA ATE AE E EEE EA EE EA 33 21 Ki Antins aea a ATEA 33 21 DLO o r E E E EEE 33 22 Clean a ar T aa E TAA AAE ones 33 22 Sfar an a a A A 33 22 Troubleshooting Guide i tsiicccsdiachascsstsinia Seastagantinns 33 22 Appendix A Changing the Picture Perfect System Host Name l a A 1 Rules and Restrictions adie eoccseasecebeessecsistunstastvbactaceites A 1 Changing the Host Name ssc kite staiadaaiasszaratencataand A 2 Files and Database Tables cccccccscceesseceesseeeeteeees A 3 toleta To lel lo 1 EEA T T E E A 3 Network FIOSEvnimaceduvencarieeattantteuaten aae A 3 Network SubhoSt cccccccccssssssecssssss
55. Activity Messages and Alarms 23 Output Groups Devices OutGroups See Chapter 9 Input and Output Groups 24 Input Groups Devices InGroups See Chapter 9 Input and Output Groups 3 26 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started Task Menu Form Information 25 Micros Devices Micros See Chapter 10 Micros 26 Data Encryption Control Keys See Chapter 10 Micros 27 Flashing Micros eFlash MicTool or See Chapter 11 Flashing Micros Micro Flash Utility 28 Outputs Devices Outputs See Chapter 12 Inputs and Outputs 29 Inputs Devices Inputs See Chapter 12 Inputs and Outputs 30 Categories Access Categories See Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors 31 Areas Access Areas See Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors 32 Readers Devices Readers See Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors 33 Doors Devices Doors See Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors 34 Badges Access Badges See Chapter 14 Badges 35 Data Generator Control Generator See Chapter 15 Generator 36 Mode Creation Schedule Mode See Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes Creation 37 Mode Command Control Mode See Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes Command 38 Mode Events Schedule Mode Events See Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes 39 Area Events Schedule Area Events See Chapter 16 Schedules and Mod
56. Administration Guide Facilities and Chapter Facility Profiles Overview The Picture Perfect system allows you to group your system database records according to facilities A facility can be records associated with a group of buildings in a city a building a floor in a building a tenant or a room on a particular floor in a building Facility records are text descriptions of these places Database records can be grouped together by assigning them to a common facility At installation a facility Global is created and by default all database records are assigned to it A Facility Profile is a way of defining the record and field level access permissions A default profile is created at installation called the Global facility profile This profile gives full access permission to all forms Once a facility profile is defined it can be associated with a facility and assigned to a permission This permission is then assigned to an operator and determines what records the operator is allowed to access and what they are allowed to do with them based on the facility of the particular record For example when the Global facility is paired with the Global facility profile and assigned to an operator that operator has full access to the database records associated with the Global facility The following diagram depicts the relationship of the Picture Perfect tables when setting up facilities in your system All of the records stored
57. BLANK Floor 11 lt BLANK gt IE LAI gt Floor 11 BLANK Floor 12 lt BLANK gt gt Floor 12 BLANK Floor 13 lt BLANK gt gt 7 BLANK BLANK gt lt SLANK gt orig lt BLANK Figure 22 14 Reader DI DO Config 3 Select the Fire DO after Floor Selection button to enable Elevator Access Method 2 in which after a valid badge read a floor has to be selected and if it is an accessible floor the DO will be activated See page 22 4 for more information on this method of elevator access Otherwise the default Method 1 in which after a valid badge read the DOs for all accessible floors are activated will be employed See page 22 2 for more information on this method of elevator access 4 Click the Reader button and select a reader from the picklist The reader should be defined as an elevator reader 5 For each floor click the appropriate button and select an input and output from the picklists To appear in the picklist the input must be defined as an elevator input Every input chosen must have a corresponding output chosen This type of configuration supports up to 39 floors per micro Click the Refresh Floor Defs button to update the floor labels if changes have been made since the Config window was displayed a p lt o er fe Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 19 Elevator Control Setup Select One Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilitie
58. By default the next empty slot number is selected when you select an available category Remove Click on this button to remove a permanent category from a slot The category list on the Badges form will be refreshed will no longer display the removed category slot number This button is enabled if an active category or the corresponding slot number is selected Close Click this button to close the Category Manager window Refresh Click this button to update the category list display after adding categories from the Category form Help Click this button to display the HTML help screen for the Category Manager window To add a permanent category to the next available slot 1 Click the Manage button to display the Category Manager window Result A list of all available categories in alphabetical order will display If a category has been assigned a slot the slot number will be displayed beside it 2 Select the desired category Result The next available slot will be highlighted 13 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 3 Click Add Result The category list on the main form will be refreshed and will display the new category and the slot number to which it was assigned 4 Click Close to return to the main form gt To add a permanent category to a specific available slot 1 Click the Manage button to display the Category Manager window Re
59. Cancel Help E Figure 27 4 Alarm Response Window with Responses Picklist 27 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Monitoring Alarms 27 l 5 Optional Enter a response either click the RSVP button to select from a list of alarm responses or type a new response When you click Ok in the Response picklist the selected response appears in the Enter New Response box The maximum length of a response is 255 characters If the responses selected from the Responses picklist exceed this limit a warning will pop up indicating this Figure 27 5 and the response will be truncated down to the maximum length The response may then be edited in the Enter New Response box to make the truncated response more presentable NOTIFY EM ADMINISTRATOR ARD WARNING w0071 fe gt e s 2 Figure 27 5 Alarm Response Window with Response Too Long Warning 6 Log the response e To log the response without clearing the alarm click Ok You can continue to select this alarm again to enter new responses The previous responses appear in the Responses To Date box Figure 27 6 e To log the response and clear the alarm click Remove on the Alarm Response window See Removing A Single Alarm on page 27 6 and Removing All Alarms on page 27 7 7 Optional Click Cancel to close exit the window without altering the state of the alarm Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration G
60. Case of Problems 33 l Flag Fields The last 10 fields are yes no Y N flag fields that reflect the current settings and conditions of the micro If the micro requests a mandatory reset during power up or if the host initiates a mandatory reset command using operator request the micro resetting flag is set until the mreset process resets the micro and the micro sends a final SYN synchronization message to indicate that it is online Micro port group leaders responsible for ACKing messages will have their ACK Pending flag set to N This is a brief condition and under normal circumstances the flag will not appear to change A flag that changes to Y indicates an unresponsive micro and a problem that requires troubleshooting If a packet is not acknowledged after the number of attempts specified in the micro record the micro is considered to be in an error condition This is a temporary condition that exists until an alarm message can be created and sent to the alarm manager After this the error flag is cleared and the micro s state becomes alarm until a valid ACK or data packet is received from the micro Once this occurs all flags are cleared including the offline flag if it is set Check the Port Records display Figure 33 8 to ensure that the selected port settings have not changed The Port Records display shows information that normally should not change after TPS has been loaded The Sp
61. Doing This chapter shows you how to configure the Alarm Activity Monitor Routing feature To get ready to configure Alarm Activity Monitor Routing using Picture Perfect forms first plan your alarms on paper Use your worksheets to document alarm locations inputs input groups output devices and alarm priorities From this information you should partition your site into sections that represent the various sets of alarms and activity Configuring Alarm Activity Monitor Routing requires three steps 1 Enter route definitions on the Route Definitions form 2 Set up terminals to which alarms will be routed on the Route Points form 3 Seta route definition for each alarm on the Alarms form See Chapter 8 Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 7 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Activity Monitor Routing 7 l Route Definitions Creating route definitions is the first step in configuring Alarm Activity Monitor Routing In general a route definition corresponds to one section of your Picture Perfect site In our example in Overview on page 7 1 we partitioned the site into two sections Building A and Building B Refer to Figure 7 1 for the Route Definitions form Setup gt To create a route definition record 1 Select Control then Route Definitions 2 Click New 3 Complete the Route Definitions form For a description of each field see The Route Definitions Form on page 7 3 4 C
62. Door Description 00 1 00 DOOR lt GLOBAL gt Input Description 00 1 00 DOOR DI lt GLOBAL gt Input Group Description 00 1 00 READER lt GLOBAL gt Output Description 00 1 00 READER lt GLOBAL gt Reader Description 00 1 00 READER lt GLOBAL gt E Figure 15 1 Master Records Window The Generator Form Use the Generator form to create new records for output groups input groups outputs areas readers and doors and to then insert the records into the database AOJEIBUSS To place the new records into the database click the Execute Gen function button on the top of the form To generate another record click the New function button on the top of the form You will be presented with the option of clearing the present form or copying the current data for a new reader Clear will not clear your master records To exit from the Generator form click the Quit function button on the top of the form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 15 3 The Generator Form Generator bctandromeda CEE Figure 15 2 Generator Form Description Type a description for the record that will be generated 30 alphanumeric characters maximum There is no required naming convention but if you type a name that already exists in the database an error message will inform you that this name is already in use The description format MMM B AA is recommended whe
63. Door Events form 16 30 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 J The Door Events Form Door Events betandromeda gaaja aaja ZEEE Figure 16 14 Door Events Form Description Type a door Description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long for example Lobby Door Mode Select the mode in which the door event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur O gt D a G D 7 5 a z a 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 31 Door Events NOTE F Time If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one For example if something is unlocked every day at 8 AM it must be unlocked at some time later that day At mode start If this is a Start End event click At mode start if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At mode end If this is a Start End event click At mode end if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more
64. Form with Micro and Output Group PICKIISUS sannous en aaun ASAE ES an cnet EEE 12 8 Figure 12 4 Inputs FOrm cececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeseaeeeeneeaaes 12 10 Figure 12 5 Inputs Form with Picklists cccceeeeseeeeeeeees 12 15 Figure 13 1 Site Map with Access Control Areas 13 3 Figure 13 2 Categories Forim ccccceccceeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaes 13 7 Figure 13 3 Categories List BOX ececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeaees 13 8 Figure 13 4 Category Manager Window ccceeseeeeeeereees 13 9 Figure 13 5 Areas Form TOp cccccccceesseeeeeeenteeeeeeenneeeeeeeaaes 13 14 Figure 13 6 Areas Form Bottom 0 cc cceeeeeeeeeennteeeeeeeaes 13 17 Figure 13 7 Common Reader Setup a Sentteds tuba a n aa tea bites a te heme aka ds 13 21 Figure 13 8 In Out Reader Setup with Single Door 13 21 Figure 13 9 Readers Form Top eeeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeaas 13 22 Figure 13 10 Readers Form Bottom Right cseeeeeee 13 25 Figure 13 11 Common Door Setup 00 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeaee 13 31 Figure 13 12 Supervised Door DI and Exit DI Setup 13 32 Figure 13 13 Doors Form ToOp sseeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 13 35 Figure 13 14 Doors Form Bottom Left 0 eeeeeeeeeeees 13 36 Figure 13 15 Doors Form Bottom Right 13 39 Figure 14 1 Badge Removal PopuD cesseeeeeesteeeeeeenees 14 8 Figure 14 2 Rem
65. If an e mail address is selected the system will not route the alarm to any terminals Start Time This field identifies when a scheduled route point becomes enabled The format of the value entered should conform to the time format in system configuration If this value is blank it defaults to zero which represents midnight This field is required only if you want to use scheduled route points that begin at times other than zero Stop Time This field identifies when a scheduled route point becomes disabled The format of the value entered should conform to the time format in system configuration If this value is blank it defaults to midnight This field is required only if you want to use scheduled route points that end at times other than midnight 7 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Activity Monitor Routing 7 Sun Sat These toggle buttons indicate what days of the week this route point should be enabled Select the desired days of the week by clicking the appropriate toggle button If no days are selected alarms and activity with this route point s route definition will not be routed Bump To Terminals This field identifies the route point s bump terminals The number of terminals selected is displayed Click the Bump To Terminals button to display a picklist of terminals One or more terminals up to 32 may be selected as a bump terminal As terminals are selected or unselected from the pickl
66. If you choose this option the Alarm Color window will be displayed on the Alarms form See Alarm Colors on page 8 9 EJ D 02 D D kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 33 Parameters Record Remove Maximum Specifies the maximum number of badge records that can be removed during the Record Remove Interval It is not required to restart Picture Perfect or the Badges form when changing this setting Record Remove Interval Specifies a period of time in minutes during which a group of badge records may be removed The system removes badge records for this period of time or until the number of badge records set under Record Remove Maximum has been reached whichever comes first If more badges are to be removed the system waits until the beginning of the next interval then automatically reinitiates the badge removal process This process is repeated until all listed badges have been removed The minimum setting is one minute It is not required to restart Picture Perfect or the Badges form when changing this setting NOTE The badge removal process is initiated by clicking The Remove function button F on the Badges form See Removing Badge Records on page 14 7 Number of User Fields This field displays the number of User Fields that will appear on the Badges form User Fields are used for detailed badgeholder identification This field is read only and is set during installation Refe
67. Levels By default the diagnostic log is located in the cas 1log directory and is named log MMDD where MM is substituted with a zero padded month number and DD is substituted with a zero padded day For example the log for April 5 of any year is named log 0405 The log automatically rolls over to a new log prior to the first log entry after midnight 23 59 local time A new log is not created until a log entry is necessary The Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 13 Diagnostics Subsystem Set system keeps logs for 7 days before it begins automatic erasure of the oldest day The Diagnostic Monitor is a user program used to view diagnostics from within the Picture Perfect X windows environment It consists of a set of internal buffers updated by whichever processes currently have diagnostics set The Set diagnostic levels selection displays a menu of diagnostics that you can set Figure 33 11 The items on the menu are a subset of the fifteen diagnostics levels available Future releases of CMENU may include additional selections Picture Perfect Release 1 7 1 4 01 Support Utilities Menu Copyright c 1990 1995 Casi Rusco Inc Picture Perfect Utilities em Diagnostics Subsystem Menu Micros Status Printer Process Process control diagnostics Check Set Clear WatchL Set main daemon diagnostics RevDrv Set receive driver diagnostics SndDrv Set send driver diagnostics RevMgr Set receive manager diagno
68. Master Records Window 15 3 Menu 3 3 3 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Messages Form 8 3 Micro Alarms 10 10 Micro Communications 10 3 Micro Map 33 8 Micro Status 33 9 Micro Utilities 33 17 Micro Utilities Menu 33 17 Micros Form 10 18 MicTool 11 6 Mode Command Form 16 7 Mode Creation Form 16 6 Mode Events Form 16 10 Modems 4 4 Modes 16 2 Monitor Control Picklist 28 4 Multiple Access Violations 23 4 N Networking option 2 5 New 3 13 Normal Mode 16 2 0 Open Report Picklist 19 3 20 4 Operating System 2 2 Operator Activity Message 28 5 Operator History Size 4 29 Operator Interface 2 2 Operator Monitor 28 5 Operator Response 23 3 Operators 6 9 Operators Form 6 9 OutGroups Events 16 41 OutGroups Events Form 16 42 Output Group Picklist 12 8 Output Groups 9 1 Output Groups Form 9 2 Outputs 12 2 Outputs Form 12 3 P Page Setup Window 20 6 Parent Input Group 9 7 Password 3 2 6 11 Permission Group Form 6 3 Permission Groups 6 1 Permissions 6 4 Permissions Form 6 5 Photo Imaging option 2 4 Picklists 3 7 PIN Entry 2 4 14 13 Port Records 33 12 Ports 4 10 Ports Form 4 12 Pre Alarm Fields 24 3 Pre loaded Report 20 9 Print Options Window 19 4 Print Report Window 20 7 Printer Utilities 33 21 Printer Utilities Menu 33 21 Printers 4 18 Printers Form 4 18 Printing a History Report 19 16 Process Control Diagnostics 33 3 Protection Plan 2 5 Q Query 2 3 Quit 3 9 R Radio But
69. Messages 8 3 Micros 10 18 Micros Alarm Response Setup 23 5 Micros Elevator Setup 22 8 Mode Command 16 7 Mode Creation 16 6 Mode Events 16 10 Modems 4 6 4 8 Operators 6 9 Output Groups 9 2 Output Groups Events 16 42 Outputs Elevator Setup 22 10 Parameters 4 28 Parameters Badge Trace Routing 25 1 Parameters Elevator Floors 22 8 Permission Group 6 3 Permissions 6 5 Personnel Type 4 39 Ports 4 12 Index 2 Ports Network 4 16 Printers 4 18 4 20 Readers 13 22 Readers Badge and Keypad Setup 23 5 Readers Double Badge Setup 26 3 Report Events 19 17 20 25 Responses 8 4 Route Definitions 7 3 Route Points 7 5 Routings 4 21 Status 30 2 Structured Query Language SQL 20 2 Temporary Categories 14 21 Terminals 4 2 Free Access Floors 22 6 Freeze 3 14 Function Buttons 3 9 G Generating Records 15 7 Generator Form 15 4 Glossary GL 1 Guard 2 5 H Help 2 3 History Form 19 2 Holiday Mode 16 4 Home Icon Button 19 13 Host Records 33 12 l Import Export 2 4 Increased Category 4 36 13 2 13 20 14 25 15 6 16 18 InGroups Events 16 37 InGroups Events Form 16 38 Input Groups 9 3 Input Groups Form 9 5 Inputs 12 9 Inputs Form 12 10 K Keypad Response 23 2 Keys Form 10 28 L Language 32 14 32 15 Language Selection 31 5 Language Translation 32 5 Limited Usage 13 29 14 18 Linux 2 1 GL 5 Locale 32 6 Log In 3 1 Log Out 3 3 Logical Operators 20 16 M Main Menu 3 3 3 4 Master Records 15 2
70. Names Picklists 20 9 Example of a Pre Loaded SQL Report 20 10 SQL Syntax for Embedded Variables 20 18 Example of Linebreak cccccceeeeeeeeeteeeeees 20 19 Example of Pagebreak cccceeeceeceeeeeenreeeeeene 20 20 Report Events Form History cceeeeeeeeeeeee 20 25 Example of Elevator Control Method 1 22 3 Example of Elevator Control Method 2 22 5 Number of Floors Field on Parameters Form 22 8 Type Field on Micros FOM 22 8 Type Field on Readers Form c cccceceeseeeeeeenees 22 9 Outputs Form Configured for Elevator Floor BUtlOiess ct a cect tessa e ftreeeenete 22 10 Inputs Form Configured for Elevator Floor AMi CoN a EE EE A tacts teal create ET 22 12 Elevator FOM lis insani eee eaaa e itt ea sgreat 22 13 Floor Description WindOW ccccccseeeeseeeeeees 22 14 Example of Increment Floors eeeeeeeees 22 15 Example of Decrement Floors 00000 22 16 XX Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide List of Figures Figure 22 12 Figure 22 13 Figure 22 14 Figure 22 15 Figure 22 16 Figure 22 17 Figure 22 18 Figure 23 1 Figure 23 2 Figure 23 3 Figure 23 4 Figure 24 1 Figure 24 2 Figure 25 1 Figure 25 2 Figure 26 1 Figure 26 2 Figure 26 3 Figure 27 1 Figure 27 2 Figure 27 3 Figure 27 4 Figure 27 5 Figure 27 6
71. Prefix Enter the command string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters used to tell the modem to dial the number that follows Dial Stored Prefix Enter the command string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that tells the modem to dial the phone number stored in the modem s non volatile memory NOTE Some modems can store phone numbers at multiple memory locations On your modem location 0 is not available for stored phone numbers because it is 7 reserved for the host phone number Hangup Command Enter the command string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters used to disconnect or hang up the modem EOL ASCII Value Enter the character expressed in ASCII value that terminates every command string Attention Response Enter the string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that the modem returns to indicate that it received the attention command Initialization Response Enter the string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that the modem returns to indicate that it received the initialization command Deinitialization Response Enter the string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that the modem returns to indicate that it received the de initialization command 2 i D 2 kc Low Speed Baud For multi speed modems enter the lowest baud rate that this modem can use for a connection The line speed can downgrade to this lower baud rate to accommodate older modems or poor line quality Picture Perfect 2 0 Admi
72. Report Type If Enforcement of Report Permission is enabled through the Control Parameters form only those reports that the operator has permission to access will be displayed Ppsql Report Displays a picklist of SQL reports History Report Displays a picklist of history reports Printer Click to display a picklist of printers 20 26 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Two Man Rule and Modified Chapter Two Man Rule P 1 Overview Some high security areas such as banks may require that a minimum of two people occupy an area Picture Perfect has the ability to control occupancy in an area by placing the area in Two Man Rule 2MR or Modified Two Man Rule M2MR mode and then monitoring the count of badge holders that enter and exit the area This type of area control can be set up through the Areas form or an area event can be scheduled for a specific time through the Area Events form The standard Two Man Rule 2MR when enabled requires that at least two authorized badge holders occupy a controlled space at the same time The Modified Two Man Rule M2MR when enabled further restricts access to controlled areas based on specific M2MR category types See Table 21 1 Badge Transactions for Occupancy Counting and Two Man Rule Features at the end of this chapter a Q Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites S5 o Forms Purpose 2 7 PERMISS
73. Save and exit the Doors form gt To enable Standard Two Man Rule for the Area NOTE In order to perform this function you must have Occupancy Control permission 1 From the Main menu select Access Areas 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the area record you wish to set up 3 Under Occupancy Control enable the Occupancy Counting radio button 4 Under Two Man Rule Control enable the radio button labeled Standard pue ajny UeN OML 5 Save and exit the Areas form z 2 O a z lo z e A D How to Set Up a Modified Two Man Rule M2MR Controlled Space with Door Control gt To set up the area readers 1 From the Main menu select Devices Readers 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the reader record you wish to set up 3 Under Logical Reader Function enable the appropriate radio button APB In APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 21 7 How to Set Up a Modified Two Man Rule M2MR Controlled Space with Door Control NOTE F NOTE In an area with Occupancy Control enabled All readers in the area must be assigned one of these logical functions APB In APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out APB readers must be set to Global Timed APB is not allowed e The logical reader function T amp A In Out is NOT allowed for any reader 4 Under Set Micro verify that all readers in the area are assigned to the
74. Select Floors button to display toggle buttons for each floor defined for that elevator Toggle the buttons on for each floor that is to be assigned this category Select Floors ak 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ite Figure 22 16 Select Floors Form Scheduling Elevator Free Access In order to schedule elevator free access a door must be defined on the Doors form Figure 22 17 and a digital output corresponding to a floor number must be assigned to the Door Strike Output field By using this setup a door can be scheduled to Lock or Unlock through the Schedule Door Events form When the door is scheduled to unlock the digital output is triggered and the associated floor s button is activated See The Doors Form on page 13 35 and Door Events on page 16 30 If a door is unlocked by a Door Event a badge is not required to activate the digital output corresponding to that floor This button may be selected by anyone not necessarily an authorized badgeholder The digital output can be deactivated in the same manner by scheduling a door to lock using the Door Events form The button will not be lit and a valid badge will be required to access the elevator s floors For each floor requiring a scheduled free access its digital output must be associated with a door and each door must then be scheduled for a specific action p lt o er fe 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Gui
75. Select this button to view on line help information describing the tool 31 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide User Customization 31 Select the Language button to change the current language Selecting the button activates the Language Selection dialog which controls the actual changing of the language Language Button and Box If you have made changes to this screen and then select another language a window will appear asking you whether to save the changes made before changing the language Selecting Yes will save the changes and then change the language selecting No will cancel the changes and then change the language and selecting Cancel will cancel the change to another language The box adjacent to the language button displays the current language Table Button and Box Select the Table button to change the current table Selecting the button activates the Table Selection dialog which controls the actual changing of the table If you have made changes to this screen and then select another language a window will appear asking you whether to save the changes made before changing tables Selecting Yes will save the changes and then change tables selecting No will cancel the changes and then change tables and selecting Cancel will cancel the change to another table The box adjacent to the table button displays the current table Fields List The Fields list displays the fields that can be customized for
76. State There are two values in this field The first is the current state of the door which in Figure 30 4 is Locked The second value is the current state of the door DI which is Closed in Figure 30 4 30 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide User Customization Chapter 31 Overview The User Customization Tool provides a Motif based user interface for customizing Badge and Department table fields These fields are used in the Access Badges and Access Departments screens Not all badge and department fields can be customized only those whose database names start with User or Address Application points of this feature are shown in Figure 31 1 Figure 31 2 and Figure 31 3 Badges orion Badge Holder Information Initials Employee 10 EERE a Poses 1 ass 3 pats a Eo a ee 561 998 6100 Cc N 1 s e a e fe 3 N o 5 Figure 31 1 Badge Holder Customization Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 31 1 Overview User Fields Figure 31 2 User Fields Window from Badges Form 31 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide User Customization 31 i Departments orion Engineering Figure 31 3 User Fields in Departments Form When the fields are customized they are immediately updated in the database so they can be viewed the next time the screen is activated The customizations are also writ
77. Submenus The Main Menu appears as a vertical window frame containing several icons Figure 3 3 Each of the icons represents a separate submenu To bring more icons into view click on the scroll bar or stretch the window frame Using a Mouse on page 3 14 and Using a Window on page 3 15 for more information gt To display a submenu Click on an icon The icons of the submenu appear inside another window When you click on a submenu icon a form appears and the submenu disappears 3 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started 3 A Categories fj Personnel Typel Badge Formats Facility Status e iy y gt fo wn er gt gt a Alarm Events Graphics and Tours appear only if you have those optional packages installed Network Backup appears only if you have the netlan package installed Monitor jiiyaj Point Definition i Tour Functions Figure 3 3 Main Menu and Submenus Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 5 Forms Forms Forms Figure 3 4 are used to enter type in and display data A form consists of text boxes where you type data also referred to as fields square toggle buttons to select multiple options round shaped radio buttons to make either or selections and selection buttons which you click to display a picklist Status Line Figure 3 4 Exa
78. The category list on the Category Manager window will be refreshed and the category will be displayed with no slot number beside it Select the category and the new slot to which you want to assign it Click Add Click Close to return to the Area Events form Result The category list on the Area Events form will be refreshed and will display the category and the new slot number to which it was assigned In the Reader box change the fields that describe how readers in this area will operate after this event occurs See Figure 13 10 Readers Form Bottom Right on page 13 25 for information on changing these fields Unchanged fields retain the previously existing values These values are subject to other events that may change the values for single readers In the Door box change the fields that describe how doors in this area will operate after this event occurs Unchanged fields retain the previously existing values These values are subject to other events that may change the values for single doors Also specify any new routing destinations for Door Held Open and Door Forced Open alarms Click Save Click New to add another area event or Quit to exit the Area Events form 02 O gt D Q D o v 5 a z fo a 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 15 Area Events The Area Events Form Figure 16 6 Area Events Form Top Description Type an area Description up to 3
79. Valid no passage One valid badge swipe on OUT reader when occupancy countis at least three door IS opened One APB T amp A OUT occupancy count decremented by one Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader when occupancy countis two within Specified reader interval time door NOT opened Valid no passage 21 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Two Man Rule and Modified Two Man Rule E i Table 21 1 Badge Transactions for Occupancy Counting and Two Man Rule Features 2MR Mode Badge Event Description Badge Transaction Generated Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader Two APB T amp A OUT occupancy count when occupancy count is two within decremented by two to zero Specified reader interval time door IS opened Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader NO Transaction when occupancy countis two but second Swipe is not within specified reader interval time MODIFIED Invalid badge swipe Invalid badge 2MR Unknown badge swipe Badge Unknown Note Door Two valid badge swipes on IN reader Two Valid door locked NOT opened when room is empty within specified caseincludes reader interval time M2MR category type door release NOT Team Member and is Valid GUEST not pressed within specified time interval Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time but second badge category type id NOT valid not on area Vali
80. a picklist appears that allows you to select one record from the group of previously created records Once master records are created they are used to generate readers and doors for your system Since most generated records are similar the Generator can be used to copy the values from the master record into a newly generated record Copying a set of values from the master record saves you from having to configure and save each record The Master Records table is required to be set up only once but it can be changed at any time The changes only affect records generated after the change no previously generated records are affected If records are created from a defective master record the created records must be corrected individually there is no Master Records Corrections facility gt To create Master Records 1 Select Control then Generator 2 Click the Master Records function button at the top of the Generator form The Master Records window appears Figure 15 1 3 Click the Description button for each of the master records and choose the description that you want to use for a template Click Close to exit the Description window 4 Click Ok to save the master records and return to the Generator window 15 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Generator 15 l 5 Click the Quit function button to exit the Generator window Ao Maeres Area Description AREA lt GLOBAL gt
81. a value which means Pre alarm should already have activated it immediately does so 24 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Pre Alarm Notification 24 i e When Pre alarm can activate and the Allowable Open Time is extended the timing continues uninterrupted Pre alarm activates when the door has been opened for the new Allowable Open Time minus one minute Pre Alarm Configuration Use the Devices Doors form Figure 24 1 and Figure 24 2 to configure Pre Alarm for an individual door galaa am no Pres Next v m gt 2 a 2 3 3 z z 2 8 G 5 C S11 OG 1G Cee Figure 24 1 Pre Alarm Fields on Top of Doors Form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 24 3 Pre Alarm Configuration Input Groups Forced Open lt Figure 24 2 Pre Alarm Field on Bottom of Doors Form Enable this feature using the Pre alarm radio button In order for Pre alarm to generate a warning signal an input group must be defined The associated outputs operate any type of physical device that can be connected to a micro including devices that produce audible warning signals The Pre alarm feature is not designed to associate inputs with the Pre alarm input group Pre alarm uses the Alarm routing defined on the Devices Alarms form and the Door Status will display the door s Pre alarm input group and whether the door is disabled or enabled for Pre alarm The Allowabl
82. a variable from the picklist m The Summary Count variable works only as a footer not as a header The Summary Field variable is the value of the selected summary field at each step 10 Optional Select the Font menu and select a Courier font size 8 10 12 14 18 or 24 points for viewing the on screen report This is not a print function 11 To save a new report click Save As on the Query menu and type a report name To save an existing report that you have reformatted click Save To save a reformatted report under a new name click Save As and type the new name The old report still exists T B o o lt A D 5 a To view the remainder of the page use the scroll bar To page forward press the Page Down button To re execute the report and return to the first page press the Home button Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 19 15 Printing a History Report Printing a History Report NOTE F gt To Print a History Report 1 Select Reports then History The Badge History New Report form Figure 19 1 appears 2 Select the history type Alarm Badge or Operator from the radio button list on the pull down Type menu The current form displays the default selections for history type badge and for report function new 3 To print an existing report select Open from the Report menu select the report name from a picklist and then select Print To print a new report that yo
83. allows you to run the applications you want on the hardware you want scaled to the size you need bringing you new levels of flexibility Informix Dynamic Server IDS 2000 9 3 IBM Informix Dynamic Server combines the robustness high performance and scalability of the Informix relational database manager system RDMS with the advanced object relational technology to store retrieve and manage rich data intelligently and efficiently IBM IDS is built on IBM Informix Dynamic Scalable Architecture DSA the goal of which is to provide the most effective parallel database arhcitecture Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 2 5 What s New available to help manage increasingly large and complex databases while substantially improving overall system performance and scalability Increased Categories This new option which can be selected at installation increases the former limitation of 32 categories per badge to 96 and the former limitation of 10 categories per area to 32 A minimum firmware level of 2 0 is required For more information on this new feature refer to Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors eFlash A new method of downloading micro firmware which does not require the micro to be in maintenance mode For more information on this new feature see Chapter 11 Flashing Micros Partitioning Picture Perfect 2 0 has incorporated the database partitioning formerly available only through Sec
84. allows you to send an output status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the micro ID where the output request is sent press Enter and wait about 30 seconds for the screen to display information If the screen scrolls too rapidly press a S to suspend and a Q to restart the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu Output Group The Output Group on Micro selection allows you to send an output group status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the micro ID where the output group request is sent press Ente and wait about 30 seconds for the screen to display information If the screen scrolls too rapidly press Gm S to suspend and r Q to restart the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu Outputs The Outputs on Micro selection allows you to send an output status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the micro ID where the output request is sent press Enter and wait about 30 seconds for the screen to display information If the screen scrolls too rapidly press a S to suspend and G a Q to restart the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu Readers The Readers on Micro selection allows you to send a reader status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the micro ID where the reader request is sent press Enter and wait about 30 seconds for the screen to display information
85. and receiver use a single key Key 1 to encrypt and decrypt data e Triple DES Both sender and receiver use three keys Key 1 Key 2 and Key 3 to encrypt and decrypt data 10 28 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Micros 10 The length of this field must be eight alphanumeric characters This key is used for a single DES algorithm as well as the first key used in the Triple DES algorithm The length of this field must be eight alphanumeric characters This is the second key used in the Triple DES algorithm The length of this field must be alphanumeric characters This is the third key used in the Triple DES algorithm Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 29 Data Encryption NOTES 10 30 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Flashing Micros Chapter 11 Overview When the micro is powered up you may need to flash download the Picture Perfect application code into the micro Micro 5 and Micro PX 2000 series only You can use the Micro Flash Utility the Micro Installation MICTOOL Utility or if you are running Picture Perfect 2 0 or later eFlash a N z Ke 2 7 Inthe cas flash directory there is a separate directory for each type of micro s firmware hex file For example the directory m5p2000 contains the hex file for the direct connect Micro 5 PX The following is a list of all Picture Perfect 2 0 firmwar
86. and weekends To operate the system in a different mode during holidays or other special events based on the calendar you must create a mode re define the schedules to occur during that mode and then schedule the mode to become active on a selected date and time When a mode becomes active it remains active until changed by an operator by Mode Command or by another scheduled Mode Event A Mode Event is a scheduled change to one or more of the operating characteristics Events can occur when a mode starts when a mode ends or at a given time of day and day of week within the mode Typical events are locking and unlocking lobby doors for general access turning on motion detectors after hours and changing categories on areas to control access for shift workers Administrative procedures can also be scheduled such as performing backups and running reports For details on these procedures see the Scheduling sections of Chapter 18 Backup and Restore Chapter 19 History Reports and Chapter 20 SQL Reports n gt 2 D a 5 a fo 2 r a Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 1 Prerequisites Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites Forms Purpose DOORS So individual events can be scheduled READERS AREAS ALARMS INPUTS To allow inputs and outputs to activate INGROUPS and to schedule input group and output OUTPUTS group events OUTGROUPS
87. any changes the scheduler has made Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites lt p Form Purpose z Q MICROS Micros must be defined online and operating Y AREAS Areas must be defined and enabled E READERS Readers must be defined enabled and online DOORS Doors must be defined with either sensing or monitoring enabled a door sensor input assigned and an area assigned What You Will Be Doing You will use the Status form to specify an Activity Monitor to view the operating status of selected components such as readers doors areas or inputs You must first select to view by micro or by area Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 30 1 Viewing Status By Micro Viewing Status By Micro gt To View Status by Micro 1 Select Status then Status The Status form Figure 30 1 appears Figure 30 1 Status Form 2 Click the Status By Micro button to display a picklist of micros Select a micro then click Ok A Status window Figure 30 2 appears Status cobra r Status M Reader M Door M Inputs M Input Group M Output M Output Group Status Cancel tatus request s sent Figure 30 2 Progression of Windows for Status by Micro 3 Select one or more of the items in the Status window then click Ok A message appears in a Status Request pop up window informing you that your status requests have been sent 30 2
88. appear You can then trigger all the outputs associated with each output group displayed or you can trigger individual outputs associated with a selected output group This does not generate an alarm See Figure 29 2 Progression of Windows in Control Outputs Form on page 29 4 To control an Output from an Input Group 1 Log in as an operator with permission to control outputs 2 Select Control then Outputs 3 Click the Input Group button to display a picklist of input groups Select the desired input group then click Close 4 Click the Input Groups icon 5 A window displaying buttons of each output group associated with that input group will appear Beside each Output Group button are on off radio buttons e Use the appropriate radio button for each output group to either turn on or off all of the outputs in that group then click Ok 29 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Controlling Outputs 29 l e To turn individual outputs in a selected output group on or off click the button displaying the name of the desired output group to display another window This window lists the outputs of that group individually with separate on off radio buttons for each Use the appropriate radio button for each output then click Ok Controlling an Output from an Output Group NOTE F When you select an output group and click the Output Groups button a window displaying that output group appears You can then
89. appear on the screen Installing spanish Picture Perfect Multi package Installation 1 14 2 7 02 Copyright C 1991 thru 2002 CASI RUSCO Installing from image in mnt pp 200 blocks Do you want to install the Picture Perfect SPANISH Package y n y Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 32 3 92 c Ke xo fe gt z at O gt eo c fet Installation To continue the installation press to accept the default y Result You will see messages similar to the following as the selected language is installed Installing spanish Picture Perfect Multi package Installation 1 14 2 7 02 Copyright C 1991 thru 2002 CASI RUSCO Installing from image in AIX17CD pp 200 blocks Do you want to install the Picture Perfect SPANISH Package y n y Checking if need to save nls or help files Picture Perfect NLS Text Save 1 16 1 19 01 Copyright C 1994 2001 CASI RUSCO Tue Mar 19 17 08 21 EST 2002 Saving nls files Saving nls files in cas nls src en US Saving nls files in cas nls src en US devel Saving help files Saving help files in cas help en US Saving help files in cas help en US devel NLS Text Save Finished Picture Perfect SPANISH Installation Version 2 0 2 4 02 Copyright C 2001 2002 CASI RUSCO Inc Making directories which are not present making cas help es_ ES making cas help es_ ES index
90. badge holder and the name of the reader where the transaction originated If a photo cannot be displayed a dialog advises the operator of the reason This dialog includes a Close button to dismiss the dialog and free the Activity Monitor The Save Search and Print function buttons affect the contents of the window but not the photo The New function button clears the monitor window but does not dismiss the photo The Freeze function button freezes the monitor but will not free the monitor while it is frozen by a photo The monitor returns to normal when the operator dismisses the photo by clicking the Close box If Authorization Not Required is active the photo will appear and the door will automatically unlock if this was a valid badge read If the Auto Image Replace option is enabled the operator is not required to acknowledge each photo prior to displaying the next one gt To view swipe and show activity 1 Select Monitors then Activity 2 Click the Outputs button to display a pop up window of Monitor Controls 3 Select Swipe And Show Monitor from the Monitor Control window 4 Click Ok Figure 28 4 shows an example of a swipe and show activity message B SWIPE AND SHOW 10 31 02 17 20 EMP 1212 A Smith RDR 1 1 009 2E LOBBY DOOR 2 1 AREA BLD 1 2 3 LOBBIES a Ej O i 5 Q gt ct lt lt Figure 28 4 Example of a Swipe and Show Activity Message The following is a description of each p
91. bases aa a iin 7 1 Prerequisites iiie inise annene anor S iata a 7 1 What You Will Be Doing ses ssssesesssesesesesesrsseseseseerese 7 2 Route DefinitionS seeeeeeeeeeesereeeseseeesereereeseesssrrrressrrees 7 3 SetuP A a A RA 7 3 The Route Definitions Form r 7 3 RO Ute Rotsen ennu lh o ue a R 7 4 DEED o E E E O akarmuls 7 4 The Route Points FOrM eeeeeeceeeeseeeesrersssrrsessreeee 7 5 Route Point Rules and Restrictions 06 7 8 Other A pplicaons sis cccursioc sates dessataitvaatieantsntaveanieaess 7 9 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide v Contents 8 Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 8 1 QOVCLVICW ttt asl aa Males Mined a Nana 8 1 PREREQUISITES sisino eseni iir aa aa 8 1 What You Will Be Doing s e esesesessssessrssesesssesresesesess 8 2 Alarm Instructions cicieiiecdsdicasicainietisigsaqaiesibixeannetiaagheieds 8 2 PIO eT o E E E E E E 8 2 The Messages Fori ssiccavaiviesasctenspenlusavenuaiien 8 3 Alarm ReSponses s esseseseesesessssesesssiereresesessssesesesesses 8 4 Setup eea a a a a a eins 8 4 The Responses FOrmsccicacsccsesevsaiesevasstesessenensetasenstieas 8 4 Alarms remna ain a A E Na 8 5 SetuP Ean RR E E E E 8 5 The Alarms Form seeeeeoeeeesesseeeeseeesssesssrrresseserrsesseee 8 6 Alarm Color Processing State cccccceseeeeeee 8 11 Setup ceina a ia e E RERE ai 8 11 The Alarm Color Form ccccccccccccceessssscecssesseeees 8 12 9 Input and Output G
92. before it dials the micro Callback Specify whether a callback is required from the host the micro or neither In a callback situation the host or micro receiving the call flags the sender for a callback then disconnects without a data transaction taking place This strategy prevents a foreign system from communicating with the host or micro This strategy may Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 23 Adding or Change a Micro NOTE NOTE F also be cost effective if host to micro calls are less expensive than micro to host calls or vice versa Host The host will call back the micro Micro The micro will call back the host A Micro 5 configured as Micro Callback cannot be flashed with upgraded application code If you need to update the application code set Callback to None prior to running the flash program Upon completion set it back to Micro None No callbacks are required Input Groups Select the appropriate input group for each error condition listed on the buttons Badge History Overflow Alarm History Overflow Upstream Comm Failure Downstream Comm Failure and Reader Comm Failure Click each button to display a picklist of input groups Select the desired input group for each then click Close Only Trigger on Input Individual input groups which are non boolean are displayed in the picklist See Boolean Type on page 9 5 10 24 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide
93. category is currently enabled its category name will appear on the Badges form with its Temp Cat button grayed out If a temporary category is currently disabled its category name will not be displayed but its Temp Cat button will still be grayed out Once a temporary category reaches its expiration date the category will be dropped from the badge record altogether and its category slot will be empty That temporary category record will remain in the temp category table of the database for one week after expiration The enabling and disabling of temporary categories is logged under the operator ID of temgr in operator history Clicking the Advanced button opens a new window as follows Advanced Temporary Categories Bal sun von al Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily m 218 818 8 81818 pHHHHHHHH pgpgogogggggg 22 8 8 22 2 2 2 2 22 212 2 2 22 212 2 2121212121 Ble ela el el etal el sl Figure 14 10 Badge Form Advanced Scheduling 14 22 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 i Schedule Type From the Advanced window you can choose a schedule type of Daily or Continuous A Daily schedule type means that the category will be enabled each day at the Start Time and disabled each day at the Stop Time A Continuous schedule type means that the category will be enabled at the Start Time of the Start Date and disabled at the Stop Time of the Stop Date The default schedule t
94. cmenu or from the command line by typing statuscmd The command statusemd is the Fy only option where badge status information can be viewed Viewing Status by Door gt To View Door Status 1 Select Status then Status 2 Select Status By Micro 3 Select the desired micro from the picklist 4 Select the desired door The following is a sample of the door status reported by the micro TABLE NAME door 1 D rip OPEN IGP DOOR HELD OPEN IGP DOOR PRE ALARM Figure 30 4 Sample Door Status The following is an explanation of the information provided by the Door Status 30 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Viewing Status 30 1 Description Description of the door found in the database 2 Door s Area Area to which the door belongs 3 Door Sensor The input associated with the door sensor for this door 4 Exit Button The input associated with the exit button for this door 5 Strike Output The output associated with the strike output for this door Forced Open The input group associated with the forced open input group for this door 7 Held Open The input group associated with the held open input group for this door 8 Pre Alarm The input group associated with the pre alarm input group for this door 9 Forced Open 10 11 12 13 14 Not Applicable Held Open Not Applicable Keypad Shunt Time mins The keypad shunt time a
95. column name with a name flag has a different meaning based on the value of the Flags column Table 20 3 The report Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 21 Flags Column Values data for these meanings appear in numbers not text in the report window Table 20 3 Flags Column Values Table Flag Column Meaning Value Alarm 0x01 Monitor the Alarm 0x02 Alarm Online 0x04 Ignore Schedule Changes 0x08 Auto Reset of Outputs 0x10 Manual Reset of Outputs 0x20 Duration Reset of Outputs 0x40 Immediate Reset of Input Area 0x01 Online 0x02 Area Enabled 0x04 Enable S hunting 0x08 Inhibit Schedule Changes 0x10 APB Enforcement Passive 0x20 Two Man Rule Door 0x01 Unlock Door 0x02 Schedule Inhibit 0x04 Sensing Enabled 0x08 Monitoring Enabled 0x10 Exit Button Enabled 0x20 Pre Alarm Enabled 0x40 Keypad Alarm Response Enabled Inputs 0x01 Normally Closed 0x02 Input Enabled 0x04 Elevator input 0x10 Notify on Any State Change 0x20 Notify Only when Off to On 0x40 Notify Only when On to Off Input Group 0x00 Trigger on any Input 0x01 Trigger on all Inputs 0x02 Enable Input Group 0x04 Ground Condition Action 0x08 Short Condition Action 0x10 Broadcast Input State Changes 20 22 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 i Table 20 3 Flags Column Values Continued Table Flag Column Meaning Value Output 0x01 Normally Open 0x02 Enable Output 0x04 Res
96. companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Ej o o 5 2a O c a 9 fe D 7 Parent Input Group Displays a description of the selected parent input groups if any associated with this child input group Click a Parent Input Group button to display the Parent Input Group picklist which is a list of input groups Figure 9 4 and select an input group to be the parent for this child You can select up to three parent input groups for a child input group An input group that is connected to a parent input group becomes in essence an input of that parent input group and is subject to the Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 9 7 Input Groups NOTE F parent s boolean or non boolean settings See Boolean Type on page 9 5 Each input group can have up to three input groups as its parents and each input group can be the parent of any number of input groups An input group cannot be its own parent A tree like hierarchy of input groups can be built with each input group propagating its state changes on to its parent input group Do not create a circular hierarchy such as A is a parent of B and B is a parent of A In both single input groups and in a hierarchy of input groups all inputs in any given group or hierarchy must be associated with the same micro An i
97. control who can enter the area when they can enter and how long they can remain An area event can change the categories of an area at a specific time For example two MIS shifts need to access the computer room during separate times but the MIS Manager needs access 24 hours a day The two shifts also require a 30 minute overlap during shift changes e First create three categories using the Categories form MIS 24 Hour MIS Shift 1 and MIS Shift 2 e To provide 24 hour access for the MIS manager assign the MIS 24 Hour category on the Areas form Do not overwrite this category with an area event la gt D Q D o 5 a fo a D 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 19 Area Events Four area events are defined one to start Shift 1 at 07 45 one to end it at 17 15 one to start Shift 2 at 16 45 and one to end it at 01 15 Only badges with the MIS 24Hour category will have access to Categories this area Fa i MIS 24Hour a E ie A Figure 16 8 Areas Form Categories Window e To provide access to the two shifts create separate categories MIS Shift 1 and MIS Shift 2 to an area event using the Area Events form Use the category NO ACCESS use w sched only to end the event When you assign the area events to a slot remember that the MIS 24Hour category was placed in the first position slot on the Areas form since categories are
98. days of the week that the event will occur 16 34 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide NOTE Schedules and Modes 16 l If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one For example if something is turned on every day at 8 AM it must be turned off at some time later that day Time At mode start If this is a Start End event click At mode start if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At mode end If this is a Start End event click At mode end if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Alarm Being Scheduled Select the alarm where the event will occur Online Offline To ensure that normal daytime activity does not trigger an alarm use a runtime alarm event to put this alarm offline during the day For example use an alarm event to set this alarm offline before the business day starts MTWTF at 07 30 Use a parallel alarm event to set this alarm online after hours MTWTF at 17 00 During the weekend between Friday at 5 P M and Monday at 7 30 A M this alarm is online and does not cycle daily To set an alarm onlin
99. displayed will be updated Open the Alarm Monitor window and select the alarm to display the Alarm Response window Figure 27 3 The instructions for this alarm will be listed The alarm type is displayed in the title bar of the window HOST TO MICRO 0 COMM FAIL Z a e al NOTIFY SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR DISPATCH GUARD ai Responses to Date fe io gt 3 7 Enter new response Figure 27 3 Alarm Response Window Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 27 3 Responding to An Alarm Responding to An Alarm The system allows the operator to respond to acknowledge alarms and to manually reset alarm outputs if manual reset was selected using the Alarms form Pre written alarm responses appear in the Responses picklist Figure 27 4 When you select a response and clear the alarm the system will archive the alarm record and the response The pre written response saves time If none of the responses on the selection list are appropriate the operator can type a unique response gt To respond to an alarm 1 Silence the alarm by clicking the Silence button on the Alarm Alert window 2 Select Monitors then Alarm 3 Select the alarm The Alarm Response window appears 4 Optional Click the Outputs button to toggle associated outputs on or off See Controlling Alarm Outputs on page 27 8 HOST TO MICRO 0 COMM FAIL ADMINISTRATOR Responses OK Refresh
100. door open for the time specified in minutes in the Keypad Shunt Time field of the Doors form without getting a Door Held Open alarm The badgeholder enters the shunt code defined on the Micros form using the reader keypad then presents his badge then enters his PIN number Scheduling Enabled means established schedule changes will control this reader Disabled means established schedule changes will not affect this reader Number of Badges Single means the reader requires only one valid badge read to open the door Double means the reader requires two separate valid badge reads to open the door Toggle A reader used in special applications only in which a badge swipe toggles the reader s valid input group non boolean On yes or Off no such as to arm disarm a burglar alarm system Toggle readers are not intended for door control but can be used that way with some limitations To do this the door must be configured without a sensor and the doorstrike output must be configured to reset with an input rather than on duration With this configuration the reader can toggle the door between locked and unlocked but since there is no sensor there can be no detection of the door being forced open or held open too long 13 28 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i For an example of toggle reader use see The Input Groups Form on page 9 4 of Chapter 9 Input and Ou
101. downstream from dial up micros Table 10 1 Dial up Micro Downstream Support Dial up Downstream Support Mi TR Micro 2 Micro 4 Micro 5 P Micro 5 PX Micro 5 PX Network Micro 4 P Yes No No No No Micro 5 P No No No No No Micro 5 P X Yes No No Yes No Micro 5 PX Yes No No Yes No Network with dial up option a Once you put a Micro 2 on this line all micros downstream from this Micro 2 MUST be Micro 2s b If the network connection fails and the micro has the dial up option it will behave as a dial up Micro 5 PX after it connects to the host for the first time Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 5 Configuring Micro Communications There are events that cause the micro to automatically dial up the host and there are events usually operator activities such as updates or commands that cause the host to automatically dial up the micro Events Requiring Micro to Host Calls Power on Reset After a power on reset the micro reads its DIP switch settings to determine its attached modem type and the required baud rate for communication to the modem assumes that the modem is connected to the host port and then tries to dial the host using the modem s hard coded phone number Alarm The micro immediately dials the host when a priority micro alarm activates Immediate Dial Up is user defined See Immediate Dial Required on page 8 7 Alarm and Badg
102. er fe S Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 3 Elevator Access Method 2 When enabled this method is available on the following elevator configurations e Reader DI DO See To Set Up Example 2 ina Reader DI DO Configuration on page 22 19 Following a valid badge swipe a floor button DI is used to enter a floor number A category match must exist between the floor selected and the badge before the DO digital output is fired to activate the elevator This method will generate a floor transaction valid or invalid which is stored along with the floor selected and can be used for history and reporting purposes For example a badgeholder has General Access as the sole category on his badge The elevator allows floors 1 2 and 5 for General Access and floors 3 and 4 for Computer Department Therefore when this badgeholder enters the elevator and pushes floor buttons 1 2 or 5 the elevator will be activated and a Valid floor transaction will be generated Entering numbers 3 or 4 would return an Invalid floor transaction and no access would be granted Refer to Figure 22 2 For a double badge transaction configuration each badge must first have access to the reader then the same access validation as above takes place The difference is that the final set of accessible floors will be denoted by the union of the two badges matched categories which correspond to floors In ot
103. etc Imgr lmgrd R A 19990908 142026 The first number on the line 181 in this example is the record id that will be used in the next step 3 Enter this command cas bin sqlstmt UPDATE tps daemons SET pathname etc 1lmgr lmgrd p 8888 where id 181 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide ct where 8888 is the chosen port number and 181 is the record id obtained from the previous step 4 Shut down Picture Perfect by entering re pperf k 5 Restart Picture Perfect by entering re pperf Perform a Picture Perfect database backup as soon as possible to save the change made to the tps_daemons database table This procedure may have to be repeated whenever an Access Vision server patch is installed on the Picture Perfect host system or if the Access Vision software is completely removed and then re installed Web Browser Security It is recommended that SSL be used when firewall traversal is required In this case the SSL port usually 5307 should be opened as well as the ports necessary for HTTP traffic usually port 80 For more information on port number assignments using the Picture Perfect Web Browser consult Chapter 5 of the Picture Perfect Web Browser Interface Operator s Guide a D 2 O Q c i a O 5 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide C 3 NOTES C 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Advanced Configuration Appendix Overvi
104. file determined by the micro s boot prom and will complete its download more quickly in approximately 10 minutes e The Frames column indicates the number of data blocks downloaded to the highlighted micro e The column indicates the percentage of the download completed to the highlighted micro When the download for a micro is complete that micro will no longer appear in boldface If the download for a micro is unsuccessful that micro will remain in boldface At this point it takes about 60 seconds for the flash program to terminate If the micros were defined as online in the database the micros will reset and receive their database and come online Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 11 5 u o n gt Ke Q s O n MicTool MicTool Although Micro Installation Tool FlashTool will work with old and new micros all new micros contain SmartBoot some functions are available only if the micro has SmartBoot installed SmartBoot is distributed with the tool for the Micro 5 PX and the Micro 5 PXN SmartBoot allows the tool to do the following e Extract and show the firmware revision such as Picture Perfect 1 6 e Alert the user if the firmware in the micro is not the latest released code e Alert the user if the network micro has an OS operating system application mismatch Features e Automatically recognizes any CASI micro M5 PX M5 PXN MicroProx Micro PX 2000 Micro PXN 2000
105. group event or Quit to exit the Outgroups Events form 10 If the schedule does not work query the mode status on the micro to see if it is in Normal mode O gt D Q D o v 5 a z fo a f 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 41 Output Groups Events The OutGroups Events Form OutGroups Events bctandromeda G iz ala E E lal Ee Ne Figure 16 17 OutGroups Events Form Description Type an output group Description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long for example Parking Lot Lights On 18 00 M F Mode Select the mode in which the output group event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Time If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one 16 42 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 For example if something is activated every day at 8 AM it must be deactivated at some time later that day At mode start If this is a Start End event click At mode start if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At mode end If this is a Start End event click At mode end if you want the event to activate at the end of the m
106. groups Motion and Control Both of these must be activated in order to trigger the alarm since Vault s boolean type is all 9 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Input and Output Groups 9 e When the vault is unpatrolled the toggle reader is used to toggle on Control meaning that this input group is activated If any of the three motion detectors should activate the Motion input group will be triggered since its boolean type is any The Vault input group will then receive the activated state change of Motion When that happens the all condition of Vault has been met and the associated alarm and output groups will be triggered e To deactivate the motion detector alarm during a routine patrol the security guard simply swipes their authorized badge through the toggle reader Control s input is deactivated therefore the Vault input group cannot trigger an alarm even though the motion detectors will activate the Motion input group while the guard is in the area When the patrol of the vault is finished the guard swipes their badge through the toggle reader again this time to activate it Output Groups Displays a description of the selected output group associated with this input group Click an Output Group button to display the Output Groups picklist Figure 9 4 Select up to five output groups one for each button then click Close When this input group activates all of the selected output groups
107. history please wait There are currently alarm history records to be archived start date 00 00 0000 00 00 00 end date 00 00 0000 00 00 00 Searching tour history please wait There are currently 0 tour history records to be archived start date 00 00 0000 00 00 00 end date 00 00 0000 00 00 00 Searching visitor history please wait There are currently 0 visitor history records to be archived last archive date 10 31 2002 start date 00 00 0000 00 00 00 end date 00 00 0000 00 00 00 e lt RETURN gt to quit 4 J Figure 18 2 Archive Dates Window gt To perform an Archive 1 Select Control then Backup 2 When the Backup window appears Figure 18 3 select the Archive radio button to display the Archive options 3 Select one of the history options Badge Alarm or Operator 4 Ifan archive of the data in the temporary table has already been performed the Force Rollover option will be displayed beside that history option Toggle this button On if you want to force a rollover of information and archive that data 5 Ifyou want to generate an onscreen verification report leave the Generate Verification Report button On 6 Use the appropriate radio button before you start a backup to Diskette Tape or Disk File If backing up to diskette make sure you have formatted diskettes available before you start the backup NOTE When Disk File is selected clicking the Execute butto
108. if available The system logs the alarm and its responses and deletes it from the Alarm Monitor Removing All Alarms If you are having hardware problems and need to clear alarms that will not reset use the Purge button in the Alarm Monitor The system logs the alarms and deletes them all from the monitor even if they are not reset fe io gt 3 n NOTE An operator must have system permission to have access to the Alarm Monitor F Purge button gt To remove all alarms from the Alarm Monitor 1 Click the Purge button located on the Alarm Monitor not the Alarm Response window The Purge All Alarms window appears Figure 27 8 2 Type the reason for clearing all alarms for log records 3 Click the Ok button in the Purge All Alarms window Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 27 7 Controlling Alarm Outputs Purge All Alarms Enter Response to Purge All rs Figure 27 8 Purge All Alarms Window Controlling Alarm Outputs An alarm may have associated outputs that require manual reset You can turn the entire output group on or off or turn each individual output on or off See Chapter 29 Controlling Outputs for details on using the Control Outputs window gt To control alarm outputs 1 Click the Outputs button on the Alarm Response window to display the Control Outputs window Figure 27 9 Options Click a radio button to turn the entir
109. in the Picture Perfect database are assigned a facility either Global or another facility in your system To determine the records that an operator can access facilities are paired with a profile defining the level of access and are then assigned to the operator s permission er 1 A facility consists of database records 1 1 Tu 2 A permission consists of w profiles paired with Permissions Operators facilities Facility Profile gr 2 3 When an operator is assigned a permission their access to database records Z is determined 2 Figure 5 1 Facility Facility Profile Overview Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 1 What You Will Be Doing What You Will Be Doing This chapter describes the following forms and shows you how to link them to your operators and permissions when using facilities in your system 0 Facilities C1 Facility Profile C1 Facility Set Manager 1 Linking Facilities Facility Profiles Permissions and Operators Facilities Facilities can be assigned to certain records to restrict access to those records Each operator can have a unique set of permissions assigned to him per facility this is the operator s Facility Profile All Picture Perfect forms support facilities A facility field is displayed on each form with the following exceptions e The Alarm Monitor Activity Monitor and the Status form Although these forms do not have a Facility field incoming mess
110. in front of description to indicate the database table because you are joining multiple tables Column names selected from the first table listed under FROM do not Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 11 Creating a Badge Report require a table indicator unless an identical column name appears in a table that you are joining When you click Apply in the Columns picklist the selected name appears after the text cursor in the SQL window Type a comma after the applied column name before you select and apply another column name do not type a comma after the last column name in the clause One or more spaces inserted before and after the comma do not affect the SQL statement 5 The FROM clause specifies the tables where the selected column names are located Type a comma to separate the table names Select and apply badge and department from the Table Names picklist to create the following FROM clause FROM badge department 6 The WHERE clause limits the search of data to certain criteria within the specified tables and columns Select and apply the appropriate table and column names from the picklists to create the following WHERE clause WHERE badge dept department id AND department description Test Department This WHERE clause retrieves only that badge data belonging to the Test Department The WHERE clause sets conditions on the select statement and uses logical and relational operators to limit the rang
111. information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Select Door Select the door where the event will occur Door State To schedule an individual door in an area to unlock at the same time each day use a door event that sets the Door State field to Unlocked An area event that locks all area doors and occurs after this door event will also loc this individual door Held Open Sensing To allow shipping and receiving to keep a loading dock door open indefinitely during business hours without an alarm occurring set Held open Sensing to Ignored This event overrides the Detected setting for the same function on the Doors form Forced Open Monitoring Select Detected to allow an alarm condition on this door to occur immediately when the door is forced open without a valid badge read or exit device Select Ignored if the monitoring function on this door is not used this may be advisable during the day when people frequently hold the door open 16 32 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 Alarm Events When you want to change the characteristics of a single alarm without changing the input group or output group assigned to the alarm use an alarm event Use the Alarm Events form Figure 16 15 to define alarm events for each mode Defining an event requires you to select a mode set the time of the event select an alarm and specify one or more changes to the alarm Se
112. information for you to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence to follow Ej Z 5 2 O c gt ad Z Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 12 9 Inputs Inputs orion Figure 12 4 Inputs Form Description Type a description of the input usually including a wiring address and a written description Micro Input Setup Current Micro ID Displays the selected micro where this input point is located Click the Set Micro Id button to display the Micros picklist Figure 12 5 Select the desired micro then click Ok Board Type a board number from 0 to 8 The microcontroller s power comm board is always board 0 12 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Inputs and Outputs NOTE 24 Use the Micro Wiring Charts for the Micro 4 and Micro 5 to find the board number and address where this input point is located Refer to Table 12 3 and Table 12 4 Verify the board number with your installer Address The Address field indicates what digital input point on the board this input is using Type a number from 0 to 47 for the Micro 4 or 0 1 8 to 9 or 16 to 35 for the Micro 5 The address depends on how the input is wired to the connector on the board Ask your installer Table 12 3 Micro 4 Wiring Chart Inputs Element Board Number DI Reader Exit Add
113. level on all Picture Perfect forms Full access also grants view and update permission at the field level on the Badges form and the ability to lock and unlock doors on the Doors form When the Global facility profile is assigned to the Global facility and assigned to an operator the operator has access to all database records in the Global facility only The term Global defines a default facility or profile it does not encompass other facilities Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 5 Facility Profiles The Facility Profiles Form Use the Facility Profiles form to create and delete facility profiles Facility Profile bctsparky Figure 5 4 Facility Profile Form Description Enter a description up to 30 characters This description will appear in the Facility list box of the Permission form Menu The button on the right side of the Menu label lets you select a menu corresponding to the Picture Perfect Main Menu icons The Access Monitors Devices Status Control Schedule Reports and Messages buttons on the right side of the Menu label control which Main Menu buttons will display for an operator assigned a permission with this facility profile If you have an optional package installed such as Alarm Graphics an additional button will be displayed for it Each button displays a corresponding list of the forms that an operator with this permission can be permitted to use If no forms are
114. list or typing its name in the Selection box 2 Select Ok to change the current table to the selection This also deactivates the dialog 3 Select Apply to change the current table to the selection This leaves the dialog active 4 Select Cancel to exit the dialog without changing the current table 5 Select Help to view on line help about the dialog Cc 7 D 5 7 e fe 3 N A m j Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 31 7 User Interface Change Field Dialog The Change Field dialog shown in Figure 31 7 controls customization of the current field rs ee Eee eee OK Apply Cancel Herp Figure 31 7 Change Field Dialog The Database Name box contains the current field s name as it appears in the database This name does not change The Old Name box contains the current field s present name The New Name box allows the user to edit the name 1 Select Ok to change the field name to the string in New Name box This also deactivates the dialog 2 Select Apply to change the field name to the string in the New Name box This does not deactivate the dialog Selecting another field in the User Fields list will load the Old Name and New Name boxes with that field s name and allow customization of that field without having to activate the dialog again 3 Select Cancel to exit the dialog without changing the current field 4 Select Help to view on line help abou
115. o ro dev cd0 mnt mount dev cdrom Start the installation by typing the following mnt INSTALL 1 the letter 1 not the numeral 1 mnt cdrom INSTALL 1 the letter 1 not the numeral 1 Result Messages similar to the following followed by a list of the available language packages will appear on the screen Picture Perfect CD ROM Installation 1 16 2 7 02 Copyright C 2000 2002 CASI RUSCO 32 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide National Language Support 32 The following LANGUAGE EXT product s are available Prod Name and Descriptions 0 french French in France Language Extension 1 italian Italian in Italy Language Extension 2 portuguese Portuguese in Brazil Language Extension 3 spanish Spanish in Spain Language Extension Enter product number s separated by to select q to quit Type the numbers of the language products to be installed separated by a comma Result Your package selection will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm You have selected the following product s 3 spanish Spanish in Spain Language Extension Is this correct y n y To make a different selection type n and you will be returned to step 6 of the installation where you will be prompted again for your language selections To continue the installation press to accept the default y Result The installation will begin and messages similar to the following will
116. of the former is the Receive Manager in receipt of a badge transaction message Since the Receive Manager is responsible for interpreting and routing all types of messages sent by the micros it doesn t have time to perform all the tasks necessary to complete each transaction Instead it routes the message to the appropriate manager task for further processing by essentially duplicating the message and placing it on that manager s queue An example of the latter is the Badge Manager in receipt of a badge history transaction Here the message type is a badge BDG message containing the type of transaction along with the badge ID and other information The badge manager gets enough information to complete the transaction updating the badge holder s record in the badge table and adding a new record to the badge history table The message queue display shows each manager s or driver s queue and the number of messages currently on them In an efficient system the numbers should all remain at zero since each process tries to empty its queue as quickly as possible Memory Management The TPS contains its own Memory Management system specially designed for interprocess communications At system startup a shared memory segment is initialized This segment contains the process control block and associated data structures The remainder of this segment is made available to all processes for use as needed The main use of shared memory is fo
117. of the print queue the status of the queue the name of the job and the percentage of the file printed so far 5 O w a p h U 1 2 2 3 2 Kill The Kill a print job selection is not fully menu driven After the printer status displays a prompt asks you to note which print request you want to kill When you press Enter the system prompts you for the request number and then removes that request from the queue NOTE The KILL request does not stop a print job that has already started fF Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 21 Troubleshooting Guide Stop If the printer spooler is malfunctioning the Stop a printer queue selection can be used to temporarily stop it From this point requests can be removed and the spooler restarted Clean The Clean out a print queue selection is used to stop the spooler remove all requests and restart it Any jobs previously submitted are completely removed from the system including the one currently printing Start The Start the print spooler selection restarts the print spooler Troubleshooting Guide The following chart Table 33 1 lists problems you might experience and possible solutions Use this guide to perform troubleshooting procedures If you are not successful contact your Picture Perfect support representative for assistance Table 33 1 Troubleshooting Chart Problem Action Reader A reader is not working V
118. one of the tape devices found in the file gt Q lt f gt O el a O a Ko o lt 5 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide D 1 Port Throttling Ifno tape cfg exists the default dev pptape and dev pptapenr will be used Function Call looks for tape cfg Application If tape cfg exists the file is read and the user is prompted for one of the tape devices found in the file For each tape device on the system tape cfg contains a description of the tape device the rewind device name the no rewind device name and the application types that will use this device as the default Each application will use one of the following as its default type INSTALL ARCHIVE HISTORY BACKUP or RESTORE If no tape device is configured inthe tape cfg file as the default for a particular application type the system defaults dev pptape and dev pptapenr will be used Port Throttling When bringing Picture Perfect up sites with a large number of micros or micros that have accumulated an unusual amount of history can overload the host if they are all brought online simultaneously Port throttling is an activity performed by TPS the microcontroller communication program when the system starts up Before enabling a port TPS checks the system activity and determines if the system is too busy to bring more ports online By gradually bringing the ports online TPS
119. ports Listed below are the ports used by the various components of the Picture Perfect system Depending on the Picture Perfect components you have implemented you will have to configure the appropriate ports To ensure that the security of your firewall is not compromised only open those ports needed for your specific system configuration Table C 1 Task Descriptions and Port Number Assignments Task Description Protocol Port Number Assignment s Access Vision Picture Perfect host client TCP Dynamically assigned by the vendor server task rpc pcsrvd operating system portmapper task but o must be setto a fixed value to penetrate a o firewall see Setting a Fixed Port for the E Client Server Task on page C 2 c te Access Vision Picture Perfecthostlicense TCP Fixed value of 6769 but can be changed 5 manager server task Imgrd at customer site see Changing the Fixed Port Used by the License Manager Task on page C 2 Picture Perfect Host vendor operating UDP TCP Fixed value of 111 that cannot be system portmapper task changed Standard Picture Perfect Web Browser HTTP Usually set to a value of 3144 see Web Browser Security on page C 3 Picture Perfect SSL Secure Socket HTTP Usually set to a value of 5307 see Web Layer Web Browser Browser Security on page C 3 Micro 5 PXN Communications TCP Fixed value of 6767 Micro 5 PXN DES key exchange TCP Fi
120. position sensitive when you add a category do not overwrite an existing category Notice that categories entered on previous forms do not display on the current Events form so you must be familiar with what is already in place e A G gt F l a quit print search columns sort help escription Mode Time Of Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Area Fire Drill NORMAL 00 09 00 0 1 0 0 0 a 0 AREA tart Shift 1 NORMAL 07 45 00 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 Computer Room Start Shift 2 NORMAL J0 0 1 i 1 1 1 0 End Shift 1 NORMAL 17 15 00 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 Computer Room End Shift 2 NORMAL 01 15 00 0 1 4 1 1 1 0 Computer Room al J Figure 16 9 Area Events Form View Window When the area events occur the Areas form will reflect the new categories 16 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes At 07 45 badges with MIS 24Hour and MIS Shift 1 categories will have access to this area oT At 16 45 badges with MIS 24Hour MIS Shift 1 and MIS Shift 2 categories will have access to this area ad Categories Manage 1 MIS 24Hour 2 MIS Shift 1 Categories Manage MIS 24Hour a 2 MIS Shift 1 3 MIS Shift 2 At 17 15 when Shift 1 Categories ends badges with MIS 24Hour and MIS Shift 2 categories will have access to this area but MIS Shift 1 will have N ACCESS MIS 24Hour 2 NO A
121. pp_wrn src contains warning messages pp_inf src contains informational messages pp_mnu src contains menu labels pp_font src contains font definitions All six catalog source files have a similar format and their translation must obey the following rules Failure to obey the rules makes it impossible to install the translations 1 Do not change any line that starts with a dollar sign Examples are Error Message Catalog name ERROR len 245 quote set SYM SET ERR Do not change any words which start with SyM_ These are called symbols Only change text found between quotes This text is called a message and is only defined on lines that begin with a symbol Messages are the only part of a catalog that can be changed An example is SYM ERR COULD NOT OPEN Cannot open 1 s The message is Cannot open 1 s and itis the only part of the line that can be changed A French translation is SYM ERR COULD NOT OPEN Impossible d ouvrir 1 s Do not add quotes Messages must not exceed the catalog s text limit The limits are e 40 alphanumeric characters for pp_phr sre and pp_mnu src e 245 alphanumeric characters for pp err src pp wrn src and pp_inf src and e 255 alphanumeric characters for pp_font src Do not split messages into separate lines Each catalog source line defines a distinct message and splitting a message will corrupt the file When a message needs to be
122. press the button connected to the Exit button input before the door timeout has elapsed at which point the warning will terminate to cause the door to unlock and allow entry to the area The M2MR output must be physically located on the same micro as the strike output Inputs Door Sensor Click the Door Sensor button to display the Inputs picklist Select the desired input for this door sensor then click Close A door sensor is associated with a digital input DI point connected to a door sensor Select a door sensor input that is wired to the same micro as the associated door strike output The system displays a popup message to the operator if an input point is selected on the wrong micro Do not attach an input group to the input unless the input is a supervised input 13 40 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i Exit Button Click the Exit button to display the Inputs picklist Select the desired input for this exit button then click Close Be sure the Exit Button Asserts Strike field in the Door Control box is set to Enabled NOTE Select an exit button input that is wired to the same micro as the associated door strike output The system displays a popup message to the operator if an input m point is selected on the wrong micro Make sure the exit input is tied to the reader s valid input group sealy S loH 3eI A D o Q D o S os s
123. prevents a flood of information coming in from the micros which could potentially cause the host to back up and go into an XOFF communication state The configuration file throttle cfg for port throttling is found in cas db text and the parameters are D 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Table D 1 Port Throttling Parameters THROTTLE_DELAY The number of seconds before enabling a port For example THROTTLE DELAY 5 THROTTLE_MAX The maximum number of messages on queues allowed in order to throttle on the next port Any number of messages greater than this value will prevent the next port from being enabled For example THROTTLE MAX 100 To find the total number of ports that have not been enabled use the following command smutl p 1 grep THROTTLE Once all ports are throttled on they cannot be throttled off Disk File Backup Archive Configuration Although they cannot replace tape backups and archives disk file backups offer a fast way to backup restore database tables and run history reports Table D 2 Disk File Backup Configuration ARCHIVE_DIR Specifies the default directory that stores history archives This directory must exist and should be set up to have sufficient space to hold archive files For example ARCHIVE DIR cas archive ARCHIVE_EXT Specifies the default file extension that the file selection dialog matches for archive files For example ARCHIVE EXT arc
124. root 666 18 SARN Message Queues key msqid owner perms used bytes messages 0x00000401 1245184 root 666 0 0 0x00000402 1277953 root 666 0 0 0x00000403 1310722 root 666 0 0 0x00000404 1343491 root 666 0 0 0x00000405 1376260 root 666 0 0 0x00000406 1409029 root 666 0 0 0x00000407 1441798 root 666 0 0 0x0000040a 1474567 root 666 0 0 0x0000040b 1507336 root 666 0 0 0x0000040c 1540105 root 666 0 0 0x0000040d 1572874 root 666 0 0 0x0000040e 1605643 root 666 0 0 0x0000040f 1638412 root 666 0 0 0x00000410 1671181 root 666 0 0 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 23 Shutting Down the Entire System 0x00000411 1703950 root 666 0 0 0x00000411 1736719 root 666 0 0 0x00000413 1769488 root 666 0 0 0x00000414 1802257 root 666 0 0 0x00000415 1835026 root 666 0 0 When Picture Perfect is not running there should be no Message Queues Shared Memory and Semaphores for TPS or INFORMIX If there are entries then Shared Memory is corrupted Shutting Down the Entire System Software or hardware maintenance on the Picture Perfect system may require a complete system shutdown If this is necessary perform the following command sequence AIX NOTE To shut down the entire system 1 Loginas root at the console terminal Make sure no one is logged on as an operator Type shutdown Fh now or Type shutdown h now Type shutdown h to halt the system type shutdown r to reboot the system The shutdown c
125. see alarms routed to that terminal Repeat these steps for each operator to whom you route alarms Make sure you do not specify the same terminal port number to more than one operator NOTE If you need to remove a terminal assignment from an operator use the following command yj tarantella object delete name o organization cn jdoe You can have a combination of user specific terminals and unassigned terminals that do not require routing or bumping assignments If you are configuring your system to use a mix of user specific and unassigned terminals you must allow for an adequate number of unassigned ports and specify user specific port numbers above the number of unassigned ports JOSMOIG q M gt i 5 3 A Ke f om For example if you need 10 unassigned terminals and three user specific terminals you must define the user specific terminals at a minimum as 20 2land 22 andleave 10 through 19 as unassigned terminals Not leaving enough ports available for unassigned terminals will cause the user specific port numbers to be used for unassigned terminals which will result in denied access for the operators with user specific terminals ius c 3 gt Q v ig T c D v D 3 D ig Te Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide F 3 Overview NOTES F 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micro Facility Appendix Assignment Tool Overview The Micro
126. specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles 4 38 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 J Personnel Type Use the Personnel Type form Figure 4 18 to define different types of personnel These entries form a picklist that will be used on the Badges form to assign a personnel type to each badge Four personnel types are already entered into the system Permanent Temporary Contractor and Visitor Additional types can be entered as described below Setup gt To define a personnel type record 1 Select Access then Personnel Type 2 Complete the Personnel Type form For a description of each field see The Personnel Type Form on page 4 39 3 Click Save The Personnel Type Form Personnel betandromeda Record of 4 Found ee Set Facility Facility GLOBAL Prs Ned EE Figure 4 18 Personnel Type Form Description Enter the identification name of the personnel type to be added up to 30 alphanumeric characters 3 o ie D 2 kc Set Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 39 Personnel Type NOTES 4 40 Picture Perfect 2 0
127. tase es bentadhe sua sansens 10 11 Changing Micros 4c sctiiedautfataasteacanties 10 14 NHS ME CHOS FOM s nare arees aaa 10 18 Dynamic COM ULatOn vex icaisachscavacsaseeiaeds peavey seaires 10 26 Data Encryption eniinn aseisiin 10 27 DOE f o AE A E AE 10 27 The Keys ForMereraninainenia noinen aia 10 28 11 Flashing Micros c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 1 a QV CL VICW arera e a a aaea 11 1 2 Prereguisit s ecnin u ees iaasead ied yates 11 2 o What You Will Be Doing ciicscsiniacjsescccctsscniotsonensaeanesnie 11 2 F Flash Download Utility sca gusiess ocateins teaevtenbnadvteaocvates 11 2 IERO LE E Sd cs it hehe dees nat aoe eee 11 2 Limitations eeceeeeeecccssececessesssseceessecseceesessrseaeess 11 2 ODELAULONG snie a nissan paren fas 11 3 DVT GO ces paren ora te i AE eased Seve tube E 11 6 Features aa aaa a ha a Ai 11 6 Limitations iania aen 11 6 Op ra tonsini i e aa then dies 11 6 CBA aise avcdear tw cdclic vont a a T A RE 11 8 Feature Srana anaren re e E 11 8 Limitations oaea aa a 11 8 QperahoNa ieena iie e a EE a 11 8 The eFlash Configuration File 0 cece 11 13 Network Micro Parameter Block Configuration 11 15 Meritt Op TONS stinsississvatanadurssss valeurs ae anii aaa 11 15 Parameters a a a aaea haa ai 11 16 12 Inputs and Outputs sassnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 12 1 Overview e A a A E A T Ta 12 1 PRERCQUISIFOS asisip r a S 12 1 What You Will Be Doing sssssesesesseresesisesrsreresesreree 12 1 OUTPUTS saiis
128. terminal attached to the server in the Server field type unix 0 Receive Alarm Alert Use the radio buttons to specify whether or not this terminal is to receive Alarm Alert messages Receive Reset Alarm Alert Use the radio buttons to specify whether or not this terminal is to receive Reset Alarm Alert messages Receive Archive Notice Use the radio buttons to specify whether or not this terminal is to receive Archive Notice messages Optional Package If you have optional packages installed such as Guard Tours or Client Workstation for example an Access Vision client use the applicable radio buttons to specify whether or not this terminal is to receive messages relating to that package Set Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles 3 2 ie D 2 kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 3 Modems Modems NOTE F Use the Modems form to describe each modem type that you intend to use for dial up communications Modem types that you define using the Modems form appear in a picklist for assignment to a micro on the Micros form and a port on the Ports form A micro can dial up the host on any available port that is compatible meaning the modem type matches The micro re
129. that there is a problem with the system There are other TPS processes that respawn under normal operation e snddrv e revdrv e moddrv e dialer Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide B 1 Configuration Files e nwmdrv e cfgmgr The base package installation program inserts a single alarm TPS RESPAWNED into the alarm table when Picture Perfect is installed The base package installation program also creates an input group for each TPS process that is not supposed to respawn NOTE Some system problems such as shared memory corruption or almmgr crashes can F prevent TPS alarms from being generated Configuration Files Icas db text tps cfg A configuration file cas db text tps cfg stores the input group associated with each TPS process It also stores two other configuration parameters The two parameters specify a respawn threshold and a failover threshold The respawn threshold indicates how many times a TPS process must respawn before an alarm is generated By default this value is setto 1 The failover threshold indicates how many times a TPS process must respawn before a primary machine in a redundant configuration fails over to the backup The backup machine also uses this value to shut itself down and disable failover if a TPS process has exceeded the failover threshold The default value is 3 but in a non redundant system TPS ignores this value The following format is used in the TPS Alarm Process config
130. the operator The operator then displays alarm instructions by selecting the alarm from a scrolling list on the Alarm Monitor The operator records a response to an alarm either by selecting a pre written alarm response from the Alarm Response window or by typing a response sobessow yanoy wey Each alarm can be configured to notify the operator as to what caused the alarm what actions are required and what alarm responses the operator can select to describe actions taken Each alarm s priority can be defined so that if alarms occur simultaneously they display on the Alarm Monitor in the order of their importance Priorities range from 1 highest to 500 lowest Alarms that have the same priority show the alarm that occurred latest at the top For information on how to configure a terminal to receive alarms see Terminals on page 4 2 Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites Form Purpose PRINTER To log alarms to a printer and to display on the ROUTINGS Alarm Monitor INPUT GROUPS To allow inputs to activate as groups when INPUTS an alarm condition occurs ROUTE DEFINITIONS To allow area activity monitor routing for ROUTE POINTS individual alarms Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 8 1 What You Will Be Doing What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to write instructions and responses for an alarm using the Messages and Responses forms an
131. the current language and table Double clicking on any item in the list activates the Field Edit dialog which controls the customization of the field The items in the list are presented in alphabetical order Language Selection Dialog The Language Selection dialog shown in Figure 31 5 controls changes to the current language The list contains only those languages that are installed on a system and for which the user has write permission to the language s meaning dat file Cc N D s 2 c no paN fe 3 N fes Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 31 5 User Interface Eee OK Aoi ance Hep Figure 31 5 Language Selection Dialog gt To selecta language 1 Either click on it in the list or typing its name in the Selection box Select Ok to change the current language to the selection This also deactivates the dialog Select Apply to change the current language to the selection This leaves the dialog active Select Cancel to exit the dialog without changing the current language Select Help to view on line help about the dialog Table Selection Dialog The Table Selection dialog shown in Figure 31 6 controls changes to the current table The list contains only those tables that can be customized 31 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide User Customization 31 i Figure 31 6 Table Selection Dialog gt To selecta table 1 Either clicking on it in the
132. the function or effect of the record The description becomes part of the transaction message telling the monitoring operator what happened and where One part of this description may include non technical language for operator information and the other part may include a wiring location For example you may write the following description for an output that controls a light indicating the back door is open BACK DOOR OPEN 002 00 07 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 12 1 Outputs In this example the first part of the description indicates the purpose of the output the second part indicates that the output is connected to DO point 07 on CPU board 00 of Micro ID 002 How you write output descriptions is entirely an administrative decision but this way of writing descriptions makes the system messages easier to use To make reports easier to read you may want to write the number description first so that the language description lines up with other records 002 00 07 BACK DOOR OPEN 002 00 08 SHIPPING DOOR OPEN Outputs Outputs that operate devices such as door strikes lights or sirens must be described to the system Use the Outputs form to define where this output point is connected how it is wired to activate how long it remains on when activated how it resets and what output group is associated with it Use the Outputs form Figure 12 1 to define the characteristics of each output point Setup gt To ad
133. the micro runs offline the door sensor reader door strike and exit button must be wired to the same micro 13 30 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 Setup Badge in here Strike READER m OUTPUT OUTPUT GROUP Exit Button DOOR STRIKE OUTPUT EXIT BUTTON DOOR SENSOR PRE ALARM Door Sensor non supervised HELD OPEN FORCED OPEN FORCED OPEN HELD OPEN DO D ag 2 o 0 3 Q sv PRE ALARM 2 p gt Uo of On O 7 NOTE A single input group and alarm can be used for multiple doors Figure 13 11 Common Door Setup Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 31 Doors e Ground condition detected e Short condition detected Strike OUTPUT OUTPUT GROUP Exit Button TAMPER ALARM Door Sensor e Ground condition detected e Short condition detected Figure 13 12 Supervised Door DI and Exit DI Setup gt To define a door record 1 Select Devices then Doors 2 Click New 3 Complete the Doors form For details on each field see The Doors Form on page 13 35 4 Click Save 5 Click New to add another door 13 32 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i Adding or Changing a Door Sensor A door contact functions as a sensor for two door open conditions door open too long and or door forced open If you a
134. the same Unique Id number to tell that the badge belongs to the same person The maximum number of times a badge may be reissued is 99 If the maximum is exceeded a new Unique Id is created for the badge and the Reissue Count is reset to 00 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 13 The Badges Form Reprint Count This view only field is visible if the seed counter option is enabled during installation This is the number of times the badge has been printed using the Access Vision Imaging package A new badge will set the Reprint Count to 00 Anytime the badge is printed or previewed the badge will increment the number storing it to the badge The maximum number of times a badge may be reprinted is 99 If the maximum is exceeded a new Unique Id is created for the badge and the Reprint Count is reset to 00 Unique Id This view only field is visible if the seed counter option is enabled during installation The seed counter assigns a unique number to each badge This unique number consists of two parts the Workstation Id and the Sequential Counter Workstation Id The Workstation Id is a number containing one to four digits It is used to uniquely identify the workstation that created the badge and to generate the Unique Id number The Picture Perfect host or web browsers will use a Workstation Id of 0 All Access Vision client workstations that create badges offline have a unique Workstation Id The Workstation Id is a
135. the same as Employee ID on the badge Login ID The login ID is case sensitive and must contain no spaces Lower case is recommended Each operator must have a unique Login ID Country Click the Country button to display the Country picklist If you have the National Language Support NLS option the country selected determines the language displayed on your screen The picklist is created at system installation according to available languages Country Select a Country Filter Figure 6 7 Country Picklist Permission Click the Permission button to display the Permission picklist Figure 6 8 The permissions displayed were created using the Permissions form See The Permissions Form on page 6 5 Select the desired permission for this operator then click Close 6 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Permissions and Operators 6 l Permission Select a Permission Record Filter Fros Refresh Cancel Help Figure 6 8 Permission Picklist Change Password Click the Change Password button to display the Password pop up window Figure 6 9 Type in the new password then click Ok When prompted re enter the password for verification then click Ok Notice that the character displays as you type the actual password is not visible If you are changing an existing password you will have to enter the old password before being prompted to enter the new one e o
136. the software installation configuration and operation of the Picture Perfect Redundant System PPRS software 1 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide System Overview Chapter Introduction The Picture Perfect system is an integrated computer based security system that provides access control to designated areas within a site or facility This system uses the IBM RISC System 6000 or Intel Pentium based servers configured to meet the exact needs of the user Picture Perfect uses industry leading products such as the Linux operating system Informix Dynamic Server and X windows IBM s graphical interface The Picture Perfect operator interface is picture icon based U lt n a D 3 0 lt D s S D The Picture Perfect platform functions in large measure as a database server The majority of access alarm and time of day decisions are made locally by intelligent microcontrollers Data necessary to make these intelligent decisions is downloaded from the host to the micro as required Since the micros are making the majority of these decisions the host is free to concentrate on operator functions such as data entry database queries requests for data and report generation The system controls access readers using either magnetic stripe barium ferrite Wiegand bar code or proximity technologies Readers with keypads for user defined PIN entry are also accommodated The smallest sy
137. their badge to the reader then enter their PIN on the reader keypad Pointer A graphic symbol in a window that indicates the current position of the mouse and the activity state of the window ready or busy Pop up Menu A menu that pops up when you click a button Port Group A single line of microcontrollers connected to a port Port Group Leader The first microcontroller in the port group See Port Group Primary Language Language used by Picture Perfect for alarm notification archive notification describing alarms in the Alarm Monitor and describing badge input and status activity in the Activity Monitor These are always described in the primary language even when viewed by operators working in a different language Priority A number used to indicate the response priority of an alarm The lower the priority number the more serious the alarm Process One of many independent programs running at the same time in the computer Protected Field An area of a screen where an operator cannot type in or change information Provided Language A language whose translations are provided by CASI RUSCO All provided languages are available at installation English and French are the only provided languages PSI 1 x0 13 Radio Button A diamond shaped button that allows only a single choice from a list of choices See Toggle Button Readers Badge readers are devices connected to the system that read the encoded bad
138. then click Ok This is a required field In our example one route definition is Building A Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Route To Terminals This field identifies which terminals are affected by this route point The number of terminals selected is displayed Click the Route To Terminals button to display a picklist of terminals One or more terminals may be selected for this route point A maximum of 32 terminals may be selected for a route point As terminals are selected or unselected from the picklist the Route To Terminals item count is updated Click the Close button when you have finished selecting the terminals This is not a required field if no terminals are selected alarms and activity with this route point s route definition will not be routed to a terminal Route to Email This field identifies which e mail addresses are associated with the route point Click the Route to Email button to display a picklist of e mail addresses One or more addresses may be selected Click the Close button when you have finished selecting the addresses This is not a required field if no addresses are selected alarms and activity with this route point s route definition will not be routed to an e mail address
139. to be restored The syntax of the contents of the restore cfg file is cas forms cas lists home install profile Options The cbr command line options are WO o 2 o a A p 7 er fe O c use character based interface a restore all tables d from disk file from floppy o output file t from streaming tape v verify afterwards Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 18 11 Restoring the Database Perform Restore gt To launch the cbr restore option 1 Opena Terminal window 2 Typeacommand including options for example to restore and verify the base Picture Perfect package from a disk file type cbr c a v d tmp basebackup NOTE Be sure to include options when using the command line cbr option If you fail to do so if you type cbr the system will try to launch the Picture Perfect graphical Restore feature Result The cbr restore option will restore the files contained in the restore cfg file Messages similar to the following will display restoring regular files After the database records are restored and if your backup included flat files you will receive messages similar to the following This program edits the configuration file cas db text restore cfg before running the backup or restore programs For backups you must also precede each file or directory name with a package name followed by a colon and a sp
140. tps almsave manual exists save or restore of the alarm buffer F a gt To create this filetype touch cas log tps almsave manual Q D This must be done before Picture Perfect is stopped or alarms will not be a saved D S NOTE The file cas log tps almsave manual willbe removed after any z c 9 r gt Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide D 9 Alarm Save State restorealarms This option can be set to auto or manual e auto The alarms in the alarm buffer will be restored automatically when Picture Perfect is brought down e manual The alarms in the alarm buffer will be restored only if the file cas log tps almsave manual exists To create this filetype touch cas log tps almsave manual This must be done before Picture Perfect is restarted or alarms will not be restored NOTE The file cas log tps almsave manual will be removed after any save or restore of m the alarm buffer alarmsfile This option can be used to override the default file cas log tps alarms which stores the buffered alarm messages One reason for overriding the default would be to eliminate problems associated with disk space If there is not enough free disk space to write out the list of buffered alarm messages its contents will be lost D 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 2 Log Messages The following messages may be displayed in the file cas log log MMDD saved l
141. trigger Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 9 9 Ej o o 5 2a O c a 9 fe D a Input Groups vault INPUT 1 OUTPUT GROUP motion detector A PARENT INPUT 2 INPUT ALARM GROUP a ALL motion detector motion input group vault vault INPUT 3 motion detector INPUT GROUP TOGGLE READER Individual non boolean on off control Figure 9 3 Example of a Parent Input Group 9 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Input and Output Groups 9 InGroups EREERE quit save find view new help Record of 36 Found Prev Next Description INVALID Delay Time Boolean Type _ Trigger on Any OR D Trigger on All AND Trigger on Input Individual 102 1 0 READ Input Group Control 102 2 0 REA ERFLOW Input Group State Open Condition Short Condition Broadcast State Changes _ Yes Figure 9 4 Input Groups Form with Picklists 5 pr 3 gt 2 O e c pr 9 x ie xe n Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 9 11 Input Groups NOTES 9 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros Chapter 10 Overview Each microcontroller micro controls specific input and output devices such as readers doors and alarms For the micro to work correctly you must de
142. ttyD013 15 dev ttyD014 16 dev ttyD015 Phone The dial up micro to host telephone number Include the area code but not the PBX prefix or country code A dial up micro can use this number to dial the host A dial up micro uses a dynamic list of phone numbers to call the host on any compatible port that is available When the port is assigned the same modem type as the micro that port becomes compatible A port used for direct communication micros does not require a phone number Leave this field blank for direct connection micros The port used for dial up communications requires a phone number 4 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i NOTE If you are configuring a modem port in a Redundant System please refer to the Picture Perfect Redundant System Administration Guide for more information Line Settings Baud Rate For direct communication micros select the baud rate the desired baud rate For dial up micros 2400 is the required line setting for the Micro 5 and 9600 is the required line setting for the Micro 5 PX Data Bits The required line setting is 8 Stop Bits The required line setting is 1 unless a Star COMM modem is attached to this port Consult the CASI documentation associated with the Star COMM modem for its setting Parity The required line setting is None Modem Type A port used for direct communication micros does not require a modem type select None None
143. type at the command line catsup help 16 44 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Access Secure Operations Chapter 17 Overview op Devices such as inputs input groups or doors normally exist in an S Access state in which they are disabled or unlocked or in a Secure state in gt o which they are enabled or locked These states are reflected on the a 4 appropriate device form Q o Device Secure State Access State Inputs Enabled Disabled Input Groups Enabled Disabled Doors Locked Unlocked It may be desirable to change this state back and forth to allow for unscheduled conditions such as heightened security levels or unscheduled peak access times This feature can be used in lieu of scheduling an event to accommodate situations that require operator control It allows state changes for multiple devices rather than applying the change to each device individually through the applicable form For example you may want all doors to be opened when the security guard arrives at his post rather than at a scheduled time This option will not appear unless it has been enabled through the Permissions screen Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 17 1 Prerequisites Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites Forms Purpose PRINTER To log activity to a printer and display on a ROUTINGS console TERMINALS PERMISSION GROUPS To enable the o
144. used to assign input groups to each micro error condition The input groups for each micro s error conditions must first be defined on the Ingroups form See The Input Groups Form on page 9 4 for details on how to complete this form If any of these micro error conditions should trigger alarms assign an alarm to that input group using the Alarms picklist on the Ingroups form 10 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros 10 If the alarm that you want is not configured on the Alarms form it will not appear in the picklist Associate Outputs with Micro Error Condition Input Groups To associate outputs with a micro error condition use the Outgroups picklist on the Ingroups form For example if you select an output that operates an LED at a guard station and link it to the micro s Upstream Communication Failure Input Group then even if no alarm displays when upstream communication fails the LED will still activate Adding or Change a Micro Do not add or change a micro until you have configured the input groups that you need for the micro to select from picklists in the Micros form and until you have configured the alarm and output groups that you want to have associated with the selected input groups See Associating Micro Alarms and Output Groups with Input Groups on page 10 10 A micro can be configured in one of five ways e non existent e direct connect e dial up e downstream dial
145. when the micro resets it will go back to midnight and execute all events scheduled to begin from midnight until the current time If the event that was in progress when the micro reset was scheduled to start before midnight the micro will not recognize it and will default to the normal mode To ensure that a schedule is restored when a micro resets schedule events to begin after midnight for example 00 01 If you schedule or command the system to return to normal operating mode after the time when scheduled runtime events for normal mode are supposed to occur it is a good idea to schedule start end events such as unlocking or locking the lobby doors See Start End Events on page 16 12 It is important to note that if there are three or more modes in the system activating an event at mode end does not determine the mode to which the system is switching For example assume the following three modes are in the system Normal Holiday and Emergency If the system is currently in Holiday mode at the end of Holiday mode the system could switch to either Normal or Emergency mode Therefore it is recommended that you activate an event at mode start if there are three or more modes in the system To change a mode by schedule 1 Select Schedule then Mode Creation 2 Click New 3 Complete the Mode Creation form For a description of each field see Figure 16 1 4 Click Save The Mode Events Form Use the Mode Events for
146. will be normal or compressed Select A Printer Select the printer to which this report should be sent Print Only to File Toggle this button On and type a file name if you want to save it as a file rather than send it to a printer Use a full pathname such as tmp readers 0407 Print SOL Allows you to print only the SQL statement that currently appears in the SOL window The Print SOL Statement window which looks just like the Print Report window will appear for specifications When you are ready to print click Print Paper Width Use the radio buttons in this area to specify both paper width and type compression Select a paper width of either 80 or 132 characters based on the printer Select whether the type will be normal or compressed Select A Printer Select the printer to which this report should be sent Print Only to File Toggle this button On and type a file name if you want to save it as a file rather than send it to a printer Use a full pathname such as tmp foo sql Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 7 The SQL Form Quit Exits the SOL form The SQL Syntax Menu This pull down menu is used to build SOL query statements by selecting and applying SQL names database table names and column names inside the SQL window The pull down SQL Syntax menu has three selections SOL Names This option displays the SOL Names picklist of SQL reserve words Figure 20 7 relational operators an
147. xidle program will close the current login session The xidle program can be configured to warn the operator before actually terminating the session The warning comes in the form of an audible bell and a popup window gt Q lt o O D Q O Q c i 5 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide D 11 Auto Logout xidle Files cas bin xidle This program implements the auto logout feature It runs every time an operator logs in and is controlled by the following X resource values e logout This value can be either True or False If it is set to False default then the auto logout feature is disabled If it is set to True then the xidle program uses the following resource values maxIdle and maxWarn e maxildle This value specifies the number or seconds of inactivity on an X Terminal before the operator is logged out If this value is not specified then it defaults to 10 minutes e maxWarn This value specified the number of seconds that an operator will be warned before auto logout occurs If this value is not specified then it defaults to 30 seconds usr 1ib X11 app defaults XIdle This file is used to control the auto logout on a global basis This file must be created with the resource values set correctly in order to affect all Picture Perfect operators The following lists the entries from a sample file xidle logout True xidle maxIdle 600 xidle maxWarn 30 HOME
148. 0 ccccceeeeeetteeeeeesteeeeeeenaes 18 3 Archive Dates Window cccccesteeeeseeceeeeeeeeeees 18 4 Archive Backup Window ceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 18 5 Table Backup WindOW ccceeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeees 18 6 Backup Events Form 2 s cccceeeeeeeeeeeeenteeaeees 18 9 Restore Window with Media Pop up 18 11 History FOT sarea a i 19 2 Open Report Picklist History cccceeeeeeees 19 3 Save Report As Window sceeceeeeeeeeeeees 19 4 Print Options Window cccceeeeeeeeeettteeeees 19 4 Delete Report Picklist History eee 19 5 Badge Query WiINdOW 0 ceeeeeeeeseeeeeeetteeeeeeeaaes 19 7 Format Columns Window c cccceseeeeseeeeees 19 8 Format Page Window scceeeeeseeeeeeeenteeeeeenaes 19 9 Format Summary WindOW ccsceeeeeeeereeeee 19 11 Variables Picklist cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 19 12 Report Events Form History c eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 19 17 SQL FORM e A a nian ee ee 20 2 Open Report Picklist SQL ccceeeeetettttteee 20 4 Save Report Query As WindowW ceeeeeeeeeeee 20 5 Delete Report Picklist SQL eee 20 6 Page Setup Window SQL oaeee 20 6 Print Report Window ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeaeees 20 7 SQL Names PickliSt ceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeteees 20 8 Table Names and Column
149. 0 2 Description Marys Web Client Server unix 21 3 Description Susans Web Client Server unix 22 For a Picture Perfect Enterprise Host primary or backup Redundant Host you define the terminal to use the host name of the server For example if the Picture Perfect server name is pphost you should define the terminals as pphost 20 pphost 21 pphost 22 For this example let s assume that John s Picture Perfect login ID is jdoe The next step is configuring the system to consistently assign the appropriate virtual terminal port number to each operator as follows 1 As the root operator from the command prompt on the Picture Perfect host change to the appropriate directory by entering cd opt tarantella bin 2 Create an object for the operator by entering tarantella object new person name o organization cn jdoe surname doe user jdoe Where j doe is the login ID of the Picture Perfect operator F 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide tI 3 Enter the following command to assign the operator to the virtual terminal port number tarantella object edit name o organization cn jdoe scottamindisplay xx scottamaxdisplay xx Where jdoe is the login ID of the Picture Perfect operator and xx is the port number derived from the terminal record In this example you would enter 20 for John s Terminal Now every time John logs into Picture Perfect he is assigned unix 20 and will
150. 0 Administration Guide 13 25 Readers NOTE NOTE Global APB Used as the default this allows the reader to function as a normal APB reader Timed APB Used to designate the reader as a Timed APB reader in which a badgeholder s APB status will be set to In or Out and will return to Neutral after a defined period of time A Timed APB reader is useful in a site where a badgeholder may enter a site by going through an APB In reader but is not required to exit the site by going through an APB Out reader If this option is selected a Timed APB Duration must also be defined A Timed APB status is local to the micro Reset Timed APB Immediately Used to reset the Timed APB status back to Neutral immediately following a badge swipe Timed APB Duration Enter a value to represent how long a badgeholder s Timed APB status will be set when his badge is used on the reader The Timed APB Duration cannot exceed one day A duration of 0 allows the micro to reset the status to Neutral immediately producing the same effect as Reset Timed APB Immediately Swipe and Show Control This feature is only visible when the optional Image package is installed See page 28 6 for more details on Swipe and Show Swipe and Show Select Enabled to enable Swipe and Show on this reader Select Disabled to disable Swipe and Show on this reader A reader cannot be defined as Toggle when Swipe and Show is Enabled See Toggle on page 13 28 Authori
151. 0 alphanumeric characters long for example General Access This event may include more than one location if the facility has multiple entrances or buildings Mode Select the mode in which the area event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Time If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one to return to the previous state At mode start If this is a Start End event click At mode start if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode 16 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 l If this is a Start End event click At mode end if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode At mode end Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Area Select the area in which the event will occur Figure 16 7 Area Events Form Middle Area Online Offline Use an area event if you want all readers in the area to operate offline not able to unlock doors b
152. 020 Even though the system will display time in one format or the other it should be noted that a time value can be entered in either format It should also be noted that time values can be entered in abbreviated format The only abbreviated formats supported for data entry are the following SS MMSS HH MM Refer to Figure 4 15 for the bottom middle portion of the Parameters form 5 a wn D pl To Figure 4 15 Parameters Form Bottom Middle Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 31 Parameters Default Badge Encode Format This is a required field that represents the default badge encode setting for the system Click the Default Badge Encode Format button and choose a Badge Encode Format from the picklist If the operator does not set a badge encode format on the Badges form this default setting is used Duress Code Enter the PIN number used to signal duress situations Position for Auto Generate Enter a number between 59 and 62 which represents the User Field position between 1 and 4 that will be used for Auto Generation on the Badges form This number is normally set to 59 which represents User Field 1 This means that the information entered into User Field 1 on the Badges form will be used to generate the Badge Encode Number For details on using the Auto Generate feature see Auto Generate Method on page 14 3 Image Front End Program This field will only appear if the optiona
153. 1190148 J ean saoo ndng eas k OXJ naom O79 00 L LO 48901 L 5018 00 L 40 3801 9019 0O b0 49907 9019 0O b0 ss00gsseonsg sjndingssso1nsg N3d0 039404 yood SWE SS01K8g a oa 49901 L 9018 00 L0 sdnoiByngsssoreg wod Pdu pesojg AjjeusoN psqeug ndul lt HNY1E gt bOYSIA on 10 Y000 48939014L 9019 00 k L0O synduyssnseg SYNY1d gt aroso aut ejag 49907 90179 00 k LO sdnoiBuyssoneg Hod pnduy pasolg AIEWJON regea pdu IA 9018 anea 43901 L 95018 00 4 00 Eas A a x34 48801 9019 80 0 sjpnduyssoneg 49907 9019 00 00 anoun PHEA enn eam k OYSIA esn 3807 L 9014 00 L0 Sue pesysssonsg Figure H 2 Valid Badge Read Flow Diagram Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide H 2 Example of a Communications Failure Detected by a Micro MICRO INPUT GROUP ALARM MICRO 0 BLDG 1 DOWNSTREAM COMM DOWNSTREAM FAILURE COMM FAILURE sel IN GROUP for DOWNSTREAM sel ALARM COMM FAILURE sel OUT GROUP a o Q g 3 7 Figure H 3 Comm Failure Detected by Micro Example of a Bad Badge Detected by an Area AREA INPUT GROUP ALARM BLDG 1 LOBBY LOST BADGE LOST BADGE sel IN GROUP for LOST BADGE sel OUT GROUP Figure H 4 Bad Badge Detected by Area Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide H 3 Example of a Door Forced Condition Detected by a Door Example of a Door Forced C
154. 14 26 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Generator Chapter 15 Overview The Generator can be used to add new readers doors and areas to your system The Generator uses specially chosen existing records as templates to generate new records saving the operator time and making it easier to set up a reader and door in the system The Generator form allows you to select an existing micro and add new reader records to it with all necessary records associated with the reader automatically being created and properly linked What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to configure the master records that will be used when you are working with the Generator form to create new records Master records forms will be configured for the following e Areas e Inputs Jo e19Ua5 e Input Groups e Outputs e Readers e Doors NOTE An Output Group record is also generated but it is assigned the name that you type in the Description box No other operator action is needed Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 15 1 What You Will Be Doing Creating Master Records The Master Records function button on the Generator form brings up the Master Records window Before you can use the Generator form you must assign a master record for each of the items on the Master Records window The Master Records window has six Description buttons one for each type of master record When you click one of the Description buttons
155. 4 26 3 Click Save 2 i r kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 25 Badge Formats The Badge Formats Form Figure 4 12 Badge Formats Form Description A unique description that identifies the badge format This field generates a picklist of badge formats that is used in the Parameters and Badges forms Badge Format A special character sequence that optionally starts with constant data and always ends with variable data It must include a percent sign to mark the beginning of the variable data and a lower case s to mark the end For example 4s This field generates a picklist of badge formats that is used in the Parameters and Badges forms Set Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles 4 26 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i Parameters The Parameters form is used to assign system parameters that will be used by the system during the setup procedures The first eight fields of the Parameters form Node Name to Operator History Size are already set based on the system installation settings These should not be changed unless you are directed to do so by your support representative Refer to Figure 4 13 for the
156. 7 AM Another option is to make a mode start event that locks the doors when Holiday mode goes into effect When you set up a Holiday mode you do not need to set up runtime events unless you want weekly and daily cycles to occur If you want any of the runtime events in your normal operating mode to occur during your holiday mode you must duplicate those runtime events within Holiday mode Table 16 3 gives examples of start end and runtime events that you might set up for a holiday Notice that the chart does not show a parallel mode end event for each mode start event that locks a lobby door The mode end event is unnecessary because the doors will unlock and lock on schedule when the system returns to normal operating mode Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes Table 16 3 Example of Holiday Mode Settings KJ Event Form Schedule Holiday Lights On Outgroup Events Time Lock Lobby Door 1 Door Events At Mode Start Lock Lobby Door 2 Door Events At Mode Start Allow Maintenance Crew Area Events 08 00 MTWTF Assign a category to this area that allows access to a maintenance crew Starting at 8AM Mon Fri during the holiday Deny Maintenance Crew Area Events 17 00 MT WTF Remove the maintenance category from the area at 5 PM Mon Fri Setup gt To create a mode 1 Select Schedule then Mode Creation 2 Click New 3 Complete the Mode Creation form Fo
157. AIX and Linux platforms Standalone etc hosts etc services etc sysconfig network Linux specific etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethO Linux specific cas db etc onconfig cas db etc sqlhosts usr 1ib X11 nced configs nced std if the NCD package is installed Network Host etc hosts on all machines etc services on all machines etc sysconfig network Linux specific etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth0 Linux specific etc hosti equiv on all subhosts cas db etc onconfig on local machine cas db etc sqlhosts on all machines vrhosti on all subhosts For Linux the above line should read root rhosti on all subhosts home lt loginid gt rhosts of System Administration operators host table on all machines usr lib X11 nced configs ncd std if the NCD package is installed At Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide A 3 IN Id oy Huibueyy ge o D O Q if lt a a D 3 I fo a n Z D D Files and Database Tables Network Subhost vrhosti on network host For Linux the above line should read root rhosti on all subhosts etc hosti equiv on network host etc hosts on all machines etc sysconfig network Linux specific etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth0O Linux specific etc services on all machines cas db etc onconfig on local machine cas db etc sqlhosts on all machines host table on all machines usr 1ib X11 nc
158. Administration Guide Permissions and Operators 6 l The Permission Group Form Perm Group bctandromeda guassas Select One Facility Facility GLOBAL Permission Group Type Area Category _ Reports WMM Figure 6 2 Perm Group Form Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters for Description For example System Administrator e 2 i m a U D o 3 a ein fo a 3 a Select One Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Permission Group Type Areal Category An Area Category permission group defines the categories and areas that an operator is permitted to assign Reports A Report permission group can be assigned to reports if the Enforce Report permissions option is enabled through the Control Parameters form This offers the capability to assign reports to report permission groups and to restrict operator report access to only those reports that the operator permission record specifies Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 6 3 Permissions Permissions Use the Permissions form Figure 6 3 to define the functions that each operator level is permitted to perform such as System Ad
159. B HUMAN RESOURCES LEGEND K Reader Category Figure 13 1 Site Map with Access Control Areas a 9 0 2a Identify Areas ao An area is a group of one or more readers Identify functions within the ga facility that require the same kind of access control and give descriptive a gt names to these areas For example 9 D o Accounting a MIS R amp D Lobby Stairwells Cafeteria Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 3 How Categories and Areas Work Identify Categories Identify each group of people who use the facility and assign a category to each group For example categories describe the users by type title group or shift Temporary Lab Technicians Chief Engineer Engineering Accounting Computer Room 08 00 17 00 Computer Room 24 Hrs Computer Room 16 00 04 00 To restrict area access to specific badges within defined time ranges create a category that includes a timeframe Assign this category to each badge required to access this area during the timeframe described in the category Then create an Area Event to schedule the category to be assigned to the area during the specified time frame Example 1 If the badgeholder is a cost accountant required to access the accounting department and the computer room 8 AM 5 PM assign the following two categories to this badge and make sure that the same categories are assigned to the respective areas during the specified time frame A
160. Badge Admin Plant operator permission is permitted to issue badges to Plant Building 1 and Plant Building 2 areas and categories no permission is granted to issue badges for the Engineering Perm Group the Purchasing Perm Group etc The Badge Admin Plant permission allows the operator to issue badges only to plant employees Permissions bctandromeda e o m v7 D o 3 a ein fe 3 a 3 a Perm Group Plant Bldg 1 Perm Group Plant Bldg 2 Perm Group gt Group Figure 6 4 Permissions Form with Picklist for Badge Admin Plant If your site does not require the kind of operator restrictions shown in Figure 6 4 use the default permission group All Groups Allowed For example a Badge Administrator can be assigned the permission group All Groups Allowed which gives this operator the permission to issue badges to all area and category permission groups without restrictions Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 6 7 Permissions Facility Profile Window This window displays the active facilities currently defined If the facility has not been associated with a facility profile it will appear with the word lt BLANK gt after it If the facility has an associated profile that profile description will appear after it Select a facility and click on it to display a facility profile picklist Facility Profile Facility Profile Badge Administrator Factory GLOBAL FACI
161. Badge And Keypad Keypad Only and Badge Or Keypad A reader s physical type may be changed with a reader event For example To provide higher security at certain hours you can define a Badge and Keypad reader as a Badge only reader from 8 AM to 5 PM and a Badge and Keypad reader from 5 PM to 8 AM To gain access after 5 PM a badgeholder must swipe his badge and use the keypad to enter a unique PIN code Logical Reader Function To change the way the reader functions schedule a reader event that changes the logical reader function Normal Anti passback In Anti passback Out Time amp Attendance In out Time amp Attendance In or Time amp Attendance Out For example To provide higher security after hours you can set up certain readers as Anti passback In readers and others as Anti passback Out readers or To provide data about shifts that badge in and out of an area you can set up a reader event that changes a normal reader to a Time amp Attendance In or out reader APB Type To change the way the Anti passback feature functions schedule a reader event that changes the APB Type Global APB or Timed APB Used as the default Global APB allows the reader to function as a normal APB reader or Used to designate the reader as a Timed APB reader a badgeholder s APB status will be set to In or Out and will return to Neutral after a defined period of time A Timed APB reader is useful in a site where a badgeholder
162. CCESS use w sched only 3 MIS Shift 2 Categories Manage 1 2 3 At 01 15 badges with the MIS 24Hour category will have access to this area but MIS Shift 1 and MIS Shift 2 will have NO ACCESS ee ad MIS 24Hour NO ACCESS use w sched only NO ACCESS use w sched only Figure 16 10 Examples Areas Form Categories Window 16 la 5 D a D o te 5 a fo 2 f 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 21 Area Events Figure 16 11 Area Events Form Bottom Reader Reader Online Offline Use an area event if you want all readers in the area to operate offline not able to unlock doors but able to read badges pass badge data route and archive access messages and activate associated alarms Number of Badges There are two badge controls available Single and Double Single means only one valid badge is required Double means that two complete valid and distinct transactions are required Physical Reader Type There are four ways to define the physical reader type of a reader Badge Only Badge And Keypad Keypad Only and Badge Or Keypad A reader s physical type may be changed with a reader event 16 22 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 j For example To provide higher security at certain hours you can define a badge and keypad rea
163. Cancel Remove Record Figure 14 2 Remove Record Popup 8 The Remove Record pop up appears providing an opportunity to stop the removal process before it has been completed This pop up 14 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 i shows the progress of the removal process The message bar on the Badges form shows the range of records currently being removed During the Remove process no other Badges form operations will be allowed The Badges form will be cleared when the Remove process is completed or has been aborted If the process is aborted before completion the badge records that were removed before the abort are lost NOTE If you are removing a large number of badges the system removes badges in increments according to the Record Remove Maximum and Record Remove m Interval set on the Parameters form See The Parameters Form on page 4 27 Badge Removal Command Line Tool A command line tool rmbadge is available in Picture Perfect to allow the removal of badges from the micro and Picture Perfect database tables The rmbadge tool allows you to remove a single badge or all badges Previously badges could only be removed one at a time Badges are required to have a status of Deleted before they can be removed Any badge that is removed is recorded to operator history Operators must have the correct permissions to remove badges Requirements The following requirements must be satisfied befo
164. Client An application program for the X Window System In Picture Perfect a menu displays when you click the left mouse button in the root window Client Area The area within the borders of a primary window s frame that is controlled by an application Close A selection on some menus or dialog boxes that closes the window associated with the menu CMENU A diagnostic program that runs on the console in order to monitor and control microcontrollers and X Terminals can also be used to monitor database activity and configuration in the host or micro Code Set A collection of character codes that express one or more languages Picture Perfect only supports code sets defined by the International Standards Organization ISO Western European languages use the ISO8859 1 code set Hebrew uses the ISO8859 8 code set Control Panel An area of a window that contains pushbuttons and other graphical controls Console The host computer used for administrative functions also called host console Cursor A graphical symbol usually a pipe or block that indicates your current input location on a screen A mouse cursor shows where to what GL 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Glossary selection the mouse is pointing A text cursor shows where the next character to be typed will appear on the screen Daemon A continually running background process that is not controlled by a terminal See Process Database Pic
165. Devices Doors 2 From the toolbar click on Find the door record you wish to set up pue ajny UeN OML 3 Under Inputs click on Door Sensor z 2 O a z lo z fe A D 4 Select the appropriate input from the list displayed 5 Save and exit the Doors form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 21 3 Two Man Rule 2MR NOTE m gt To enable Occupancy Counting for the Area In order to perform this function you must have Occupancy Control permission 1 From the Main menu select Access Areas 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the area record you wish to set up 3 Under Occupancy Control enable the Occupancy Counting radio button 4 Save and exit the Areas form Two Man Rule 2MR The standard two man rule requires that at least two authorized badge holders occupy a controlled space at the same time Two man rule can only be enabled if the operator has been granted Occupancy Control permission through the Permissions form and Occupancy Counting has been enabled through the Areas form If desired a digital output DO such as a blinking light can be activated on the reader following the first badge swipe to alert the badge holder that a second badge swipe is required before access will be granted This is an optional feature available by selecting 2MR Output from the Readers form Modified Two Man Rule M2MR The modified two man rule further restric
166. ERMISSIONS To give operator permission to create update or delete a report from the database What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to use the SQL form to open save delete and print report data selected and sorted using SQL statements and how to schedule SQL reports Structured Query Language The SQL form provides an interface to the online Picture Perfect database so you can use ANSI standard SQL select statements to query the database Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 1 The SQL Form and generate reports The SQL query function allows unlimited selection criteria and up to eight sort criteria whereas the query function in the History form allows selected data to be sorted on a maximum of eight selection criteria The relational database allows a query to join separate database tables into one report To optimize complex queries used for reporting and decision making Picture Perfect uses IBM s Informix Dynamic Server a Relational Database Management System RDBMS designed to run on a wide range of Unix like operating systems in stand alone or networked environments Informix optimizes the processing of large databases that are shared by many concurrent users Some advantages of Informix file management are e The operating system does not limit the number of tables used at one time For example the SQL form lets you select data from all Picture Perfect database tables for a single repo
167. FOnm sed tied clint as a ten 5 3 Delete Facility Window ccccceeeeeeeeteeeeeteees 5 4 Facility Profile Forma si eiiean anaa ea 5 6 Facility Set Managet ceceecceeeeeeteteteeeneees 5 11 Clients Menu Change Active Facility Set 5 11 FACIA e e A tatewdstecteediins 5 14 Facility Yre tanini aiad eae dese anit N aT 5 14 Facility Z eatea eae rea a aen ana ea Lander eee 5 14 Update Badge Facility Profile eee 5 15 View Operator Facility Profile 2 0 0 eeeeeeeeee 5 16 Facility WiIndOW 00 eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeenaaees 5 17 Facility Profile WindOW cceessteeeeeettteeeeeenaees 5 17 Current Profile Column 2 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 5 18 Permissions FOrm ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeeeeees 5 18 Operator Permission Window c cccceeeee 5 19 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide xvii List of Figures Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 10 4 Figure 10 5 Figure 10 6 Figure 10 7 Figure 10 8 Figure 10 9 Figure 10 10 Figure 10 11 Figure 10 12 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2
168. Facility Assignment Tool allows you to change the facility a micro is assigned along with the inputs input groups outputs output groups readers and doors for that micro NOTE Do not use this utilty if your micro spans multiple facilities Running the Tool gt Follow the steps below to run the tool 1 Log on as root and open a terminal window 2 Type cas bin micfac sh Micro Facility Assignment Tool Version 1 6 7 17 96 Micros 0 100 1 101 31 32 152 153 154 75 Type a list of micros belonging to GLOBAL or press lt ENTER gt to skip 3 Enter the number of the micro s you would like assigned to the facility Global If you plan to enter more than one separate the micro numbers by a space and press Enter For example if you wanted to assign micros 31 32 and 152 to the Global facility you would type 31 32 152 Result You will be asked to verify your choice of micros For example to continue with the example started above this step would result in the following prompt Micros 31 32 152 is this correct y n Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide G 1 gt a o Co 5 3 D 5 O o Ayyioe4 O01911 Running the Tool 4 Press Q Result The inputs input groups outputs output groups readers and doors associated with all the micros you assigned to the Global facility will also be assigned to the Global facility NOTE All records in Picture Perfect 2 0 are assigned a fac
169. Figure 27 7 Figure 27 8 Figure 27 9 Figure 28 1 Figure 28 2 Figure 28 3 Figure 28 4 Figure 29 1 Figure 29 2 Figure 30 1 Figure 30 2 Figure 30 3 Figure 30 4 Figure 31 1 Figure 31 2 Figure 31 3 Figure 31 4 Figure 31 5 Figure 31 6 Figure 31 7 Figure 33 1 Micro DO Config s aasi ns aaa nera AE 22 17 Reader DO Config cceeceeeeeeesteeeeeeenteeeeeeeaes 22 18 Reader DI DO Config 22 19 Category Floors Form cscscceeeeesteeeeeeeenteeeeeeens 22 20 Select Floors Form 2 ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeees 22 21 Doors Form Configured for Elevator Door 22 22 Badge Query WiNdOW ccccceeeeeeteeeeeeentteeeeeeeaes 22 23 Alarm Response Code Field on Micros Form 23 5 Badge and Keypad Field on Readers Form 23 5 Keypad Alarm Response Field on Doors Form 23 6 Keypad Alarm Response Field on Badges Form 23 7 Pre Alarm Fields on Top of Doors Form 24 3 Pre Alarm Field on Bottom of Doors Form 24 4 Badge Trace Routing Portion of Parameters Form 25 1 Control Portion of Badges Form cceeee 25 2 Reader Control Portion of Readers Form 26 3 Interval Time Portion of Readers Form 26 3 Reader Portion of Reader Events Form 26 3 Alarm Monitor Window cc c ssssseceeeeeeeseseeeeeees 27 2 Alarm Alert WiINdOW cccccccccesssseeeeeeeeeaseeeeeee
170. IKE Use LIKE after a column name to specify a value or pattern that data must match in order to be found Characters typically used in a LIKE string are Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 15 Logical Operators A percent character matches zero or more characters An underscore character matches any single character The following SQL select statement retrieves a list of reader descriptions from the reader table where the reader description starts with the characters Lob and ends with zero or more unspecified characters SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description LIKE Lob The following SQL select statement retrieves a list of reader descriptions from the reader table where the reader description contains the word Door or DOOR anywhere in the description SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description LIKE Door OR SDOOR Logical Operators Use AND OR and NOT to connect one or more search conditions that create a comparison condition AND OR Use AND to retrieve data that matches both of the values connected by AND The following SQL comparison statement retrieves each reader described as Engineering Reader and also has a set interval time of less than 5 seconds SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description Engineering Reader AND Interval_Time lt 5 Use OR to retrieve data that matches either one of the values connected by OR The following SQL comparison statement retr
171. IONS To assign Occupancy Control Permission A oO READERS To set up the area s readers DOORS To set up the area s doors AREAS e To enable Occupancy Counting e To select the type of Two Man Rule enforcement to be used e M2MR only To assign an M2MR category to the area CATEGORIES To define M2MR Category Types M2MR only BADGES To assign M2MR Category Types M2MR only Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 21 1 Occupancy Control Occupancy Control Picture Perfect allows the number of persons in a controlled space to be monitored by enabling Occupancy Control through the Areas form This option is used when the number of people in an area must be controlled for example fire code enforcement regulations or when Two Man Rule is enforced The occupancy count is set to zero and Picture Perfect updates the occupancy count when a valid entry or exit to from the area occurs When using Occupancy Control with the Two Man Rule feature the following restrictions apply NOTE Occupancy Count must be enabled and the count must be zero in order to enable Two Man Rule If Two Man Rule is enabled Occupancy Count cannot be disabled An error message will display and you will not be allowed to save the record If Standard Two Man Rule or Modified Two Man Rule is enabled and the occupancy count is greater than zero Two Man Rule can be disabled but you cannot switch to another Two Man Rule state For example
172. If the screen scrolls too rapidly press S to suspend and a Q to restart the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu 33 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide In Case of Problems 33 j Doors The Doors on micro selection allows you to send a door status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the micro ID where your door status request is sent press Enter and wait about 20 seconds for the screen to display information If the screen scrolls too rapidly press G S to suspend and x Q to restart the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu Printer Utilities The Printer Utilities Menu Figure 33 15 allows the operator to view and cancel print requests Print requests originated by other users can only be cancelled if the operator has an effective user ID of superuser root Picture Perfect Utilities Menu Informix Start stop Informix database Transaction Start stop transaction processor Diagnostics Diagnostics Subsystem Menu Micros Mic Status Sta Printer Utilities Menu SAJES Printer queue status Kill Kill a print job Stop Stop a printer queue Clean Clean out a print queue Start Start the print spooler Pri K Terminals Res Figure 33 15 Printer Utilities Menu Status The Printer queue status selection displays information about all printer queues including the name
173. K TempCat 26 lt BLANK TempCat 27 lt BLANK TempCat 28 lt BLANK BLANK BLANK BLANK Aaa a S a D E A ove iy D 3 3 O a o Aq As ake ow BLANK Close Advanced Figure 14 9 Temporary Categories Form For each temporary category selected enter the appropriate information in the following fields Start Date Type the date on which the temporary category is to be enabled Use the format of your system date as set on the Parameters form Stop Date Type the date on which the temporary category is to expire Use the format of your system date as set on the Parameters form Start Time Type the time at which the temporary category is to be enabled each day for a Daily schedule type using the interval set at installation time For example if you selected the 30 minute default scheduling interval select start times that occur on the hour or half hour Use the format of your system time as set on the Parameters form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 21 The Badges Form Stop Time Type the Stop Time the time at which the temporary category is to be disabled each day for a Daily schedule type using the interval set at installation time For example if you selected the 30 minute default scheduling interval select stop times that occur on the hour or half hour Use the format of your system time as set on the Parameters form If a temporary
174. LITY PROFILE OK Refresh Cancel Help Figure 6 5 Faclity Profile Picklist If you want to assign a facility profile to this facility select a profile from the list and click OK 6 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Permissions and Operators 6 l Operators Use the Operators form Figure 6 6 to assign Operator permissions to individual operators and to give them login capabilities on the system NOTE Always have more than one operator with System Administrator permissions Deleting an operator only deletes that operator from the Picture Perfect system and not from the 7 operating system Setup To define an operator record 1 Select Control then Operators 2 Complete the Operators form For a description of each field see The Operators Form on page 6 9 NOTE When adding a new operator in Linux you must enter a password before saving the r record 3 Click Save e 2 m a U O 3 3 7 a 7 o 2 The Operators Form Operators bctandromeda galaa aag quit save find delete view new help E Record f Country English in US Permission System Administrator lt GLOBAL gt Change Password Set Facility Facility GLOBAL Figure 6 6 Operators Form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 6 9 Operators User Name The name of the operator Employee ID The Employee ID must be
175. Network See LAN xdm The login utility used to allow an operator to log in on an X Terminal The operator uses an xdm window to enter a Login ID and a Password The X Window Display Manager xdm is the program that controls workstation windows X Terminal The computer monitor that displays the screens that the operator uses to interact with the system Also called a workstation X Window System A portable network transparent window system that handles graphics and multiple fonts in a hierarchy of windows on a wide variety of bit mapped display devices Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide GL 9 Glossary NOTES GL 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Index A Access 17 1 Access Secure Operations 17 2 Activity Monitor 28 1 Activity Monitor Window 28 4 Activity Monitoring 2 3 AIX 2 2 Alarm Alert Window 27 3 Alarm Color 4 33 8 12 Alarm Events 16 33 Alarm Events Form 16 34 Alarm Graphics 2 4 Alarm History Size 4 29 Alarm Instructions 8 2 Alarm Messages 2 3 Alarm Monitor 27 2 Alarm Monitor Window 27 2 Alarm Response Window 27 3 Alarm Responses 8 4 Alarm Activity Monitor 8 1 Alarm Activity Monitor Routing 7 1 Alarms 2 3 Alarms Form 8 6 Antipassback 2 4 Anti Passback Status 14 23 Archive 18 2 Archive Backup Window 18 5 Area Events 16 14 Area Events Form 16 16 Areas 13 13 Areas Form 13 15 Auto Generate 14 3 B Backup Events Form 18 9 Badge Activity Message 28 4 Badge Categorie
176. OUTGRP ei MICRO ADDR 00 1 00 LOBBY B1 BOARD OUTPUT AREA ADOR ON BD purer one DOOR DI JEXT DI a a o Q o 3 7 CATEGORY INPUTS 00 1 00 LOBBY DR DI LEAVE INGRP BLANK amp TIE TO DOOR 00 14 08 LOBBY EXIT 00 1 16 FIRE BLDG 1 00 1 16 FIRE BLDG1 INGRP 00 1 16 FIRE B1 OUTGRP 00 1 16 FIRE B1 OUTPUT FIRE ALARM from MICRO INPUT GROUP ALARM H TO MCONM FAL H TO M COMM FAL HTOMCONMM FAL UPSTR COBA FAIL UPSTR COMM FAIL UPSTR COMM FAIL DWNSTR COM FAIL OWNSTR COM FAIL DWNSTR COM FAIL READER COM FAIL READER COM FAIL READER COM FAIL BADGEHIST OVRFL BADGE HIST OVRFL BADGE HIST OVRFL ALARM HIST OWRFL ALARM HIST O VRFL ALARM HIST O VRFL frm AREA INPUT GROUP INVALID BADGE INVALID BADGE LOST BADGE LOST BADGE UNKNOWN BADGE SUSPENDED BADGE APB ERROR DURESS ALARM frm DOOR INPUT GROUP DOOR HELD OPEN DOOR HELD OPEN DOOR FORCED OPEN DOOR FORCED OPEN PRE ALARM PRE ALARM Figure H 1 System Flow Diagram Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide H 1 Picture Perfect Valid Badge Read Flow Diagram Picture Perfect Valid Badge Read Flow Diagram g oog j mone les u o l N3dO l Losi iooa nav N N3d0 0713H Y000 N3d0 0173H Y000 A sdnosGuysaoreg swiep sS0Kag W u Y 1 Y ce l 10 4000 osuss 100a EEE 9014 00 L L0 g xay 48807 J uonna apa uon 5074 801 40 apa C j N3dO 0339404 4000 sdnouysaorag ae OL uadg s qemoipy Swit punys uadg pasoj 4990
177. PS To allow outputs to trigger when associated inputs OUTPUTS activate MESSAGES To facilitate notification of and response to alarms RESPONSES ALARMS Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 27 1 What You Will Be Doing What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to view respond to and remove alarms and how to control alarms that require manual reset The Alarm Monitor Select Monitors then Alarm to display the Alarm Monitor window Figure 27 1 Use the Alarm Monitor window to view and select any alarms that occur active pending or completed Alarms that are not yet acknowledged are active alarms that are acknowledged but not removed are pending and alarms that are removed but not yet reset are completed a J Alarm Monitor orion ei New Alarms 25 E il 2 OO EAM rotat xlarns 29 quit freeze save print search purge help Highest Priority 1 Pri Alarm Description Location Condition Input State Date Tine Proc State Count 1 TPS RESPAWNED prngr Alarm N A 04 03 01 13 45 Active aa 10 SCHEDULE DID NOT RUN TEST Usha Reset Closed 04 03 01 13 30 Active 20 HOST TO MICRO 0 COMM FAIL Dons Micro Alarm N A 04 03 01 12 48 Pending 20 MO READER COMM FAIL 103 1 0 Usha Alarm Closed 03 08 01 12 32 Active 20 MO READER COMM FAIL 103 2 0 Usha Alarm Closed 03 08 01 12 32 Cmpltd m ef 20 HOST TO MICRO 0 COMM FAIL Craigs Micro Alarm N A 03 12 01 13 27 Activ
178. Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Double Badge Transaction Chapter 26 Overview This feature provides double badge control for access to high security areas Operator defined readers will require two badges or two badges with PINs to be presented before a door strike is activated it gt a D 2 e 5 peg jqnoq Double Badge Function Access through double transaction readers is only granted when two complete valid and distinct transactions are presented to the reader Complete means that both transactions have all necessary information Valid means that both transactions are recognized by the reader Distinct means that both transactions are individually distinguishable a single badge cannot be used twice to complete a double badge transaction e Badge only readers need two distinct badges e Keypad only readers need two distinct badge encode numbers e Badge and keypad readers need two complete badge and keypad transactions The first reader activity may be a shunt code or an alarm response code entered on the keypad This first activity is optional Next must come the presentation of a badge to the reader Following that a PIN or duress code must be entered on the keypad The two transactions must have different badges but they may use the same PIN or duress code The required order for a badge and keypad reader transaction is outlined below 1 Shunt or Alarm Response code 2
179. Picklist Description The name of the person to whom the e mail is to be sent or a description of the group if using an alias up to 30 alphanumeric characters Email Address The e mail address to which the alarm is to be sent If you want the alarm message to go to multiple addressees enter a valid e mail alias An alias is used if you wish to have an alarm message go to multiple addressees Any alarm messages sent to this address will be handled by the Sendmail subsystem and routed to the appropriate e mail addresses in the e mail alias Phone number The phone number of the person specified by the e mail address Facility The facility associated with the person specified by the e mail address Select Facility Press the Select Facility button to display a picklist of facilities 4 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i Routings Use the Routings form Figure 4 9 to define a routing There are eight predefined routings already entered The system lets you use these routings to send messages to a printer history log monitor and or to e mail addresses The routings you create make up a picklist and are assigned to various aspects of the system Setup gt To define a routing 1 Select Control then Routings 2 Complete the Routings form For a description of each field see The Routings Form on page 4 21 3 Click Save The Routings Form aa bctandromeda
180. Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Viewing Status 30 i 4 Click Ok on the Status Request pop up and wait for the Activity Monitor to appear displaying the selected data which begins to scroll Click the Freeze button to stop the scrolling action and use the scroll bar to view data that has scrolled off the window Viewing Status By Area gt To view Status by Area 1 Select Status then Status The Status form appears 2 Click the Status By Area button to display a picklist of areas Select an area then click Ok A Status window Figure 30 3 appears status cora Area Status Select Area Status Category v Reader M Door lt iy Q wn er lt 3 ee c n PERIMETER ANNEX e 4 Status request s sent OK Refresh Cancel Help Figure 30 3 Progression of Windows for Status by Area 3 Select one or more of the items in the Status window then click Ok A message appears in a Status Request pop up window informing you that your status requests have been sent 4 Click Ok on the Status Request pop up and wait for the Activity Monitor to appear displaying the selected data which begins to scroll Click the Freeze button to stop the scrolling action and use the scroll bar to view data that has scrolled off the window Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 30 3 Viewing Status by Door NOTE You can also receive status information by selecting Status from the
181. Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites Forms Purpose PRINTER To log activity to a printer and display ona ROUTINGS console TERMINALS PERMISSION GROUPS To authorize operators to monitor activity PERMISSIONS OPERATORS What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to use the Activity Monitor to view badge operator tour or swipe and show activity and to control what kinds of activities the Activity Monitor will display a Ej ce i 5 Q gt a lt lt Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 28 1 Badge Monitor Badge Monitor The Activity Monitor displays badge activity by default Types of badge activities include the following VALID TRANSACTIONS APB IN APB OUT DEGRADED OPEN OPEN DURESS OPEN SHUNT PASSIVE APB IN PASSIVE APB OUT SWIPE AND SHOW T amp AIN T amp A OUT VALID DOOR LOCKED VALID NO PASSAGE VALID TOGGLE VALID FLOOR A valid read occurred in an Antipassback In reader A valid read occurred in an Antipassback Out reader A read occurred when an 8RP board was offline from the Micro 4 CPU A valid read occurred in a Normal reader or a Keypad reader and the door was opened A valid read occurred in a Keypad reader but was followed by a duress code The door was opened The door was opened as part of an alarm shunting process A badgeholder was granted access in two successive APB IN readers A badgeholder w
182. Port Configuration Port Name Description 6767 Application Normal operation data port between micro and host 6768 Key Port for exchanging DES key information 6868 Reserved Future use port See Appendix C Firewall Configuration 7111 Reserved Future use port See Appendix C Firewall Configuration The following products use these ports Mictool Picture Perfect and M 5PX Network 2 ie r kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 17 Printers Printers Use the Printers form Figure 4 7 to add each printer configured during installation Setup gt To define a printer record 1 Select Devices then Printers 2 Complete the Printers form For a description of each field see The Routings Form on page 4 21 3 Click Save The Printers Form Printers betandromeda paaa aan EE Pres Next po PARALLEL PRINTER Figure 4 7 Printers Form Queue This is the print queue specified when printers were configured during the installation of Picture Perfect or anytime a printer is added Description A description of the printer including type quality location etc as required up to 30 alphanumeric characters Set Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those 4 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup
183. Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem Direct wired Micros No Bi directional TTY None Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem Dial up Micro with Micros Downstream 1 None None Host 1 Cardinal Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem 0 2 Downstream Dial up Callback None Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem None None 1 None Downstream Dial up Callback None Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem Network Micro without Fallback Dial up NetPort None Host 1 None NetP ort None Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem NetPort None Host 1 Cardinal Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem Downstream Dial up Callback None Figure 10 7 Secondary Port NetP ort None 1 None None Primary Port Upstream Downstream Modem NetP ort None 1 None Downstream Dial up Callback None Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem Micro Configuration 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 17 Adding or Change a Micro The Micros Form Use the Micros form to identify the micro s address modem port and upstream and downstream equipment and to define how each micro operates and communicates The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete The list is in the order that t
184. Select one of these to specify the type of history you want Alarm Badge Operator or optional The selection of history type is critical in using the History application as it determines which reports are displayed on the New and Open picklists of the Report menu which Query form appears using the Format menu as well as other screens This is the starting point for using this program The Source Menu There are three selections in the Source menu Select one of these to specify the data source of the history Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 19 5 T 7 o a lt 5 D 5 3 7 The History Form Data Base Diskette Tape The Format Menu The selections in the Format menu let you design a report to your specifications using one of several methods You can also control the page design and include headers and footers using this menu Query NOTE This option displays the Query window Figure 19 6 which is used to designate specific selection criteria for a report This is useful in limiting the search of data to a very narrow scope such as badges used in a specific reader during a certain day or Invalid Floor elevator access attempts For more information on generating reports on floor access see Floor Tracking on page 22 22 The window consists of radio buttons toggle buttons text fields and picklist buttons for various aspects of data you may wish to include in the report When
185. Set Up Example 2 Reader DO Configuration on page 22 18 e Reader DI DO See To Set Up Example 2 in a Reader DI DO Configuration on page 22 19 22 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control 22 i gt To Set Up Example 2 in a Micro DO Configuration 1 In Configuration Type select Micro DO 2 Click the Micro DO Config button to display the following window Refresh Floor Desc Micro lt BLANK Floor Outputs Floor lt BLANK Micro DO Config AE BLANK Floor3 lt BLANK Floor4 lt BLANK Floor5 lt BLANK Flore lt BLANK Floor7 lt BLANK BLANK Figure 22 12 Micro DO Config 3 Click the Micro button and select a micro from the picklist If multiple readers are configured on an elevator micro the first reader controls the elevator 4 For each floor click the appropriate button and select an output from the picklist this type of configuration supports up to 64 floors per micro Click the Refresh Floor Defs button to update the floor labels if changes have been made since the Config window was displayed a p lt o er fe 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 17 Elevator Control Setup gt To Set Up Example 2 Reader DO Configuration 1 In Configuration Type select Reader DO 2 Click the Reader DO Config button to display the following window Reader DO Config Refresh Floor Desc Reader lt BLANK Flo
186. Structured Query Language cccceseseeeeseeeeees 20 1 The SOL POR eepe aie aa a 20 2 The Reports WCRI sacsiseransieecisewtinusietaencenasiin 20 4 The SQL Syntax Menu ssssessssssessssssesessesssssese 20 8 Using a Pre loaded Report ss ssesssessessesesseses0s 20 9 Q Creating a Badge Report siccsinchasimcutasacniancass 20 10 5 SOL Clauses nusa a a n a 20 14 2 Logical Operators sneneareutesiiin ionsar 20 16 z Relational Operators yi siwisessintssnsaaiedesiontandereswisesserstn 20 17 SOL Variables nna a arra a Rai 20 18 Break VariableSiimsnin ianiai 20 19 LINEBREAK enera annaa 20 19 PAGEBREAK aa raa a i a a 20 20 Using Pagebreak lt column number gt within SQL to the X WindoW ccececceesteesteeseeees 20 20 Using Pagebreak lt column number gt within SOL to the Printerni 20 21 Badge Table Values ccciccacteissncstisssconceisvsacieaspiedo tones 20 21 Flags Column Values vaca ntirycendsicosiuauarnstn crys 20 21 Scheduling an SOLAR EpOPt wa sctens suai sivecasareteasees 20 23 SEU p sssanats vienvidssatinvan a e e a ii erena 20 23 The History Report Form sic isa asegtniavss 20 25 21 Two Man Rule and Modified Two Man Rull ccccccceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeenes 21 1 QV CL VICW a A ie 21 1 Prerequisites reanna rore aE a E E Ea 21 1 Occupancy Control ssssessssessssessesessesessessenessesesessessese 21 2 How to set up Occupancy Control cee 21 2 Two Man Rule 2MR sccvsssacciieewsstisrclenusarsernidees 21 4 Modifie
187. W amanen a aa a 14 1 PRELEQUISHES sch hanncdetinadunsmniniaanuanii E 14 1 What You Will Be Dong syecscsccpiicscrrdisczesas dearvennsesiannce 14 1 Issuing a Permanent Badge Four Methods 14 2 Console Reader Method ccccccscccssceesseeeessees 14 2 Manual Method siscci stuvscases cnisiet bt avdaceussanieteiuaaes 14 2 Auto Generate Method ccccccceescecssseeesseeeensees 14 3 Seed Counter Method cccccccscccssscccsseeesseeeesens 14 4 Issuing a Temporary Badge cccccceeseseeseeeeees 14 4 Changing a Badge sai icarseaiean soiree inenvseanparscncivaniasneense 14 5 Changing a Badge Status to Deleted cee 14 6 Removing Badge Records uu cesses cesses 14 7 Badge Removal Command Line Tool 004 14 9 REQUIREINENTS riisi iare isei 14 9 RIP HONS e A A E A 14 9 The Badges FOrmM ssesesssesiesesisisessesesesieresesesessssesese 14 10 viii Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Contents 15 GONG AtOT sississiciececedesisdvasesesaccutatessaacniins 15 1 Oy CIVIC Wart eked aati aia etait 15 1 What You Will Be Doing s sasccccietch scan cesassgouvencivessas 15 1 Creating Master Records asiciSeatdccauionasdioend 15 2 The Generator FOrM eeeeseesseesesseeesreeseeseerseseessssrreessre 15 3 Generating RecordS ss ssssessssessesessesissessesesseses 15 7 16 Schedules and Mode 0 0ce008 16 1 CVERVIOW ieas a aE EE a N a 16 1 O Pf reg isites iinn ni a e T
188. Xdefaults The file is used to control the auto logout on an individual basis This file must be created in an operator s home directory HOME with the resource values set correctly It should be noted that the values found in this file will override the values found in the xidle resource file The following lists the entries from a sample file for an operator who has been given a longer idle time xidle logout True xidle maxIdle 1200 xisle maxWarn 30 D 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 24 Restrictions It should be emphasized that the xidle program detects activity based upon mouse and keyboard events Therefore the following activities may be inadvertently terminated due to the potential for idle time e Monitoring alarms activity e Running reports e Performing backups restores It is recommended that operators who perform these actions either disable auto logout or increase the individual s idle resource value Also the xidle program only supports the capability to log an operator off of an X Terminal It does not support the capability to lock the screen and then prompt the user for a password to gain access to the X Terminal gt Q lt o O D a O Q c D 5 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide D 13 Auto Logout xidle NOTES D 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Using the vi Editor Appendix Overview The vi editor is
189. a a 16 37 The InGroups Events FOrM s s sesesesesesesseseses 16 38 Output Groups Everts snsiasiinceinvasniscictadoctonss 16 41 SELU Penn a a E A ANE A RA 16 41 The OutGroups Events Form ccceeeeeees 16 42 Reportin shian aani n A Aa aiai 16 44 CALSUP iri a eee ae a ERE A ETELA 16 44 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide ix Contents 17 Access Secure Operations 17 1 OVELVICW nike Gara eB eae aad 17 1 PREREQUISITES cini atei esie iia E EE 17 2 What You Will Be Domi gs yeatevsisadoaaspcuseseidedioarsbeattesnsn 17 2 Access Secure OPELallONS s cssscsevssecansdusnsasansaeioessneseds 17 2 SetU Pipan e aaa aitai a a aial 17 2 Sample Access Secure WindOW ccccceeeeee 17 5 18 Backup and Restore 2 c csseeeeeeees 18 1 OvVervileWnnea a a Sieh Wh le eves kote e a shad 18 1 What You Will Be DOU gt scstecisdosneapdivasessge tan dteatoesnie 18 1 Back p Op tons aisisiccscatinesskedsoitnsbedenasscernstaietaaanieatarsiots 18 1 Performing an ATchivessscieBseisthcatnnaevmiae dettarestveriets 18 2 Performing Backups cacssioswuen sania 18 5 Using the Picture Perfect Backup Function 18 5 Using the Command Line Backup Option Cba sass secccatiteatansrasthy testa nesnmsdiaolia 18 7 Scheduling BACKUPS zicscigcaiecyarsncsdearmeseyeaisemncesiwen ses 18 8 Restoring the Database iuuuusaimiakisionsaundas 18 10 Using the Picture Perfect Restore Function 18 10 Using the Command Line Option cbr
190. a does not appear in the Badge Encode Number field of the Badges form Variable data identifies the length of the character string required in the Badge Encode Number field on the Badges form For example Badge ID format 002 7s starts with a three digit facility code and its variable string indicates seven alphanumeric characters therefore its entire character total is 10 Table 4 6 shows other examples 4 24 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i Table 4 6 Badge ID Formats Badge ID Explanation Entire Format Length 10s 10 character string of variable data 10 00 8s 2 character facility code 00 and 10 8 character string of variable data 0340 8s 4 character facility code 0340 and 12 8 character string of variable data 1005 6s 4 character facility code 1005 and 10 6 character string of variable data 4s Keypad only 4 NOTE RECOMMENDED To ensure that the Auto Generate function produces a unique badge ID number the variable portion of the Badge ID format must be at least 10 m digits The system comes with one pre loaded format 10s which is the format for 10 digit badges If additional formats are needed they can be added on the Badge Formats form Figure 4 12 Setup gt To define badge formats 1 Select Access then Badge Formats 2 Complete the Badge Formats form For a description of each field see The Badge Formats Form on page
191. a full screen editor While there are several editors available in a Unix environment vi is a standard editor available on every Unix system Modes The vi editor has 3 modes Command Insert and Ex gt Q lt 9 D a O g 5 e Command When you enter the vi editor you are in Command mode Command mode allows you to move around the document Insert Allows you to insert text e Ex Used for special operations such as saving a file and exiting Changing Modes The following table provides a quick reference to the key strokes required to change from one mode to another Table E 1 Mode Change Key Strokes FROM Key Stroke TO Mode Explanation Mode Command i Insert Allows you to enter text at the cursor Command a Insert Allows you to enter text after the cursor Command 0 Insert Adds a blank line below the current line Command 0 Insert Adds a blank line above the current line Insert ESC Command Allows you to enter command mode Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide E 1 Overview Table E 1 Mode Change Key Strokes FROM Key Stroke TO Mode Explanation Mode Command Ex Allows you to enter an Ex command Command Mode Functions The following tables lists some of the functions available when in Command mode Table E 2 Command Mode Functions Function Key Stroke Insert text in
192. a record you must first locate the one you want This is done by entering your search criteria in the appropriate fields on the form then clicking the Find button If more than one record was found use the Prev and Next buttons to locate the record you want or enter a record number in the record field and press Ente When the desired record is displayed change the appropriate fields and click Save Whether you are adding or changing data you must click Save otherwise the new information will be discarded Using a Mouse A mouse is a hand operated device used to move the pointer or cursor on the screen and select items display windows position windows on the screen size windows and iconify windows The mouse has two or more buttons that you push and a ball that rolls when you move the mouse along a flat surface such as a table or a pad There are several mouse operations 3 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started Table 3 1 Mouse Operations Mouse Term Description Point Move the mouse to position the screen pointer ata certain spot Press Push and hold down a button Release Release a pressed button Click Push and release a button without moving the mouse Drag Move the mouse while pressing a mouse button Double click Click a mouse button twice in rapid succession without moving the mouse P oint and click Move the pointer to a screen object and click t
193. abled Number of Badges _ Single _ Double Toggle _ Yes No Limited Usage _ Enabled _ Disabled Elevator Reader _ Yes No Figure 26 1 Reader Control Portion of Readers Form Figure 26 2 Interval Time Portion of Readers Form The double badge configuration can also be changed by scheduling This is done by setting the Num Of Badges field on the Schedule Reader Events form Figure 26 3 See Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes for details on the Reader Events form Reader Reader Online _ Online _ Offline Num of Badges _ Single _ Double Figure 26 3 Reader Portion of Reader Events Form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 26 3 Double Badge Configuration A change to the definition will be reflected in a micro s local database The only micro affected by any change to a reader s Number of Badges definition is the one which is physically connected to the reader A change in the micro s local database does not affect any on going reader activity In other words changing a reader from double transaction to single transaction while the micro is processing the reader s activity does not affect that process two complete valid transactions are still needed before access may be granted After the two transactions are processed the micro will grant or deny access based on a single transaction A reader s Number of Badges definition is not limited by the reader s physical or logical type For e
194. ace or tab This will cause the specified files to be backed up only when the associated package is backed up For restores DO NOT precede each file or directory name with a package name colon or space Simply supply the file or directory you wish to be restored from the media P Print Current List A Add Item to List 18 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Backup and Restore 18 j E Edit Item on List D Delete Item from List Q Quit and Save File Enter Function P A E D Q p 3 Type the letter p to print the list of files to be restored Result A list similar to the following of the files contained in the restore cfg files will be displayed Current File List cas forms cas lists photo photo photo designs A Ww N Be 4 If these are the files you wish to restore press Q to quit and save the file If you wish to edit the list press A E or D as appropriate When you have completed your edits press Q to quit and save the file Result Your flat files will be restored es o 2 x f xe a A D er e D Recovering the Entire System 1 To recover the entire system perform the Installation procedures For the complete installation procedures for Picture Perfect and the operating system refer to the appropriate Picture Perfect Installation Guide 2 When you reach the Database Restore utility during installation select option 3 R
195. ach form is detailed in this chapter 3 Assign a weekly cycle time to this event Click on Time to activate the day of the week buttons then click the button of each day on which you want this event to occur 4 Type the time that this event should begin on all specified days in the Time box If you do not want this event to happen at the same time on each selected day then you must define additional event schedules for those days that are different and assign them all to the same mode For example if you want lobby doors to lock at 7 PM on weekdays and at 5 PM on weekends two separate events would have to be created 5 Click Save 6 Click New to create another event Start End Events Start end events occur only once during the mode either at mode start or at mode end Start end events are frequently used for Emergency and Holiday modes A mode start event may require a parallel mode end event to undo the change This may not be necessary however since the next normal mode change may accomplish the desired change For example a Fire Mode could be set up using mode start and mode end events When the operator uses the Mode Command form to select Fire 16 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 l Mode all the events associated with this mode will immediately activate such as triggering a continuous siren and unlocking all doors so people can exit or enter the building w
196. acilities and Facility Profiles 5 Facility Set Manager After successfully logging in to Picture Perfect a list of the facilities available for selection based on the operator s facility profiles will display If an operator has access to only one facility it will be automatically enabled at login Facility Set Manager Terminal Three ae ov Q D 7 Figure 5 5 Facility Set Manager How to Change the Active Facility gt To change the active facility set 1 If you want to change the active facility in a session left click on your desktop to access the Clients menu and select Change Active Facility Set The change will not affect forms that are already open CLIENTS New Window change Active Facility Set Calculator Digital Clock Analog Clock Change Password Reload Menu Figure 5 6 Clients Menu Change Active Facility Set 2 Click on a facility to select or deselect it Or click on Select All or Deselect All to select or deselect all of the available facility sets Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 11 Linking Facilities Facility Profiles Permissions and Operators 3 Click Close The operator will have access to the records in the selected facilities as defined in the facility profiles assigned to them Linking Facilities Facility Profiles Permissions and Operators When you launch Picture Perfect 2 0 the system is configured by default with one default facility reco
197. ackup Events or Report Events and assign the appropriate mode to each of them Two types of event scheduling options are available Runtime and Start End e Runtime lets you schedule an event to cycle within a mode and can occur at a particular time on any days of the week e Start End schedules the event to take place only once either at mode start or at mode end Schedules that run on the micros can update the database This is configurable on the Parameters form using the field Schedules Update Database With this feature enabled as long as there is communication with the micro the host will reflect the scheduled state of the device For example if a door is scheduled to unlock at 8 AM the host record will be updated to reflect the change If this feature is disabled the host record will only reflect the host database information Runtime Events Runtime Events are events scheduled to occur in weekly cycles for selected areas readers doors alarms input groups and output groups A runtime event can occur on one or more days per week at the start time that you select Runtime events are frequently used for the normal operating mode Runtime events must be created in pairs so that the entire cycle of events can be completed Therefore you need to create two events for each cycle and make sure both events are assigned to the same mode For example an unlock door at 8 AM event is paired with a lock door a
198. activity in this area indicates a security violation Or to conserve electricity after hours schedule the input group for hallway motion detectors to trigger lights to turn on for a duration to provide lighting only when required Output Groups If scheduling outputs they must reside on the same micro An input group event can change the output groups associated with an input group Output groups are position sensitive and follow the same scheduling rules as categories on the Area Events form See Area Events on page 16 14 It is possible to overwrite an existing output group depending on which output group slot is changed so familiarize yourself with the existing output groups associated with the input group being changed e To have security lights turn on when someone opens an exterior door at night using a badge or using force schedule an input group event to occur at sundown Select the output group that operates the security lights When an exterior door opens this output group triggers the outdoor security lights When you add this new output group make sure you don t overwrite something such as the existing door unlock output group e To have an alarm sound when someone uses an invalid badge between the hours of 5 PM and 8 AM schedule an input group event Select the output group that operates a siren When the reader detects an invalid badge the reader s Invalid Input Group activates the associated o
199. ad Alarm Response Status requests on badges show whether or not a badge is authorized for keypad response Keypad response authorization is independent of badge status such as permanent contractor etc but it must be an active badge See The Badges Form on page 14 10 of Chapter 14 Badges 23 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Keypad Alarm Response 23 i Control Card Trace _ Enabled Disabled Keypad Response _ Enabled Disabled Download Upon Save _ Yes C No Figure 23 4 Keypad Alarm Response Field on Badges Form Disabling Keypad Alarm Response Keypad Alarm Response can be disabled in the following ways AA MO N lt 38 5a o gt ny 3 e Disable Keypad Alarm Response on the Devices Doors form This prevents Keypad Alarm Response for both types of access violations on that door e The following situations inhibit an access violation completely The violation is not reported to the host and Keypad Alarm Response does not function e Access Violation input group not configured e Access Violation input group disabled e Access Violation input group not associated with an alarm e Disabled alarm associated with the Access Violation input group Disabling or enabling Keypad Alarm Response does not affect an active access violation Therefore enabling Keypad Alarm Response while a door is forced open does not change the fact that the violation rese
200. age 20 16 and Relational Operators on page 20 17 for information on describing relations between two values SELECT Use the SELECT clause to find data from selected columns in a table The report retrieves columns of data and lists the data under each column heading in the report The sequence of column names in the SELECT clause determines the sequence of column headings on the report title bar FROM Use the FROM clause to name the tables where the selected data is located You can include join multiple database tables For example the following unfinished SQL select statement retrieves data from the category badge and department tables Notice that each column name in the SELECT clause has a table indicator If there is more than one table identify each column name with the table name since identical column names that belong to different tables cause an ambiguous error SELECT badge last name category description department description FROM badge department category The above SQL statement is unfinished because it requires a WHERE clause The WHERE clause is discussed next 20 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 i NOTE When selecting columns with the same name from multiple tables make sure to specify the display label For example m SELECT reader description reader area description area FROM reader area WHERE Use the WHERE clause to set conditions on the select st
201. age Support 32 1 CVELVICW eeann ae e a TE N i 32 1 TEVINITRA TIONS ists arema a a a 32 1 PHYS Earl ALOT EEA E E E ce erniles 32 2 Language Translation s esssesessssssesessseeresesesrssssesese 32 5 TEC ALE AE E E E E EN E E A 32 6 Preparing for Translation ssssesssessesseeresesesee 32 7 Translating Text scccigicactitwenddiiecdsnncneamagieiiens 32 8 Installing Translations as ikssiccis eat ceatinsedasteieess 32 12 DUA eno i ied ciao tains e Ra 32 12 ildmeaning ieena ti 32 12 pddD risna E lice R A 32 13 avlaNgeiiisesieeitininirini iniii 32 13 Translation Installation Example 000 32 13 Modifying TranslationS sss sesessesesessesesesesessssesese 32 14 Selecting An Operator Language cccceeeees 32 14 Selecting The Primary Language 32 15 Selecting Login Screen Language cccceeeeees 32 15 Error and Warning Messages cccceeeseeeeees 32 16 Customizing Badge and Department Screens 32 16 33 In Case of ProblemMS c sccccseeeeeees 33 1 OVELVICW nnna e a a a a 33 1 What You Will Be Does sssigeussisteclierestteiets sacs 33 1 CONVENEIONS TAE EEES EA 33 2 Using the CMENU Utility s snssesssessesessessesesssseseesesees 33 2 Diagnostics Subsystem ss ssssessessssesseseeresseressesssses 33 2 Process Control Diagnostics cccceceeeseneeees 33 3 Check a a detente nae anata 33 13 a a a OR aa a a E 33 14 Cleiren a A T NAR 33 16 WatehLog
202. ages are filtered by facility e Although the following forms do not have a Facility field access to them is governed by Facility Profiles Parameters Backup Restore Alarm Color Keys History Sql A default facility is created at installation time Global and is assigned to the default facility profile Global Facility Profile If an existing Picture Perfect system is being upgraded all existing database records will be assigned to this facility unless they are already associated with a facility 5 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Facilities and Facility Profiles 5 The Facility Form Use the Facility form to create and delete facility records Record of 3 Found Prev Next Description Ecem a a ov Q D 7 Figure 5 2 Facility Form Description Enter a text description that defines a logical grouping such as a group of buildings a building a floor in a building or a room ona particular floor in a building How to Add or Delete a Facility gt To add a facility In addition to the default facility Global which is created at installation time other facilities may be created to allow an operator access to only those records in a particular facility 1 Select Access then Facility 2 Inthe Description field enter a unique text description to decribe the facility For example Headquarters 3 Click Save gt To delete a facility Before deleti
203. ails on this feature Refer to Figure 4 14 for the top middle portion of the Parameters form EJ D 02 D D kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 29 Parameters C C C C Cc c amp C Figure 4 14 Parameters Form Top Middle Display Flags These radio buttons are used to display or hide the Auto Generate button on the Badges form If your system uses magnetic stripe readers and you want to use this method to issue badges select the option to display the Auto Generate button Otherwise select the option to hide this button See Position for Auto Generate on page 4 32 Date Format Specify the date format of Month MM Day DD and Year YY or YYYY that the system will use Click a radio button to select one system date format For example the date January 02 2002 can display in any one of the following formats MMDDYY 010202 MM DD YY 01 02 02 MM DD YYYY 01 02 2002 DD MM YY 02 01 02 DD MM YYYY 02 01 2002 YYYYMMDD 20020102 YYYY MM DD 2002 01 02 4 30 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i YYMMDD 020102 YY MM DD 02 01 02 Time Format Specify the way the hour minutes and seconds appear in the time of day HH MM SS or HHMMSS Time displays in military 24 hour format Click a radio button to select the system time format For example thirty minutes and 20 seconds after 5 PM can display two different ways 17 30 20 173
204. al states are Set Reset and Tamper The processing states are Active Bumped Notified Remote Pending and Completed and are defined as follows Active Alarms that are not yet acknowledged Bumped Alarms received by the alarm monitor a specific terminal that are not acknowledged in a defined amount of time and are sent to another terminal defined by the user Notified Used by NAN Network Alarm Notification alarms that are received by the alarm monitor on a subhost but are not acknowledged in a 8 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 8 defined amount of time and are forwarded through a pop up login screen to a pre defined terminal Remote Used by RAN Remote Alarm Notification alarms that are received by the alarm monitor but are not acknowledged in a defined amount of time and are forwarded to a configured remote non Picture Perfect system Pending Alarms that are acknowledged but not removed Completed Alarms that are removed still displayed on the monitor waiting for a physical reset Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 8 13 o Q gt i 3 7 gt s 3 gt o an lt g lt D o N Q 7 Alarm Color Processing State NOTES 8 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Input and Output Groups Chapter 9 Overview The Picture Perfect system monitors digita
205. ally including a wiring 2 address Delay Time a 3 a Type the number of seconds an input must be true On State or Change State before the input group is true This delay helps avoid false input detections NOTE The Off To On Delay Time and On To Off Delay Time set on the Inputs form overrides the Delay Time set on the Ingroups form ri Set Delay Time to zero for any input group assigned to an exit pushbutton Boolean Type Boolean refers to an any or an all condition If the specified any or all condition occurs an input group will change its state In the any scenario an input group will change its state if any of its inputs are activated This one is very flexible In the all scenario an Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 9 5 Input Groups NOTE input group will change its state only if all of its inputs are active at the same time This one is very rigid For example a building contains three smoke detectors one on each floor and all three of these inputs go to one Fire Emergency input group A fire breaks out on the ground floor If this input group is set up with the any condition the input group will change state and activate the alarm as soon as the first floor s smoke detector is activated If this input group is set up with the all condition the input group will change state and activate the alarm only after all three smoke detectors have been activated This input group will activate a
206. alog 0 ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeee 31 8 Utilities MOM ccccceesseceeeessceeereteeneeeeeteeneneeeteneneees 33 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Xxi List of Figures Figure 33 2 Figure 33 3 Figure 33 4 Figure 33 5 Figure 33 6 Figure 33 7 Figure 33 8 Figure 33 9 Figure 33 10 Figure 33 11 Figure 33 12 Figure 33 13 Figure 33 14 Figure 33 15 Figure D 1 Figure D 2 Figure H 1 Figure H 2 Figure H 3 Figure H 4 Figure H 5 Figure H 6 Figure H 7 Figure H 8 Figure H 9 Figure H 10 Figure H 11 Diagnostics Subsystem Menu ceeeeeeeeenees 33 3 Dump PC Main Utilities Menu eeeee 33 4 Queues Memory Communications Screen 33 4 Alarms Flags Devices Counts c ccee 33 7 Micro Mapiaeeteit ee ek ate eee le Adee 33 8 NY el es C 0 s e aae eiee a aa e aaea 33 10 Port Records reai neee aaa a da ddatebet ieee 33 12 Host RECordS ili ec liek sat ei aana da aa 33 13 Check Current Diagnostic Levels 33 13 Set Diagnostic Levels Menu 33 14 Clear Diagnostic Levels Menu ceeeeeeeeees 33 17 Micro Utilities Menu ccceeeeeeeeeeeeettreaeees 33 17 Status Information From Micros Menu 33 18 Printer Utilities Menu cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 33 21 File System Monitor Notification Message D 4 Database System Monitor Notification Message D 6 S
207. an rule radio buttons are grayed out and not selectable Picture Perfect updates the occupancy count when a valid entry or exit to from the area occurs The default setting for Occupancy Counting is disabled Occupancy Count The value in this field shows the current occupancy count for the area Reset This button is enabled only if the operator has Occupancy Control permission granted and occupancy counting has been enabled It allows the occupancy count for an area to be reset to zero Two Man Rule Control These radio buttons are enabled only if the operator has Occupancy Control permission granted and Occupancy Counting has been enabled Two man rule 2MR or modified two man rule M2MR can only be enabled if the Occupancy Count is zero If the operator violates this rule an error message will appear in the status line see Figure 3 4 Example of a Form on page 3 6 The record cannot be saved unless the count is reset to zero or two man rule mode is set to Disabled Disabled Select this radio button to deactivate two man rule mode if it is currently enabled Standard Select this radio button to activate the standard two man rule mode This ensures that at least two badge holders occupy a given controlled space Modified with Door Control Select this radio button to activate the modified two man rule mode which restricts access to a controlled area based on the MZ2MR Category Type The first two badge holders to enter a contr
208. and then click Remove Click either Ok or Apply to save your changes 7 Optional select up to eight sort criteria from the Columns picklist Format Columns First highlight a selection in the All Columns picklist then click Sort Ascending or Sort Descending and your sort criterion appears in the Sort window Specify ascending or descending order for each sort criterion that you select For example you can sort by descending date and time and by ascending last name Click either Ok or Apply to save your sort criteria A report Summary is available on reports that include one or more sort fields 8 Select the Page function from the Format menu type header footer lines in three available page positions left center and right and select to show or hide summary and detail lines To create a blank line between the headers and the detail lines position the text cursor at the end of the last line and press Enter The text cursor appears on the next line Click either Ok or Apply to save your page format 9 Optional Select the Summary function from the Format menu select one or more summary fields from an option menu which includes all selected sort fields and then define summary and detail line indentions Data may appear as nested summaries You can select variables for summary lines NOTE Select the Variables function Format menu to apply a variable to a summary line First position the cursor on the summary line and then select
209. and or second component transaction may enter an alarm response code See Chapter 26 Double Badge Transaction Keypad response only affects an active access violation on a door to which the reader is associated It cannot affect any other door The following situations must exist for the keypad response to be valid e The door must be closed before the keypad response e The badge must be authorized for keypad response e The entire reader transaction must be granted access For example an invalid PIN or a category mismatch will invalidate the keypad response Valid keypad alarm response does not unlock the door Keypad alarm response is essentially an acknowledgment that the door is secure so it makes no sense to unlock the door for the keypad response Since the door does not open keypad response is independent from antipassback This means that keypad response cannot fail due to the badge s antipassback status It also means that keypad response cannot change the badge s antipassback status As with all other reader activity keypad response is reported in the host s activity monitor and or badge history The transaction explicitly reports that it is keypad response When keypad response is valid a report is made that the transaction was valid but did not gain access Invalid 23 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Keypad Alarm Response 23 keypad responses report the reason for failure In addition to
210. anslated Only T is removed the records must always end with a bar An example of a meaning dat synonym definition is 1 2 3 4 33 2 Alarm Monitors T Only the words Alarm Monitors can be changed and the translation must not exceed 60 alphanumeric characters The french translation is 33 2 Moniteur d alarmes 32 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide National Language Support 32 l Help information aids operators in understanding the system Help Information Help information for a particular language is stored in files located in cas help LOCALE where LOCALE is the language s locale identifier The help files are in HTML format and cannot be translated Default Database Text Default Database Text is text contained in records within the minimum database The default database text for a particular language is stored in files named base ddb datand tour ddb dat locatedin cas nls srce LOCALE where LOCALE is the language s locale identifier The file base_ddb dat contains default database text for the Base package and will be present on all installations The file tour_ddb dat contains default database text for the Tour package and will only be present when the Tour package is installed 92 c Ke xo fe gt z at O gt eo c fet Each line in the files defines text for a minimum database record The lines are divided into six to seven fields sep
211. arated by bars Only the fifth and sixth fields are of interest to translators The fifth field contains the actual text which is translated The sixth field contains the maximum number of alphanumeric characters that the fifth field may contain Only the fifth field can be changed changing the first through fourth fields will corrupt the database The seventh field is optional When present it will always contain a capital T Its presence indicates that the field needs translation The seventh field should be removed when the record is translated Only T is removed the records must always end with a bar An example of a default database text file line is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 alarm id 1 description MICRO PLACED OFFLINE 30 T The only portion of the line that can be changed are the words MICRO PLACED OFFLINE and the change must not exceed 30 alphanumeric characters A Spanish translation is alarm id 1 description MICRO FUERA DE LINEA 30 Catalogs Catalogs contain all text that is not database synonyms help information or default database text Catalog text for a particular language is defined in six catalog source files located in cas nls src LOCALE where LOCALE is the language s locale identifier Each catalog source file holds a different type of catalog text e pp phr src contains phrases Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 32 9 Language Translation pp_err src contains error messages
212. art of the activity message above Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 28 7 Swipe and Show Monitor Indicates badge activity SWIPE AND SHOW Indicates a Swipe and Show transaction 01 28 93 09 10 Date and time the badge was read EMP 4 The badgeholder s employee ID A Smith The badgeholder s initials and last name RDR 1 1 009 2E LOBBY DOOR 2 1 The description of the reader which read this badge AREA BLD 1 2 3 LOBBIES The description of the area where the reader is located gt To enable and use the Auto Image Replace option 1 Change tothe cas db text directory by typing cd cas db text 2 Edit the file auto_image replace cfg located in the directory changing the value of the two configuration values in the file The values should be set according to the user s requirements WantPhotoReplaced Indicates whether or not you want to use the auto image replacement feature 0 The default case Indicates that you do NOT want to use the feature 1 Indicates that you DO want to use the auto image replacement feature MinMilliSecsImageDisplay Indicates the minimum delay period for the image to display in milli seconds when the image is being piped into the showimage program from stdin When used with auto image replacement on Swipe and Show 500 milli seconds is recommended to ensure the image is seen before the next one replaces it in a high badging rate scenario This setting may
213. as granted access in two successive APB OUT readers A valid read occurred on a reader configured for Swipe and Show This will be followed by another valid transaction indicating how the transaction ended A valid read occurred in a Time amp Attendance In reader A valid read occurred in a Time amp Attendance Out reader In a Double Badge reader the first badge read was valid but will not open the door until the second is validated A valid read occurred but the door was not opened A valid read occurred in a Toggle reader which reversed the current state of the Input Group A valid floor number was selected with Elevator Reader DI DO configuration Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Monitoring Activity 2 INVALID TRANSACTIONS AREA OFFLINE The area was selected as offline BADGE DELETED A deleted badge was used in a reader BADGE EXPIRED An expired badge was used in a reader BADGE LOST A lost badge was used in a reader BADGE SUSPENDED A suspended badge was used in a reader BADGE UNKNOWN An unknown badge was used in a reader INVALID APB IN An invalid read occurred in an APB IN reader INVALID APB OUT An invalid read occurred in an APB OUT reader INVALID CODE The number entered was not a valid code for a Shunt or Keypad reader INVALID KR BDG The badge used in a Keypad reader was not a keypad response badge INVALID PIN The pin entered at the Keypad reader was invalid INVALID SHUNT The shu
214. as the reader for that door hf 2 Do not assign a door DI to an input group Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 12 13 Inputs NOTE f Input Input Point Toggle this button On to configure this input as a standard input point Elevator Point Toggle this button On to configure this input as an elevator input For more information see Chapter 22 Elevator Control Route Definition Displays the selected route definition for this input This route definition is used for Activity Monitor routing Click the Route Definition button to display the Route Definition picklist Select the desired route definition then click Close If this field is left blank this input s activity will be routed to all terminals If an input group is unselected from an input and a new input group is assigned to the input the micro has to be reset Facility Click Facility to display the facilities picklist By default the input record will be assigned the same facility as the micro to which the input is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign an input s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles 12 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Inputs and Outputs 12 Inp
215. ated by Areas AREA INPUT GROUP SELECT INPUT GROUP ALARM UNKNOWN BADGE UNKNOWN BADGE SUSPENDED BADGE SUSPENDED BADGE DURESS ALARM DURESS ALARM Figure H 10 Alarms Initiated by Areas Alarms Initiated by Doors INPUT GROUP SELECT INPUT GROUP ALARM DOOR HELD OPEN DOOR HELD OPEN DOOR HELD OPEN DOOR FORCED OPEN DOOR FORCED OPEN DOOR FORCED OPEN PRE ALARM PRE ALARM PRE ALARM Figure H 11 Alarms Initiated by Doors Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide H 7 Alarms Initiated by Doors H 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Glossary Access The ability to enter or pass through such as to enter a building by going through a door See Access Control Access Control A security system that controls an individual s ability to enter an area building parking lot room Typically readers protect doors or gates Badges used in the readers permit or deny access based on a person s authorization ACK Acknowledgment See ACK Packet ACK Packet A message sent between computers to acknowledge that the preceding message was received correctly Active Window The window with the input focus in which what you type appears Only one window is active at a time AIX Advanced Interactive Executive the UNIX based operating system developed by IBM used for Picture Perfect Alarm Notification Message An alarm alert message that displays on the Alarm Notification Window on Picture Perfect X Terminals when an alarm oc
216. ategories Permission Group assigned to the operator Cannot log on to Picture Perfect Verify that you typed your Logon ID correctly Verify that you typed your password correctly Verify that the operator table has only one entry for your Login ID Login ID and Password are case sensitive Micro is not working If the micro was newly configured restart Picture Perfect Immediately run logtail to trace to the log file Check the log file to See if the line is set up properly Verify micro communication using the CMENU utility Verify host to micro communications Verify the power to the micro Verify with micro indicators that the micro is functioning See the Micro 4 P and or Micro 5 Manual Request Status from the micro Watch the Activity Monitor for transaction messages Alarms An alarm condition is occurring but the alarm is not being reported in the Alarm Monitor Verify that an alarm is assigned to the input group for the input point that detects the condition Verify that the alarm is routed to the Monitor Verify that alarm messages are enabled Verify that the terminal is in the terminal table Changes to the terminal may require TPS restart or system database reset Reader A reader works but the associated exit pushbutton does not work Verify that the Exit DI Input is assigned to the same input group as the reader Verify that the input grou
217. atement so that the query finds only selected not all rows in a table The WHERE clause describes acceptable values for one or more columns Use relational operators after the WHERE keyword followed by search conditions or descriptions of the rows you want to find See Relational Operators on page 20 17 2 n A O xo 5 re 2 When your search conditions include a column name a relational operator and a value enclose character values in quotation marks For example the following SQL select statement retrieves reader descriptions from the reader table that match only the Cafeteria Reader description SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description Cafeteria Reader ORDER BY Use the ORDER BY clause to sort the ROWS FOUND data records returned The report can sort by any column name however it is faster to order by columns that are indexed such as last_name and description If the SQL statement does not specify the sorting order Informix Sql creates an index in ascending order that is A to Z for character fields low to high for number and money fields from earlier to later in time and date fields and from smallest time span to largest time span for interval fields For example the following SQL select statement retrieves data from the reader table that matches all reader descriptions which appear in ascending alphabetical order SELECT description FROM reader ORDER BY description L
218. ations If the number of digits in the BID does not match the BID format selected a mismatch will occur and the record will not be saved If the BID matches then the field will be updated and the record saved Auto Generate s peg Clicking the Auto Generate button generates a badge encode number automatically Prerequisites 1 The Display Auto Generate radio button in the Display Flags field of the Parameters form must be set to On 2 a number must be entered in the Position For Auto generate box on the Parameters form and 3 user information must be entered in the corresponding user field on the Badges form See Auto Generate Method on page 14 3 Department Click the Department button to display the Departments picklist Select the desired department for this badgeholder then click Close Personnel Type Click the Personnel Type button to display the Personnel Types picklist Select the desired type then click Close Badge Encode Format Click the Badge Encode Format button to display the Badge Encode Format window Figure 14 6 Select the desired format then click Close This is not necessary unless the system has more than one badge encode format NOTE When the Seed Counter feature and the Copy to BID option are enabled The Badge Encode Format selection button can be used when performing 7 a search by selecting a format and then clicking Find Once the search results are returned the button is disa
219. ator can type in information Input Group A group of one or more digital inputs or logical inputs that can cause an alarm and or trigger output groups when any or all inputs in the group are detected as true Insertion Point A point marked by a cursor where the text that you enter will appear GL 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Glossary Keyboard The device that the operator uses to interact with the system by typing inputs or responses Keypad Override Code See Shunt LAN A Local Area Network X Terminals are connected to the host computer using an Ethernet or Token ring LAN Linux Linux often pronounced LIH nuhks with a short i is a Unix like operating system that was designed to provide personal computer users a free or very low cost operating system comparable to traditional and usually more expensive UNIX systems Linux has a reputation as a very efficient and fast performing system Linux is a remarkably complete operating system including a graphical user interface an X Window System TCP IP the Emacs editor and other components usually found in a comprehensive UNIX system Linux is publicly open and extendible by contributors Because it conforms to the Portable Operating System Interface standard user and programming interfaces developers can write programs that can be ported to other operating systems List Box A scrollable list of options from which to select Also called a picklis
220. ators should not have access to the operating system PPSQL Set the PPSQL toggle button On to have the ability to create new SQL reports or modify existing ones If this button is set to Off the operator will only be able to view pre defined SQL reports Permission Groups Category Permission Group Click Category Permission Group to display the Perm Group picklist Select the permission groups that designate categories this operator permission is allowed to assign to areas and badges then click Ok You can select up to 20 Category permission groups or All Groups Allowed Area Permission Group Click Area Permission Group to display the Perm Group picklist Select the permission groups that designate areas for which this operator permission is allowed to assign readers and doors then click Ok You can select up to 20 Area permission groups or All Groups Allowed 6 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Permissions and Operators 6 l Report Permission Group If enforcement of report permissions is enabled the Report permission group button is available Click this button to display the Perm Group picklist Select the permission groups that designate reports this operator permission is allowed to access then click Ok You can select up to five Report permission groups The assigned Area permission groups and Category permission groups restrict an operator s badge issue functions For example in Figure 6 4 the
221. atus such as the flags set on a micro Format Diskette Formats a diskette Tail Current Log Displays the last ten transactions logged in the system log and continues to scroll new entries as they are logged to the file Archive Dates Displays the number of records that have rolled over from the history files badge operator and alarm into the temporary files The earliest and latest dates and times of each are also displayed History Dates Displays the number of records in each history table badge operator and alarm along with the earliest and latest dates and times of each current history table Using the Clients Menu Click the left mouse button on the root window the background area of the screen to display the Client menu Drag and release the pointer on the selected function New Window Opens a system window if your operator permission allows it Change Active Facility Set Displays the Facility Set Manager from which you may change or select facilities for the session Calculator Displays the calculator Digital Clock Displays the digital clock On an X Terminal use Alt F4 to close the clock Analog Clock Displays the analog clock On an X Terminal use Alt F4 to close the clock 3 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started 3 i Displays the Password form used to change your password Change Password NOTE Operators without System Administration per
222. badge swipes on OUT reader Two APB T amp A OUT occupancy count when occupancy count is two within decremented by two to zero specified reader interval time door IS opened Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader NO Transaction when occupancy count is two but second Swipe is not within specified reader interval time pue ajny ue OML fo 2 D a lo z D 5 3 D Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 21 17 How to Set Up a Modified Two Man Rule M2MR Controlled Space without Door Control NOTES 21 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control Chapter 22 Overview Elevator Control allows you to control access to floors serviced by an elevator This feature works only with the Micro 5 Micro MPX 2000 and Micro MPXN2000 microcontrollers It allows the micro to control multiple elevator readers DI s and DO s This chapter shows how to implement the Elevator Control feature using any one of the following methods 1 Elevator Micro DO Configuration 2 Elevator Reader DO Configuration 3 Elevator Reader DI DO Configuration System Configuration Standards e Elevator Control is a part of the BASE Picture Perfect software package e Elevator Control is implemented on Micro 5 Micro MPX 2000 or Micro MPXN2000 configurations only e A maximum of 64 floors can be serviced by one elevator e 128 separate user configurable elevator categories are support
223. ble dial out prefix assigned to the micro For details about the events that may initiate micro to host and host to micro calls see Example of Direct Communication Bi directional Micros on page 10 4 4 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i NOTE Each time a micro makes a call it chooses a different number from this list which reduces competition between micros trying to call the host at the same number F The host can also download the micro s local badge database which reduces the number of micro to host calls required for learning a badge The maximum connect time is one hour on an initial reset Setup gt To add a modem to the host machine 1 Select Devices then Modems 2 Complete the Modems form For details on each field see The Modems Form below To determine the required operating parameters for a modem refer to the user manual published by the manufacturer or associated documentation provided by GE Interlogix NOTE There are completed Modems forms for the Hayes 1200 2400 and 9600 r modems Cardinal 28 8 V 34 modem and STAR Comm 144F 1 modem supplied 3 Click Save The Modems Form The Modems form supports dynamic configuration This means that you can configure modems without having to restart the Picture Perfect system Refer to Figure 4 2 and Figure 4 3 for the Modems form The following is a list of fields that may require additional information fo
224. bled e When creating a new record no matter what format you select when the record is saved the Seed Counter defined format will be used and the field will be grayed out Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 15 The Badges Form Badge Encode Format 10 Digi 12 Digi Filter Refresh Cancel Help Figure 14 6 Badge Encode Format Window Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Badge Status Select one of the four badge status descriptions There is one type of Valid badge status Active and three types of Invalid badge statuses Suspended Lost Deleted You should update the badge status as needed For example if a valid badge is lost this status change should be indicated in the Badge Status box Then if the lost badge is later tried in a reader the system will deny access and should generate a lost badge alarm 14 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 i Refer to Figure 14 7 for the top right hand portion of the Badges form Control Card Trace _ Enabled _ Disabled Keypad Response _ Enabled _ Disabled Download Upon Save _ Yes _ No Temporary Badge _ Yes _ No sobpeg Limited Ba
225. bueyy V D D O 9 lt m o 3 I O a 2 Z D D Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide A 1 Changing the Host Name Changing the Host Name 1 Log in to the console as root 2 Make sure Picture Perfect is not running cas bin profile 3 Run the program to change the host name and or IP address by typing at the prompt chhostname The following shows an example of how to change the host name on a subhost in a Picture Perfect Network System All text in italics represents text that was typed in chhostname chhostname Version 1 2 Starting up informix OK This is a STANDALONE system Host Name triton IP Address 192 9 200 70 Network Interface en0 Enter new host name triton tritonhost Enter new IP address 192 9 200 70 Are these values correct y n n y Changing triton to tritonhost IP address is unchanged Updating my cas db etc onconfig Updating my cas db eh sqlhosts Updating my etc hosts Upating my eh services 4 Reboot the system 5 Ifthe machine is part of a Picture Perfect enterprise system or a Picture Perfect redundant system then all of the other machines in the Picture Perfect system will have to be rebooted A 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Files and Database Tables The chhostname program affects the following files and database tables Unless otherwise specified files are common to both
226. buttons are automatically toggled Off and the column is unavailable If Update or Insert is toggled On the Field Permission Update column will remain activated Field Permission This section is used to set up the field level permissions for the Badges and or Doors forms This window becomes active with data when either Badges or Doors has been selected from the Menu Form section The data in the Field Permission window is shown in three columns Field View and Update This window should be used to set the field level permissions for the selected form by setting the toggle buttons to On or Off in the View and Update columns Field This column contains the field description of each of the fields that can be toggled The description labels will appear unavailable or grayed out if neither the Field Permission View or Update columns are activated These can be activated through the Record Permission toggle buttons See Form Permission on page 5 7 View This column contains the toggle buttons that determine if the field is allowed to be viewed or not from the selected Badges or Doors form The Record Permission View button must be toggled On for this column to be active Toggling a button Off in this column will automatically toggle Off the associated Update button next to it if it is On 5 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide NOTE F Facilities and Facility Profiles 5 l Update This column contains t
227. c alarm instruction such as FORCED DOOR SEND SECURITY GUARD and a response message such as GUARD DISPATCHED Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 8 3 Alarm Responses Alarm Responses Use the Responses form Figure 8 2 to write alarm responses that the operator can select when responding to an alarm The system allows the operator to enter multiple responses to each alarm Create at least one response message that is appropriate for all alarms For example ALARM ACKNOWLEDGED Setup gt To create alarm responses 1 Select Messages then Responses 2 Click New 3 Complete the Responses form For a description of each field see The Responses Form on page 8 4 4 Click Save 5 Click New to create another alarm response The Responses Form Responses bctandromeda gga o 2 z Pev nea all OK Figure 8 2 Responses Form Alarm Response Type an alarm response for the operator to use up to 60 alphanumeric characters These alarm responses appear in a picklist that is used 8 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 8 when the operator responds to an alarm When the operator s
228. cale identifiers defined by the vendor supplied operating system The supported locales and their identifiers are defined in the following table Table 32 1 Language Locale Names Language Description Locale Name AA Arabic Area ar_AA English in United States en_US French in France fr_FR Spanish in Spain es_ ES Danish in Denmark da_DK German in Switzerland de_CH German in Germany de_DE English in Great Britain en_GB Finnish in Finland fi_F French in Belgium fr_BE French in Canada fr CA French in Switzerland fr CH 32 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide National Language Support 32 i Table 32 1 Language Locale Names Continued Language Description Locale Name Icelandic in Iceland is_IS Italian in Italy it_IT Dutch in Belgium nl_BE Dutch in Netherlands ni NL Norwegian in Norway no_NO j Portuguese in Brazil pt_BR i Portuguese in Portugal pt PT A Swedish in Sweden sv_SE 5 Hebrew in Israel iw_IL if Korean in Korea ko_KR NOTE Remember to use the proper locale name for the operating system installed at your site F Preparing for Translation Each language stores its text in unique subdirectories under cas n1s src and cas help The subdirectory names are the same as the language s locale identifier For example in an AIX environment English text is in cas nls src en USand cas help en_US
229. ccounting Computer Rm 08 00 17 00 Example 2 If the badgeholder is a contractor required to clean the building from 5 PM to midnight but required to clean the Computer Room and other high security places only from 5 PM to 6 PM assign the following two categories to the badge General Areas Cleaning 17 00 23 59 High Security Cleaning 17 00 18 00 The names should be descriptive of the area for which access is to be given the lock or key it represents For example if you plan to schedule areas to change categories at various times during the day use a category name that indicates when the category is valid for the area Use any descriptive name for a category It may be easier to use a name that indicates the kinds of locks and keys the category represents For example BLDG 4 High Security is more meaningful than 1234 3 Here are some examples of categories and how they may be used Exterior Access 00000005 Used for all areas that control exterior access and the majority of badgeholders who use the outer doors Bldg 1 Lobbies 7x24 Used for lobby access at a specific building seven days a week 24 hours a day 13 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 Bldg 1 Lobbies 07 00 19 00 M F Used for the same building but scheduled to be valid on that area only from 07 00 to 19 00 Monday through Friday In this case the description i
230. ce the runtime events in a single mode 16 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 allow you to set different operating characteristics for all days of the week and all times of the day Emergency Modes Create Emergency modes to handle situations such as fires accidents or other work disruptions Define these modes on the Mode Creation form using descriptions such as Emergency and Fire Emergency modes are usually activated by the operator using Mode Command and typically use start end events Remember that most mode start events require parallel mode end events Unless there are events that need to cycle during the emergency mode you do not need to set up runtime events Table 16 1 and Table 16 2 give examples of start end events that you might set up for emergencies such as a security alert Restricted Mode or a fire Fire Mode Table 16 1 Example of Restricted Mode Settings Event Form Schedule Start Limited Access Area Events At Mode Start Removes all categories from an area and assigns one category that permits access to selected badgeholders only End Limited Access Area Events At Mode End Lock Exterior Doors Door Events AtMode Start Keypad Lobby Reader Reader Events AtMode Start Activates the keypad on the lobby reader to require badgeholders to entera PIN as wellas a badge Normal Lobby Reader ReaderEvents AtMode End O
231. ch as hallways Held Open Sensing Detected Ignored You can set up area events to ignore doors that are held open For example lobby doors or common interior doors such as hallways that are held open in an area during peak business hours Forced Open Monitoring Detected Ignored You can set up area events to ignore doors that are forced open in an area For example to keep a loading dock door open indefinitely during business hours without an alarm occurring 16 24 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 l Reader Events If you want to change the characteristics of a single reader rather than a group of readers in an area use a reader event instead of an area event Use the Reader Events form Figure 16 12 to define reader events for each mode Defining an event requires you to select a mode set the time of the event select a reader and specify one or more changes to the reader NOTE Do not set up the Reader Events form to match the fields on the Reader form Fields that do not need to be scheduled should not be selected that is if the reader is 7 already online do not select Online on the Reader Event schedule Setup gt To create a reader event 1 Select Schedule then Reader Events 2 Enter a description for this event 3 Set the time for this event to occur either by selecting days of the week and typing a time or by selecting At Mode Start or At Mode End 4 Click th
232. ck Ok The View window will display the new information Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 11 Using Function Buttons select Columns to view EOIN Ins Instructions Cancel Help Figure 3 8 Columns Picklist To control the order in which the information on the View window is sorted click the Sort button This will display the Sort window Figure 3 9 which includes a picklist of columns Select the one column you want to sort by click a radio button to specify whether it should be in Ascending or Descending order then click Ok The View window will display the re organized information lt t Columns to sort by Priority Routing Instruction Figure 3 9 Sort Window Search Used to locate a certain record within a window of listed data 3 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started 3 i gt To search for a record 1 Click the Search button to display the Search window Figure 3 10 which includes a picklist of columns 2 Select the one column you want to search by such as Last Name type search text a full or partial name such as Peterson or Pet in the text box 3 Click Ok The system will locate the first record meeting this description and position it at the top of the data window Select Columns to search User Name Employee ID Login Id Permission Country Facility Enter search text e iy y gt fo w
233. cognizes the Hayes SmartModem 9600 baud or a 100 Hayes SmartModem compatible modem Only compatible modem types can establish a connection The Micro 5 P supports 2400 baud only and the Micro 5 PX supports 9600 baud only A dial up micro uses standard modem communications and standard telephone lines to dial up and respond to the host Each dial up micro has a dedicated phone line and a modem for communication with the host The modem connects using RS 232 cable at the micro s host port RS 232 serial port Set the micro switches for modem type to Hayes compatible and baud to 2400 or 9600 depending on the micro type refer to your micro manual for the switch block settings For a Micro 5 we recommend that the phone number be configured hard coded into the modem so that a dial up micro has a number for dialing the host after the micro resets For the Micro 5 PX use the Flash utility which is part of the Micro Installation Tool MICTOOL Version 1 103 or higher to enter the phone number into the micro s parameter block The host has a list of user definable phone numbers available for calling any dial up micro in the system likewise all dial up micros have a list of user definable phone numbers available for dialing the host In addition each dial up micro has the option of a hard coded phone number in the attached modem or parameter block To allow for micros located in a PBX or in another country there is a user defina
234. conjunction with area category hf schedules Manage Click the Manage button to display the Category Manager window Figure 13 4 from which you may add remove or replace a category in a slot For more information on Category Management see Managing Category Assignment on page 13 8 13 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i Readers Use the Readers form to define how each reader operates and to associate the reader with an area a micro and input group so that the system can process reader activity NOTE Readers may also be set up using the Data Generator See Chapter 15 Generator F Badge in here Strike e VALID INPUT OUTPUT GROUP OUTPUT Green LED INVALID INPUT GROUP Figure 13 7 _Common Reader Setup Badge In Here IN OUTPUT READER GROUP OUTPUT Green LED Badge Out Here OUT READER NOTE Set up the door as per Figure 13 11 Common Door Setup on page 13 31 Connect both green reader LEDs to the same DO on the micro sealy soloba e9 A D o Q D o S os s e Figure 13 8 In Out Reader Setup with Single Door Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 21 Readers Setup gt To define a reader 1 Select Devices then Readers 2 Click New 3 Complete the Readers form
235. ct 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 8 Alarm Color Processing State It is possible to define the colors that will be used in the Alarm Monitor so that the color scheme reflects the alarm state Each alarm in the Alarm Monitor will have a foreground and background color based on its processing state and logical state This option will be used if Processing State is selected in the Alarm Monitor Color Scheme box of the Parameters form Setup gt To set Processing State colors o Q gt i 3 7 1 Select Control then Alarm Color 2 Use the color palette or type a numeric value in each box to indicate the color desired Numeric values range from 0 to 127 The same color palette shown in Figure 8 4 is used for this setting sobessow AVAIOY wey 3 Click the Save function button to save the settings 4 Click the Quit function button to close the Alarm Color window Once these changes are made the next alarm that comes in will have the new colors Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 8 11 Alarm Color Processing State The Alarm Color Form r orion a S L Lo el S Io E C L gt i py i I a os i SS a io C Figure 8 5 Alarm Color Window The Alarm Color window is used to set foreground and background colors for each possible combination of alarm logical and processing states The logic
236. ct 2 0 Administration Guide Keypad Alarm Response Chapter 23 Overview Keypad Alarm Response allows alarms to be cleared only after an input has been physically reset such as closing a door that has been forced open and an authorized badge has been swiped and a keypad code entered The use of this feature is intended for strict controlled resets by authorized card holders only AA n lt OD OD 52 o gt N g o 3 This feature requires a response to access violations at both the host and reader levels The alarm response consists of two actions a response at the host or sub host and a response badge swipe and keypad code at the reader The badge must be specially authorized for Keypad Alarm Response This chapter shows how to configure a Picture Perfect system to implement the Keypad Alarm Response feature Keypad Alarm Response Function The Keypad Alarm Response function starts with an access violation the door is forced open or is held open too long The violation activates one of the door s input groups which then triggers the alarm and outputs associated with that input group Forcing the door open activates the door s forced open input group and holding the door open for too long activates the door s open too long input group The input group and its associated outputs are not reset until the door is closed and a valid keypad response and badge swipe are made on the reader associated with the door
237. ctivity that occur in Building B at night Refer to Figure 7 2 for the Route Points form Setup gt To create a route point record 1 Select Control then Route Points 2 Complete the Route Points form For details on completing each field see The Route Points Form on page 7 5 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another Route Point 7 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Activity Monitor Routing 7 J The Route Points Form The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence for you to follow BE i B a B m i quit save find delete view new help Record of None Found Route Definition lt BLANK gt Facility lt BLANK gt Route To Route To Terminals 0 Items Route To Email 0 Items Schedule sun Non Tue Wea Thu Fn sa Bump To Bump To Terminals 0 Items Bump To Email 0 Items Simp Toon Mode lt BLANK gt Figure 7 2 Route Points Form Route Definition This field identifies the current route point s route definition Click the Route Definition button to display a picklist Select the desired Route 2 i 5 gt 2 F lt S fe Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 7 5 Route Points Definition
238. curs Alarm State When an alarm sensor detects an alarm condition such as an open door its contacts open or close depending on the type of sensor and how it is wired to the system and the sensor is said to be in alarm state PSI 1 x0 13 Allowable Open The length of time a door can remain open before an alarm occurs Archive To copy history transactions from the database to diskette or magnetic tape Some fields are expanded from IDs to descriptions Archives are used for later examination of transactions archives cannot be restored Area A logical grouping of readers and doors used to control access Available Language A language that can be used by Picture Perfect operators A language must be supported by Picture Perfect and translated before it can be made available BID The hidden number that uniquely identifies each badge Background Window A window behind another window The background window does not have the input focus Backup To copy tables from the database to diskette or magnetic tape A backup can be used to restore the system to a previous state or to recover from a failure Badge A plastic card issued to each person who uses the facility The system reads the information on the badge to determine whether or not to grant access to a person Badge Encode Number The hidden number that uniquely identifies each badge Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide GL 1 Glossary Badge Issue Pe
239. d Two Man Rule M2MR sses 21 4 M2MR Category Type esesesssesesesssssssrsriririresisessen 21 4 Modified Two Man Rule without Door Controlee reiia 21 5 Modified Two Man Rule with Door Contro brieret ea anune a eaa 21 5 How to Set Up a Two Man Rule 2MR Controlled S PACe insxisntstvastesiin eabbcadeteshtiylansietanashonvates 21 6 How to Set Up a Modified Two Man Rule M2MR Controlled Space with Door Control 21 7 How to Set Up a Modified Two Man Rule M2MR Controlled Space without Door Control 21 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide xi Contents 22 Elevator Control cccccsccesseeeeeeeeeees 22 1 OV CLVICW sists Gestinee See ie aa es BRS Se 22 1 System Configuration Standards 22 1 El vator ACCESS eian ta a A aan 22 2 Duration Time for Elevator Access 00 0000 22 6 Elevator Access for All Categories 0000 22 6 Free Access FlooOfS ss iicdirattiossacntiecvcoianiouaecaiell 22 6 Elevator Control Setups ast inssathsstovauateiseaienetadadyaad 22 7 Defining the Number of Floors c cee 22 8 Defining MACLOS s scsiciasiienctetnivects nace sudeomaneiee tone 22 8 Defining KEAG CIS oiuaiyissagie dire maasineraashaay imei 22 9 Defining Outputs mincuwdituiin vena nmin es 22 9 D fining INp tS sinisen 22 11 The Elevators FOrmncadccitialiccsactes ctcaseiiaiiess aan 22 13 The Category Floors Form 22 20 Scheduling Elevator Free Access ccceeeeeees 22 21 Floor Trac
240. d an output record 1 Select Devices then Outputs 2 Click New 3 Complete the Outputs form For a description of each field see The Outputs Form on page 12 3 4 Click Save 12 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Inputs and Outputs 12 i The Outputs Form The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence to follow Outputs orion HAREE Eev Next Set Micro Select a micro Set Output Group Select an Output Group 00 1 00 READER 102 00 1 00 READER OK Refresh Cancel Help GLOBAL 5 D a o 5 a fe 5 z a Figure 12 1 Outputs Form Description Type a description of the output usually including a micro board address and a text description Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 12 3 Outputs NOTE Board Type a board number from 0 to 8 The microcontroller s power comm board is always board 0 Use the Micro Wiring Charts for the Micro 4 and Micro 5 to find the board number and address where an output point is located Refer to Table 12 1 and Table 12 2 Verify the board number with your installer Address Type a number from 0 to 47 for the Micro 4 or 0 1 8 9 16 to 31 for the Micro 5 for the digital output address where the output is wired to the connector on the board Duratio
241. d door locked and No Categ Match Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time but first badge category type id NOT valid not on area No Categ Match and Not Validated Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time M2MR category type NOT Team Member and IS valid GUEST Two Valid door locked Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time M2MR category type IS Team Member door NOT opened Valid no passage Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 21 15 pue ajny ue OML fo 2 D a lo z D 5 A D How to Set Up a Modified Two Man Rule M2MR Controlled Space without Door Control Table 21 1 Badge Transactions for Occupancy Counting and Two Man Rule Features 2MR Mode Badge Event Description Badge Transaction Generated Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time M2MR category type IS Team Member door IS opened Two APB T amp A IN occupancy count incremented by two to two Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty but second swipe is not within specified interval time M2MR category type IS Team Member NO Transaction One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy count is at least two M2MR category type NOT None door NOT op
242. d how to set up an alarm To get ready to configure alarms using Picture Perfect forms first plan your alarms on paper Use your worksheets to document alarm locations inputs input groups output devices and alarm priorities Alarm Instructions Use the Messages form Figure 8 1 to write alarm instructions that will display when the various alarms occur and when they reset Keep in mind that the same alarm may occur at different times of the day or week Your instructions who to call who to dispatch may change depending on the shift These alarm messages appear in a picklist that is used in the Alarms form Setup gt To create alarm instructions 1 Select Messages then Messages 2 Click New 3 Complete the Messages form For a description of each field see The Messages Form on page 8 3 4 Click Save 5 Click New to create another alarm instruction 8 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 8 J The Messages Form Messages bctandromeda BEE HH WERIFY THAT DOOR IS SECURE gt Q gt ey s 3 n sobessa Ayanoy wey Figure 8 1 Messages Form Alarm Message Type an alarm instruction for the operator to follow up to 60 alphanumeric characters You can assign up to five messages to each alarm Write generic messages that are common to most of your alarms For example a forced door alarm on a perimeter door should use a generi
243. d logical operators which you select and apply to an SQL statement When you select a name and click Apply the name appears wherever your cursor is located in the SQL window SQLNames e SQL Words Ji Select ETT Figure 20 7 SQL Names Picklist Table Names This option displays the Table Names picklist Figure 20 8 Select and apply table names to SQL statements after FROM This picklist includes all the table names in the Picture Perfect database and each contains different types of data that you may want to include in your report When you select a table name and click Apply the name appears wherever your cursor is located in the SQL window Column Names When you select a table name from the Table Names picklist and then click the Columns button the Column Names picklist Figure 20 8 20 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 i appears with all the column names included in that database table When you select a column name and click Apply the name appears wherever your cursor is located in the SQL window For details on using the Columns picklist to create an SQL select statement see SQL Clauses on page 20 14 Table Names n 2 m A o O s 2 ALARM id integer 31 description alarn Figure 20 8 Table Names and Column Names Picklists Using a Pre loaded Report Instead of building a custom report you can execute a pre loaded re
244. d to a Micro 2 or 8RP Each output on the first 32DO board has the same board number as the Micro 2 or 8RP where it is connected Each subsequent 32DO board uses the next sequential board number 3 Every 32D0 board after the first one takes an available 8RP or Micro 2 slot 4 Strike DOs are 0 to 7 Aux DOs are 8 to 15 Normal DOs are 16 to 47 5 Refer to Figure 12 2 on page 12 6 for the 32DI DO board addressing scheme Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 12 5 Ej o ad e Z f 5 2 O c gt Z Outputs LINE 1 e Maximum of 8 32DI DO boards per line Board 0 e Maximum of 432DI DO boards per 8RP M 4 CPU Only ADDR 0 ADDR 1 ADDR 2 Board 1 Board 2 Board 3 y Board 4 Board 5 Board 6 Board 7 Board 0 32D0 8RP amp S1 4 0n Figure 12 2 32DI DO Board Addressing Scheme Table 12 2 Micro 5 Wiring Chart Outputs Element Board Door DO Reader Aux DO Number Address Address Address CPU 2RP Board 1 4 0 1 0 1 8 9 16D0 DOR Board 1 4 16 31 12 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Inputs and Outputs 12 i NOTE Optional boards include four 20DI boards 20 supervised input points four 16DO boards 16 output points and two 2RP boards 2 reader board m The Micro 5 cabinet has a seven slot capacity Two slots are used by the mandatory Power Communications and CPU boards The remainin
245. de 22 21 Floor Tracking Boas 8 a Figure 22 17 Doors Form Configured for Elevator Door Floor Tracking When Method 2 is employed for Elevator Access floor transactions are generated and stored along with the floor selected This data can then be used for history and reporting purposes gt To generate a Floor Tracking report follow the steps below 1 From the Main Menu select Reports then History The Badge History New Report form appears 22 22 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control 22 2 From the menu bar select Format then Query The Badge Query form appears Badge Query Badge Encode Number Last Name PIN Number Reader Employee Number Department lt Floor Number Date and Time Invalid Range Daily C Continuous Date Through From I Between Logic M Normal F APB In F APB Out F Badge or Keypad Figure 22 18 Badge Query Window 3 In the Floor Number field enter the relative floor number as opposed to the actual floor number The relative floor number is a number in the range 1 64 For example for an elevator with floors labeled 31 through 80 the relative floor numbers would be 1 through 50 To obtain an access report for floor 40 the relative floor number 10 must be entered p lt o er fe 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 23 Floor Tracking NOTES 22 24 Picture Perfe
246. der as a badge only reader from 8 AM to 5 PM and a badge and keypad reader from 5 PM to 8 AM To gain access after 5 PM a badgeholder must swipe his badge and also use the keypad to enter a unique PIN code Logical Reader Function To change the way the reader functions schedule a reader event that changes the logical reader function Normal Anti passback In Anti passback Out Time amp Attendance In Time amp Attendance Out or Time amp Attendance In out For example To provide higher security after hours you can set up certain readers as anti passback in readers and others as anti passback out readers or To provide data about shifts that badge in and out of an area you can set up a reader event that changes a normal reader to a Time amp Attendance In or Out reader APB Type To change the way the anti passback feature functions schedule an area event that changes the APB Type of all readers in the area Global APB or Timed APB Used as the default Global APB allows the reader to function as a normal APB reader or Used to designate the reader as a Timed APB reader a badgeholder s APB status will be set to In or Out and will return to Neutral after a defined period of time A Timed APB reader is useful in a site where a badgeholder may enter a site by going through an APB In reader but is not required to exit the site by going through an APB Out reader If this option is selected a Timed APB Duration must als
247. dge Usage Usaue Court io Figure 14 7 Badges Form Bottom Right Control Card Trace Use this field only when you want to trace the activity of a particular badge Select Enabled to allow the Card Trace feature to track this badge The letter T is inserted in front of the transaction when it appears on the Activity Monitor Select Disabled when you no longer need to trace the badge See Chapter 25 Badge Trace for details on this feature Card trace routing is defined on the Parameters form Keypad Response Select Enabled to give this badgeholder the ability to respond to special alarms requiring keypad input Select Disabled if this feature is not required Normally this feature is disabled See Chapter 23 Keypad Alarm Response for details on this feature Download Upon Save Select the Yes or No radio button If you select Yes any time a badge record is saved it is downloaded to all micros subject to the following conditions New Records New records that are created by copying an existing record that has this field set to Yes will be automatically changed so that this field is set to No This prevents accidental downloads to all micros when using the Copy feature of the New button You must manually set this field to Yes Updated Records Updated records are only downloaded to all micros if the previous setting was saved as No The next time a badge record field is changed for a badge record that previ
248. displayed across multiple lines the n character combination indicates where a line break is desired Line breaks can only be used in pp_err src pp_wrn src and pp_inf src Translators can move line breaks within a message and 32 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide National Language Support 32 l can add or remove line breaks as long as there are no more than 4 lines per message and no more than 72 alphanumeric characters on a line An example of a message that spans 4 lines is given below SYM WRN_EXAMPLE Line 1 nLine 2 nLine 3 nLine 4 n Some catalog messages contain special character combinations called substitution variables These define how dynamic information such as strings and numbers will be substituted into the message during system execution All substitution variables start with the character combination and end with the next blank character The is a number that indicates which variable is inserted As messages are translated the substitution variables can be moved as the sentence structure changes An example is 92 c Ke xo fe gt z at O gt eo c fet SYM INF EXAMPLE The 1 s jumped over the 2 s A translation can change the sentence structure as follows SYM INF EXAMPLE The 2 s was jumped over by the 1 s The substitution variables were moved to accommodate the new structure Since they identify which va
249. dministration Guide Initial Setup 4 The number of transaction records alarm badge or operator that can be stored in the history table or backup table This value is set according to the amount of alarm badge or operator activity expected considering the desired archive frequency These three fields are grayed out which means that they are read only fields These fields are set during installation Alarm Badge Operator History Size Alarm Monitors This field is reserved for future use Default is 2 for the current version Diagnostic Monitors This field is reserved for future use Default is 1 for the current version Event Monitors This field is reserved for future use Default is 2 for the current version Operator Routing Define an Operator Routing for operator activity Click the Operator Routing button to display a picklist of routings Select the desired routing then click Close Default Routing Define a Default Routing to ensure that all messages alarm and activity are routed somewhere Whenever the routing of a function is unassigned the system will use this setting as the default Click the Default Routing button to display a picklist of routings Select the desired routing then click Close Card Trace Routing Define a routing for traced badges Click the Card Trace Routing button to display a picklist of routings Select the desired routing then click Close See Chapter 25 Badge Trace for det
250. ds do not contain acceptable data therefore bad data cannot corrupt the database Operator Activity Monitoring The activity of all system operators can be saved on the hard disk User Defined Alarms Alarms may be assigned priorities to control processing in the event of simultaneous alarms Multiple action Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 2 3 Optional Features messages may be configured to notify the operator when and where the alarm is occurring and what actions to take Digital Outputs to Operate Output Devices Inputs digital or logical trigger digital outputs which can operate output devices door locks lights bells sirens Transaction History Processing The standard system stores history records online including badge alarm and operator activity transactions which can be archived to diskette or streaming tape A larger hard disk can be configured to store more history records online User Defined Reports The reports feature provides an SQL Structured Query Language interface to the online Picture Perfect database so that you can use ANSI standard SQL select statements to query the database and generate reports Pre loaded SQL reports satisfy standard administration requirements The query function allows unlimited selection criteria and up to eight sort criteria The relational database allows an SQL statement to join multiple database tables in one report sorting the result by any selected field
251. duct s was successful The INSTALLation has completed The system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take effect Reboot the system y n y 10 Remove your installation media before pressing defaults to y Additional languages can be made available The primary language and the install operator s language can be changed However before any of these changes can be made any languages other than the provided ones Spanish French Portuguese and Italian must be translated Language Translation The English text provided by GE Interlogix CASI can be translated into any of the supported languages The English French Spanish Portuguese and Italian text can be modified as well This means that an installation can translate GE Interlogix CASI s English terminology into its own English terminology Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 32 5 Language Translation The steps to language translations are 1 Create text that can be translated 2 Translate the text 3 Install the translations 4 Make the text available for operators Subsequent changes to a language s translation only requires steps 2 and 3 Make the change in the translated text and then re install the translations Locale Locale is defined as a language and the location in which it is used All languages in Picture Perfect are defined in terms of locale Each language has a unique locale identifier Picture Perfect uses the lo
252. e Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Input Group Select the input group that will be triggered by the event Online Offline To prevent an associated alarm and or output group from triggering if the input is triggered use an input group event to place an input group offline For example this event can place an input group offline at a scheduled time on a daily weekly cycle within the normal operating mode or this event can be set to occur At Mode Start and to continue with no daily or weekly cycles until a parallel At Mode End event occurs to reverse the change For example For use with Fire mode you could create an event that sets the fire detector input group to offline so that Open Condition and or Short Condition state changes do not continue to be detected This input group event prevents the system from receiving a flood of alarms when a fire occurs Remember that a mode start event requires a parallel mode end event 02 O gt D Q D o o 5 a z a 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 39 InGroup Events NOTE NOTE NOTE You could also schedule an event to place a Motion Detector input group offline during the day and online at night if after hours
253. e 20 MO READER COMM FAIL 102 1 1 Craig Closed 03 09 01 13 57 Pending 20 MO READER COMM FAIL 102 2 1 Craig Closed 03 09 01 13 57 Active a AlAs E Figure 27 14 Alarm Monitor Window The first and second columns of the Alarm Monitor display the Priority and Description that you defined for the alarm using the Alarms form The third column displays the alarm Location defined using the description field of forms such as Inputs Readers Micros and Input Group and could also include an 8RP board number The next columns are Condition alarm reset tamper Input State open closed N A short or ground Date Time Process State active pending completed bumped or notify and Count number of times the alarm has set and reset To see all the columns on the Alarm Monitor stretch the window frame or use the scroll bar Notification of Alarms When an alarm occurs a pop up Alarm Alert window Figure 27 2 appears on every terminal in the system that is configured to receive alarms The window beeps and displays the number of new alarms the number of unanswered alarms and the highest priority alarm that is pending No 7 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Monitoring Alarms 27 l Highest Priority Figure 27 2 Alarm Alert Window When you click on the Silence button the beeping stops and the button changes to Stand By If another alarm occurs the beeping will resume and the information
254. e The default is 5 Comments The eFlash configuration file may contain comments A comment is a line that begins with the pound sign The pound sign and all characters up through the next carriage return are ignored 11 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Flashing Micros 11 Network Micro Parameter Block Configuration The ppnwmc fg command allows the root user to configure a network micro s parameter block from the host by connecting to the network micro Once connected the ppnwmc fg utility will put the network micro in maintenance mode and display the current settings gt To display the ppnwmcfg utility 1 Log in to Picture Perfect as root and type ppnwmcfg v microid micro hostname a f n 3 iz n A flag that turns on verbose The Id of the network micro The host of the micro output This is useful when troubleshooting connection problems Result The ppnwncfg utility will display Menu Options The ppnwmc fg utility displays the following menu options S Show parameter block Displays the contents of the network micro s parameter block C Clear parameter Clears a specific value U Update parameter block Writes the current values to the parameter block 1 n Modify parameter Selecting a number will prompt you for a new value E Edit all Prompts you for each parameter block value Q Qu
255. e micro or press F3 or s to view the detailed status of the micro The detailed status of all micros on the same serial line is available using this method This is described in more detail in the Micro Status paragraph below Dialup Micros Unconnected dialup micros are not represented on the Micro Map screen When a micro dials in it is shown on the serial line to which it is attached To view the detailed status of an unconnected dialup micro press or m You will be prompted to enter the micro s ID After entering the ID and pressing the detailed status of that micro is displayed Micro Status The Micro Status screen displays information about each micro configured The display is updated every second See Figure 33 7 O D O D o 9 V a O z D 3 a Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 9 Diagnostics Subsystem Micro Status dev tty2 Micros Micro ID 0 Next in line 1 Pri Port dev tty2 Sec Port dev tty3 Last comms 08 30 13 On primary port On backup port Online Resetting ACK Pending Timeout Comm alarm Call now Dialing micro Connected Resend messages egzam Micro ID 1 Next in line 2 Pri Port dev tty2 Sec Port dev tty3 Last comms 08 30 07 On primary port On backup port Online Resetting ACK Pending Timeout Comm alarm Call now Dialing micro Connected Resend messages ae ZzZZzZzZKzZzK Micro ID 2 Next in line 2 Pri Port dev tty2 Sec Port dev t
256. e Badges and Departments forms The customization may be made in all available languages See Chapter 31 User Customization for information on how to use the tool 32 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide In Case of Problems Chapter 33 Overview The CMENU program is targeted towards support personnel and Picture Perfect users with system level responsibility CMENU is a menu driven consolidation of various commands and programs used to administer the Picture Perfect system NOTE The CMENU program provides raw diagnostic data to technical support personnel This chapter does not equip users with all of the information and background required to perform troubleshooting Instead this chapter shows users how to use CMENU functions hf to capture diagnostic data The support representative then uses this raw data to troubleshoot the problem and provide a solution If you are familiar with Picture Perfect or the operating system you can execute most of the functions provided by CMENU from the command line Also many of the functions are duplicated by the XWindows Motif based software This character based system provides remote support since Picture Perfect does not currently support dial up terminals CMENU is not all inclusive If a function that you require does not appear on one of the menus there is still a possibility that the function or program exists elsewhere on the system in some other format 5 O
257. e Earlier in date TIME Later in time Earlier in time INTERVAL Longer span of time Shorter span of time CHAR Later in the alphabet Earlier in the alphabet Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 17 SQL Variables SQL Variables Variables may be embedded directly into the SQL syntax by enclosing the variable inside brackets It is up to the operator to put double quotes outside the variable as needed for character fields The variable will be detected when the operator clicks the Execute Select button and the Variable window will pop up When the operator fills in the desired value and clicks Ok the report is executed The value is then substituted in place of the variable SOL supports a maximum of ten variables in the SQL select statement If there are no variables detected the Report Variables window will not pop up Figure 20 10 shows the SQL syntax for embedded variables NOTE Multiple words with spaces for substitution variables cannot be supported for column descriptions SQL leaves it up to the operator to make the decision Y regarding the choice of variables and their textual descriptions The Schedule Reports feature will not support variables An audit routine that detects variables in the Schedule Reports form prevents reports from being scheduled if they contain variables Picture Perfect SQL Output Group Report orion Ja Substitution Variable from SG Output Group De
258. e Open Time on the Doors form must be greater than 60 seconds in order to use Pre alarm as the Pre alarm input group will be triggered 60 seconds before a sensing violation is detected and reported Keypad Shunt Time can be used to extend the allowable open time on a door In this case the Pre alarm warning signal will be triggered one minute before the Held Open Too Long violation is issued Follow these steps to set up Pre alarm Notification 1 Select Devices then Doors 2 Use the radio button to enable Pre alarm 3 Click the Pre alarm button to display a picklist of Input Groups Select the desired Input Group then click Close e Ifa warning signal is required at the host an alarm must be associated with that Input Group e Ifan audible warning signal is required an Output Group containing at least one digital output must be associated with that Input Group See The Doors Form on page 13 35 of Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors 24 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badge Trace Chapter 29 Overview This feature allows an operator to trace an individual badge and route its activity to a specific routing location regardless of the routing definition for each of the area s input groups When the traced badge is swiped through a reader a record of the transaction is sent to the Badge Trace routing destination usually to the Activity Monitor and the History Log The routing for Bad
259. e Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 37 Doors NOTE Forced Relock If enabled this feature provides further security by locking a door if a second person presents a badge to the reader before the first person opens the door For example if a person badges into a reader but does not open the door and a second person badges into the same reader before the first person s Unlock Time expires the door will immediately lock This will show on the Activity Monitor as two 2ND BDG DOOR LOCK transactions one for each person Door Strike Relock Door Strike Relock provides additional security by incorporating the ability to relock the door upon a door opening or closing or after a specified period of time On Door Open When the door is opened the door strike will relock Do not use this option if you are using magnetic locks with built in door open sensors On Door Closed When the door is closed after being open the door strike will immediately relock On Door Unlock Duration The door strike will relock after the Unlock Time set in the Door Values box has expired Input Groups Select one input group for each door error condition This input group will activate and the associated alarm will be triggered when the associated door error condition occurs Only Trigger on Input non boolean input groups are displayed in the picklists See Boolean Type on page 9 5 of Chapter 9 Input and Output Groups Input groups
260. e Select Mode button to display the Modes picklist Select the desired mode for this event then click Ok 5 Click the Select Reader button to display the Readers picklist Select the reader at which this event should occur then click Ok 6 Specify whether the reader selected is to be Online or Offline If Online readers assigned to the area may open doors 7 Inthe Reader section change the fields that describe how the reader is to operate after this event occurs Unchanged fields retain the previously existing values 8 Click Save 9 Click New to add another reader event or Quit to exit the Reader Events form la gt D a D o te 5 a fo a D 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 25 Reader Events The Reader Events Form Figure 16 12 Reader Events Form Top Description Type a reader Description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long for example Lobby Door Mode Select the mode in which the reader event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Time If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one For example if something is turned on every day at 8 AM it must be t
261. e Threshold The micro dials the host when the micro s alarm or badge history buffer reaches its threshold user defined and requires uploading to the host Badge Table Request The micro dials the host when there is no micro database record for a badge just presented to a reader The micro s resident database reduces the requirement for micro to host calls for badge records Events Requiring Host to Micro Calls Database Updates The host dials out to send database updates to micros Whether the host does this automatically never or on request is user defined for each individual micro For micros that do not require immediate updates the host stores the updates until the next host to micro or micro to host call occurs and then downloads the new records Outputs and Output Group Commands The host dials the micro immediately whenever the operator changes the state of an output or output group on that micro 10 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros 10 i NOTE For details that show how an operator can command state changes and control outputs using input groups output groups or selected outputs see Chapter 29 m Controlling Outputs Operator generated Commands The host allows the operator to dial any micro in the system to check the status See Chapter 30 Viewing Status Micro Reset Request Command The host dials the micro to send a reset command when an update to the system database r
262. e a SYN message with its address when it receives the ENQ message See the Glossary for a definition of SYN and ENQ messages When the resend manager diagnostics is set each attempt to communicate with a micro is logged The entry contains the message sequence number the retry attempt number and the packet type Clear When diagnostics are no longer needed they should be cleared To determine which diagnostics need to be cleared use the Check function on the Diagnostic Subsystem Menu Figure 33 12 to check current diagnostic levels As in Set diagnostic levels the menu selections are a limited subset of the entire set of diagnostics available 33 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide In Case of Problems 33 Picture Perfect Release 1 7 1 4 01 Support Utilities Menu Copyright C 1990 1995 Casi Rusco Inc Picture Perfect Utilities Menu ECeaeeeem Diagnostics Subsystem Menu Micros Diagnostics Subsystem Menu Status Printer Process Process control diagnostics Check Set Diagnostic Levels Clear WatchL main daemon diagnostics RevDry receive driver diagnostics SndDrv send driver diagnostics RevMgr receive manager diag Seuss Back lt ESC gt Figure 33 12 Clear Diagnostic Levels Menu WatchLog The Watch diagnostic log selection allows the operator to monitor the diagnostic log Any diagnostics written to the log are displayed in real time To stop viewing the diagnostic log press sc
263. e aia tateonexides aaa amine 4 1 What You Will Be DOING taisssscccesstescnsssenesesssnrncdsensoasies 4 1 Terminalsnesnu Kontan e aa AeA REN 4 2 SetuP e a a R A A S AIAT 4 2 The Terminals Form cccccccccesscccsssssceeessseeeeeseees 4 2 MIGGEINS sscnlenaihut ces kinana a i 4 4 SEU P ara a Ee e E E PEES 4 5 The Modems Forntiscivcssissscsisadsivedocancassoatiovnsciiaceovans 4 5 POLES ier a a A RE 4 10 Setup iniiai a a aaa aai 4 11 Th POLES FORMS wilaicivecdduai dies teaahile aeaa ein 4 11 The Network Micro Ports Form cc ccccsceeeees 4 16 SetU prn a ent a en E a E A R 4 16 The Network Ports Form seeen 4 16 PADITET S orek a A E N ns 4 18 SetuP nien a n ER ENR EE ERSS 4 18 The Printers F OVI nemcine nataan 4 18 FPA AA I E EA E E T 4 19 SAEI o AE E E 4 19 The Email Forma cbexsssatecwtanstotonlaa ceeds dan na n 4 20 ROUUNES iiiaae ennes eaea a EE 4 21 PIC nE o EES E S E 4 21 The Routings Form ssssessssssesssesiesesisesisssseseseneenen 4 21 Bad Se Formats nnesnionnaeannriin eiaa 4 24 SEL Gata e a a A EE E E 4 25 The Badge Formats FOrM s ssssesssssiereseresreresesese 4 26 Paramieterss hinienn ea a a a i 4 27 Setup der a E AARE E 4 27 The Parameters Form c cccccceeccceesssssceessseseeees 4 27 Departments riras tenani an E ES 4 37 Setup eE e e E E E ERI 4 37 The Departments Form s s s sesesesesissssesersesreresesees 4 37 Personnel Type siisii 4 39 SeT E E E 4 39 The Personnel Type FOrm sssesssssse
264. e all caps to differentiate the reserved words from the rest of the clause Only the SELECT clause and the FROM clause are required WHERE and ORDER BY are optional SELECT FROM WHERE ORDER BY n 2 n A D xo 5 re 2 Instead of typing these names you can use SQL Names on the SOL Syntax menu for a picklist from which you can select and apply words to the SQL statement window For a brief explanation of each of the SQL reserved words read SQL Clauses on page 20 14 4 Select and apply column names from the badge table and department table to create the following SELECT clause Follow the three steps listed below When joining multiple tables use table indicators for column names In the following SQL statement department indicates that description comes from the department table The statement does not include table indicators for column names from the badge table SELECT last name first name department description issue date e Select badge from the Table Names picklist then click the Columns button Select and apply last_name first_name issue_date from the Badge Column Names picklist and type a comma after each column name except the last name in the clause e Select department from the Table Names picklist then click the Columns button Select and apply description from the Department Column Names picklist inserting it in front of issue_date with a comma after it e Type department
265. e day two operators monitor the site one operator in Building A and one operator in Building B At night only one operator monitors the site from Building A One possible configuration could be that the daytime operators monitor alarms and activity that occur in their respective building and the nighttime operator would monitor alarms and activity that occur in both buildings This configuration could be extended such that during the day if an operator did not respond to an alarm in his building the alarm would be bumped to the terminal in the other building The Alarm Activity Monitor Routing feature allows for this type of configuration It should be noted that Alarm Activity Monitor Routing configuration is required only if you wish to restrict the displaying of the alarms and activity on a terminal In other words if you want all alarms and activity to be displayed on all terminals you do not need to configure this feature It should also be noted that activity routing is restricted to badge activity and digital input DI activity Other activity such as gt operator activity cannot be routed to a specific terminal 3 gt Prerequisites m lt The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites ae O 5 Forms Purpose F TERMINALS To define the terminal displays throughout the system Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 7 1 What You Will Be Doing What You Will Be
266. e file directories and what type of hex file each contains total 336 drwxr xr x 8 root sys 512 Mar 31 16 34 drwxr xr x 16 root sys 512 Mar 27 09 14 rw r r 1 root sys 133276 Mar 31 16 33 flash dat drwxr xr x 2 root sys 512 Mar 13 16 43 m50200s Micro 5 PXN operatng system code drwxr xr x 2 root sys 512 Mar 14 11 02 m5p2000 Micro 5 PX Direct drwxr xr x 2 root sys 512 Mar 14 18 32 m5p200p _ Micro 5 PX Dial Up drwxr xr x 2 root sys 512 Mar 19 15 44 m5p200s Micro 5 PXN application code rw r r 1 root sys 556 Mar 28 17 33 tty7 log Micro 5 PX Direct rw r r 1 root sys 312087 Mar 28 17 33 eflash m5pe200 ef1 Flash code rw r r 1 root sys 140881 Mar 28 17 33 eflash m5npe200 ef1 ala code Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 11 1 Prerequisites Prerequisites e Ifthe micro is configured for Micro Callback the Callback feature must be disabled the Callback field on the Micro form must be set to None in order to perform a flash download Upon completion of the download the feature can be enabled the Callback field can be set back to Micro e If this is a dial up micro it must be disconnected from the host before attempting to flash e A micro must already be flashed with firmware 1 70 or later to make use of the eFlash feature What You Will Be Doing This chapter includes instructions for flashing your micros using three methods Refer to the section Flash Download Utility on page 11 2 if y
267. e of a DI Used to Trigger a Physical Output DO cscciscicisspowcsssssssencasiseguecansstaten H 5 Example of the Door Exit DI and Sense DI Set Up Using Supervised Inputs to a 2SRP or 20DI H 6 Alarms Initiated by Micro eeeeseseeeeeees H 7 Alarms Initiated Dy Areas 2i stsiaxsissscctecieneesinsicnntesienes H 7 O Alarms Initiated by Doors iciciiscasiescitesscneassectencsinssis H 7 S Glossary caunu aa nea GL 1 A VON EEEE EPEA A EERE E Index 1 Customer Survey Software Defect Report Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide xvii Contents xviii Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide List of Figures Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 List of Figures LOGIN S Cr E a a a aed 3 1 FrOnt Panel E E A EE 3 3 Main Menu and SubmenuS 0 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 3 5 Example of a Form i eiaa aae anaa 3 6 Example of a Picklist c cececcee
268. e of data See Logical Operators on page 20 16 and Relational Operators on page 20 17 for information on using operators such as the equal sign the quote sign the connector AND in an SQL statement 7 The ORDER BY clause specifies how the report sorts and sequences the selected data Select and apply column names from the Department Column Names picklist to create the following ORDER BY clause ORDER BY last_name This report sorts the rows by last name Ascending alphabetical order is the default To specify descending use DESC a reserve SQL name NOTE SQL syntax does not accept DESC as an abbreviation for DESCRIPTION because it is one of the reserve SQL names Remember this rule when you are hf customizing the column headings for the report title bar next 20 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 8 To customize the column headings modify the SELECT clause in the SQL window Before you change the headings your SELECT clause is SELECT last name first name department description issue date This SELECT statement makes the following headings in the report title bar LAST NAME FIRST NAME DESCRIPTION ISSUE DATE To change a column heading insert a space and the new column name no spaces after the SQL name Use an underscore instead of a space between words for example type Dept_ Description after description n 2 m A D xo 5 re Oo SELECT last name
269. e operator permission to delete NOTE If report permissions are enabled only the reports that the operator has access F to will be displayed Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 5 The SQL Form j Clete Repo Delete Cancel Help Figure 20 4 Delete Report Picklist SQL Page Setup Displays the Page Setup window Figure 20 5 to specify a unique title and an optional header and or footer If you want to save this report a title is required The optional header prints at the top right the footer prints in front of the page number at the bottom Click Ok Page Setup Title Alarm Report Header Footer Page Ok Cancel Figure 20 5 Page Setup Window SQL Print Allows you to print the entire report The Print Report window Figure 20 6 will appear for specifications When you are ready to print click Print To view the report before you print it click Execute Select on the SOL window 20 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 i OOOO o oe O O Select A Printer 80 columns C Normal LEL PRINTER Browser Printer C 132 columns Compressed F Print Only to File Print Cancel n 2 rH A o O s 2 Figure 20 6 Print Report Window Paper Width Use the radio buttons in this area to specify both paper width and type compression Select a paper width of either 80 or 132 characters based on the printer Select whether the type
270. e output group on or off then click Ok Or to turn individual outputs on or off click the Output Group button to display a listing of that group s individual outputs Each output has its own on off radio buttons for your selection If no selection is made the outputs will retain their current settings When the desired changes have been made click Ok Click Ok on the Control Outputs window to close it when you are done Control Outputs M On or 00 1 00 READER E A Shs Eem inte Control Outputs l On Off 00 1 00 READER OK Cancel Help Figure 27 9 Control Outputs Window 27 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Monitoring Activity Chapter 28 Overview Real time activity displays in a scrolling window called the Activity Monitor The queue of messages on the Activity Monitor scrolls upwards as new messages appear at the bottom You can select whether you want to monitor badge operator tour or swipe and show activity or any combination of activities To temporarily stop the Activity Monitor from scrolling click the Freeze button The system continues to queue activity messages and will resume scrolling the stored information when you click the Unfreeze button To print the information that appears on the Activity Monitor click the Print button To see all the columns on the Activity Monitor stretch the window frame use the point and drag method Prerequisites The following
271. e readers are not allowed to unlock doors but are allowed to read badges pass badge data route and archive access messages and activate associated alarms Shunting Enabled indicates that the system allows use of keypad override of shunt time on doors and readers in this area Disabled indicates that shunting is not allowed This has no effect on Door Held Open or Door Forced Open See Held Open Sensing on page 13 37 the Doors form and Shunting on page 13 28 the Reader form Scheduling Enabled indicates that the system recognizes scheduled changes associated with this area Disabled indicates that the system ignores scheduled changes Antipassback Enforcement If antipassback is set to Normal for this area it works in conjunction with the antipassback status setting on each badge used to access this area If set to Passive antipassback will not be enforced in this area which means that access will be granted regardless of the antipassback status However violations will still be reported See Antipassback Status on page 14 23 the Badges form Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Set Input Groups Select one Input Group for each error condition These Input Groups will activate an a
272. e typed in lower case characters and must not be the port assigned to the operator s console Typically tty0 is assigned to an ASCII console For Linux systems refer to Table 4 1 through Table 4 3 for Port Linux A m Device Names for Linux systems Table 4 1 COM Port Device Names for Linux Systems Type Port Direct and Dial up Name com port com1 Idev ttyS 0 com2 dev ttyS 1 Table 4 2 PCI 8 Port Serial Port Adapter Port Device Names for Linux Systems Type Port Direct and Dial up Name PCI 8 port Digi board dev ttyD000 dev ttyD001 dev ttyD002 dev ttyD003 dev ttyD004 dev ttyD005 dev ttyD006 oj N DD OY HB WwW N e dev ttyD007 EJ D 02 D e kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 13 Ports Table 4 3 PCI 16 Port Serial Port Adapter Port Device Names for Linux Systems Type Port Direct and Dial up Name PCI 1 dev ttyD000 16 port Digi board 7 devjttyD001 For additional Digi 3 dev ttyD002 boards continue with device names as 4 dev ttyD003 plots 5 devittyD004 Board 2 6 dev ttyD005 dev tty D016 to dev tty D031 7 dev ttyD 006 8 dev ttyD007 Board 3 A dev tty D032 to 9 dev ttyD008 per Ei 10 devittyD009 Board 4 11 dev ttyD010 dev tty D048 to dev tty D 063 12 dev ttyD011 13 dev ttyD012 14 dev
273. e when the facility is closed for a holiday use an alarm event that does not cycle daily Use a mode start alarm event associated with your holiday mode When the system starts to operate in holiday mode events that cycle during normal operating mode stop cycling Set this alarm to remain online until the system switches back to normal operating mode You may need to schedule a parallel mode end alarm event in case the system does not return to normal operating mode for other scheduled events to occur However the preferred way is to schedule the input group offline online This way no input activity ISC is sent to the host See InGroup Events on page 16 37 la 5 D a D o te 5 a fo a D 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 35 Alarm Events Routing To send an alarm to a different routing at certain times schedule an alarm event that specifies the new routing and time You can send the alarm message to the alarm monitor a printer the history log or to a combination of the three For example if you want invalid badge alarms to route to the log and monitor during the business day but to the monitor and a printer after hours set an alarm event for MTWT at 17 00 to start routing invalid badge alarms to the alarm monitor and to a selected printer Set a parallel alarm event to occur on MTWTF at 08 00 to start routing the alarm to the history log and monitor If no one watches the alarm
274. eS 16 2 2 What You Will Be Doing scaitnnctadaaoeeciveocmicnsss 16 2 oy Creating MOGES siiissrhssiaccisstisabitatdonsnonsbsbhietdnastisiuessihl 16 2 zi Norma Mode aa a a RA 16 2 Emergency MOUS siiceiincelensscteisi oni aterenne g 16 3 Holiday Modes esx ors vnesebatinyashanhadaturdvessaevasaawies 16 4 SETUP merer e T 16 5 The Mode Creation FOrM eeeeeeeeeeeeseereeserreseee 16 5 Changing Modes ies araies diver sasoivestta iatis 16 7 How to Change Mode by Command 16 7 The Mode Command Form n se 16 7 How to Change Mode by Schedule 04 16 8 The Mode Events Form cccccccsessceceeeesceseesenes 16 9 Scheduling TY CLUES ease 3 ea cceceets Uocaruualeseeineumatent ntsc 16 11 Runtime Events ccccccccssssssscsscseceessssssesessecs 16 11 Start End Event cccececssssssccececcsseeeesssseaeess 16 12 ATCA EV ENS 35 ah ites eateesiaeh ete weit See 16 14 SetU p es i aa E E Ein laaa 16 14 The Area Events Form ccccccccceseeecsceesesseeeeees 16 16 Reader Events maciran it aE 16 25 SETUP e o O r E areca tags 16 25 The Reader Events Form cccccccccccceesssssceeees 16 26 Door EVeMUts ccccccccccsccecsesssssecssccecsssssssseessesecceeseees 16 30 DELP i h RERNE E E AR 16 30 The Door Events Form eeceescceescrreerrereesrre 16 31 Alarm Events ss a cea utines aa ea A An eae 16 33 Setup u aa E A A S ARAKEA 16 33 The Alarm Events Form h or 16 34 InGroup Events enson n nai a 16 37 SETUP ie iiaia E E
275. ea readers 1 From the Main menu select Devices Readers 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the reader record you wish to set up 3 Under Logical Reader Function enable the appropriate radio button APB In APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out NOTE Inan area with Occupancy Control enabled All readers in the area must be assigned one of these logical functions APB In m APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out APB readers must be set to Global Timed APB is not allowed The logical reader function T amp A In Out is NOT allowed for any reader 4 Under Set Micro verify that all readers in the area are assigned to the same micro 5 Under Reader Control Number of Badges verify that all area readers are set to Single 6 Optional If you want to activate a DO such as a blinking light between the first and second required badge swipes under Two Man Rule click the 2MR Output button and select the output to be triggered 7 Save and exit the Readers form gt To setup the area doors 1 From the Main menu select Devices Doors 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the door record you wish to set up 3 Under Inputs click on Door Sensor 21 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Two Man Rule and Modified Two Man Rule 21 j NOTE The door sensor input and the door output must be physically connected to the same micro 4 Select the appropriate input from the list displayed 5
276. eady online do not select Online on the Area Event schedule To create an area event 1 2 Select Schedule then Area Events Enter a description for this event Set the time for this event to occur by selecting days of the week and typing a time or by selecting At Mode Start or At Mode End Click the Select Mode button to display the Modes picklist Select the desired mode for this event then click Ok Click the Select Area button to display the Areas picklist Select the area where this event should occur then click Ok Specify whether the area selected is to be Online or Offline If online readers assigned to the area may open doors If any message destinations should change during this event change the routing specifications for Valid Invalid Suspended Lost Unknown or Antipassback Click the appropriate Routing button to display the Routings picklist Select the new routing then click Close Any Routing button left blank will retain its current routing destination To change the area s categories during this event click the Manage button For more information on Category Management see Managing Category Assignment on page 13 8 16 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Schedules and Modes 16 Select the category you wish to change Result The slot to which the category is assigned will be highlighted Click Remove Result
277. ear diagnostic levels functions to set diagnostics on and off for TPS managers and drivers e Watchlog Use Watch diagnostic log to view TPS manager and driver transactions in a scrolling window Set diagnostics for a short duration of time because the diagnostic writes a large volume of detailed information to the TPS log System performance is degraded while diagnostics are set Diagnostics usually are not set during normal operations Process Control Diagnostics NOTE This selection allows the operator to look at the data structures contained in the process control block PCB The PCB is the nerve center of TPS and runs only when TPS is running Otherwise the appropriate message displays and the program terminates This utility can also be run by itself from the command line by typing at the prompt ape Select Process to display the Dump PC Main Utilities Menu Figure 33 3 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 O w a p h U ie a O 3 4 Diagnostics Subsystem Dump PC Main Utiliti 5 Queues Memory Communications Alarms Alarms Flags Devices Counts Micro Micro Records Ports Port Records Terminal Terminal Records Host Host Records Figure 33 3 Dump PC Main Utilities Menu Queues Select Queues Memory Communications on the Dump PC Main Utilities Menu to display shared memory usage communications flow control flags and the number of me
278. eated during base package installation Translating Text Picture Perfect text is divided into four types help information database synonyms default database and catalogs A crucial concern in translating text is the code page used in the translation The code page specifies the character encoding All translations should be made with the ISO8859 1 code page which is used by Picture Perfect The only other acceptable code page is the IBM 850 which is normally found on personal computers Translations made in IBM 850 can be converted to IS08859 1 with the AIX iconv utility Database Synonyms Database Synonyms are synonyms for database tables fields and values used to describe the database to operators They are also called meanings The synonyms for a particular language are stored in a file named meaning dat in cas nls src LOCALE where LOCALE is the language s locale identifier Each line in meaning dat defines a distinct synonym The lines are separated into three to four fields as numbered in the example below separated by bars The third field is the actual synonym and is the only field that can be changed changing the first and second fields will corrupt the database The third field must not contain more than 60 alphanumeric characters The fourth field is optional When present it will always contain a capital T Its presence indicates that the field needs translation This field should be removed when the record is tr
279. ecause data is read and written sequentially tape can hold 20 40GB gigabytes of storage If your network configuration provides storage on a physical drive that is accessible using the network this may also be an option providing its storage capacity is large enough for your requirements It is also a good idea to check with your network administrator before moving backup data across the network Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 18 1 Performing an Archive Performing an Archive The system prompts you using a pop up window to perform a specific archiving function for Badge History Alarm History or Operator History when the primary table for that history is full At that time the system takes the records stored in that primary history table and transfers them to a temporary history table When an archive is performed for a particular history it uses the information in its temporary table that way the primary table is free to start collecting new information right away If an archive is not performed before the primary table is filled again the data in the temporary table will be overwritten and the original archive data lost So it is important to perform the indicated archive when the system notifies you Since the time needed to reach a history threshold varies with activity levels it s hard to predict when a particular threshold will be reached A Force Rollover option exists therefore which allows you to archi
280. ecessscsseeseees A 4 R dundantan ose arein a a NE exec ne NE AA Appendix B TPS Alarms ccccsseeeeeees B 1 OV EFVICW sites ar ioe eR tans B 1 Contig ratiorn Files necesara iaaa B 2 PCASTAD IEXT PS Clea ici det ciaiAoaciadsmotuan es B 2 cas db text tps cfg sample siicsdcaiiscstianceeschaneasis B 3 PEAS TDING UPS HCLe SI at concerti niensis nadani B 3 Appendix C Firewall Configuration C 1 Setting a Fixed Port for the Client Server Task sx ciisisasthestscasissasivtguapas tlovtigacns C 2 Changing the Fixed Port Used by the License Manager Task ccceseeeeees C 2 Web Browser Security cas Accu sisi esepet ile escrn C3 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide XV Contents Appendix D Advanced Configuration D 1 OVELVICW iis Mei hea ne at ate eas D 1 Multiple Tape Support nc casiencvoniictiictevicascgecvoniinnes D 1 Port THEON Sissin rnio sasn D 2 Disk File Backup Archive Configuration D 3 File System MIOnitOnys iisissinsstescenrccanschensedetdorageestvorises D 4 Database Space MOnitor ass icasdsccionmaisacrutnedls D 6 Resend List State ccccccccscceesssccceessssececsssseecsseseeess D 7 Configuration ie iinn a a aus D 7 Log M ssageS hniena arans D 8 Alarm SAVE State arana a N E TNTA ay D 9 Configura toM aesa n EE D 9 Log MeSSa POS seasivttesagivsanorsiswsdadaiecsersatansinaiiachertag D 11 Auto Logout xidle cites acesneh A iedias cade ee cestess D 11 PILES Si ic
281. ect 2 0 Administration Guide 18 5 Performing Backups 4 Ifyou want to see exactly which tables are included in your selection you may click the Show Tables button This displays the Database Tables window with a listing of all the tables in the database The tables included in your selection will be toggled On CAUTION Do not toggle any of the individual table buttons in the Database Tables window unless instructed to do so by your support representative 5 If you want to generate an onscreen verification report leave the Generate Verification Report checkbox selected 6 Use the appropriate radio button to start a backup to Diskette Tape or Disk File Make sure you have formatted diskettes available before you start the backup NOTE When Disk File is selected clicking the Execute button will display a list from which you can select the destination file for the backup archive See the m Installation Guide for detailed information on configuring this option 7 Click Execute to start the backup Figure 18 4 Table Backup Window 18 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Backup and Restore 18 Using the Command Line Backup Option cba Configuration File The command line version of backup uses a configuration file backup cfg located in cas db text This file contains the flat files to be backed up You can edit this file if you have additional files you would like to back up The syntax of the cont
282. ed button must E be deselected the default 7 Save and exit the Doors form gt To enable M2MR with Door Control for the Area NOTE In order to perform this function you must have Occupancy Control permission 1 From the Main menu select Access Areas 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the area record you wish to set up 3 Under Occupancy Control enable the Occupancy Counting radio button 4 Under Two Man Rule Control enable the radio button labeled Modified Two Man Rule with Door Control pue ajny UeN OML 5 Save and exit the Areas form z 2 O a z lo z fe A D gt To define Categories for M2MR Category Types 1 From the Main menu select Access Categories 2 Define one or more categories groups of people who will access the controlled area and under Modified Two Man Rule Type enable the appropriate radio button None Guest or Team Member 3 Save and exit the Categories form gt To assign M2MR Categories to Areas and Badges 1 From the Main menu select Access Areas Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 21 9 How to Set Up a Modified Two Man Rule M2MR Controlled Space without Door Control 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the area records to be controlled 3 Under Categories click a Cat button to assign an M2MR category to the area 4 Save and exit the Areas form 5 From the Main menu select Access Badges 6 F
283. ed configs ncd std if the NCD package is installed Redundant etc hosts etc services on both machines etc sysconfig network Linux specific etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg eth0 Linux specific etc sysconfig network scripts ifcfg ethl Linux specific cas db etc onconfig cas db etc sqlhosts on both machines vhosts on other host For Linux the above line should read root rhosts on all subhosts etc hosts equiv on other host host table on both machines usr 1ib X11 ncd configs hexfiles need to be regenerated if the NCD package is installed cas bin profile on other host RMACH cas db text fpp A 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide TPS Alarms Appendix Overview TPS Alarms are a feature that allow a Picture Perfect system to indicate that there is a problem with one or more of the TPS processes By default TPS generates an alarm every time a TPS process respawns The following TPS processes trigger an alarm when respawned UV 02 D s 3 7 e almmgr e bdgmgr e dbmgr e oprmgr e prmgr e rcevmgr e rsndmgr e schmgr e sndmgr e stsmgr e evtmgr e maamgr TPS expects these processes to run without exiting until TPS is shut down If one of these TPS processes respawns then the administrator should investigate the problem The log files should contain an entry indicating that a TPS process respawned The alarm generated serves as an additional warning
284. ed per elevator e The elevator buttons are enabled for a length of time duration defined on the Devices Outputs form All the buttons outputs should be set to the same duration e Badges must be authorized for an elevator reader in order to gain access to an assigned floor e Picture Perfect can address up to 4096 micros with each micro having up to a maximum of 16 elevator readers The recommended limit is based on memory and disk capacity of the Picture Perfect host system m D lt g a s O 3 pl Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 1 Elevator Access Elevator Access There are two ways to grant access to an elevator floor Both require a valid badge swipe to an elevator configured reader and a valid category match between the badge and a floor or floors Depending on the elevator control configuration one of the following methods will then activate the elevator floors Method 1 This is the default and is available on all configurations Following a valid badge swipe the badge is checked for category floors for this elevator For each badge category that matches the elevator s categories access is granted to the set of floors denoted by the matched category Therefore the set of accessible floors will be the combined set of matched category floors For example a badgeholder has General Access and Computer Department as categories on his badge The elevator allows floors 1 2 a
285. eed baud rate Parity number of Data Bits and number of Stop Bits should be checked however to ensure that the port is running at the recommended settings 19200 baud NONE no parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit It is possible for these settings to become changed after the transaction processor is loaded which can result in a host to micro communications error Check this display to ensure that the port settings are correct 5 O o N D h U x ie zZ D 3 7 If the Idle field is Y or the port is not initialized not opened for sending or not opened for receiving and a port group exists for it a problem exists Flags display in reverse video to alert the operator that the condition is abnormal Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 11 Diagnostics Subsystem Picture Perfect Port Records Ports Port ID 1 Port name fdev tty1 File handle 4 First micro id 0 Modem type f Speed Parity Data bits Stop bits Idle Initialized Open for SND Open for RCY Modem dialing Modem connected E z ote Figure 33 8 Port Records Terminal Records The Terminal Records screen displays information about terminals that are currently logged on CMENU supports up to three Picture Perfect terminals logged on at one time The Terminal Host field shows the Internet host name display the Logon field shows the number of times the terminal has been used for logon since the Epoch the last TPS start
286. eeeeeeeeeseneteeeeees 3 8 Function Buttons on a Form cceeeeeeeeeesteeeeeeenees 3 9 View Window 2 ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeceeeeeeeeeeees 3 11 Columns Picklist cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 3 12 SOM WINdOW s teeta ee a tee ae naan deta ete ae 3 12 Search WiNdOW cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 3 13 Title Bar and Buttons 0 ceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteees 3 15 Terminals Formace s aae e aad 4 2 Modems Form Top e cecceeeeeeeeseeeeesensnneeeees 4 6 Modems Form Bottom cccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 4 8 Sample AIX Connection Diagram for Micros Setup 4 10 Ports FO sesh es eset aaeoa aeaa naa ae eaae raa 4 12 Network Micro Ports Form ccccccsesseseeseeeeees 4 16 Printers FOMM sich iar setae cack cee eke 4 18 Email Form with Facility Picklist 000 eee 4 20 FROUTLINGS FON dis sce ecets sine cores e ccdetassnetegeeinne 4 21 Printer Routing assenaar 4 23 E Mail Routing selai E aes 4 24 Badge Formats F N sssini nein iii 4 26 Parameters Form TO cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 28 Parameters Form Top Middle ccceeeeeee 4 30 Parameters Form Bottom Middle e 4 31 Parameters Form Bottom 4 35 Departments Form c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeesecteeeeeees 4 37 Personnel Type Form cccccccceeeesceeeeeeeesueeeeeenaes 4 39 Facility Facility Profile Overview eee 5 1 Facility
287. egories Window 16 21 Figure 16 11 Area Events Form Bottom 16 22 Figure 16 12 Reader Events Form Top eeeeeeceeeeeeteeeeeeenaes 16 26 Figure 16 13 Reader Events Form Bottom seeeeeees 16 27 Figure 16 14 Door Events FOrm cccccceceeeseseeeeeseesneeeeeeeaaes 16 31 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide xix List of Figures Figure 16 15 Figure 16 16 Figure 16 17 Figure 17 1 Figure 17 2 Figure 17 3 Figure 18 1 Figure 18 2 Figure 18 3 Figure 18 4 Figure 18 5 Figure 18 6 Figure 19 1 Figure 19 2 Figure 19 3 Figure 19 4 Figure 19 5 Figure 19 6 Figure 19 7 Figure 19 8 Figure 19 9 Figure 19 10 Figure 19 11 Figure 20 1 Figure 20 2 Figure 20 3 Figure 20 4 Figure 20 5 Figure 20 6 Figure 20 7 Figure 20 8 Figure 20 9 Figure 20 10 Figure 20 11 Figure 20 12 Figure 20 13 Figure 22 1 Figure 22 2 Figure 22 3 Figure 22 4 Figure 22 5 Figure 22 6 Figure 22 7 Figure 22 8 Figure 22 9 Figure 22 10 Figure 22 11 Alarm Events Form c c 0cssssssseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 16 34 InGroups Events Form cccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeees 16 38 OutGroups Events Form 0 ecceeeeeeteeteees 16 42 Facility Profile Window 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeaaes 17 3 Operations Pop Up Menu ccccceeeeeeteeteee 17 4 Access Secure List Example Input Groups 17 5 History Dates Window
288. eld see The Badges Form on page 14 10 Click Save Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 3 Issuing a Temporary Badge Seed Counter Method This method will usually only be used if you are using Access Vision and Access Vision Imaging to issue your badges The seed counter option provides a way to 1 Automatically generate a unique Id number for each badge 2 Automatically generate the badge Id BID number for each badge optional 3 If using Access Vision keep count of the number of times a person s badge has been re issued 4 If using Access Vision Imaging keep count of the number of times a person s badge has been printed In order to use this feature the seed counter must be selected at the time of base installation The base installation will ask you a series of questions to help you set up the seed counter options The setup can only be done at installation Refer to Appendix G in the Picture Perfect 2 0 Installation Guide for more information If enabled three new fields will appear on the Badges form Reissue Count Reprint Count and Unique Id Refer to the section The Badges Form on page 14 10 for a complete explanation of these fields Issuing a Temporary Badge You may replace a permanent badge with a temporary badge when an employee forgets or misplaces their permanent badge The permanent badge will be suspended the categories and employee details will be copied to the tempo
289. elect new settings in the configuration screen 1 Select Devices then Ports 2 Use the Ports form to configure each port Unless your installation has dial up micros select None for Modem Type and do not enter a phone number See The Ports Form on page 4 11 for a description of each field 3 Click Save gt To setup a network micro communication line Perform the following steps to configure a communication line To change an existing configuration display the desired record then follow the same steps to select new settings in the configuration screen 1 Select Devices then Network Micro Ports 2 Use the Network Micro Ports form to configure each port Simply enter a description for the port and either the IP address or the host name of the network micro See The Network Micro Ports Form on page 4 16 for a description of each field 3 Click Save The Ports Form The Ports form supports dynamic configuration for all fields on this form except tty Dynamic configuration means that you can configure ports without having to restart the Picture Perfect system If you change the tty name you must restart Picture Perfect Refer to Figure 4 5 for the Ports form The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence to follow 2 ie D 2 kc NOTE An asterisk
290. elects a response the response and the alarm event automatically route to the log Pre written responses save time but if none of the responses on the picklist are appropriate the operator can type a unique alarm response Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles o 5 a gt D D 3 a Alarms Use the Alarms form to define each alarm both physical alarms such as door forced open and logical alarms such as invalid badge Define the alarm priority whether or not it can be scheduled how the alarm inputs and outputs reset where it is routed and which alarm instructions display when the alarm occurs These entries form a picklist that is used in the Input Groups form where alarms are assigned to a specific input group See The Input Groups Form on page 9 4 sobessow AVAIOY wey Setup gt To define an alarm 1 Select Devices then Alarms 2 Click New 3 Complete the Alarms form For details on completing each field see The Alarms Form on page 8 6 4 Click Save 5 Click New to add another alarm Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 8 5 Alarms The Alarms Form The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete The list
291. em all terminals including the host console are graphics terminals Operating Features e UNIX like Operating System AIX or Linux provides multitasking multi user capabilities Multiple tasks can be performed by multiple users simultaneously An operator can view several windows at once e Host System architecture is powerful enough to support the operating system and relational database management systems e Graphical Menu Driven Operator Interface almost completely frees you from the keyboard Color menus and pop up windows provide various options which lead to input forms screens where you can 2 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide System Overview 2 l add change or delete information Menus use icons symbolic pictures rather than text so you can point and click with a mouse to select a task or operation Pop Up Window Alarm Messages appear on whatever form screen is currently displayed You can continue with the current form or exit to an alarm response form Online Help HTML based Click the Help button to display a pop up help window for any form or picklist Help constitutes an on line reference manual that explains every window and field in each form Powerful Query Function Picture Perfect uses Informix Dynamic Server a relational database management system RDBMS with a query function that reduces the need for printed reports The RDBMS frees you from canned search criteria Use the Find a
292. ems form Direct and network micros require a port assignment see Chapter 10 Micros Printer ports have already been configured in the Picture Perfect installation procedure The user must set up the printer queue on the Printers form Prerequisites Your installer completes the initial hardware and software installation The Picture Perfect software provides forms that you fill out to fit your configuration Some of the forms contain default information that you can change as required What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to define modems ports network ports printers routings terminals system parameters departments and micro communication lines A physical printer was configured with an adapter and port specified during the Picture Perfect installation so all you need to provide is a printer description and printer queue For example the adapter for a parallel printer is a Standard I O Parallel Port Adapter The adapter port for a serial printer may be one of two standard serial ports or one of the ports on the multi port adapter EJ D 02 D e kc Many of the port characteristics for micro communication lines are already configured at the time of installation so all you need to provide is a port description tty number and line settings If the port supports dial up micros you specify a phone number and modem type If your system uses Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 1 Te
293. en Facility 2 In the Description field enter a unique text description For example Facility X 3 Click Save 4 Repeat step 2 and step 3 for Facility Y and Facility Z Result The Facility records will look similar to the following Figure 5 7 Facility X Facility betsparky Figure 5 8 Facility Y Figure 5 9 Facility Z 5 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Facilities and Facility Profiles 5 Step 2 Defining Facility Profiles gt To create the Update Badges facility profile 1 2 Select Control then Facility Profile In the Description field type Update Badges Click the box next to the label Menu Result A list of menu items will display Select as a Menu item Access Result In the box below a list of forms will display From the list of forms select Badges For Record permissions select Update To set the desired Field permissions click Toggle On View and Update column Click Save Result The Update Badges facility profile record will look similar to the following APRRRA Facility Profile betsparky Update Bz Figure 5 10 Update Badge Facility Profile Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 15 ov Q 7 Linking Facilities Facility Profiles Permissions and Operators gt To create the View Operator facility profile 1 2 3 Select Control then Facility Profile In the Desc
294. ended Routing button to display the Routings picklist Select the desired routing for a suspended badge read then click Close Lost Routing Click the Lost Routing button to display the Routings picklist Select the desired routing for a lost badge read then click Close Unknown Routing Click the Unknown Routing button to display the Routings picklist Select the desired routing for an unknown badge read then click Close Antipassback Routing Click the Antipassback Routing button to display the Routings picklist Select the desired routing for a valid antipassback transaction then click Close Route Definition Click the Route Definition button to display the Route Definitions picklist Select the desired Route Definition for this area then click Close This Route Definition is used for Activity Monitor routing If this field is left blank this area s activity will be routed to all terminals sealy souoba ye9 Ps D f Q D o f 5 Q s e Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 19 Areas Categories If the Increased Category feature was selected during installation 32 categories can be assigned to an area or an area event Otherwise only 10 categories can be assigned This list box contains the active categories ordered by slot number To access an area a badge must match at least one category that is assigned to that area NOTE This field is position sensitive when used in
295. ened Valid no passage One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy count is at least two M2MR category type NOT None door IS opened One APB T amp A IN occupancy count incremented by one One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy count is at least two M2MR category type IS None but valid on area Valid door locked One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy count is at least two M2MR category type IS None and category not on area No Categ Match One valid badge swipe on OUT reader when occupancy countis at least three and there would NOT be two Team Members left in the room Valid door locked One valid badge swipe on OUT reader when occupancy countis at least three and there would be two Team Members left in the room door NOT opened Valid no passage One valid badge swipe on OUT reader when occupancy countis at least three and there would be two Team Members left in the room door IS opened One APB T amp A OUT occupancy count decremented by one Two valid badge swipes on OUT reader when occupancy count is two within Specified reader interval time door NOT opened Valid no passage 21 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Two Man Rule and Modified Two Man Rule 21 Table 21 1 Badge Transactions for Occupancy Counting and Two Man Rule Features 2MR Mode Badge Event Description Badge Transaction Generated Two valid
296. ent Floors did not change because they T are outside the range of defined na floors 20 2 Press on Increment Floors button Figure 22 10 Example of Increment Floors gt To reset the default floor labels Floor 1 Floor n corresponding to floors 1 n a o lt o9 m fe O S 1 Click the Increment Floors or Decrement Floors button 2 Enter 1 as the Starting Floor Number 3 Enter 0 or blank as the Increment or Decrement value Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 15 Elevator Control Setup 4 Press Enter Example 2 To set up an elevator that will access 64 floors described as Basement Parking Lobby and Floor 2 through Floor 62 3 Enter Starting Floor Number as 4 1 Type in descriptions Basement Parking Lobby Floor 1 Floor 2 Floor 3 Floor 4 Floor Floor 6 Floor 7 Floor 6 Floor 9 Floor 10 Floor 11 Increment Floors Decrement Floors Starting Floor Number 4 Decrement Value Al 4 Enter Decrement Value as 2 This will resultin Floor 4 displaying a description of Floor 2 4 2 2 Press on Decrement Floors button Close Figure 22 11 Example of Decrement Floors Configuration Type Select one of the following types e Micro DO See To Set Up Example 2 in a Micro DO Configuration on page 22 17 e Reader DO See To
297. ent Input Group 0 008 9 10 Input Groups Form with Picklists c 9 11 Common Micro SetuD eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 10 2 Example of Direct Communication Uni directional MICKOS 4 upomina Gea eat ee eH e 10 4 Example of Direct Communication Bi directional MICKOS sete e ett net ie ote alas ett aa ae Sundae 10 4 Example of Dial Up Communication 2 55 10 5 Sample Ethernet Configuration 0 eeeeeeeee 10 8 Sample Token Ring Configuration cceee 10 9 Micro Configuration ccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeenteeeeeees 10 17 Micros Form Top Left 10 18 Micros Form Bottom 10 20 Dial Up Window ceceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeteeteeteeeaees 10 22 Micros Form Right Times in Seconds 10 25 The Keys FOrm ens a uane a a 10 28 Micro Flash EPROM Upgrade Menu 200 11 3 Begin Flash Download cccceeeesseeeeeeenteeeeeenaes 11 4 Available Hex Files ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 11 5 MicTool FlashTool Main Screen 11 7 OP laSh eis iret ashes nated ot einai 11 9 Network eFlash File Popup eeseeeeeeeees 11 10 Default eFlash File Popup eseseeeeeeeeeees 11 11 Outputs FOrm aiiiar ii eiei aE 12 3 xviii Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide List of Figures Figure 12 2 32DI DO Board Addressing Scheme 0008 12 6 Figure 12 3 Outputs
298. ents of the backup cfg file is package name directory or file to back up base cas forms base cas lists base home install profile Options The cba command line options are c character mode b backup a archive r force rollover on history archive only rt retry rollover of times default is 100 d file write to the specified disk file t tape write to dev pptape D f floppy write to dev fd0 A vV verify that data was written successfully p np do not prompt for tapes if specified with c nb run from netback a a Tables S The following tables can be backed up b or archived a badge ba badge table badge history base b basic database hist ba all three history tables image b badge photos and related files graph b alarm graphics if installed tour b guard tours if installed thist ba tour history if installed visitor b visitor tables if installed vhist ba visitor history if installed alarm a alarm history oper a operator history Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 18 7 Performing Backups NOTE F Scheduling Backups NOTE Perform Backup gt To launch the cba backup option 1 Open a Terminal window 2 Type acommand including options for example to backup and verify the base Picture Perfect package to a disk file type cba c b v d tmp basebackup base badge Enter Result The cba backup option will back up the fil
299. equires major updates to one or more micro configurations The host dials the micro to send a reset request when an operator uses CMENU to reset a micro NOTE Before the reset sequence starts the micro terminates the call and disconnects to free the communications line after reset the micro dials the host to request its 7 database and configuration Micro Poll The host can poll micros that have not communicated with the host for a user defined time period A zero Polling Interval setting tells the host that no polling is required See Polling Interval on page 10 26 Network Micros A network micro requires an ethernet or token ring connection to the host A network micro with the optional dial up backup feature also requires a PCMCIA modem card in the other available slot a dedicated phone line and one or more compatible modems attached to the host port in addition to the network lines Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 7 o 22 a 5 c o O T Micros 10 Figure 10 6 Sample Token Ring Configuration Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 9 Associating Micro Alarms and Output Groups with Input Groups Associating Micro Alarms and Output Groups with Input Groups When a micro error condition occurs an alarm message is generated Each error condition alarm should be associated with an input group which can then trigger an associated output For examp
300. ered trademark of Linus Torvalds Motif is a registered trademark of Open Software Foundation NCD Terminal is a registered trademark of Network Computing Devices Inc PC Xware is a registered trademark of NCD Software X Window System X XII are registered trademarks of Massachusetts Institute of Technology Contents Contents 1 Using This Manual ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 1 1 PUP OSE iniesta ae aoa aaa Ee Sn E 1 1 Who Should Read this Manual ccccccseseeeeeeeees 1 1 Terminolo gyesre nia a a e 1 1 E Sa T E E E E ar ET E E 1 1 Select iima E OEA 1 1 O PLESS eas scsedesteves chabetaeet ante esos Retin Rowen aes 1 2 S Comma hd a a a A Bannan 1 2 2 Toggle cia eena RRA EANN 1 2 z Notational and Typographical Conventions 1 3 Related Documentation cccccccscccesscecssseeessseeesseeeens 1 4 2 System OvervieW eccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 Introduci n eea AA R 2 1 Operating Features piira eini aer a aS 2 2 Optional Features att reiri a E RE 2 4 SUpport Services siisii ieia daa nnan ot SE SSi Eas 2 5 Whats NeW e a a a aiey 2 5 3 Getting Started cceccseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 OV ELVA Wis isgeithes deities eerce sede a dot th ote Aia 3 1 SY SECT StartUp espn a vaste n a A ium tate 3 1 Op i E ASST biaeewnd 3 1 TOS ODIs E E E tants whdoadsisetidssUatsnen 3 3 Using the Common Desktop Environment 3 3 Main Menu and SubmenugB cccccscecessee
301. erfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control 22 j Free Access Without a Badge The free access without a badge method allows anyone to walk onto an elevator and have free access to designated floors without using a badge in any way For this method to work you must configure a Door State of unlocked for the door to each floor you want included then associate a digital output to the door See Figure 22 17 Doors Form Configured for Elevator Door on page 22 22 When this is in place the free access floor buttons will always be lit regardless of a badge swipe When a badge is swiped access is given to all floors for which the badge is valid along with the free access floors Free access without a badge can be scheduled as described in Scheduling Elevator Free Access on page 22 21 Elevator Control Setup gt To implement Elevator Control follow these steps for each access controlled elevator in the system 1 Define the maximum number of floors you want to control using the Control Parameters form Depending on the configuration this number is based on either per elevator micro or is divided between all elevator readers on a micro 2 Depending on the configuration define a Micro 5 as an elevator micro on the Devices Micros form or define a Micro 5 as a normal micro and a reader on that micro as an elevator reader on the Devices Readers form 3 Define an output for each floor on the Devices Outputs
302. erify that the reader is online and enabled Watch 2RP 8RP lights for badge read Watch the Activity Monitor for transaction messages Reader When a badge is swiped Verify the Normally Closed Open state of the door strike output the reader light changes from assigned to the reader green to red Watch the Activity Monitor for transaction messages Reader Door When a valid badge Verify that the badge is valid for the area where the reader is is swiped through the reader the assigned door does not unlock Verify that the reader is online Verify that the micro is working Verify that the door information is correct Verify input group and outputs for the door and reader Badge Error conditions are not Verify the badge routing information for the area where readers being logged to the monitor log are used Verify that badge messages are enabled for the Monitor Badge does not work for a Verify that the area is properly set up Specific area Verify that the badge is assigned a category that matches a category assigned to the area 33 22 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide In Case of Problems Table 33 1 Troubleshooting Chart Continued EJ Problem Action An operator cannot assign categories to an area badge because the categories do not appear in the picklist Verify the Permission Group for the missing category Verify the C
303. ers the capability to assign reports to report permission groups and to restrict operator report access to only those reports that the operator permission record specifies The All Groups Allowed permission group gives an operator full access to all Report groups Each permission group created with the Report type will appear on the Report Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 6 1 Permission Groups permission group picklist of the Permissions form along with the default All Groups Allowed CATEGORY AND AREA CATEGORY AND AREA A PERMISSION GROUPS PERMISSION OPERATOR GROUPS REPORT PERMISSION REPORT eee Figure 6 1 Relationship Between Permissions and Permission Groups If you want to divide responsibilities among operators create several different permission groups a separate permission group for each group of categories and or areas Forexample Building 1 Building 2 Building 3 Then remove the special permission group All Groups Allowed and assign one or more of the newly created permission groups An operator can have permission to assign up to 20 Category and Area groups and if enabled five Report groups Refer to Figure 6 2 for the Perm Group form Setup gt To define Permission Group records 1 Select Control then Perm Group 2 Complete the Permission Groups form For a description of each field see The Permission Group Form on page 6 3 3 Click Save 6 2 Picture Perfect 2 0
304. erview A backup of your access control database should be performed periodically The system allows you to back up the database to diskette tape or disk file If your system has the optional packages installed use separate diskettes or tapes to back up each database because each backup initializes the diskette or tape Recommended During initial system setup perform a daily backup Every day during initial setup new inputs outputs and alarms are configured and new badge data is entered Regular backups will protect this setup process The system stores badge transactions alarm events and operator activity in online history tables When the online history table for an activity is almost full the system displays an Archive Alert pop up window with a w message to archive the records of that particular table If you prefer to S archive data on a regular schedule a Force Rollover option can be used a instead This lets you archive a table even if it hasn t reached its threshold be point a F NOTE An operator must remove the tape or diskette after the backup to prevent it from 3 being overwritten F What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to perform an archive back up the database restore the database and recover the entire system Backup Options Diskettes may be appropriate for installations with small databases Another option for backing up large amounts of data storage is tape While slow b
305. es 40 Reader Events Schedule Reader See Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes Events 41 Door Events Schedule Door Events See Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes 42 Alarm Events Schedule Alarm Events See Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes 43 Input Group Schedule InGroups See Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes Events Events 44 Output Group Schedule O utG roups See Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes Events Events 45 Backup Events Schedule Backup Events See Chapter 18 Backup and Restore 46 Report Events Schedule Reports Events See Chapter 19 History Reports 47 User Customization User Cutomization Utility See Chapter 31 User Customization Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 27 9 E 5 Co ie re D mi D 2 System Setup Procedures NOTES 3 28 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup Chapter Overview Initial setup defines the system hardware configuration as well as message routing and department information Your installation may include direct dial up and or network micros Ports for direct communication and ports for dial up communication are user defined and configured on the Ports form Ports for network communication are user defined and configured on the Network Micro Ports form The port on the host used for dial up micros requires an attached modem and a phone number The dial up micro requires an attached modem user defined on the Mod
306. es 27 3 Alarm Response Window ceeceeeeeeeeeeees 27 3 Alarm Response Window with Responses Picklist 27 4 Alarm Response Window with Response Too LONG Warning sisses niarren aian 27 5 Alarm Response Window with Logged and New ReSponSeS oinei e nisnin di iiaee iinde taati 27 6 Alarm Response Window with Remove Function Disabled ciciec ceneccdecchivl ccs aeeiecdodtedacededtelaeccecaaes 27 7 Purge All Alarms Window n 27 8 Control Outputs WindOw cccceeeeeeeeteeeeeees 27 8 Activity Monitor Window with Monitor Control Pickl Stie anini vaaia eiai E aAA E N aaa 28 4 Example of a Badge Activity Message 00 28 4 Example of an Operator Activity Message 28 5 Example of a Swipe and Show Activity Message 28 7 Control Outputs Form cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 29 2 Progression of Windows in Control Outputs Form 29 4 Status FON gives Seta a E 30 2 Progression of Windows for Status by Micro 30 2 Progression of Windows for Status by Area 30 3 Sample Door Status erde eiaeaen esaea 30 4 Badge Holder Customization ccccceereereee 31 1 User Fields Window from Badges Form 5 31 2 User Fields in Departments Form 0 000 31 3 User Customization Window cceeeeeeeeenees 31 4 Language Selection Dialog ccceeeeeeeeeeee 31 6 Table Selection Dialog eeceeeeeceeeeeeeeneees 31 7 Change Field Di
307. es contained in the backup cfg file Be sure to include options when using the command line cba option If you fail to do so if you type cba the system will try to launch the Picture Perfect graphical Backup feature The Schedule Backup feature allows you to schedule a system backup to pre selected media The backup will then run automatically at the day and time settings specified on the Backup Events form The backup can go to either tape diskette or disk file and can include one or more of the following backup types badge table base system history tables and any optional packages such as Alarm Graphics tables The scheduled backup will not span multiple diskettes or tapes and there will be no prompt for inserting the backup media Before the backup is to take place an operator must make sure that the correct media is properly inserted All error messages and completion messages generated as a result of the scheduled backup process will be written to a log file in the cas log directory called bak mmdd where mmdd system date example bak 0302 March 2nd You must check the bak log file for messages after the scheduled backup process has executed since there are no pop up window messages associated with this feature Archives of Badge Alarm or Operator History cannot be scheduled Refer to Figure 18 5 for the Backup Events form 18 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide gt To schedule a System Backup
308. es on that line Between the host and the first micro and between each micro is a hyphen The absence of a hyphen indicates that the communications path is broken somewhere in that segment If a micro has been configured or placed offline by the host the micro s ID is displayed in normal intensity Micros that are in true online pending online or pending offline state are displayed in high intensity Process Control Block Micro Map PRI PORT MICRO MAP SEC PORT TYPE tty2 Jo00 0001 0002 Direct tty5 0128 0078 1492 Direct tty 4001 Direct Screen 1 of 1 Press lt Fi gt for HELP Figure 33 6 Micro Map Context Sensitive Help There are several options available when viewing the Micro Map screen Press 1 or for a list of these options 33 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide In Case of Problems 33 l Multiple Pages If your system is configured with more than 10 serial lines additional pages of lines can be accessed by pressing Page Down or f to display the next page of information To move back to a previous page press Page Up or b Moving About the Screen To view the detailed communications status or to run a full communications trace on a micro you must first select the micro The arrow keys can be used to move the cursor to the micro whose status or communications trace you want to view After the cursor is located at the micro press F2 or t to start tracing packets to and from th
309. es sic nseeiaatians aelorline nia Meieoui ieee aes D 12 REStLICH ONS 92 eni ses eat cacdar och costa AERAN D 13 Appendix E Using the vi Editor E 1 OVCEVICW fides Ses hated ncaa Mia tnnhen piston ais E 1 DV GSS 2 cialis acest entane taste anitesd E Eei E 1 Changing Modesa osean eroa a E 1 Command Mode Functions ccccccesseeceseeeenees E 2 Ex Mode Functions iiisccccsssiivcesaciscoresnsseccesisaceiavesoene E 3 Editing the etc hosts File gacsessssess vices comeonewaeinven E 3 Appendix F Alarm Routing and Bumping Using Picture Perfect Web Browser cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees F 1 OVER VIC Wi EE eve AEE A AEA F 1 Appendix G Micro Facility Assignment TOO cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees G 1 VICE VIO W voice eroinei EEE A EERE EEEE G 1 Running the Tool wsiicsiewecsvcsasvosntiattevasscnvendeeestsreciocs G 1 Appendix H Flow Diagrams aassssassnsnnnnnn H 1 Picture Perfect System Flow Diagram 00 H 1 Picture Perfect Valid Badge Read Flow Diagram H 2 Example of a Communications Failure Detected via Mitro sti iactautiay lava spuria H 3 Example of a Bad Badge Detected by an Area H 3 Example of a Door Forced Condition Detected Dy a Doo nisiinntinvaiiciiank iinn H 4 xvi Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Contents Example of a Problem Condition Detected by a Sensor DI and Triggering Both an Alarm and a Physical Output DO H 4 Exampl
310. esseeeesseeeens 3 4 FON Sa antenen otetiaseccsavande n aa 3 6 Text BOXES ennha a a a ao n at 3 6 Toggle Buttons sssesessesissssesesesesesssesesiseeresesesss 3 7 Radio DUCOIS ss a tcctetinl arts hoereedeasa a NaN 3 7 Selection Buttons and Picklists cccceeeeeeee 3 7 Using Function ButlOnsiincisiiinaiiuatdeatontaiensiadennans 3 9 Adding or Changing Data iascicssisscsndsrsiecciessndastesnees 3 14 Usine a Mouse itai e a e ites 3 14 Using a Windowsni neona n R 3 15 The Tite Baf onien ninae a 3 15 The Window Frame seeeeeeesesereeeesrerrreserrsssrrrrssree 3 16 The Scroll Bars rriat ana aeai 3 17 Using the Window Menu s ssessssssesesesesssssseseseseeses 3 18 Using the Workspace Menu ssss ssssssssessessssessesessesees 3 19 Using the Programs Menu ssesssssesessssesssseeresesesess 3 19 Using the Clients Ment siccccsiudicenindintgns ii 3 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide iii Contents Stopping Picture Pertectsy sin scisttcantiaicctatshiaases 3 21 Starting Picture Perlect 2 lscaeh smn niente entra 3 21 Verify that Picture Perfect is Stopped or RUNM ia tines ion ceria EAEE EI EAEE Eea ates 3 22 Shutting Down the Entire System ccceeeeeees 3 24 Frequently Used Unix Command cece 3 25 System Setup PROCEUULCS sc teh Weds se stidtieat adeatnaen 3 26 Initial S tUp ieee ee ales 4 1 OV CL VICW vied ei aciaien acedas tatiana cashtaacscaastet be vith sadeanteids etavans 4 1 Prereg isit S sorie
311. est release of firmware that is present on your PC To flash an older version of firmware or to flash boot code you will need to click MicoFiash to access a picklist 3 For detailed information on how to use FlashTool click Help to access the online help table of contents or press 1 to display context sensitive help Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 11 7 eFlash eFlash This download procedure can be used with Picture Perfect version 2 0 host systems or later The eFlash download program is installed as part of the base Picture Perfect 2 0 product and can be run on stand alone systems network subhosts and on the primary host of a redundant system On a networked system eFlash should not be installed on the network host since it can not be run there It can run on all subhosts simultaneously and is capable of flashing the micros connected to each subhost Features e eFlash is a new flash method which does not require the micro to be in maintenance mode while the flash code is being downloaded e Flashes Micro 5 PX Micro 5 PXN M PX 2000 and M PXN 2000 micros e All communication is handled by the host Limitations e Micros must already have been flashed with Picture Perfect micro firmware version 2 0 or later Operation NOTE eFlash can be run either from a Graphical User Interface the default or from the unix command line Operating eFlash in a Graphical Mode To flash a micro us
312. estore Customer s Database from Tape option 4 Restore Customer s Database from Diskette or option 5 Restore Customer s Database from Disk File depending on your media type and reload your database backup rather than the minimum or sample database Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 18 13 Recovering the Entire System NOTES 18 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide History Reports Chapter 19 Overview The Picture Perfect system captures history information for alarms badges and operator activity This information can then be manipulated into various reports that can be viewed on screen or sent to a printer Alarm History includes acknowledged alarms Badge History includes access attempts by valid invalid lost and suspended badges plus Swipe and Show transactions on readers Operator History includes database changes logins control outputs alarm graphics and Swipe and Show record changes to output state What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to control which activities go to history how to view history how to format reports how to use selection criteria how to save reports how to print reports and how to schedule reports Controlling Which Activities Go to History The History Log is online history and is one of the destinations specified by routing instructions used throughout the system You can set up routing control information to direct selected operator ac
313. et On Duration 0x08 Reset On Input Reader 0x01 Reader Online P 0x02 Enable Reader 0x04 Enable Shunting y 0x08 Inhibit Schedule Changes 2 0x10 Toggle Reader Q 0x20 Limited Usage a 0x40 Elevator Reader Scheduling an SQL Report If there are certain SQL reports that you want to run at specific times you can use the scheduling feature to run these automatically The scheduled report will follow the day and time settings specified on the Report Events form Figure 20 13 NOTE f A report that contains variables cannot be scheduled All error messages and completion messages generated as a result of the scheduled report process will be written to a log file in the cas log directory called log mmdd where mmdd system date example log 0302 March 2nd You must check the log file for messages after the scheduled report process has executed since there are no pop up window messages associated with this feature This scheduling feature can be used for both History and SQL reports and they can be run together or separately Each report type will have a prefix in the log file to indicate its execution History reports will have a prefix of hist and SQL reports will have a prefix of ppsql Setup gt To schedule an SQL Report 1 Define your report through the SQL form and save it under the desired name Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 23 Scheduling an SQL Report NOTE F Select Schedule
314. ew This chapter provides information on advanced options that may be configured at the time of installation Some of these options are already configured by default but you may wish to modify the settings Other options are not configured but you may wish to implement them Each of the options will be discussed in more detail in the following sections Multiple Tape Support This option enables your Picture Perfect system to support multiple tape devices During installation of the Picture Perfect base package a shell script pptapesetup is run which creates links to two tape devices By default the rewind device is dev pptape and the no rewind device is dev pptapenr If your system has only one tape device do not change these default settings If more than one tape device is detected by the shell script an ASCII text configuration file cas db text tape cfg is created which contains a tape definition for each tape device on the system The shell script pptapesetup can be run at any time to reconfigure the tape devices on your Picture Perfect system If multiple tape devices are present on the system the default will depend upon the application accessing the tape device When an application attempts to access a tape device the application searches fora tape cfg file If it does not find the file the default tape devices dev pptape and dev pptapenr are used Ifa tape cfg file is found the file is read and you will be prompted for
315. f all inputs in the group must activate to trigger the group For additional information on each field display the online Help form or see The Input Groups Form on page 9 4 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group The Input Groups Form The following is a list of fields on the Input Groups Ingroups form The list is in the order that the fields appear There is no required sequence to follow Refer to Figure 9 2 for the Ingroups form 9 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Input and Output Groups 9 al gt G d m m a quit save find view new help Record ill of 36 Found Prev Next DESen pon 00 1 00 READER oye _ Boolean Type Alarm lt BLANK gt _ Trigger on Any OR acitity GLOBAL _ Trigger on All AND Parent Input Group 1 lt BLANK gt Trigger on Input Individual Earentinput Groupies BEANE a Parent Input Group 3 lt BLANK gt Input Group Control Output Group 1 00 1 00 READER j Output Group 2 lt BLANK gt Input Group State Enabled 2 Disabled Output Group 3 lt BLANK Open Condition _ Detected Ignored ia z Output Group 4 lt BLANK gt Short Condition _ Detected Ignored E Broadcast State Changes _ Yes C No Cpa lt ERIS i 3 Figure 9 2 InGroups Form Description a Type a Description of the Input Group usu
316. f fields that may require additional information for you to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence to follow Refer to Figure 13 13 for the top portion of the Doors form NOTE Depending on the features required for each door all fields may or may not be applicable Doors orion jajajaja e Pree Nex 00 1 00 LOBBY DOOR Figure 13 13 Doors Form Top Door Values Define the door and the times allowed before alarms are enabled Description Type a door description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Unlock Time secs Enter the number of seconds that this door may remain unlocked due to a valid badge read or an exit button being pushed This field controls how long the door strike is unlocked for the badgeholder to open the door After that the Allowable Open Time controls how long the badgeholder may keep the door open while the badgeholder is passing through sealy souobaj e9 A D f Q D S Q w 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 35 Doors Forced Open Shunt Time secs Enter the number of seconds that the Door Forced Open alarm will be shunted before an alarm is generated When the shunt time expires the Door Forced Open alarm is enabled The number of seconds set here must be greater than the Unlock Time This field controls how long a door strike will remain unlocked after the U
317. f indexed fields on the Badges form include Last Name m Employee ID and Badge Encode Number 3 Complete the Badges form for the fields that require updating For details on completing each field see The Badges Form on page 14 10 4 Click Save Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 5 Changing a Badge Status to Deleted Changing a Badge Status to Deleted When you delete a badge the badge record remains in the database since it might still be referenced in badge history but it no longer grants access This section shows you how to give the badge deleted status not how to remove the badge record from the database To remove the badge record from the database see Removing Badge Records below The badge must be changed to deleted status using this procedure before the badge record can be removed from the database To change a badge status to deleted 1 2 Select Access then Badges When the Badges form appears enter search criteria in one or more fields to locate the badge you want to delete Click Find If more than one badge is found click Prev or Next until the correct badge profile appears Click Deleted in the Badge Status box Although the badge no longer grants access the badge record remains in the database Click Save 14 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 i Removing Badge Records CAUTION This procedure removes badge records from the databa
318. fault to this facilty unless they are specifically assigned to another facility Facility Primary Port Displays the selected primary port for micro communications Click the Primary Port button to display the Ports picklist Select the primary port to which this micro is wired then click Close Uni directional micros require a primary port assignment and None specified for the secondary port Bi directional micros require both a primary and a secondary port assignment Dial up micros do not require a port assignment assign None to both the primary and secondary port Secondary Port Displays the selected secondary port for micro communications Click the Secondary Port button to display the Ports picklist Select the secondary port that will be activated if communication is lost on the primary line then click Close Upstream Micro Displays the selected upstream micro Click the Upstream Micro button to display the Micros picklist Select the micro or host that is upstream from this micro then click Close Downstream Micro Displays the selected downstream micro Click the Downstream Micro button to display the Micros picklist Select the micro or host or None that is downstream from this micro then click Close Dial Up Click the Dial Up button to display the Dial Up pop up window containing fields for dial up communications Figure 10 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 21 Adding or C
319. field is blank the route point is valid for all system modes gt o gt oO gt lt 5 fe Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 7 7 Route Points NOTE F If you are following the setup sequence recommended in Chapter 3 the Mode picklist will only show the default Normal and Holiday modes See Creating Modes on page 16 2 to create your own custom modes then return to this procedure to assign routing points for that mode Route Point Rules and Restrictions There may be times when you question whether an alarm should or should not appear on the Alarm Monitor Since a system configured for Alarm Activity Monitor Routing may consist of many route points it is possible for two route points to have conflicting route terminals For example assume that Route Point A and Route Point B belong to Route Definition A Route Point A explicitly routes all alarms to no terminals whereas Route Point B explicitly routes all alarms to all terminals In this case Route Point B has precedence Because of the many possible combinations of terminals start times stop times bump terminals bump times and modes it may be confusing as to where an alarm or activity should be routed The following lists some rules and restrictions that may be used to configure or troubleshoot Alarm Activity Monitor Routing e If there is a terminal route conflict between two route points the route point that disp
320. fine an operator s language follow these steps 1 Select Control then Operators from the Main menu 2 Define anew operator as described in Chapter 6 Permissions and Operators or use the Find button to find an existing operator definition 3 Click the Country button and select a language from the list of available languages displayed 4 Click the Save button to save the operator record 32 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide National Language Support 32 l Selecting The Primary Language The following command changes the primary language The primary language must be an available language Any user with root permission can invoke this tool by typing the following at the command line chprlang locale where locale is the new primary language s locale identifier The following example sets the primary language to French 92 c Ke xo fe gt z at O gt eo c fet chprlang fr FR Selecting Login Screen Language On installation the Picture Perfect Login screen is set to English The chxdmlang command changes the language used by the screen It should only be run after the buildlang command is used to install the language s catalogs and resource files The system must be rebooted for the change to take effect Any user with root permission can invoke this tool by typing the following at the command line chxdmlang locale where locale is the locale ide
321. fine communication port characteristics such as communication retries polling interval port assignment and micro address The micro address set in the software must match the micro address in the hardware Several Picture Perfect forms are used in these configurations Picture Perfect supports Dynamic Configuration that is micros can be configured without having to restart the Picture Perfect system or the micro However there are some rules that must be met which will be discussed later in this chapter Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites Forms Purpose MODEMS To allow modems to be associated with micros PORTS To allow a serial port to be assigned to a micro NETWORK PORTS To allow a network port to be assigned to a micro ALARMS To allow alarms to be associated with a micro s input groups INPUT GROUPS To allow input groups to be associated with each micro error condition so that these conditions can trigger an alarm and or output groups Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 1 What You Will Be Doing What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to 1 Configure the micro for dial up and network communications using the Ports form and the Network Micro Ports form 1 Associate micro error conditions with input groups and link them to the micro using the e Alarms form to configure the micro alarm that you want to appear i
322. for the following can be generic that is one input group and alarm can be used by all doors for forced held and pre alarm Forced Open Click the Forced Open button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the desired input group then click Close Be sure the Forced Open Monitoring field of the Door Control box is set to Detected 13 38 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i Held Open Click the Held Open button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the desired input group then click Close Be sure the Held Open Sensing field of the Door Control box is set to Detected Pre Alarm Click the Pre Alarm button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the desired input group then click Close Be sure the Pre Alarm field of the Door Control box is set to Enabled Refer to Figure 13 15 for the bottom right hand portion of the Doors form Figure 13 15 Doors Form Bottom Right Door s Area Click the Door s Area button to display the Areas picklist Select the desired area for this door then click Close If a reader is associated with this door select the same area that is assigned to the reader Strike Output Click the Strike Output button to display the Outputs picklist Select the desired door strike output associated with this door then click Close The door output is a digital output DO point associated with sealy souobaj e9 A oi eS Q O
323. form 4 Fora Reader DI DO configuration define an input for each floor on the Devices Inputs form 5 Define the type of elevator configuration the number of floors for the elevator and assign an output and an input in the case of a Reader DI DO configuration to each floor on the Devices Elevator form 6 Define sets of floors for categories on the Devices Category Floors form m lt D fj Q O fe 5 z 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 7 Elevator Control Setup Defining the Number of Floors Use the Control Parameters form to specify the maximum number of elevator floors on a micro Figure 22 3 This number could be per elevator Micro DO configuration or it could be distributed between up to 16 elevators Reader DO or Reader DI DO configurations This number will then be used as the default on the Elevator form and will apply to all the elevators defined in the system The maximum number of floors serviced by a micro elevator is 64 See The Parameters Form on page 4 27 Figure 22 3 Number of Floors Field on Parameters Form Defining Micros Required for Micro DO Configuration Only Use the Devices Micros form to define the micro type as an Elevator for each micro used with an elevator in the Picture Perfect system Figure 22 4 Only a Micro 5 should be designated as an elevator micro See The Micros Form on page 10 18 Figure 22 4 Type Field on Micros Fo
324. front of cursor i Append text after cursor a Move down one cursor position j Move up one cursor position k Move left one cursor position h Move right one cursor position Undo last change u Undo all changes to current line U Save file and exit ZZ Go to beginning of next line Go to beginning of current line 0 Go to beginning of file 1G Go to end of file G Scroll Forward one page Cn f Scroll back one page Cr b Delete current line dd E 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Ex Mode Functions The following tables lists some of the functions available when in Ex mode Table E 3 Ex Mode Functions Function Key Stroke Quit without saving q Save and Quit wq Editing the etc hosts File Follow the steps below to add the internet addresses of the Host machine and one for the Workstation gt Q lt o O D Q O Q o mp 5 1 At the system console login as root 2 Toopenthe etc hosts file using vi type vi etc hosts Result The beginning of the file will display You can enter the address anywhere in the file but to make the file understandable add the address in order 3 To move forward one screen at a time press and Continue pressing until you have reached the correct section 4 Move to the line where you would like to enter the address You can enter the address above or bel
325. g five slots may be configured to meet your site requirements with any combination of boards within the limits listed above Strike DOs are 0 to 1 Aux DOs are 8 to 9 Digital Output Board DOs are 16 to 31 Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist By default the output record will be assigned the same facility as the micro to which the output is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign an output s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Enable Output Toggle the button On if this output is to be activated when its output group triggers Normally Open The inactive state of an output is either normally open or normally closed Toggle this button On if it is normally open Ej o Z f 5 2a O gt Z NOTE Ask your installer how the output point is wired Door DOs are usually wired F normally open Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 12 7 Outputs ajajaa 8 S Saas free Next MICRO 0 541 0 F ro Select an Output Group MICRO 0 541 0 00 1 00 READER i 0 1 M2MR output 00 1 00 READER Refresh Cancel Help Figure 12 3 Outputs Form with Micro and Output Group Picklists Reset on Dura
326. g the badge with the assigned encode number and 3 using wedge readers To issue a badge using the manual method 1 Select Access then Badges 14 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Auto Generate Method Site encodable badges only The system uses unique information in a designated user field on the Badges form to generate a Badge Encode Number using a hidden algorithm The designation of which user field controls this is made in the Position for Auto Generate field on the Parameters form Prerequisite Display Flags on page 4 30 Parameters form must be set Badges 14 j Click New Type the badge encode number into the Badge Encode Number box Complete the Badges form For details on completing each field see The Badges Form on page 14 10 Click Save sobpeg to display the Auto Generate button on the Badges form gt To issue a badge using the Auto Generate method 1 2 Select Access then Badges Click New Click the User Fields button to display the user fields The number of user fields displayed is determined during installation Type a unique value in the user field represented by the number set in Position for Auto Generate on page 4 32 usually User Field 1 The default value for this field is 27 Click the Auto Generate button The badge number will appear in the Badge Encode Number box Complete the Badges form For details on completing each fi
327. ge Trace transactions is set up on the Parameters form Specific badges are that are to be traced are identified on the Badges form If Badge Trace is routed to the Activity Monitor a T is displayed in front of the badge to indicate that the badge is being traced If the Badge Trace is routed to the History Log it is logged as an existing badge transaction such as Open or Invalid Badge Trace Configuration To configure the Badge Trace feature select a routing for traced badges using the Card Trace Routing field of the Parameters form Figure 25 1 See Chapter 4 Initial Setup for details on completing this form Operator Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY Default Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY Card Trace Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY Figure 25 1 Badge Trace Routing Portion of Parameters Form Tracing a Badge When you want to trace a particular badge you must enable it for Card Trace on the Badges form Figure 25 2 When you no longer want to trace it you must disable Card Trace aoe1 obpeg gt To enable or disable Card Trace 1 Bring up the Access Badges form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 25 1 Tracing a Badge 2 Use the Find feature to display the desired badge record 3 Select Enabled for the Card Trace field in the Control box to trace a badge or select Disabled for this field to discontinue the Badge Trace 4 Click Save Figure 25 2 Control Portion of Badges Form 25 2 Picture
328. ge a Micro Configure Online Offline Non existent Select whether the micro is being configured Online Offline or Non existent If neither are selected the micro is configured as non existent that is not on the system Select Online to bring a micro online that was either configured offline or non existent The micro will be automatically reset when configured online Select Offline to allow this installed and connected micro to be configured before it goes online This allows normal operations to continue without interruption by a flood of unexpected error messages related to this micro Select Non existent to configure a micro that is not yet installed physically connected Once the micro is installed bring up this form and select Online to put the micro online Type Normal Elevator Select whether this is a Normal micro or an Elevator micro type Only a Micro 5 can be used with Elevator Control See Chapter 22 Elevator Control for more details on this feature NOTE An Elevator micro configured with multiple readers uses Reader 1 to control the F elevator Refer to Figure 10 9 Micros Form Bottom for the bottom portion of the Micros form Micros orion BEKAK Pree Newt Figure 10 9 Micros Form Bottom 10 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros 10 You must assign a facility to a micro Other devices such as readers and inputs that are connected to the micro will de
329. ge is used in a Limited Usage reader the usage count is decremented by 1 When the count is 0 the badge will no longer grant access into a Limited Usage reader See Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors for related information 14 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 i Refer to Figure 14 8 for the bottom left hand portion of the Badges form Dates amp Times Issue Date 12 02 97 Issue Time 08 27 00 Expiration Date lPyraepar cops Expiration Time F R Poum oate rt Tie Dates amp Times Last Access Reader lt BLANK gt User Fields Temporary Categories sobpeg Figure 14 8 Badges Form Bottom Left Dates amp Times Issue Date Type the date the badge was issued If this field is left blank the system will automatically enter the current date Type the slashes if the system date format requires them Issue Time Type the time the badge was issued If this field is left blank the system will automatically enter the current time Type the colons if the system time format requires them Expiration Date Type the date when the badge should expire The system invalidates the badge when the expiration date and time occur Type the slashes if the system date format requires them If you enter an expiration date an expiration time must also be entered For no expiration date leave blank Expiration Time Type the
330. ge numbers They are usually located near doors or gates or in elevators that the system controls Relational Database A database that uses a table structure to store data Relationships among tables are logically specified at the time of user access into the database they are not built into the data structures themselves Response Text that the operator selects or types when answering an alarm Restore To re display an iconified window Root Window The background behind all Picture Perfect windows sometimes called the desktop or workspace area where all the windows in your environment display To display the Control menu click the left mouse button on the root window drag to highlight a selection To display the Client menu click the right mouse button on the root window drag to highlight a selection SSL SSL Secure Sockets Layer is a commonly used protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the Internet SSL uses a program layer located between the Internet s Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP and Transport Control Protocol TCP layers Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide GL 7 Glossary Schedule Event A time dependent change to a mode area reader door alarm input group or output group See Operating Mode Screen The video display portion of a computer terminal or workstation Scroll Bar A graphical device used to move the contents of a window up down left or right i
331. guration MAXUSAGE A global usage percentage which a database space must exceed For example MAXUSAGE 90 DBSPACE A list of database spaces that are checked For example DBSPACE rootdbs basedbs ucsdbs MSG A message displayed in the popup Forexample MSG Your database space has exceeded 90 utilization INGRP An input group record id for an alarm generated set up by default For example INGRP 20 cas bin infopopup A binary file that extracts the message to be displayed on the popup cas db text cron tab Runs chkdbspace sh every hour at 5 minutes past the hour cas bin almsim A binary file that generates the alarm for chkdbspace sh cas bin terminalpopup A shell script that determines which terminals are defined in the database and calls infopopup for each of these terminals Resend List State In order to avoid lost messages from the host to micros when the system is taken down this feature preserves the state of the resend list Before using this option review the following restrictions e This feature is only supported in stand alone and subhost systems The Resend List State feature can be configured in the cas db text resend cfg file using the following options e Only messages with valid micro destinations will be saved and gt restored Messages sent to hosts will not be saved 2 o e Micros which are configured for offline will not have their messages 3 restored 2 O fe
332. gure 4 6 Network Micro Ports Form Description Type a port description The ports that you define here will appear ina picklist on the Micros form so that you can assign a network port to network micros None will automatically appear in the picklist so that you can indicate no secondary port 4 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide NOTE Initial Setup 4 i A typical description of a network micro port should allow an operator to identify it on the ports picklist on the Micros form It should also allow the operator to distinguish it from a serial port for example Network Micro 0 Port Host Name Type the host name of the network micro The host name of the network micro must be resolved by listed in the etc hosts file or a Domain Name Server DNS This can be either the IP address or the name Set Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles FOR FIREWALL USERS If your installation requires ANY micro and its corresponding host to communicate through a firewall the firewall must be configured to allow for connections through the following range of ports 6767 7800 See also Appendix C Firewall Configuration Currently the following ports have been designated for use Table 4 4 Firewall
333. h another column if you want a secondary sort a tertiary sort etc The order in which the columns are listed in this field determines the sort priority of each the first listed is the primary sort the second listed is the secondary sort etc 19 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide History Reports 19 i Sort Ascending Button Click this button to include a selected column on the All Columns list in the sort with data listed in ascending order such as A through Z Sort Descending Button Click this button to include a selected column on the All Columns list in the sort with data listed in descending order such as Z through A Remove Buttons Click this button to delete selected columns from the section above it Width Header These fields display the width and name of the column selected in the Display list If you want to change the width of a column on the report select that column in the Display list then overtype the data in the Width field If you want to change the name of a column on the report select that column in the Display list then overtype the data in the Header field Page This option displays the Format Page window Figure 19 8 which lets you apply headers footers and spacing commands to the current report and control the use of detail and summary lines After you have formatted your page click Ok Format Page Margins Paper Width Detail Lines Summary Lines Let 4 Top 3 No
334. hange a Micro Dial Up Modem Type Starcomm Idle Time days hours mins 30 secs Maximum Connect Time days 2 hours 30 mins secs Micro Phone Number 9 1 Micro Dialout Prefix 9 1 561 Dial on Updates Always Never Ask Operator Dial Host On Schedule Updates C Always Never s Never Callback Host C Micro C None Figure 10 10 Dial Up Window Modem Type Displays the selected modem type Click the Modem Type button to display the Modems picklist Select the type of modem to connect to at the host then click Close e For direct communication micros select None e For network micros without Dial Up select None e For network micros with Dial Up select the host modem type The modem type selected for the micro must match the modem type and baud rate indicated by the micro s DIP switch settings on Switch Bank 2 See the appropriate Installation Guide for information on DIP switch settings The modems in this list are created using the Modems form See Modems on page 4 4 for information on setting up modems Idle Time Enter the number of days hours minutes and or seconds that the line must be idle before the line is dropped This field must be greater than Host micro retries x Host micro retry interval 1 Maximum Connect Time Enter the maximum number of days hours minutes and or seconds 0 to 65536 that the micro and host may be connected 10 22 Picture Perfect 2 0 Ad
335. he Monitor Control window from the Activity Monitor form Outputs function button The Swipe And Show button is visible on the Monitor Control window only when the Image package is installed in the system When properly configured the Activity Monitor displays a photo when a valid badge read is received from a reader The photo is imported from the photo database For double badge transactions the photo is displayed when the first swipe is detected and the door is allowed to be unlocked when the second swipe is detected If Authorization Required is active a dialog allows the operator to unlock the door or advises the operator why the door cannot be unlocked If the door is allowed to be unlocked the dialog includes an Ok button and a Cancel button The Ok button unlocks the door and dismisses the dialog The Cancel button dismisses the dialog but does not unlock the door If 28 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Monitoring Activity 28 l the door is not allowed to be unlocked the dialog only shows a Close button which dismisses the dialog If the operator clicks the Ok button to unlock the door the door strike output command event is recorded in operator history Any invalid transaction denies the operator the option of unlocking the door The monitor is frozen while the photo is being displayed to allow the operator to read the text description of the transaction The text description includes the name of the
336. he fields appear on the form There is no required sequence for you to follow Refer to Figure 10 8 below for the top portion of the Micros form Micros orion GEE Figure 10 8 Micros Form Top Left Description Type a micro description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long for example Building 1 Micro 0 This micro description appears in a Micros picklist for selection on the Inputs Outputs Readers and Generator forms Micro Address Type a number from 0 to 4095 which identifies the address of this micro as set in the micro s hardware address switches Once a micro s address is set it cannot be changed 10 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros 10 Optional Currently this field is used only by Access Vision This field enables Access Vision workstations to display badge and alarm activity in the micro s local time by entering a time zone correction The time zone correction is the number of hours the micro s time is different from the host s time If the micro is west of the host the time zone correction number must be preceded by a hyphen If the micro is east of the host the time zone correction number must be preceded by a plus sign For example if your host is in New York and the micro is in California enter a 3 in this field If the host is in Austin Texas and the micro is in Boca Raton Florida enter a 1 Time Zone Correction Facility Code Type a facili
337. he toggle buttons that determine if the field can be edited or not from the selected Badges or Doors form The Form Permission Update button must be toggled On for this column to be active Toggle On View column This button will cause all of the buttons in the View column to be turned On The View column must be activated for this to take affect This means the Record Permission View button must be toggled On Toggle On View and Update column This button will cause all of the buttons in the View and Update columns to be turned On The View and Update columns must be activated for this to take affect This means the Record Permission View button in combination with the Update Insert or Delete buttons must be toggled On To toggle Off all the buttons in the View or Update column use the Record Permission View or Update button Toggling Off the Record Permission View button will reset all buttons to Off in the Field Permission View column and the Update column if appicable since Update implies View You must save the record before any changes become permanent How to Add a Facility Profile NOTE f NOTE Once created a facility profile can not be deleted You can modify the facility profile record and rename it if desired The changes are automatically reflected in any associated records To add a facility profile The default facility profile Global is created at installation time Other facility profiles ma
338. her Area Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 13 Areas The Areas Form The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete There is no required sequence for you to follow Divide your site into areas that require access control Assign an area to each reader that protects that area Before assigning categories to areas read the lock and key discussion in How Categories and Areas Work on page 13 2 Figure 13 5 Areas Form Top Description Type an area Description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long for example Lobby The lobby area may include more than one location if the facility has multiple entrances or buildings An area may be one contiguous physical space such as the Computer Room or it may be a number of separate but related spaces such as Computer Room MIS Lab Computer Vault MIS Equipment Room that require the same level of access control Area Control Use the radio buttons to specify the Area Control setting for each of the following items Physical State Enabled indicates that the system allows readers in this area to read badges Disabled indicates that the system does not allow the area s readers to operate 13 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i Logical State Online indicates that the readers in this area operate in normal mode Offline indicates that th
339. her words if the elevator category matches a category found on either badge access is granted See Chapter 26 Double Badge Transaction 22 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Category 3 FLOOR 6 Category 1 FLOOR 5 Category 2 4 5 FLOOR 4 Category 2 4 5 Elevator Control 22 j Since this badge has category 1 this badge holder is granted access to floors 1 2 or 5 because those floors contain category 1 When one of the buttons for floors 1 2 or 5is FLOOR 3 pressed an output is eae triggered to activate the FLOOR va elevator to go to that floor 1 4 Category 1 ee 2 IE BADGE contains ia 3 6 category 1 LEGEND Category 1 General Access Category 2 Accounting Category 3 Administration Category 4 Marketing Category 5 Computer Dept Figure 22 2 Example of Elevator Control Method 2 m o lt f er fe S Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 5 Elevator Access Duration Time for Elevator Access Method 1 During the period of time when the elevator s digital outputs are active buttons are lit any number of those buttons may be selected The amount of time that the elevator buttons are active after a valid badge swipe is set using the Devices Outputs form The same duration time should be used for all digital o
340. hic is displayed on the left side of the page Warnings Provides information you MUST know to avoid consequences of a disastrous nature before continuing The following graphic is displayed on the left side of the page Instructions Provides instructional information in a step by step format a Related Documentation Picture Perfect 2 0 AIX Edition Installation Guide This manual is a step by step guide to help the system administrator connect hardware HFT subsystem serial port adaptors ASCII terminals modems printers tape drives X Terminals microcontrollers etc boot install AIX configure AIX for the network micro communication lines printers and X Terminals install the Picture Perfect software and set up X Terminals Picture Perfect 2 0 Linux Edition Installation Guide This manual is a step by step guide to help the system administrator connect hardware PCs serial port adapters modems printers tape drives X Terminals micros boot install Linux configure Linux for the network micro communication lines printers and X Terminals install Picture Perfect software and set up X Terminals Picture Perfect Enterprise System Administration Guide This document includes information regarding the installation and configuration of the network Picture Perfect host and subhosts as well as management of the networked system Picture Perfect Redundant System Administration Guide This manual provides instructions for
341. i or a option to remove associated photo images For example rmbadge p i 0000012345 The Badges Form The following is a list of fields that might require additional information for you to complete Several of the fields are required e First Name e Last Name e Initials e Employee ID e Badge Status e Badge Encode Number e Personnel Type The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence for you to follow 14 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 i NOTE A search FIND using indexed fields improves the time required to find the records Some examples of indexed fields on the Badges form include Last Name ha Employee ID and Badge Encode Number Refer to Figure 14 3 for the top left hand portion of the Badges form oe 22 2 2 s peg Figure 14 3 Badges Form Top Left Badge Holder Information First Name Type the badgeholder s first name up to 20 characters Last Name Type the badgeholder s last name up to 30 characters Initials Type the badgeholder s initials up to 5 characters NOTE The initials not the first name display on the Activity Monitor in front of the last name of the badgeholder Therefore use initials to distinguish between F badgeholders who have the same last name Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 11 The Badges Form Employee ID Type an alphanumeric employee ID 1 to 12 charac
342. iagnostic monitor and diagnostic log If the log routing flag is on Y any diagnostics sent to the diagnostic monitor are also sent to the log gt O D o D o 9 V a O z D 3 a Use diagnostics only when required since diagnostics degrade the performance of the system occupy shared memory and consume disk space The status manager diagnostics turn on automatically when you request status from a micro and turn off flag clears when you exit the status monitor This is normal and does not indicate a problem Configured Devices The Configured Devices display shows the numbers of various configured devices Once the system is started these numbers do not change The key items to note are the number of hosts micros ports printers and operators The current version of CMENU does not display device information about tape drives and floppy drives Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 7 Diagnostics Subsystem History Counts The History Counts display shows the number of transactions for alarms badges and operator activity These numbers reflect changes to the counts while the screen is displayed Micro Map The Micro Map screen Figure 33 6 provides a visual display of all the micros on the system and their relative position on their respective serial lines Each page on the display shows up to 10 serial lines A line of micros is represented by a serial tty line followed by all the micro address
343. ial Setup 4 Network Ports Devices Network Ports See Chapter 4 Initial S etup 5 Printers Devices P rinters See Chapter 4 Initial Setup 6 Email Control E mail See Chapter 4 Initial Setup 7 Routings Control R outings See Chapter 4 Initial Setup 8 Badge Formats Access Badge Formats See Chapter 4 Initial Setup 9 Parameters Control P arameters See Chapter 4 Initial Setup 10 Departments Access Departments See Chapter 4 Initial Setup 11 Personnel Type Access P ersonnel Type See Chapter 4 Initial Setup 12 Facility Access F acility See Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles 13 Facility Profile Control F acility Profile See Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles 14 Permission Groups Control PermG roup See Chapter 6 Permissions and Operators 15 Permissions Control P ermissions See Chapter 6 Permissions and Operators 16 Operators Control O perators See Chapter 6 Permissions and Operators 17 Route Definitions Control Route Definitions See Chapter 7 Alarm Activity Monitor R outing 18 Route Points Control R oute Points See Chapter 7 Alarm Activity Monitor Routing 19 Alarm Instructions Messages Messages See Chapter 8 Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 20 Alarm Responses Messages Responses See Chapter 8 Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 21 Alarms Devices Alarms See Chapter 8 Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 22 Alarm Color Control Alarm Color See Chapter 8 Alarm
344. ical or gt Greater than or equal to lt Less than or equal to gN FAV For example to find all records greater than A and less than L type gt A amp lt L The system will find records Aa to Kz Delete F4 Deletes the record currently displayed from the database On the Badges form this button is labeled Remove It is used to completely remove badge records from the database See Removing Badge Records on page 14 7 3 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started 3 i View F5 Views the record currently selected from the database NOTE If there is no Delete option then View is F4 New is F5 and Help is F6 If there is a Delete option then View becomes F5 New becomes F6 and Help F becomes F7 gt To view the records located by the Find function 1 Click View It may take a few moments for the system to prepare the data 2 The data found appears on the View window Figure 3 7 and includes all columns fields for those records Resize the window to view more columns escription Micro Address Facility Type MICRO 0 SA1 0 0 GLOBAL Normal a iy 2 gt wn ee gt gt a Figure 3 7 View Window gt To limit the number of columns displayed in the View window 1 Click the Columns button A picklist of columns will appear Figure 3 8 2 Select the columns you want to display and de select those you do not want then cli
345. ied by the lt column number in the select statement gt You should always use ORDER BY lt column number in the select statement gt before issuing a pagebreak This will make the pagebreaks occur at meaningful places Figure 20 12 shows an example of a pagebreak Picture Perfect SQL Alarm Report cobra MESSAGES ALARM HISTORY OVERFLOW MONITOR AND HISTORY BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOY MONITOR AND HISTORY CEEDED 90 0 MONITOR AND HISTORY aie fl nem DOOR FORCED OPEN 40 MONITOR AND HISTORY MONITOR AND HISTORY Figure 20 12 Example of Pagebreak Using Pagebreak lt column number gt within SQL to the X Window This will simulate a page eject by printing data page data 20 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 within the SQL X Window list Using Pagebreak lt column number gt within SQL to the printer This will issue a full page eject when there is a change in the value of the column Badge Table Values The badge table contains status and antipassback values represented by numbers Table 20 2 The report data for these values appears in numbers not text in the report window n 2 m A D xo 5 re 2 Table 20 2 Badge Table Values Value Badge Status Value Antipassback Status 1 Permanent 1 Neutral 2 Temporary 2 In 3 Out 4 Privileged Flags Column Values In a database table each
346. ieves reader descriptions that match either Lobby Reader or Cafeteria Reader SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description Lobby Reader OR description Cafeteria Reader NOT IN Use NOT IN to screen out data that you do not want in the report 20 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 i For example the following SQL comparison statement retrieves all reader descriptions except those described as Engineering or Antipassback SELECT description FROM reader WHERE description NOT IN Engineering Antipassback Reader Relational Operators Relational operators describe a relationship between two values Use the N following characters as relational operators in a WHERE clause 2 Equal to A 8 lt gt Not equal to Fi Not equal to gt Greater than lt Less than gt Greater than or equal to lt Less than or equal to NOTE Do not use the pipe symbol in an SQL statement f For example the following SQL select statement retrieves data for employees with last names that start with the letter A or above and also start with letters below G in other words last names that start with the letters A through F SELECT last name employee FROM badge WHERE last name gt A AND last name lt G Table 20 1 Data Type Relational Operators Data Type Greater Than gt Less Than lt Means Means DATE Later in dat
347. if the area is set up as 2MR and the occupancy count is 2 you cannot change the area to M2MR with Door Control Instead you must disable 2MR reset the occupancy count to zero and then enable M2MR with Door Control Areas with Occupancy Counting enabled cannot span micros All readers and F doors must be physically connected to the same micro How to set up Occupancy Control gt To set up the area readers 1 From the Main menu select Devices Readers From the toolbar click on Find to locate the reader record you wish to set up Under Logical Reader Function enable the appropriate radio button APB In APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out 21 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Two Man Rule and Modified Two Man Rule 21 i NOTE In an area with Occupancy Control enabled All readers in the area must be assigned one of these logical functions APB In 7l APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out APB readers must be set to Global Timed APB is not allowed e The logical reader function T amp A In Out is NOT allowed for any reader 4 Under Set Micro verify that all readers in the area are assigned to the same micro 5 Under Reader Control Number of Badges verify that all readers are set to Single 6 Save and exit the Readers form gt To setup the area doors NOTE The door sensor input and the door output must be physically connected to the F same micro 1 From the Main menu select
348. igure 17 3 Access Secure List Example Input Groups Current State Access This list box displays a list of the selected devices such as Input Groups that are in Access state enabled for example door unlocked Current State Secure This list box displays a list of the selected devices such as Input Groups that are in Secure state disabled for example door locked Change State to Access This arrow button will be activated when a selection is made from the Current State Secure list box When clicked a confirmation box will appear Change State to Secure This arrow button will be activated when a selection is made from the Current State Access list box When clicked a confirmation box will appear Filter A pattern can be entered and used to restrict the items displayed Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 17 5 Access Secure Operations Refresh This button can be used whenever there is a change in the database for example after entering changing a filter to rescan the database and list the updated items Cancel Click this button to cancel any selections made Print Click this button to send the list to the terminal s assigned printer Close This button is used to close the appropriate window Help Click this button to display online help about the use of the buttons on this screen 17 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Backup and Restore Chapter 18 Ov
349. ility however this utility only updates the records of the corresponding devices such as inputs input groups outputs output groups readers and doors Area and alarm records will have to f be updated manually For example since 31 was the first micro in our previous example this step would result in the following messages This may take a long time please be patient Updating micro 31 with GLOBAL Updating inputs Updating output Updating reader Updating door Updating micro 31 s bdghis ingrp Updating micro 31 s almhis ingrp Updating micro 31 s upstrm comm _ingrp Updating micro 31 s dnstrm_comm ingrp Updating micro 31 s reader comm ingrp This process would be repeated for each micro that you assigned to the Global facility 5 Upon completion the remaining micros would be listed and you would be prompted to assign those to the next facility 6 When all micros have been assigned a facility the installation is complete The following messages will display No micros left to assign This utility will now exit You may use this tool at any time by typing as root cas bin micfac sh NOTE Do not use this utilty if your micro spans multiple facilities F G 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Flow Diagrams Appendix Picture Perfect System Flow Diagram INPUT GROUP VALID BADGE READ 00 41 00 LOBBY B1 OUTPUT DOOR 00 1 00 LOBBY B1 00 1 00 LOBBY B1 OUTPUT GROUP sel
350. in form gt To replace an existing category 1 Click the Manage button to display the Category Manager window Result A list of all available categories in alphabetical order will display If a category has been assigned a slot the slot number will be displayed beside it Select the category you wish to change Result The slot to which the category is assigned will be highlighted Click Remove Result The category list on the Category Manager window will be refreshed and the category will be displayed with no slot number beside it The category list on the main form will also be refreshed and the category will no longer be displayed Select the category and the new slot to which you want to assign it Click Add Result The category list on the main form will be refreshed and will display the category and the new slot number to which it was assigned Click Close to return to the main form 13 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i Areas A single area may be assigned to multiple readers and doors For example the Accounting Management Area may be assigned to a reader using the Area button on the Readers form The same area may be assigned to a door using the Area button on the Doors form Additional readers and doors may be assigned to the same area but an individual reader or door can only belong to one area The permission assigned to an operat
351. indicates fields required only for dial up communications f Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 11 Ports Ports betandromeda 2 9322 aj a TAGE eee EES DIGI PORT 0 dev ttybD000 Figure 4 5 Ports Form Description Type a port description The ports that you define appear in a picklist on the Micros form so that you can assign a serial port to direct communication micros unidirectional or bidirectional None appears in the picklist so that you can indicate no secondary port for a unidirectional micro and no primary or secondary port for a dial up micro A typical description of a host port includes the line number and the port number for example Line 1 Port 1 tty2 There are two serial ports on the host and additional serial ports are available if a multi port adapter is attached NOTE Serial port S1 on the RISC 6000 is used by the system console in the case of a m non graphical console A line of unidirectional micros requires one communications channel and one tty RS 232 port at the host A line of bidirectional micros requires two channels a primary communications line and a 4 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 secondary communications line and two tty RS 232 host ports primary and secondary tty AIX For RS 6000 systems type the full path name of the port as defined in AIX suchas dev ttyN where N line number This must b
352. ine onei aaisan aaea I EENAA 12 2 DRE asics a a E A S O RR EA 12 2 The Outputs FOrM ssss ssssesesesesessssssesisteresisessssesese 12 3 TAURI DS sets a aaa A a a tetanic segues 12 9 Setup arias erain wanna EEA NS ETEEN E 12 9 The Inputs FOrm s ssssesesesisissesisesrssesesesseseseseesee 12 9 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide vii Contents 13 Categories Areas Readers ANG DOOIS oppaina peonnin psani 13 1 Oye eW a a T E AORE 13 1 Preregtiisites irane a anand AEA E Ea i 13 1 What You Will Be Doing ssesesssesessssesesisssseseseseenee 13 1 How Categories and Areas WorK ssesesssesessssesesee 13 2 Identify Ateas n a eea aa 13 3 Identify CatecOries sis casisessasoussiescicanssacivsearaeireerete 13 4 Assigning Categories to Badges Areas and Area Events hci icib eis vei a a e KATA a 13 5 Categori Seon ao ae ao a aaa ra Sa En aii 13 6 SetU pa a N REE 13 6 The Categories Form es ssssesesesesissssesesesesreseseseses 13 7 Managing Category Assignment cccceee 13 8 Vea Se A A A EA 13 13 SetU Pan a la mun a a a li 13 13 The Areas FOr cicassaaucca visa verclewscattesiualentin 13 14 Readers deret aeae a eee tata arin 13 21 SetU i R E nee EE NRE dois 13 22 The Readers FOrm eeeeseseseeeeesereesssrresreserrssserese 13 22 DOOrS ea aa E a E E aa ee ined 13 30 SetuP i aaas e a e Ee 13 31 Th Doors F t Meronen aa 13 35 14 Badges iy vicnisssiasnsaccccccsenzeenecsuscncteacnsgaanntes 14 1 OVeLVIE
353. ing messages may be displayed in the file cas log log MMDD failed to save resend list This message will be displayed if the entire resend list could not be written to the file the resend list file will subsequently be removed D 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 2H resend list n messages saved m ignored This message will be displayed if the entire resend list was successfully written out to the disk resend list n messages restored m ignored This message will be displayed if the resend list is restored when TPS starts Alarm Save State In order to avoid lost alarm messages stored in the alarm buffer when the system is taken down this feature preserves the state of the alarm buffer Before using this option review the following restrictions e This feature will only run on the primary host in a redundant system a subhost or a standalone host e Restored alarms are not checked for validity and may need to be manually purged if the state of the system has changed for example if a subhost has been added or deleted Configuration The Alarm Save State feature can be configured in the cas db text almsave cfg file using the following options savealarms This option can be set to auto or manual e auto The alarms in the alarm buffer will be saved automatically when Picture Perfect is brought down e manual The alarms in the alarm buffer will be saved only if the file cas log
354. ing the eFlash GUI 1 Login as root and open a terminal window 2 At the command prompt launch eFlash by typing eflash Erter Result The eFlash main screen will display Only one instance of eFlash can be run on a system When eF lash begins it creates a lock file tmp eflash lock If the lock file exists indicating that the program is running when you attempt to launch eFlash an error message will display and the program will exit Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Flashing Micros 11 i NOTE The eFlash graphical user interface will terminate and generate an error message if both an Alarm Graphics form and a Badges form displaying an image are open Enhanced Flash for Pi Ir Help Select to access online help u w n gt Ke 2 s n Select a micro number or a page number to move to another page Figure 11 5 eFlash 3 Select the micro you want to update To select a single micro click on the micro a E Result A green check mark will appear over the micro you selected Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 11 9 eFlash To select a line of micros click on the line icon to the left of the micros Result Green check marks will appear on all the micros in the selected line 4 To select the firmware hex files to use to update the micro click on the File menu 5 Select either Direct Micro File or Network Micro File according to the
355. ion_ip subnet_ip_mask The network micro s subnet mask alt_gateway_ip The network micro s gateway IP address to reach the alternate_ip a f 77 z io 2 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 11 17 Network Micro Parameter Block Configuration NOTES 11 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Inputs and Outputs Chapter 12 Overview The Picture Perfect system monitors digital inputs DIs for contacts and digital outputs DOs for controlling output devices Outputs are triggered when associated inputs activate Outputs can operate devices such as door strikes bells and lights Inputs may be physical connections to a microcontroller or logical events such as a transaction buffer overflow or an invalid access attempt Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites Forms Purpose PRINTER To direct messages generated by input and output activity to the 2 ROUTINGS printer in addition to history and monitor displays 7 INPUT GROUPS To allow door inputs and door outputs to activate gt OUTPUT GROUPS S MICROS To assign inputs or outputs to specific micros 5 c ROUTE DEFINITIONS To allow area activity monitor routing for Dis a ROUTE POINTS What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to add or change individual outputs and individual inputs Outputs and inputs include description fields that describe
356. ipe and SHOW MOnItOL sccscecssisssionsscassesvirgeetsaasdeneas 28 6 29 Controlling Outputs ccseeeeeeeeeees 29 1 OV ELRVICW feiss isd aid vei odie hts edie Bante cel eae 29 1 Prerequisites iiiaio ha ane E s lite 29 1 What You Will Be Doing ss ctivecietaiagee Goeacectaaigcnve 29 1 Controlling an Output from an Input Group 29 2 Controlling an Output from an Output Group 29 3 Controlling an Individual Output eee 29 4 30 Viewing Status ccc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 1 OVELVICW oecccccccccsssssssccsscsccscsssssssssesscceesssssssseessesecseseeees 30 1 Prerequisites viru diuresis oneru in Aa Mamaniteuiads 30 1 What You Will Be Doing wicasceiasiien ccnasteveusoneevrenes 30 1 Viewing Status By MiCrO sesssssssssssssssssssrsrerereresesenes 30 2 Viewing Status By Area s sesesesesesssesesrsrsrirerirerenees 30 3 Viewing Status by DOOR sssessesesssieissesisesssresesesrerene 30 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide xiii Contents 31 User Customization cccecseeeeeees 31 1 OVCLVICW vise dase ie ie Ate a a ees 31 1 TAVO CATION srann e shots cat onh A E A R 31 3 User AGEL FACS ea Saraan a eia 31 4 Main Wind Ow faoiistish cpetdavccranrsihelieaii ae ieaathe 31 4 Language Selection Dialog ccceeeeseseeees 31 5 Table Selection Dialog aciccstiesiscinensuottetnsamseueies 31 6 Change Field Dialogs c stayrsiinndstawtansevnensntwves 31 8 32 National Langu
357. irements with any combination of boards within the limitations listed above 3 On a Micro 5 the Tamper and AC Power Fail inputs must be wired to connector 6 on the Power Communications board The AC Power Fail input will always be defined as Board 0 Address 0 the Tamper input will always be defined as Board 0 Address 1 Off To On Delay Time The Off To On Delay Time delays the effect of the input described on this form when it changes state from Off to On This delay helps avoid false input detections Type the number of seconds 0 to 65535 required for the delay Leaving this field blank or typing a 0 zero causes no delay Set this delay to 0 for an Exit DI This field overrides the Delay Time set on the Input Groups form See Delay Time on page 9 5 On To Off Delay Time The On To Off Delay Time delays the effect of the input described on this form when it changes state from On to Off This delay helps avoid false input detections Type the number of seconds 0 to 65535 required for the delay Leaving this field blank or typing a 0 zero causes no delay Set this delay to 0 for an Exit DI This field overrides the Delay Time set on the Input Groups form Input Control Setup Select one or both of the following toggle buttons 12 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Inputs and Outputs 12 i Normally Closed The inactive state of an input is either normally open or normally closed If it is Norma
358. is field is read only and is set during installation If the Increased Category feature was selected during installation 96 categories are available for assignment to a badge Otherwise 32 categories are available for assignment to a badge To access an area a badge must match at least one category that is assigned to that area Number of Area Categories This field is read only and is set during installation If the Increased Category feature was selected during installation 32 categories are available for assignment to an area or an area event Otherwise 10 categories are available for assignment to an area or an area event To access an area a badge must match at least one category that is assigned to that area Alarm Filter Micro If this radio button is selected the alarm will be assigned the same facility as the micro record from which it originated Input If this radio button is selected the alarm will be assigned the same facility as the input record with which it is associated Input Group If this radio button is selected the alarm will be assigned the same facility as the input group record with which it is associated Alarm If this radio button is selected the alarm will be assigned the same facility as the alarm record with which it is associated Location The Location column in the Access Vision Alarm Monitor displays the name of the door reader input or micro that the alarm originated from If this radio bu
359. is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence for you to follow Refer to Figure 8 3 for the Alarms form FEREBBE A e ee Figure 8 3 Alarms Form Description Type a description for this alarm up to 30 alphanumeric characters Priority Select an alarm priority so that when several alarms occur simultaneously this alarm displays in order of priority Highest priority is 1 and lowest is 500 Slide the scroll bar until the number you want to select appears You may also use the up arrow down arrow keys to increase or decrease the priority level 8 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 8 j NOTE One strategy is to leave gaps between the priority numbers so that when you add alarms later you will not have to re assign priorities among the existing F alarms The same priority number can be assigned to more than one alarm Controls This box contains two lists The first list has toggle buttons that allow multiple selections Select any or all of the following options Alarm Online Toggle this button On if you want this alarm to occur when an associated Input Group is activated o a gt 3 o gt o gt i ah lt o N 7 i Q O 7 NOTE Do not click this button until the alarm is ready to be brought online f Inhibit Schedule Changes Toggle this button On if you want to inhibit schedu
360. is route definition will be routed to all terminals in the system e The Alarm Monitor will reflect any changes made to the Alarm Monitor Routing configuration Database updates will however only add entries to the Alarm Monitor they cannot remove entries Other Applications The Alarm Monitor Routing feature not only affects the Alarm Monitor it also affects other programs that use the Alarm Monitor Buffer These programs include the Alarm Alerts pop up and the Alarm Graphics Monitor program The same rules that apply to the Alarm Monitor also apply to these two applications The Alarm Alert program will display only if alarms can be viewed on the Alarm Monitor The Alarm Graphics Monitor will not flash an object unless it can be viewed on the Alarm Monitor gt o gt oO gt lt 5 fe Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 7 9 Other Applications NOTES 7 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Activity Messages and RAGIO Alarms Overview The Picture Perfect system monitors digital inputs DIs for sensors or contacts and drives digital outputs DOs for alarms and output devices The system notifies the operator of alarms using pop up windows and in a scrolling window called the Alarm Monitor g a 2 f 3 7 When an alarm occurs the system beeps and displays a pop up window on each terminal configured to receive that alarm and thereby notifies
361. is the default selection If modems are connected click the Modem Type button to display a picklist of modems Select the modem type that matches your modem then click Close For information on setting up modems see Modems on page 4 4 For information on DIP switch settings see the appropriate Installation Guide Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles 3 2 ie D 2 kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 15 Ports The Network Micro Ports Form The Network Micro Ports form supports dynamic configuration This means that you can configure network micros without having to restart the Picture Perfect system Refer to Figure 4 6 for the Network Micro Ports form Setup gt To define a network ports record 1 Select Devices then Network Ports 2 Complete the Network Ports form For a description of each field see The Network Ports Form on page 4 16 3 Click Save The Network Ports Form The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence for you to follow Network Ports bctandromeda EERE Prev Nea betnetmicroi44 Fi
362. ist the Bump To Terminals item count is updated Click the Close button when you have finished selecting the bump terminals This is not a required field if no terminals are selected alarms with this route point will not be bumped This field should be ignored if you are creating a route point that is used only for Activity Monitor Routing Bump to Email This field identifies which e mail addresses are associated with the route point Click the Bump to Email button to display a picklist of e mail addresses One or more addresses may be selected Click the Close button when you have finished selecting the addresses This is not a required field if no addresses are selected alarms with this route point will not be bumped to an e mail address If an e mail address is selected the system will not bump the alarm to any terminals Bump Time The value in this field must be in seconds and must be greater than zero The operator has this number of seconds to respond to the alarm before the alarm is bumped to the terminals selected in Bump To Terminals This field should be ignored if you are creating a route point that is used only for Activity Monitor Routing The default value in this field is blank meaning that there is no bump time Mode This field identifies the system mode under which this route point is valid Click the Mode button to display the Mode picklist Select the desired mode then click Ok This is not a required field If this
363. ists of up to eight alphanumeric characters Spaces should not be used as part of the ID and it is recommended that all alpha characters be entered in lower case The login ID typically incorporates the operator s name and may include an initial or a number such as davidm or janet32 The password is a security measure that keeps unauthorized personnel from logging onto the system Unlike the login ID the password does not display on the screen as you type it It is very important that your password remain confidential Care should be taken when selecting a password so that it cannot be easily guessed by anyone It can be up to eight alphanumeric characters long and can use any combination of numbers and upper and lower case letters Spaces should not be used Select a password that you can easily remember because it should not be written down anywhere but one which is not likely to be guessed Be creative in your selection Some examples of good passwords are NewtToe2 bliPPer9 z3EggLeg Some examples of bad passwords are your own name in any form the name of your pet spouse children your license plate number your address etc To set your password or to change it if you think it is no longer secure use the Operators form See Change Password on page 3 21 and page 6 11 Or you may left click your mouse to display the Client menu and select Change Password To log in 1 Type your login ID after the prompt and press
364. it Exits out of ppnwmefg Once you have quit the ppnwmc fg utility the network micro will require about 30 seconds of idle communication before it resets Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 11 15 Network Micro Parameter Block Configuration Parameters The fields shown below may vary depending on your firmware version address The micro ID which is not necessary unless you are configuring a network dialup micro phonel Primary host number for a network dial up micro to call phone2 Secondary host number for a network dial up micro to call mmdmm_init Modem initialization string mdmm_dinit Modem de initialization string rx_idle_time The minimum number of characters 20 254 to process a buffer hop_count The number of hops network boards that must be crossed between the network micro and host ring_speed Specifies ring speed for token ring networks only source_ip The network micro s IP address destination_ip The Picture Perfect host s IP address NOTE The network micro will accept connections only from the host defined in this field If this field is updated incorrectly the network micro can only be configured from m a laptop computer alternate_ip The backup machine s IP address in a Picture Perfect redundant system 11 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Flashing Micros 11 gateway_ip The network micro s gateway IP address to reach the destinat
365. it until the flash is complete You will not be able to flash another micro until the current selections are complete Result When the flash procedure is complete the highlight around the micros being flashed will change to green spg Line 02 0001 0002 If the flash process failed or if communication with the micro cannot be re established the highlight will be red Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 11 11 eFlash Operating eFlash from the Command Line The following command line arguments are available c Command line selection option p lt directory gt Specifies the source directory to search for flash files This replaces the default directory of cas flash eflash f lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use for the 5PX micro instead of the default flash n lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use for the 5PXN micro instead of the default flash x lt number gt Specifies the maximum number of micros that can be flashed at one time h Starts the HTML based online help u or Prints out the usage message m lt micro selection gt Specifies the micro to be flashed This option can be repeated multiple times e To flash all active micros in the Picture Perfect database use eflash m a e To flash a specific micro use eflash m lt microid gt where lt microid gt is the ID of any micro on the line eFlash adds all other micros on the line to the flash list in the co
366. ithout badges The fields that control start end events appear on each of the Events forms Refer to Figure 16 5 for the start end portion of the Events form At mode start _ At mode end Figure 16 5 Start End Portion of an Events Form To set up a Start End event 1 2 Select Schedule then the Events form that you want to define Specify the parameters for this event Each form is detailed in this chapter Click on At Mode Start if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode Click on At Mode End if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode Click Save Click New to create another event la gt D a D o te 5 a fo a D 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 13 Area Events Area Events To schedule changes for all the readers doors and routings in an area use an area event An event can also put the entire area online or offline Use the Area Events form Figure 16 6 Figure 16 7 and Figure 16 11 to define area events for each mode You can create events that affect all doors and readers in an area Defining an event requires you to select a mode set the time of the event select an area and specify one or more changes to the area readers or doors NOTE F Setup Do not set up the Area Events form to match the fields on the Area form Fields that do not need to be scheduled should not be selected for example if the area is alr
367. ithout communication to the host before the host polls this micro to verify that it is still capable of communicating normally set to 60 seconds Dynamic Configuration NOTE F Rule Rule Rule Rule Rule Rule Rule Rule Micros firmware 2 0 or later required can be configured dynamically meaning the Picture Perfect system does not have to be restarted for the changes to take effect However there are some rules that must be met If these rules are not met an error message will display and none of the changes will be made until that rule is satisfied All of the fields on the Micros form support dynamic configuration except for the Micro ID Once a micro s ID is set it cannot be changed 1 Every micro must have a head or upstream micro Every micro must have a tail or downstream micro A micro can be upstream from at most one micro A micro can be downstream from at most one micro The primary port must be the same for a micro and its downstream micro The secondary port must be the same for a micro and its downstream micro An upstream micro must have a matching downstream micro A downstream micro must have a matching upstream micro 10 26 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros 10 i Rule 9 The last micro in a bi directional line must have a Host downstream Rule 10 Two head micros cannot have the same primary port Rule 11 Two tail micros cannot have the same secondary port Ru
368. k the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles EJ D 02 D D kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 9 Ports Ports Use the Ports form to define a serial port and the Network Micro Ports form to define a network port The system then allows you to assign the device port line to a micro Uni directional direct connection micros require only a primary port bi directional direct connection micros require both a primary and a secondary port Dial up micros do not require a port assignment but do require a Ports form as designated below Network micros require only a network primary port See Configuring Micro Communications on page 10 3 of Chapter 10 Micros Refer to Figure 4 4 below for micro connections Unidirectional Primary Port dev tty2 Secondary Port None up down host none Network Primary Port 192 9 200 13 Secondary Port None Figure 4 4 Sample AIX Connection Diagram for Micros Setup 4 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i Setup gt To setup a serial micro communication line Perform the following steps to configure a communication line To change an existing configuration display the desired record then follow the same steps to s
369. king isinisisi iarten 22 22 23 Keypad Alarm Response 0 008 23 1 OV CL VICW sictds Sovsancas Sencha att e hacen ATAS 23 1 Keypad Alarm Response Function 23 1 Violation Notification cccccccccesccecssssscecsseseseseeeeees 23 2 Keypad KRESPONS Cutis saatenyst cccdesstneatuss Uanuannectstenecarenan 23 2 Operator Response sisa rcsseunnnestimicnssiecaatiicehonses 23 3 ConditiOni sesissiisesssresensicninssssiesesssrisi sesanti nanesena 23 3 Process StatOsashslas idee ea N r a 23 3 Multiple Access Violations cccscsseeseseeseeeeseees 23 4 Door Operation While Violation is Active 23 4 Keypad Alarm Response Configuration 04 23 4 Defining the Alarm Response Code 000 23 5 Dehinine a Reder cides seats acaclen nenleaticctentneniny 23 5 Enabling Keypad Alarm Response 0 008 23 6 Enablinga Bad 2 Cinders teeter see satenensarceettuetint 23 6 Disabling Keypad Alarm Response 0 cee 23 7 24 Pre Alarm Notification 0008 24 1 OVETVI EW naea n a a OO 24 1 Pre Alarm Function dissasiaseseccciondasessiad cansaaternessiediatenrvant 24 1 Pre Alarm Notification Methods ccccccccssseeeeees 24 1 Disabling Pre larie astecee ws stindosal Senet tee States 24 1 Pre Alarm Comfiguration cccccecscesscssesseessesseeses 24 3 25 Badge Trasien 25 1 OVETVIEW en auae A cred a ea T N 25 1 Badge Trace Configurations csccssssisiivscstsnavecsnsasvises 25 1
370. l up down left or right for an incremental movement 2 Drag the bar between the arrows in either direction for a slower more controlled movement 3 Click on the empty space between the arrows to jump to a certain spot 9 D zd 5 2 e 5 ai D a Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 17 Using the Window Menu Using the Window Menu Click on the left title bar button or on an iconified window window reduced to an icon to display the Window menu Drag and release the pointer on the selected function Restore Re opens an iconified window Move Changes the window to a wire frame Drag the mouse to reposition the window Size Allows you to resize the window Move the mouse to the desired location on the screen then click to set the size at that point Minimize Minimizes the window and displays the icon at the bottom of the screen Maximize Enlarges the window to full screen size Occupy Workspace Based on the number of workspaces established in the CDE Cmmon Desktop Environment Front Panel you may use this to assign an active menu or application to one or more workspaces Occupy All Workspaces Allows you to assign an active menu or application to all established workspaces Unoccupy Workspace Allows you to remove an active menu or application from an established workspace Lower Shuffles moves the window down under all other open windows Close Exit
371. l Image package is installed Enter the name of the program and the parameters that are used to extract a specific image from the photo database used with imaging such as Swipe and Show Max View Recs Enter the maximum number of records the system will have the ability to find and view This is usually set to 500 This field controls the number of records shown in a picklist CAUTION This figure is dependent on system memory and number of users Do not change this field to a higher number unless authorized to do so by your support A representative If set too high the system will use excessive memory and may slow down and become non responsive Number of Floors Enter the number of floors 0 to 64 serviced by an elevator associated with the Elevator Control feature See Chapter 22 Elevator Control Number of Temporary Categories The number of category slots available for use for temporary categories on the Badges form default is 8 Temporary category slots 4 32 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 occupy the highest numbered category slots For example on a system where the Increased Categories feature is enabled if the Number Of Temporary Categories is set to 8 slots 89 through 96 are assigned for temporary categories This means that these slots can be used for either permanent categories or temporary categories This field is read only and is set during installation Temporary ca
372. l by typing the following at the command line cas bin profile buildmeaning The command has no arguments 32 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide National Language Support 32 l upddb The upddb command updates the database with a language s default database text It can only be run from cas db default Any user with root permission can invoke this tool by typing the following at the command line upddb locale where locale is the locale identifier of the language whose translations will be loaded The following example loads Spanish default database translations 92 c Ke xo fe gt z at O gt eo c fet cd cas db default upddb es ES avlang The avlang command makes a language available or unavailable for operators All language s except English must be made available before any operator can use them Any user with root permission can invoke this tool by typing the following at the command line avlang locale availability where locale is the locale identifier of the language whose availability is being changed and availability indicates whether the language is being made available or unavailable A value of A makes the language available a value of U makes the language unavailable The following example makes Spanish available avlang es ES A Translation Installation Example The following commands make Spanish available to ope
373. l inputs DIs for contacts and drives digital outputs DOs for controlling output devices Outputs are triggered when associated inputs activate an input group Outputs can operate devices such as door strikes bells and lights Input groups trigger output groups when the system detects the inputs as true Inputs may be physical connections to a microcontroller micro or logical events such as a transaction buffer overflow or an invalid access attempt Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites gt Forms Purpose ALARMS To allow Input Groups to be assigned to alarms 5 ROUTE DEFINITIONS To allow area activity monitor routing for DIs o ROUTE POINTS g e O 7 What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to add or change output groups and input groups Output groups and input groups include description fields that describe the function or effect of the record The description becomes part of the transaction message telling the monitoring operator what happened and where One part of this description may include non technical language for operator information and the other part may include a wiring location Output Groups Before you define individual outputs you must create output groups to which individual outputs can be assigned When an output group triggers all outputs assigned to the group activate An input group triggers one or more output g
374. lays the alarm has precedence e If an alarm is supposed to be bumped to a given terminal and two different bump times are given in two different route points for the alarm s route definition the shortest length of time determines when the alarm is bumped e Once an alarm is displayed on a terminal only the operator can remove it The disabling of a scheduled route point will not remove an existing alarm from the Alarm Monitor e When a scheduled route point is enabled affected terminals are updated immediately This event may cause alarms that were already in the system to appear on the Alarm Monitor e Alarms and activity with no route definitions are displayed on all Alarm Activity Monitors e Ifa route definition consists of scheduled route points every time slot throughout the day and week must be accounted for by a scheduled route point Times that are not accounted for will default to all terminals in the system This means that if a route definition has a scheduled route point from 8 00 00 to 17 00 00 then alarms and activity with that route point s route definition will be routed to only those terminals listed in the route point during that time period But there are two other time periods for which there are no route points 7 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Activity Monitor Routing 7 23 59 00 to 8 00 00 and 17 00 00 to 23 59 00 During these two time periods alarms and activity with th
375. le if communication is lost between two micros a micro alarm is generated and the associated input group can activate an LED or a beep to alert the operator that communication is down The following sections will explain e How to define the micro error conditions as micro alarms e How to assign input groups to each micro error condition e How to have the input group trigger an output Creating Micro Alarms Use the Alarms form to define each micro alarm used to notify you when micro to micro or host to micro communication problems occur Define the alarm priority how the alarm resets where it is routed and what alarm instructions display when the alarm occurs Each micro that has a downstream micro attached to it needs a unique micro to micro alarm One host to micro alarm can be used for each line of micros e Create the micro alarm messages Select Messages then Messages and complete the form See Alarm Instructions on page 8 2 for details on how to complete this form e Create the micro alarm responses Select Messages then Responses and complete the form See Alarm Responses on page 8 4 for details on how to complete this form e Create the micro alarms Select Devices then Alarms and complete the form See Alarms on page 8 5 and The Alarms Form on page 8 6 for details on how to complete this form Create Input Groups for Micro Error Conditions The Input Groups buttons on the Micros form are
376. le 12 A network dial up micro must have a matching downstream micro Rule 13 A network micro must have a matching downstream micro Data Encryption In order to secure transmission between the host and the network micro the data is encrypted using DES Data Encryption Standard This is accomplished by means of a key to create the encryption pattern for transmission Setup gt To manage the DES keys used 1 From the Main Menu select Control then Keys 2 Select Find shows all configured micros The user can enter the micro ID and then select Find to edit the record NOTE You cannot enter and save data from a blank screen You must edit existing records F by performing a search and editing the record as necessary 3 Due to the sensitive information presented on the screen you will be prompted for root s password if you attempt to perform any operations with the keys Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 27 Data Encryption The Keys Form K ey s orion Figure 10 12 The Keys Form The following required fields are user definable according to the parameters described Encryption This is a required field which defines the type of encryption to be used It can be set to one of three values e None No encryption is used the original or plain text is transmitted NOTE None is the default In order to activate this feature one of the following must be selected e DES Both sender
377. le changes for this alarm Otherwise the system implements alarm schedules created using the Alarm Events form You may want to inhibit schedule changes for an alarm if no schedules yet exist for alarms or if you are not ready to implement the schedules you have created Immediate Reset Input Toggle this button On if you want the system to reset this alarm as soon as an associated input group triggers this alarm Only Logical alarms such as invalid suspended unknown or lost badges must have this button On as there is no reset condition for this type of alarm Immediate reset allows the operator to remove clear an alarm without waiting for the reset condition Immediate Dial Required This button is used for dial up micros only Toggle this button On if you want the associated micro to dial the host immediately when this alarm condition occurs See Example of Direct Communication Uni directional Micros on page 10 4 of Chapter 10 Micros for information on configuring micros for this ability If you toggle this button On for a direct connect micro it will ignored The second Controls list has radio buttons that allow only one selection Select one button to define how associated outputs reset Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 8 7 Alarms NOTE F NOTE F Auto Reset Outputs Click this button to allow the system to automatically reset any output groups associated with this alarm whe
378. led area is empty a Team member is allowed entry only with a second Team member Additional team members can enter individually after the initial two 2 team members are present in the M 2MR controlled area Additionally the final two 2 team members will not be permitted to exit until no Guests remain Managing Category Assignment Use the Areas Badges Generator and Area Events forms to assign new categories or to change or remove categories already assigned Each of these forms contain a Categories list box that display the active categories assigned to the selected badge area or area event Categories ALL CATEGORIES 0002 Category 0003 Category 0004 Category 0005 Category 0006 Category 0007 Category 0008 Category 0009 Category 0010 Category 0011 Category 0012 Category 0013 Category 0014 Category Figure 13 3 Categories List Box Click the Manage button to display the Category Manager window Figure 13 4 from which you may add or remove a category in a slot You may also apply a filter to limit the number of categories displayed in the Category Manager s category list 13 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i Assigned permanent slot Slots Categories gt Category Cate T Cat adOrT lt q Assigned Category Category Category Un assigned Categon Available permanent slot gt Assigned temporary slot Fil
379. lick Save 5 Click New to add another route definition The Route Definitions Form Route Definitions bectsparky EERE m eJ sa ze rt 5 gt 2 F lt z e fe Figure 7 1 Route Definitions Form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 7 3 Route Points Description Type the route definition that will be used for alarm and activity routing up to 30 alphanumeric characters These entries create a Route Definitions picklist that will be used in the Route Points form the Alarms form the Inputs form and the Areas form Select Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Route Points Creating route points is the next step in configuring Alarm Activity Monitor Routing A route point indicates to which terminals alarms and activity are routed and when they are routed A route point also indicates which alarms are bumped and when they are bumped A route point belongs to only one route definition but several route points can belong to the same route definition In the example in Overview on page 7 1 there are three route points 1 alarms activity that occur in Building A 2 alarms activity that occur in Building B during the day and 3 alarms a
380. lick Save As or Ok T n a lt rs D 3 77 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 19 3 The History Form Cancel Heip Figure 19 3 Save Report As Window Print Allows you to print the entire report or a range of pages within that report The Print Options window Figure 19 4 will appear for specifications When you are ready to print click Ok Print Options Printers PARALLEL PRINTER C all Stat Page 4 End Page 6 Copies 1 F Print Only to File Page Range Figure 19 4 Print Options Window Page Range Select either All or a range If printing a range type the Start Page number and the End Page number Copies Type the number of copies to be printed Print Only to File Toggle this button On and type a file name if you want to save it as a file rather than send it to a printer Use a full pathname such as tmp badgerpt 0407 19 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide History Reports 19 i Printers Select the printer to which this report should be sent Delete Displays the Delete Report picklist Figure 19 5 so you can delete an existing report Select the desired report then click Delete or Ok Reports General Activity Report Selection Figure 19 5 Delete Report Picklist History Quit Exits the History form The Type Menu There are three basic selections plus optional reports in the Type menu
381. ller Microcontroller micro The metal box containing the circuitry that controls the opening and closing of doors Badge readers alarm points and digital output points are wired to micros and micros are connected to the host computer The Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide GL 5 PSI 1 x0 13 Glossary Micro 4 P or Micro 5 P is the first microcontroller on a communication line from the host Micro 2s are configured in Picture Perfect as if they were physically part of the closest upstream Micro 4 P See Upstream and Downstream Mode A set of schedules that defines how the system operates and specifies the characteristics of readers areas doors and other system components See Operating Mode Modem Hardware device used to communicate between computer systems over telephone or other communications lines Monitoring See Door Forced Open and Shunt Mouse Button One of two or three buttons on a pointing device usually referred WM to as left mouse button middle mouse button and right mouse button See Click Drag Double Click for ways to use a mouse button Offline A condition in which the micro is not communicating with the host computer Offline Reader A condition in which a reader is not enabled to release the doorstrike when a valid badge read occurs Access attempts at an offline reader can be routed to the Activity Monitor and to printers and online history Online A mic
382. llowing functions Ok Accepts the selections and dismisses the window Some picklists use Close instead of Ok Close Accepts the selections and dismisses the window Some picklists use Ok instead of Close 3 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started 3 i Cancel Clears all selections made Refresh Updates the contents of the picklist if additions or deletions have been made to the options since the form was displayed For example if you are selecting a permission from a picklist and see the one you want is not displayed you can open the Permissions form add and save the one you need then click Refresh on the picklist window to reflect the additional option Help Displays on screen information regarding the use of the picklist Using Function Buttons There are function buttons at the top of each form as shown in Figure 3 6 Your operator permission determines which function buttons display for you just as it controls which Main Menu icons you can see Point and click with the mouse to click a function button e orion Figure 3 6 Function Buttons on a Form The purpose of each function button is listed below e iy ES gt fo wn er gt gt a Quit F1 Exits the form If needed be sure to save the form before you exit Save F2 Saves the data record currently displayed If you have created a new record it will be added to the database If you displa
383. llows you to restore the database tables from tape diskette or disk file NOTE The Restore function does not overwrite existing data To clear your tables refer to your Technical Reference manual or contact your support representative F Before you restore the database perform a database initialization For instructions refer to your Technical Reference manual or contact your support representative The Restore function does not restore regular files Use the command line database restore option cbr or the database restore utility restore sh to restore regular files gt To perform a restore 1 Select Control then Restore 2 On the Restore window Figure 18 6 use the radio buttons to specify whether to Restore From Diskette Restore From Tape or Restore from Disk File 3 Click Ok 4 When the Media pop up window appears insert the tape or diskette 5 Click OK to start the restore 18 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Backup and Restore 18 i _ RESTORE FROM DISKETTE RESTORE FROM TAPE _ RESTORE FROM DISK FILE OK Close Help F G Insert tape 1 OK Cancel Figure 18 6 Restore Window with Media Pop up Using the Command Line Option cbr Configuration File The command line version of restore uses a configuration file restore cfg located in cas db text This file contains the flat files to be restored You can edit this file if you want to add or delete files
384. lly Open toggle this button Off by deselecting it If it is Normally Closed toggle it to On by selecting it NOTE Ask your installer how the input point is wired Door Dis are usually wired normally closed and exit request DIs are usually wired normally open Input Enabled Toggle this button On by selecting it to allow this input to activate NOTE If an input is to be used as an Exit Button input in an area designated as MZ2MR with Door Control the Normally Closed and Input Enabled buttons must be m deselected the default Routing Displays the selected routing where messages about this input are displayed Click the Routing button to display the Routings picklist Figure 12 5 Select the desired routing then click Close The typical routing is None which means that it is not routed Input Group Displays the selected input group for this input Ej o Z f 5 2a O gt Z Click the input group button to display the Ingroups picklist Figure 12 5 Select the desired Input Group then click Close NOTE In both single input groups and in a hierarchy of input groups all inputs in any given group or hierarchy must be associated with the same micro See Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors where the Forced Open and Open Too Long door input groups are explained Use the Doors form to assign a door DI NOTE 1 Assign a door exit button to the same input group
385. lock an area how to group readers into different areas and how to assign categories to badges that unlock an area sealy soiobajye9 Ps D fS Q o v 5 Q s e e n Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 1 How Categories and Areas Work How Categories and Areas Work NOTE Categories are both the locks and the keys of the Picture Perfect system A category assigned to an area can act as a lock on the doors in that area When you assign that same category to a badge the category functions as the badgeholder s key to those doors If the Increased Category feature was selected during installation 96 categories are available for assignment to a badge and 32 categories for assignment to an area or an area event Otherwise 32 categories are available for assignment to a badge and 10 categories are available for assignment to an area or an area event To System Administrator Plan your system using floor plans that locate the readers and areas controlled by the Picture Perfect system as in Figure 13 1 e Identify the logical areas of access control e Determine the categories of access that will allow badges into each area 13 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 CAFETERIA PURCHASING gom MEETING ROOM EXEC UTIVE OFFICES MAINT COMPUTER SUPPLIES ROOM EMERGENCY EXIT EDUCATION LOBBY LA
386. lso type 19 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide History Reports 19 i rather than paste the variable commands if you know the exact context of the command you want Remember to enclose it within braces The Execution Menu There are two selections in the Execution menu Automatic or Manual If you select Automatic execution each time you click the Apply or Ok button the report is run immediately and the changes are displayed If you select Manual execution the report is not run until you click the Home icon button Use the Manual selection if you prefer to view the report after selecting all the format and sort criteria The Font Menu The Font menu has six Courier font sizes 8 10 12 14 18 and 24 points to select from for the onscreen display The Home Icon Button The Home icon button executes the query and includes any database changes made since the last query execution Example At 10 00 AM you load a daily badge report formatted to include daily transactions between 08 00 and 17 00 The query automatically executes when you load the report and includes transactions between 08 00 and 10 00 AM You view the report using the page up down buttons Meanwhile other transactions occur These will not appear in your report until you click the Home button to re execute the query and capture transactions that occurred after the last query execution Up Down Buttons The Page Up and Page Down bu
387. ly toggled Off Update Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to update a record associated with the selected form If toggled On the Field Permission View and Update columns will be activated on forms that use field level permissions If toggled Off the Field Permission Update column buttons are automatically toggled Off and the column is unavailable on forms that use field level permissions Use this to clear all the toggle buttons in this column to Off Insert Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to insert or add a record using the selected form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 7 Facility Profiles If toggled On the Field Permission View and Update columns will be activated on forms that use field level permissions If toggled Off and Update and Delete are also toggled Off On forms that use field level permissions the Field Permission Update column buttons are automatically toggled Off and the column is unavailable If Update or Delete is toggled On the Field Permission Update column will remain activated Delete Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to delete a record associated with the selected form If toggled On the Field Permission View and Update columns will be activated on forms that use field level permissions If toggled Off and Update and Insert are also toggled Off On forms that use field level permissions the Field Permission Update column
388. m Format Columns All Columns icode Number Display A Sort Ascending Sort Descending Width Header Deselect All Remove Figure 19 7 Format Columns Window All Columns This picklist displays all fields of information in the History table for the type alarm badge or operator of report being created Select the desired columns one at a time and move them into the Display list by clicking the Display button Multiple selections can be made by holding the left mouse button down and dragging Deselect All If one or more undesired columns were selected in the All Columns list click Deselect All to clear them Display Button After selecting one or more column names from the All Columns list click this button to move them into the Display list Display List The Display box displays the columns that have been selected for the report and controls the left to right order of their appearance The column listed at the top will be at the far left of the report and the column listed at the bottom will be at the far right Sort List The Sort box displays the columns that will control the sorting order of the data In the All Columns list select the column that is to control the sorting order of the data then click either the Sort Ascending or the Sort Descending button That column will then be listed in the Sort list The sorting column does not have to be one of the displayed columns Repeat this procedure wit
389. m The next section explains the six pull down menus and the three command buttons beneath the menu bar The phrase current report means the report that is currently displayed on your screen The Report Menu The pull down Report menu has seven selections Each selection is explained below On picklists the Ok button applies the specified function to the report and closes the picklist window other buttons such as Open Save As and Delete apply their functions to the report but leave the picklist window open 19 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide History Reports 19 j New Clears the form so you can create a new report You are provided with the Open Template picklist from which you can open an existing report to use as a template Select the desired report then click Open Clicking Ok without selecting a report creates a blank report Open Displays the Open Report picklist Figure 19 2 from which you can open a predefined report Select the desired report then click Open or Ok Open Report Open Weekly Invalid Transactions Selection Figure 19 2 Open Report Picklist History Save Saves the current report with the existing title and current changes Save As Allows you to save the current report under a different name with the original report still existing under the previous name The Save Report As window Figure 19 3 will appear Type a new name for the current report then c
390. m Figure 16 3 to assign the starting date and time to a mode that goes into effect on a specific calendar date This is known as a Mode Event For example mode events are used to schedule the various holidays assigning each the Holiday Mode la gt D a D o te 5 a fo a D 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 9 Changing Modes Mode Events orion 2 8 3 8 3 3 a Sr a NORMAL TO CHRISTMAS Figure 16 3 Mode Events Form Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters for Description For example Normal to Thanksgiving Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles New Mode Date Type the date this mode event begins New Mode Time Type the time this mode event begins New Mode Click the New Mode button to display the Modes picklist Select the mode that is to go into effect during this mode event then click Close to close the picklist 16 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 l Scheduling Events NOTE F Use the Events forms to define and schedule the desired characteristics for Area Events Reader Events Door Events Alarm Events Ingroups Events Outgroups Events B
391. m define reset methods for outputs Output resets can be overridden as follows A Manual Reset of an output overrides any other reset method that is defined for that output For example if the Outputs form specifies Reset On Duration for an output but the Alarms form assigns it Manual Reset the Manual Reset overrides A Duration Reset overrides an Auto Reset defined for an output For example if the Alarms form specifies Auto Reset for an output but 8 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide NOTE F Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms 8 j the Outputs form assigns it Reset On Duration the Duration Reset overrides e A Duration Reset overrides a Reset On Input for an output If the Outputs form defines a Reset On Input for an output but the Alarms form assigns it Duration Reset the Duration Reset overrides Route Definition The selected monitor routing is displayed here Click the Route Definition button to display the Route Definitions picklist This picklist allows the operator to specify a route definition from the Route Definitions form to route alarms to specific monitors If this field is left blank this alarm will be routed to all terminals Q gt m 3 n gt g s 3 gt O of lt lt D 7 N Q Q D 7 Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those
392. making cas nls cat es ES making cas nls src es ES making cas app defaults es ES All es ES directories are present Record has correct availability Reading spanish files from media Please wait Extracting files from media 18600 blocks The files have been read from the media Shutting down the Informix database Done The SPANISH INST installation has completed successfully Checking if need to update nls files Picture Perfect NLS Check 2 0 1 19 01 32 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide National Language Support 32 Copyright C 1997 2001 CASI RUSCO Tue Mar 19 17 09 21 EST 2002 Updating nls files Picture Perfect NLS Text Update 1 32 2 5 02 Copyright C 1994 2001 CASI RUSCO Tue Mar 19 17 09 22 EST 2002 Comparing nls files in cas nls src en_US devel Updating nls files in cas nls src en US Comparing nls files in cas nls src es ES 92 c Ke xo fe gt z at O gt eo c fet Q Updating nls files in cas nls src es ES Comparing help files in cas help en US devel Updating help files in cas help en US Comparing help files in cas help es ES Updating help files in cas help es ES Building en US Building es ES Loading meaning table NLS Text Update Finished Running cas bin fixperm on tmp spanish perm file No errors detected cas bin fixperm finished Installing LANGUAGE EXT pro
393. may enter a site by going through an APB In reader but is not required to exit the site by going through an APB Out reader If 16 28 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 l this option is selected a Timed APB Duration must also be defined A Timed APB status is local to the micro Swipe and Show Control This feature is only visible if you have the Image package installed You can schedule a specific time period for any of the following functions to be active e Swipe and Show Select Enabled to enable Swipe and Show on this reader Select Disabled to disable Swipe and Show on this reader NOTE A reader cannot be defined as Toggle when Swipe And Show is Enabled See Toggle on page 13 28 If Toggle is set to Yes and either Authorization m Required or Authorization Not Required is turned on photos will be displayed for invalid transactions but not valid transactions e Authorization Required Select Yes to designate a reader that will display a photo on the Activity Monitor and require an operator to unlock a door Select No to designate a reader that will display a photo on the Activity Monitor and will unlock a door without operator intervention NOTE The Yes and No buttons are not available unless Swipe And Show Enabled is selected hf Access cannot be granted through readers defined as Authorization Required while communications to the micro are down la gt D a D o te
394. mined during installation and is shown on the Parameters form The names of the user fields can be changed using the User Customization tool See Chapter 31 User Customization When the Display Auto Generate button is enabled on the Parameters form the system uses the user field designated in the Position For Auto generate field on the Parameters form to generate a unique Badge Encode Number See Auto Generate Method on page 14 3 Temporary Categories Temporary categories are set to be enabled during certain times of day and will expire on a certain date and time They are selected and set on an individual badge basis 14 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 i NOTE Micros must be properly installed before Temporary Categories become active In addition for this feature to work communications must be present m between the host and micro Click the Temporary Categories button to display the Temporary Categories form Figure 14 9 The number of Temp Cat buttons displayed is determined during installation and is shown on the Parameters form Click the desired Temp Cat button to display the Categories picklist Select the desired category then click Close If a Temp Cat button is grayed out this indicates that a regular category already holds that slot s peg Start Date Stop Date Start Time Stop Time TempCat 23 lt BLANK TempCat 24 lt BLANK TempCat 25 lt BLAN
395. ministration Guide Micros 10 After a reset to allow for badge download the default maximum connect time is one hour Micro Phone Number Enter the phone number of this dial up micro including area code This does not include PBX prefix or country code Micro Dialout Prefix Enter the PBX prefix area code or country code or other prefix required with the Host phone number Dial on Updates Specifies when the host should dial the micro with record changes Always The host always dials the micro for any record changes that affect it Never The host will not dial the micro for any record changes Updates are made during the next communications session Ask Operator The host will prompt the operator to see if it should dial the micro for each record change Dial Host On Schedule Update Specify whether the micro should dial the host whenever changes occur due to a micro schedule Always The micro always dials the host for any schedule updates that affect it Never The micro will not dial the host for any schedule updates Updates are made during the next communications session Dial On Startup Specify whether the host should dial the micros whenever the system is started Always The host always dials the micro whenever the system is started Never The host will not dial the micro immediately whenever the system is started Rather it will wait a random amount of time no greater than the polling period
396. ministrator Badge Administrator or Alarm Operator Then that permission can be assigned to individual operators using a picklist Assign the System Administrator permission a default to one or more operators who have total responsibility for the Picture Perfect system and therefore require all functions NOTE Once an operator is assigned System Permissions it cannot be altered To remove the system permissions the operator will have to be deleted from Picture Perfect and the m operating system and then added back into the system by creating a new operator record with the correct permissions Setup gt To define permission records 1 Select Control then Permissions 2 Complete the Permission form For a description of each field see The Permissions Form on page 6 5 3 Click Save 6 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Permissions and Operators 6 i The Permissions Form Permissions bctandromeda GLOBAL FACILITY PROFILE e o m v7 D o 3 a ein fe 3 a 3 a Figure 6 3 Permissions Form Description Enter the identification name of the permission to be added up to 30 alphanumeric characters Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facilit
397. missions use the password function on the Client menu because the Operators icon does not appear on their 7 Control menu The Operators form has the Change Password function which is only available to operators with System Administration permissions Reload Menu Displays the Main Menu Use the reload function if the Main Menu is closed Stopping Picture Perfect gt To shut down the Picture Perfect application 1 Loginas root atthe console terminal 2 Make sure no one is logged on as an operator You can do this by typing who H 3 Type rc pperf k 4 Verify that Picture Perfect is stopped See Verify that Picture Perfect is Stopped or Running on page 3 22 e D d gt Co wn er e gt a Starting Picture Perfect Use the following command sequence to start the Picture Perfect application The third step which is a command to stop Picture Perfect is used to verify that Picture Perfect is not running so that you do not start another process for Picture Perfect gt To start Picture Perfect 1 Loginas root atthe console terminal 2 Make sure no one is logged on as an operator 3 Type rc pperf k 4 Verify that Picture Perfect has stopped See Verify that Picture Perfect is Stopped or Running on page 3 22 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 21 Verify that Picture Perfect is Stopped or Running 5 Type rce pperf 6 Verify that Picture Perfect is running See Verif
398. mple of a Form Text Boxes To use a text box point to the box and click to make it active You can then type data in that field You may use the key to move to the next text box or Shift to move to the previous text box 3 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started 3 l Toggle Buttons Toggle buttons are square and appear beside one or more options When several options are grouped together toggle buttons indicate that more than one of these options can be selected Click on the button to toggle it on or off When the button looks like it is pushed in darkened it is on When it looks like it is popped out lightened it is off Radio Buttons Radio buttons are round shaped and appear beside one or more options When several options are grouped together radio buttons indicate that only one of these options can be selected As soon as another option is selected the previously selected button is automatically de selected Click on the button to select the option When the button looks like it is pushed in darkened it is active When it looks like it is popped out lightened it is inactive Selection Buttons and Picklists Selection buttons are rectangular and labeled to indicate what type of picklist they will display when clicked For example a button labeled Micros will display a picklist of defined micros a button labeled Routing will display a picklist of routing destinations The content
399. ms to define and save selection criteria and layout Use either the Ok or the Apply button in each Format form to save your changes The Ok button closes the window Select the Query function from the Format menu and define the report parameters The query date and time ranges can be set for either a daily range time range each day or a continuous range 24 hours a day A daily range repeats each day of the selected date range and runs between a daily start and end time A continuous range continues from the start date time through the end date time and runs 24 hours a day Click either Ok or Apply to save your selection criteria To enter a variable such as Date Date n Time or Time n first position the cursor in the text entry field then select a variable from the Variables picklist Format menu and highlight a variable from the picklist The selected variable will appear in the text field Select the Column function from the Format menu and select column headers from a picklist Each selection criterion in the Query form is available as a column header Selected column headers appear in the Display box To change the default 19 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide History Reports 19 i width and the header name for a column header select highlight the column header and then use the text cursor to change the defaults in the Width and Header fields To erase a selected column first highlight it
400. n Type the number of seconds this output remains on when activated if this output is allowed to reset when the duration time expires The maximum value is 32 767 If 0 is selected the output will not reset but will remain activated continuously See Outputs Form with Micro and Output Group Picklists on page 12 8 and Reset on Input on page 12 8 Micro Displays a description of the selected micro where this output is connected Click the Select Micro button Figure 12 3 to display the Micros picklist Select the desired micro then click Ok Output Group Displays a description of the selected output group to link this output point with a group of outputs Click the Select Output Group button Figure 12 3 to display the Output Groups picklist Select the desired output group then click Ok 12 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Inputs and Outputs Table 12 1 Micro 4 Wiring Chart Outputs 24 Element Board Number DO Reader Address Address CPU 0 0 15 8RP Board DIP Switch 0 15 0 7 Micro 2 Address 1 1st 32D0 Board Same as 8RP or 16 47 Micro 2 2nd 32D0 Board lst DO Board 1 16 47 3rd 32D0 Board lst DO Board 2 16 47 4th 32D0 Board lst DO Board 3 16 47 NOTE 1 8RP and Micro 2 board numbers are 1 to 8 To calculate the board number add 1 to the DIP switch address which is a number from 0 to 7 F 2 Up to four 32DO boards can be connecte
401. n alarm and will trigger an output group which will activate a siren and warning lights A non boolean input group is also available This is an individual input group that activates each time one of its inputs changes state To the system this input group is transparent because the message sent by this input group actually reflects the description of the input itself not the input group Logical alarms must always use a non boolean input group In both single input groups and in a hierarchy of input groups all inputs in any given group or hierarchy must be associated with the same micro Only Trigger on Input Individual input groups which are non boolean appear on the Input Group picklists of the Readers Areas Doors and Micros forms Select one of the following radio buttons Trigger on Any Click this radio button if you want the Input Group to change state when any of its inputs are activated Boolean Trigger on All Click this radio button if you want the Input Group to change state only when all of its inputs are activated Boolean Trigger on Input Click this radio button if you want the Input Group to pass along information that one of its inputs has changed state Logical alarms must always use Trigger On Input Non Boolean Input Group Control Specify the settings for each of the following Input Group State Select Enabled to allow this input group to activate Select Disabled if this input group
402. n er gt gt a Figure 3 10 Search Window New F5 Clears the form so you can add data for a new record NOTE If there is no Delete option then View is F4 New is F5 and Help is F6 If there is a Delete option then View becomes F5 New becomes F6 and Help becomes g F On some forms you will be given the option to Clear or Copy the data currently displayed If you want all the fields to be blank select Clear If you want to re use much of the information already displayed select Copy This is useful when you are adding data records that are similar Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 13 Adding or Changing Data to others as it minimizes the time required for data entry Not all the fields will copy however Critical fields will be cleared requiring new input Freeze Resume Used on windows with scrolling real time data Click Freeze to temporarily halt the output of new data so you can review the information currently on the screen When this button is selected it changes to Resume Click Resume to continue the scrolling action Help F6 See Note on page 3 11 under View Provides on screen information about the current form and its fields Adding or Changing Data Similar procedures are used when adding or changing data records The same forms are used and the same access procedures are used When you add a record you fill in a blank form and click Save When you change
403. n be able to badge out of the second room The system registered him globally as in without regard to reader location therefore he can badge out of any room If he followed someone out of the first room and then tried to badge in at the second room however Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 23 The Badges Form he would not be given access because the system has him already registered as in If the badgeholder is required to use an antipassback reader assign the badge an antipassback status of neutral otherwise leave these buttons unselected Neutral Indicates an unknown user state In Out The next time the badge is used in an antipassback reader the system will set the appropriate In Out state Use this setting when creating a new badge or when a badgeholder gets locked in or out of an antipassback area In or Out Indicates whether the last use of this badge logged the badgeholder In or Out of the antipassback reader s area This reflects information captured as of the moment the badge record was displayed but the information will not be updated automatically while it is on the screen It can be changed manually if necessary Privileged Indicates that whenever this badge is read by an antipassback reader the system ignores the antipassback status Access is granted if categories match the area regardless of whether the badgeholder was logged into or out of the area Assign this status to a badgeholde
404. n example of an operator activity message 0 10 31 02 17 24 OPR_EMP 0003 LOGIN ID jeffim ACTION Update TABLE badge RECORD DESC Roger Falconbridge FIELD state VALUE FL Figure 28 3 Example of an Operator Activity Message The following is a description of each part of the above activity message O O 5 O 5 amp gt Q a lt Indicates operator activity 02 05 93 16 02 The date and time this record was updated or viewed Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 28 5 Swipe and Show Monitor OPR_EMP 0003 The operator employee number of the person who updated or viewed this record LOGIN ID jeffm The login name of the operator jef fm who updated or viewed this record ACTION Update Description of the activity performed by the operator In this case it was an Update TABLE badge The onscreen form or table that was viewed or updated In this case it was the Badges form RECORD DESC Roger Falconbridge The description of the record viewed or updated In this case it was Roger Falconbridge s badge record FIELD state The field name state of the record that was changed on the form VALUE FL The change FL which was made in the field Swipe and Show Monitor To enable the Swipe And Show function the reader must be designated as Authorization Required or Authorization Not Required on the Readers form The Swipe And Show button must be selected on t
405. n exit device releases to unlock a door when a valid badge read occurs or when an exit device is pushed When the door strike releases the system starts counting the Unlock Time set for the door strike and then closes the door strike when the time elapses The badgeholder opens the door during the Unlock Time To define a door strike setting 1 Select Devices then Doors 2 Complete the following fields of the Doors form For details on each field see The Doors Form on page 13 35 e Description e Unlock Time e Strike Output DO digital output point wired to the door strike Adding or Changing an Exit Device An exit device releases the door strike on a door Exit devices are often used on lobby doors The exit button is associated with a door strike so that the latch unlocks and the sensor is shunted when the exit button is pushed You can enable the exit button and define how long the latch remains unlocked using the Doors form To define an exit device 1 Select Devices then Doors 2 Complete the following fields of the Doors form For details on each field see The Doors Form on page 13 35 e Description e Unlock Time e Exit Button Asserts Strike Enabled e Strike Output DO digital output point wired to the door strike e Inputs Exit Button 13 34 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i The Doors Form The following is a list o
406. n none Figure 10 2 Example of Direct Communication Uni directional Micros In bi directional communication the micros are connected to the host using a primary port at one end tty1 and an alternate port at the other end tty2 If communication is lost between any micros the host will communicate from the primary port to all micros upstream from the break and from the alternate port in the opposite direction to all micros upstream from the break Using this method communication with all micros is maintained For example if a break occurs between Micro 1 and 2 the host will communicate with Micro 0 and 1 from tty1 and it will communicate with Micro 3 and 2 from tty2 No communication is lost Host a EA tty 1 Primary Poti ae pe Micro 0 Micro 1 Micro 2 up hort down 1 upo down 2 up 1 down tty 2 Secondary Port up 2 down noit Figure 10 3 Example of Direct Communication Bi directional Micros 10 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros Dial up Micros A dial up micro requires an attached modem a dedicated phone line and one or more compatible modems attached to the host ports There is only one possible configuration for dial up communication uni directional which is detailed in Figure 10 4 Example of Dial Up Communication Figure 10 4 Mi4 up down host none reader Example of Dial Up Communication The table below shows the micros that are supported
407. n the Allowable Open Time set in the Door Values box Select Ignored if the sensing function on this door is not used Forced Open Monitoring Select Detected to allow an alarm condition on this door to occur immediately when the door is forced open without a valid badge read or exit device Select Ignored if the Monitoring function on this door is not used Exit Button Asserts Strike Select Enabled to allow an exit button to unlock this door for the number of seconds in the Unlock Time field and remain open for the number of seconds in the Allowable Open Time field both set in the Door Values box Be sure to make a selection in the Exit Button field in the Inputs box Select Disabled if an exit button is not allowed to unlock this door but will shunt the door DI Pre Alarm Select Enabled to allow the Pre alarm Notification feature to activate See Chapter 24 Pre Alarm Notification for details on this feature Select Disabled if the Pre alarm Notification feature is not used NOTE Input groups for the above can be generic that is one input group and alarm can F be used by all doors for forced held and pre alarm Keypad Alarm Response Select Enabled to allow the Keypad Alarm Response feature to activate See Chapter 23 Keypad Alarm Response for details on this feature Select Disabled if the Keypad Alarm Response feature is not used sealy souobaye9 Ps D o Q D S os s e Pictur
408. n the Doors form If you select No a door record is not generated Generate New Area using Master This tells the generator whether to create a new area record using the values from the master Record If you select Yes a new area record is created from the master record entries and you must select an Area Permission Group and an Area Category from picklists If you select No you will select an existing area record complete with its Area Permission Group and Area Category Area This is a picklist of areas defined on the Areas form The selected area will be assigned to the generated records for the reader and door If an area is chosen here there will be no area record generated since the operator is choosing to assign an existing area The Area picklist becomes available for selection and is required when the Generate New Area using Master No option is selected If the AOJCIBUSS Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 15 5 The Generator Form Yes option is selected there is no need to select an existing area and this picklist will become Grayed Out making it unselectable Area Permission Group This is a picklist of Area Category type permission groups defined on the Perm Group form The selected permission group will be used for the newly generated area record The Perm Group picklist becomes available for selection and is required when the Generate New Area using Master Yes option is selected
409. n the input resets The system resets any devices lights sirens etc operated by outputs in an output group For example you may decide to use an auto reset for an output device such as a camera that requires toggling on or off See Outputs Form with Micro and Output Group Picklists on page 12 8 and Reset on Input on page 12 8 Manual Reset Outputs Click this button to require an operator to manually reset any outputs associated with this alarm The system resets any devices associated with the alarm Any devices lights sirens etc operated by outputs stay on until manually reset For example you may decide to use a manual reset for a motion sensor that activates floodlights in a parking lot The manual reset requires the operator to turn the output off using the Output button on the Alarm Response window Duration Reset Outputs Click this button to allow the system to reset any outputs associated with this alarm when the output duration time elapses Any devices lights sirens etc operated by outputs stay on for the duration time set on the Outputs form For example you may use a duration reset for an alarm that triggers flood lights to go on The time duration can be set for the maximum amount of time required to implement the alarm instructions See Outputs Form with Micro and Output Group Picklists on page 12 8 and Reset on Input on page 12 8 Both the Alarms form and the Outputs for
410. n the picklist in the Ingroups form e Outgroups form to configure the output group you want activated when the alarm occurs e Ingroups form to configure the input group so that it is available in a picklist on the Micros form Also use the Ingroups form to assign an alarm or an output group to the input group 11 Adding or changing the micro using the Micro form A block diagram of the forms necessary to complete the Micros form is shown in Figure 10 1 ALARMS INPUT GROUPS Badge History Overflow Alarm History Overflow Upstream Comm Failure Downstream Comm Failure Reader Comm Failure ALARM INSTRUCTIONS ROUTING PORTS Primary Secondary MICROS Figure 10 1 Common Micro Setup 10 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros 10 i Configuring Micro Communications Picture Perfect supports three kinds of micro communications direct dial up and network All three types of communications can be combined on a single host The following sections discuss e How to configure the ports required to connect the micros to the host e How to configure micros using direct communication e How to configure micros using dial up communication e How to configure micros using network communication Ports See The Ports Form on page 4 11 for a description of how to configure ports for direct uni directional and bi directional micro communications or for dial up micro communicatio
411. n will display a list from which you can select the destination file for the backup archive See m See Appendix D Advanced Configuration for detailed information on configuring this option 18 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Backup and Restore 7 Click Execute to start the archive s Baap Fi _ Backup Archive History W Badge _ force rollover Alarm force rollover W Operator _ force rollover W Generate verification Report _ Diskette Tape _ Disk File Execute Quit Help L Figure 18 3 Archive Backup Window Performing Backups There are two methods of backing up your database e The Backup feature in Picture Perfect e The command line option cba Using the Picture Perfect Backup Function The backup function allows you to back up your access control database es o 2 o a A p 7 er fe 1 gt badge table reader table operator table etc and the databases of any optional Picture Perfect packages you may have installed If backing up to diskette make sure you have formatted diskettes available before you start the backup gt To perform a backup 1 Select Control then Backup 2 When the Backup window appears Figure 18 4 select the Backup radio button to display the various tables buttons 3 Select one or more of the tables options Badge Base History or an optional package Picture Perf
412. ncel the door s current timer Enabling or disabling Pre alarm using the radio button has no effect on an on going timing process If Pre alarm is disabled when the door opens it stays disabled until the door closes If Pre alarm is enabled when the door opens it stays enabled until the door closes Creating a Pre alarm input group during a timing process will not affect the Pre alarm it continues to behave as if it were enabled Removing a Pre alarm input group during the timing process will have different effects based on when it is removed Removing it before Pre alarm activates will prevent activation Removing it after activation will prevent Pre alarm from resetting By removing the input group the door loses its pointer to the input group and its associated alarm and outputs Changing the door s Allowable Open Time also has different effects based on when it is changed and the value to which it is changed The rules below are listed in priority order In other words the second rule has no effect when the first rule overrides it e Changing the Allowable Open Time after Pre alarm activates has no effect e When the old Allowable Open Time prevents Pre alarm from activating and it is changed after the door is opened the change has no effect e Pre alarm will not activate when the new Allowable Open Time prevents it from doing so 60 seconds or less e When Pre alarm can activate and the Allowable Open Time is changed to
413. nd 5 for General Access and floors 3 and 4 for Computer Department Therefore when this badgeholder enters the elevator floors 1 through 5 will be activated Refer to Figure 22 1 For a double badge transaction configuration each badge must first have access to the reader then the same access validation as above takes place The difference is that the final set of accessible floors will be denoted by the union of the two badges matched categories which correspond to floors In other words if the elevator category matches a category found on either badge access is granted See Chapter 26 Double Badge Transaction 22 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control 22 j Category 3 Since this badge has categories FLOOR 6 1 and 5 this badge holder is aF granted access to floors 1 ategory FLOORS through 5 because each floor contains category 1 or 5 Category 2 4 5 FLOOR 4 Category 2 4 5 When the badge is FLOOR 3 read the buttons for floors 1 through Category 1 5 light up FLOOR 2 ae Category 1 1 im 4 BADGE FLOOR 1 2 m 5 contains categories 1 Ne 2 and 5 LEGEND Category 1 General Access Category 2 Accounting Category 3 Administration Category 4 Marketing Category 5 Computer Dept Figure 22 1 Example of Elevator Control Method 1 m o lt f
414. nd View functions to query and display data As an alternative to printing a report you can display the report on screen and scroll back and forth through data The RDBMS allows you to define direct relationships between separate database tables so that a single report joins multiple tables The report function also lets you customize reports with Structured Query Language SQL so you can pinpoint just the data you need i lt N e 3 0 lt D s D Real Time Monitoring Badge activity displays in real time on a scrolling window where you can scroll backward and forward through the transaction data or perform a transaction search Database Protection The system database is protected from unauthorized use by the Operator Permissions feature which controls using a login ID and password each operator s authorization to display or update each system screen and to print reports User Defined Schedules The system provides an interface for user defined schedules For example an area can be scheduled for general employee access during business hours but restricted to selected employees after hours All schedules can be manually overridden from the operator s console If the host and Micros stop communicating Micro 5s continue processing all resident schedule changes Operator Input Validation All system forms screens and menus provide extensive data entry error checking The system will reject a form if fiel
415. ndicates how this category is used See Area Events on page 16 14 of Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes Tape Vault ortesi esso retaiersssi Used to designate a high security area and assigned to only those badges with permission to enter this restricted area Assigning Categories to Badges Areas and Area Events There are various strategies for assigning categories and the system is flexible enough to allow you to use several different methods at the same time Here are some examples Example 1 If an area that you have named HIGH RISK includes the Computer Room the Archive Tape Room and the MIS Equipment Room you may decide to assign the following categories based on job titles MIS Director Comptroller CEO To provide each of the above categories of people access to the area assign each badge using the Badges form at least one of the categories associated with that area and assign the area using the Area form all three of the above category names Example 2 Instead of using separate categories based on job titles assign all top level people to a category named HIGH RISK To provide top level people access to this area just assign the HIGH RISK category to each of their badges Example 3 Another way of assigning categories is by shift MIS All Hrs MIS 8 5 Accounting 24 Hrs Accounting 8 5 Contractor 7 10 If you assign some categories according to shift you can schedule areas to have the categories only d
416. ndividual Output When you turn an output on or off this triggers the individual output NOTE The output is turned on off for the time specified in the output s duration field gt To control an individual Output 1 Log on as an operator with permission to control outputs 2 Select Control then Outputs 3 Click the Output button to display a picklist of outputs 29 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 Controlling Outputs 29 l Select an individual Output from the picklist and click Close Click the Outputs icon A window appears with on off radio buttons next to the output name Turn the individual output on or off and click Ok Or if you have selected the wrong output click Cancel O fo 5 a ie c os c a Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 29 5 Controlling an Individual Output NOTES 29 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Viewing Status Chapter 30 Overview The Status function lets you see a micro s current operating characteristics status for its areas categories readers doors inputs input groups outputs output groups alarms modes elevators category floors and or version You can also view the status of an area s readers and or doors Scheduled events change the micro database and can also be used to update the host database The Status function allows the operator to see the database in the Micro in real time to see
417. need to be adjusted depending on the capabilities of the computer To use the feature the recommended settings are as follows 28 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Monitoring Activity 28 l WantPhotoReplaced 1 MinMilliSecsImageDisplay 500 Save the file with the new settings To begin using the feature Ifthe Activity Monitor was already opened it will need to be closed and a new copy opened so that the configuration file can be re read Ifthe Activity Monitor is not already opened open a copy from the Picture Perfect Main Menu Select the Swipe and Show Monitor option from the Outputs menu on the Activity Monitor and the auto image replace functionality should now be enabled as badges are swiped on the designated Swipe and Show reader O z O 5 amp gt Q ot lt Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 28 9 Swipe and Show Monitor NOTES 28 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Controlling Outputs Chapter 29 Overview Outputs are devices that can turn on or off due to an input condition or operator intervention An authorized operator can turn outputs on or off using the Control Outputs function for the duration of Time entered on the Output form O e 2 5 Ke O c c e 7 Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites Form Purpose INPUT GROUPS To allow inputs to ac
418. network micro 1 Select Devices then Micros 2 Complete the Micros form for each micro See The Micros Form on page 10 18 for details on completing this form The following fields must be set to the given value e For the primary port you must select a network micro port e For the secondary port you must select None e Click on the Dial Up button and select a modem type of None Leave the remaining fields on this Dial Up screen blank 3 Click Save 4 Toadd another micro click New or Quit to exit gt To add a dial up network micro 1 Select Devices then Micros 2 Complete the Micros form for each micro See The Micros Form on page 10 18 for details on completing this form e For the primary port you must select a network micro port Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 13 Adding or Change a Micro e For the secondary port you must select None e Click Dial Up and select the modem type of the host s modem Complete the remainder of the Dial Up screen 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another micro or Quit to exit Changing Micros Changing a micro is simply locating the record and changing the necessary fields Keep in mind that if you change the port or modem setting you may be changing the type of communications that this micro is using To change a micro configuration 1 Select Devices then Micros 2 Click Find to retrieve all the micro records or enter specific
419. ng Printers Sele er Ri PARALLEL PRINTER elect Printer Routing Select Printer Figure 4 10 Printer Routing History Log Select History Log to route messages to a history log file Monitor Select Monitor to route messages to the Alarm or Activity Monitor When the Monitor routing is selected the Email button is enabled Email Select Email to route message to an e mail address or alias Click the Select Email Address button to display all of the e mail addresses currently defined in the system Select the desired addresses from the picklist then click Ok 3 o ie D 2 kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 23 Badge Formats amp S a quit save find view new help Record of 14 Found Prev Next PARALLEL PRINTER Select Printer Email Addresses Email Rou ting Select Email Address Figure 4 11 E Mail Routing Badge Formats The format of the encoded badge is identified by a special character sequence that optionally starts with constant data and always ends with variable data It must include a percent sign to mark the beginning of the variable data and a lower case s to mark the end The entire Badge ID must be between 1 and 16 alphanumeric characters long Constant data such as a facility code is data common to all badges and will be entered in front of the in this field Constant dat
420. ng a facility you should ask yourself two questions What do you want to do with the records that have the facility assigned to them You will be given the opportunity to re assign the facility for those related records to Global or to change them to an existing facility If you choose to re assign them to an existing facility you should keep in mind who has Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 3 Facilities access to that facility because that operator will now have access to those records using their existing facility profile What operators are already using that facility When a facility is deleted it will remove the facility to facility profile relationships for any operator using that facility The facility record is deleted but the facility profile record is left intact This means you may need to re assign the facility profile to a new facility for each operator that may have been using the deleted facility Deleting an existing facility will effectively remove an operator s access to that facility 1 Select Access then Facility 2 From the toolbar click Find Navigate to the facility that you wish to delete 3 From the toolbar click Delete Result The Delete Facility window will display C DeeteFaiy Change Related Records to Global 1 C Select New Facility for Related Records Figure 5 3 Delete Facility Window 4 Select either Change Related Records to Global 1 Changes
421. nistration Guide 4 7 Modems Figure 4 3 Modems Form Bottom Lo speed Connect Msg Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that the modem returns when it connects using its low speed baud rate High Speed Baud For multi speed modems enter the highest baud rate that this modem can use for a connection The modem uses its highest baud rate when it first tries to connect If it does not receive a carrier using the high speed baud rate it steps down to lower baud rates until the connection occurs Hi speed Connect Msg Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that this modem returns when it connects using its high speed baud rate No Carrier Msg Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that this modem gives when it fails to connect this message differentiates between No Carrier No Answer and Busy 4 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 No Answer Message Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that this modem gives when it fails to connect this message differentiates between No Carrier and No Answer Error Message Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that this modem gives when it rejects an invalid command Busy Msg Enter the message 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters that this modem gives when it fails to connect this message differentiates between No Carrier and Busy Select One Facility Facility Clic
422. nlock Time expires so a badgeholder can open the door and not get a Door Forced Open alarm Allowable Open Time secs Enter the number of seconds that this door may be open due to a valid badge read before an alarm condition exists Be sure to set the Held Open Sensing button to Detected in the Door Control box to activate this feature Keypad Shunt Time mins Enter the number of minutes that this door may remain open due to a badgeholder entering an override code into a keypad reader For example Shipping and Receiving may use the override time to keep a shipping door open beyond the Allowable Open Time Refer to Figure 13 14 for the bottom left hand portion of the Doors form C Z G C sy E C E DANDA ei Figure 13 14 Doors Form Bottom Left Door Control Use the radio buttons to specify the Door Control setting for each of the following items 13 36 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i Door State Indicate whether you want the door currently Locked pending a valid badge read or other event or Unlocked Scheduling Select Enabled to allow scheduled changes set for this door to take place Select Disabled to prevent scheduled changes set for this door from taking place Held Open Sensing Select Detected to allow an alarm condition to occur on this door when the door remains open with a valid badge reader or exit button for too long based o
423. nother category 13 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i The Categories Form Categories orion Record of 12 Found fev Next Ga oe Category Permission Permission Group SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR Modified Two man Rule Type C None _ Guest _ Team Member S Figure 13 2 Categories Form Category Enter a category description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Category Permission Permission Group Click the Permission Group button to display a picklist of Permission Groups Select the desired Permission Group for this category then click Close Modified Two man Rule Type M2MR These buttons identify M2MR category types and will only be available to operators with Occupancy Control permission granted See Occupancy Control on page 13 17 The M2MR category type defines different levels of access to M2MR controlled areas as AQ indicated below Entry to an M2MR controlled area is restricted by the 5 M2MR category type of the categories on the badge and the area Eke 2 o 3 None ao Access to an M2MR controlled area is not permitted while M2MR control is 2 gt enabled Uo on oo Guest a A Guest is not allowed entry to an M2MR controlled area unless two 2 team members are already present in the area Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 7 Categories Team Member If the M2MR control
424. notice changes since the last publication marked by a change bar which is a vertical line in the margin that E visually identifies significant new or revised information Terminology Click To click means to press and release a mouse button while the pointer is on a designated area of the screen in order to display a window or select an option The press and release makes a clicking sound The term double click means to press and release a mouse button twice in rapid succession Left click and right click mean to click the button on the left or right side of the mouse Cc o 5 r 7 D 5 2 Select The word select indicates that you choose an item from the current menu submenu form or picklist displayed on the screen Use the mouse Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 1 1 Terminology or the cursor keys to select the item For example Select Devices then Terminals The statement above tells you to select a certain menu Devices and then to select a certain submenu that will appear Terminals If you make the selections with a mouse you will point to the Devices icon and click the left mouse button When the submenu icons appear you will point and click on the Terminals icon to select this submenu If you make the selections with a keyboard you will use the cursor keys instead of a mouse pointer and the key instead of the left mouse button Press The phrase
425. nput group s alarm and output groups are not affected by its association with a parent They will all work independently Example of a Parent Input Group A high security vault is equipped with three motion detectors yet a security guard is required to patrol the vault periodically Any one of the motion detectors must be able to activate an alarm but the alarm must be disabled during the patrol This scenario can be resolved as follows refer to figure 9 3 on page 9 10 e Have the three motion detectors inputs 1 2 and 3 go into a Motion input group This input group would have a boolean type of any so any single motion detector could activate this group e Assign Motion the Parent Input Group of Vault No alarms or outputs will be associated directly with Motion e Assign Vault the appropriate alarm and Output Groups desired for motion being detected in the vault area and assign it a boolean type of all e Associate a toggle reader see Toggle on page 13 28 of Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors with an input group called Control The toggle reader will be the only input in this group Control will be a Trigger on Input Individual input group which is non boolean so a badge swipe through this reader will toggle the Input Group s state on or off e Assign Control the Parent Input Group of Vault No alarms or outputs will be associated directly with Control e Vault s only inputs are its child input
426. ns Ports configured using the Ports form are then available on a Ports picklist for assignment to micros See The Network Micro Ports Form on page 4 16 for a description of how to configure ports for network micro and firewall communications Ports configured using the Network Ports form are then available on a Ports picklist for assignment to micros Direct Communications Micro A direct communications micro requires direct connection to the host Communication can be uni directional as in Figure 10 2 or bi directional as in Figure 10 3 NOTE F Micro 2s are not supported downstream from a Micro 5 P Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 3 Configuring Micro Communications In uni directional communication each line of micros is connected to the host from a unique port For example Micro 0 through 3 are connected to tty1 Micro 4 through 5 are connected to tty2 If communication is lost between downstream micros the host continues to communicate only with those micros upstream from the break An alarm is generated indicating the loss of communication For example if a break occurs between Micro 1 and 2 the host will only have communication with Micro 0 and 1 from tty1 and it will maintain communication with Micro 4 and 5 from tty2 Communication with Micro 2 and 3 is lost Host F Micro 1 Micro 2 Micro up hort down 1 up 0 down2 up i downs Uup2 dovwnnone Micro 4 Micro 5 up hort down up 4 dow
427. ns appear as separate alarms on the Alarm Monitor A single valid keypad response resets both alarms Each alarm is separately removed from the Alarm Monitor when the response is completed Door Operation While Violation is Active The door will continue to operate normally while the keypad alarm response is active This makes it possible for someone to gain access through the door even though the response to the violation has not been completed Keypad Alarm Response Configuration gt Follow these steps to set up a Keypad Alarm Response details on each step are given below 1 Define the Alarm Response Code maximum of 10 digits on the Devices Micros form 2 Define a reader as a Badge and Keypad reader on the Readers form 3 Enable the Keypad Alarm Response on the Devices Doors form 4 Enable a badge to be used as the Keypad Alarm Response badge on the Access Badges form 23 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Keypad Alarm Response 23 j Defining the Alarm Response Code Use the Devices Micros form Figure 23 1 to define an alarm response code up to 10 digits for each micro on which Keypad Alarm Response will be implemented When an authorized badgeholder responds to an access violation on a door using this feature he will enter this code for reader keypads on this micro The same code can be used on any number of the system s micros or you can configure different codes for different micros
428. nside the frame A scroll bar consists of a slider scroll arrows and a scroll area To scroll click on the scroll arrows or the scroll area or drag the slider Select To choose an object to be acted upon or an action to be performed Select Button The mouse button used to make a selection In Picture Perfect this is the left button Semaphore In programming especially in UNIX based systems semaphores are a technique for coordinating or synchronizing activities in which multiple process compete for the same operating system resources A semaphore is a value in a designated place in operating system or kernel storage that each process can check and then change Server Generally a server is a computer program that provides services to other computer programs in the same or other computers In the client server programming model a server is a program that awaits and fulfills requests from client programs in the same or other computers Shuffle To move a window to the screen foreground or background Shunt Override an alarm on a door contact that detects an open state on the door A digital input device monitors the door state If the door opens with a valid read or exit device the input device a door contact detects a state change but does not report the change until a shunt time elapses The shunt time allows the badgeholder enough time to get through the door See Door Forced Open and Door Open Too Long To override a doo
429. nstalled in a Micro 5 e The duration time should be the same for all elevator digital outputs NOTE In a Reader DI DO configuration make sure the Reader Interval Time does not exceed the Output DO Duration e Elevator digital outputs do not require output groups to be associated with them Defining Inputs Required for Reader DI DO Configuration Use the Devices Inputs form to define a digital input for each elevator floor button Figure 22 6 When this input is received by the micro it performs a category match and if successful activates the associated output for a floor to which access is allowed For more information see The Inputs Form on page 12 9 m p lt fe fe S r 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 11 Elevator Control Setup Inputs orion amp 8 8 2 3 8 EE 1 Frey E 00 1 01 ELEVATOR FLOOR 1 Figure 22 7 Inputs Form Configured for Elevator Floor Button Keep the following in mind when defining elevator floor inputs e Toggle the Elevator Point button to On to make this input an elevator input e Atleast one 20DI board must be configured with an elevator configured to have the Reader DI DO configuration e Fora maximum configuration 39 floors an 8RP reader configured to be an elevator reader two 20DI boards and two 16DO boards must be installed in a Micro 5 e Elevator DI s do not require an input group to be associated wi
430. nt value was entered on a reader not enabled as a Shunt reader INVALID T amp AIN An invalid read occurred in a T amp A IN reader INVALID T amp A OUT An invalid read occurred ina T amp A OUT reader KR INVLD OPEN DR A keypad response was given while the door was still open KR NOT ENABLED A keypad response was given on a reader not enabled as a Keypad reader LEARN TIMEOUT A badge was not learned by the micro within the set amount of time of 5 seconds NO CATEG MATCH An invalid badge read occurred because the badgeholder s categories did not match one of the area s categories NOT VALIDATED In a Double Badge reader the second badge read was not validated because the first was invalid 3 READER OFFLINE A read took place in an offline reader 2 USAGE EXHAUSTED The badgeholder s usage count for limited usage readers has been exhausted o 2ND BDG DOOR LOCK A second valid read occurred before the door was g opened for the first valid read The door then locks INVALID FLOOR An invalid floor number was selected with Elevator Reader DI DO configuration Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 28 3 Badge Monitor gt To view badge activity 1 Select Monitors then Activity 2 Click the Outputs button to display the Monitor Control pop up window Figure 28 1 3 If not already selected select Badge Monitor from the Monitor Control pop up window 4 Click Ok Figure 28 2 shows an example of a badge acti
431. ntifier of the language the login screen uses The following example changes the login screen to French chxdmlang fr FR Subsequent modifications to the text used in the screen require that the command be run again As before buildlang must be run before chxdmlang Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 32 15 Error and Warning Messages Error and Warning Messages All error and warning messages are displayed with a type indicator followed by a message number The type indicators are E for error messages and W for warning messages Examples are E00123 Error message number 123 wW00123 Warning message number 123 The ppmsgnbr facility provides the ability to view a warning or error message in a selected language The command s calling convention is ppmsgnbr type number locale where type is message type E or W number is message number and locale is locale identifier of the language in which message will be displayed The argument is optional with English as its default value Customizing Badge and Department Screens Both the Badge and Department screens include fields which users may wish to customize The Badge screen defines fields Address 1 to Address 5and User 1to User 40 to hold any data desired by the user The Department screen defines fields User 1 and User 2 to hold any data desired by the user Use the User Customization Tool to customize the Address and User field names as they are presented on th
432. o InputGroups Input Groups on Micro Mode Mode on Micro Outputs Outputs on Micro QutputGroups Output Groups on Micro Readers Readers on Micro Doors Doors on Micro Figure 33 14 Status Information From Micros Menu 33 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide In Case of Problems 33 l Alarms The Alarms on Micro selection allows you to send an alarm status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the micro ID where the alarm request is sent press Enter and wait about 30 seconds for the screen to display information If the screen scrolls too rapidly press G S to suspend and x Q to restart the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu Areas The Areas on Micro selection allows you to send an area status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the micro ID where the area request is sent press Enter and wait about 30 seconds for the screen to display information If the screen scrolls too rapidly press m S to suspend and Ga Q to restart the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu Badges The Badges on Micro selection allows you to send a badge status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the badge ID full 10 digits and the micro ID press Enter and wait about ten seconds for the screen to display information If the screen scrolls too rapidly press m S to suspend and Gm Q to restart
433. o Set Up a Modified Two Man Rule M2MR Controlled Space without Door Control Table 21 1 Badge Transactions for Occupancy Counting and Two Man Rule Features 2MR Mode Badge Event Description Badge Transaction Generated Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time door NOT opened Valid no passage Two valid badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty within specified reader interval time door IS opened Two APB T amp A IN occupancy count incremented by two to two Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty but second swipe is not within specified reader interval time NO Transaction Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty but second badge is invalid Valid door locked Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty but second badge does not have a valid category Valid Door Locked and No Categ Match Two badge swipes on IN reader when room is empty but first badge does not have a valid category and second badge is valid No Categ Match and Not Validated One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy countis atleast two door NOT opened Valid no passage One valid badge swipe on IN reader when occupancy count is at least two door IS opened One APB T amp A IN occupancy count incremented by one One valid badge swipe on OUT reader when occupancy countis at least three door NOT opened
434. o be defined A Timed APB status is local to the micro Swipe and Show Control This feature is only visible if you have the Image package installed You can schedule a specific time period for any of the following functions to be active Swipe and Show Select Enabled to enable Swipe And Show on this reader Select Disabled to disable Swipe And Show on this reader O gt D Q D o v 5 a z fo a 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 23 Area Events NOTE NOTE A reader cannot be defined as Toggle when Swipe And Show is Enabled See Toggle on page 13 28 If Toggle is set to Yes and either Authorization Required or Authorization Not Required is turned on photos will be displayed for invalid transactions but not valid transactions Authorization Required Select Yes to designate a reader that will display a photo on the Activity Monitor and require an operator to unlock a door Select No to designate a reader that will display a photo on the Activity Monitor and will unlock a door without operator intervention The Yes and No buttons are not available unless Swipe And Show Enabled is selected Access cannot be granted through readers defined as Authorization Required while communications to the micro are down Door Door State Unlocked Locked You can set up area events to open all doors in an area during normal business hours for example lobby doors or common interior doors su
435. o select that object Point and drag Point at an object usually a window press and drag until the pointer reaches the desired location then release the button Use this method to resize a window reposition an object or window or to make a menu Selection from a pop up window Using a Window A window consists of several elements which have different features These features are used to manipulate the window The Title Bar The Title Bar Figure 3 11 runs across the top of the window It displays the name of the window and contains three buttons One button is on the left the other two are on the right The buttons Figure 3 11 Title Bar and Buttons perform these functions e iy ES gt fo wn er gt gt a Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 15 Using a Window Table 3 2 Title Bar and Buttons Button Location Description Window Menu Left side Opens the Window Menu Minimize Second from right Reduces the window to an icon on the taskbar Maximize Far right Enlarges the window to full screen size Press again to return window to previous size See Using the Window Menu on page 3 18 for details on menu functions gt To move the window and to shuffle send the window to the front or back 1 Press hold down the left mouse button anywhere on the title bar except on the buttons 2 Drag the window displayed now a
436. ode Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Output Group Select the output group that will be triggered by the event Enabled Output groups such as lights or perimeter cameras can be enabled to operate as required at scheduled times For example Define output group events to have parking lot lights enabled only during the night State The outputs in the output group such as emergency lights or sirens can be turned on or off A duration of zero turns on the output indefinitely For example Define an output group event for Emergency mode that turns on sirens and emergency lights for the duration of Time or Define output group events for normal mode to turn on lights late at night and turn them off in the morning 02 O gt D Q D o v 5 a z fo a 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 43 Reporting Reporting catsup This is a command line tool that lists in a report format all the schedules that have been executed up to the current time and date by all micros Use the following to get the report in a default format catsup cas log sup mmdd where mm is the month and dd is the day Example sup 0302 March 2nd To get a listing of all the options available
437. olled space must be of the Team Member personnel type and at least two team members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Additionally a team member within the controlled space must press a door release button in order to allow entry to any subsequent badge holders The door release button must be pressed within the time specified in the Door Release Timeout field or the door will not be unlocked 13 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 Modified without Door Control Select this radio button to activate the two man rule mode which restricts access to a controlled area based on the M2MR Category Type The first two badge holders to enter a controlled space must be of the M2MR Type and at least two Team members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Door Release Timeout This field is enabled only if the operator has Occupancy Control permission granted Valid values range from 0 no timeout to 32 767 seconds Set Routings Select routings for the following types of conditions Valid Routing Click the Valid Routing button to display the Routings picklist Select the desired routing for a valid badge read then click Close Invalid Routing Click the Invalid Routing button to display the Routings picklist Select the desired routing for an invalid badge read then click Close Suspended Routing Click the Susp
438. olor for the text of the alarm message that will be displayed on the Alarm Monitor Background Index Click the Background Index button to display a palette of colors Select the desired color for the background of the alarm message that will be displayed on the Alarm Monitor When finished using the palette click Ok After you have made your selections the Alarm Color field will display the colors you have chosen for this alarm Alarms betsparky fiev Next so Figure 8 4 l Inhibit Schedule Changes Set Alarm Routing Immediate Reset Input Immediate Dial Required Foreground Index Background Index Auto Reset Outputs _ Manual Reset Outputs _ Duration Reset Outputs BLANK gt Route Definition lt GLOBAL Facility Alrminstuctions Select up to 5 instructions Alarm Instructions OK Refresh Cancel Help Set Alarm Instructions Alarms Form with Color Palette AlarmRouting Select ONE Alarm Routing ALL lt GLOBAL gt HISTORY lt GLOBAL gt MONITOR lt GLOBAL gt MONITOR AND HISTORY lt GLOBAL gt MONITOR AND PRINTER lt GLOBAL gt NONE lt GLOBAL gt PARALLEL PRINTER lt GLOBAL gt PRINTER AND HISTORY lt GLOBAL gt el aha Alarm Routing OK Alarm Online MONITOR AND HISTORY EERTE Alarm Instructions and Alarm Routing Picklist 8 10 Picture Perfe
439. ommand also stops Picture Perfect before shutting down the system Wait until the halt completed AIX or Power Down Linux message appears and then power down the computer 3 24 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started 3 Frequently Used Unix Commands The following commands are frequently used in both AIX and Linux pwd Present working directory who Who is logged on ps e Processor status ipcs Shared memory status rm Remove file mv Move or rename file more Page contents of a file cd Change directory Is l List contents of current directory cat Type contents of file Pipe Connects two programs df Shows used and free space of file systems plevel Shows patch level of Picture Perfect packages 9 zd 5 ro n e 5 4 a Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 25 System Setup Procedures System Setup Procedures Because the Picture Perfect forms build off of one another it is important that the setup procedures follow a logical flow The steps below are listed in the preferred order to make the setup of your system a smooth one Table 3 3 System Setup Procedures Task Menu Form Information 1 Terminals Devices Terminals See Chapter 4 Initial Setup 2 Modems Devices Modems See Chapter 4 Initial Setup 3 Serial Ports Devices P orts See Chapter 4 Init
440. on The Badge Removal popup asks if you want to remove only the current record or all records If you select Remove Current Record only the record displayed in the Badge Holder Information box will be removed If you select Remove All Records the number of records shown in parentheses on the Badge Removal popup will be removed provided they all have a status of Deleted Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 7 Removing Badge Records Badge Removal Remove current record Remove all records 1 501 Remove Associated Image s Figure 14 1 Badge Removal Popup 5 Select one choice on the Badge Removal popup and click Ok to confirm your intention to remove the badge records If you do not want to proceed with the removal process click Cancel If the Image package has been installed there will be an additional toggle selection Remove Associated Images in the Badge Removal popup Select this in addition to Remove Current Record or Remove All Records to remove associated photo images for the badges to be removed 6 Ifyou chose to Remove Current Record the selected record is removed immediately CAUTION The next step will remove all badge records selected on the Badges form A 7 Ifyou chose to Remove All Records the Remove Record popup provides another level of confirmation This popup also shows the range of badge records to be removed Click Ok again if you are sure you want to proceed otherwise click
441. on then click Close Unknown Grp The input group to trigger when an unknown badge read occurs An unknown badge is one whose BID The hidden number that uniquely identifies each badge is not recorded in the Badges table of the Picture Perfect database and therefore is not recognized by the system Click the Unknown Grp button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the desired Input Group for an unknown badge violation then click Close Antipassback Grp The input group to trigger when an antipassback violation occurs When used in conjunction with antipassback readers the antipassback status In Out or Privileged of a badge plus a category match regulate its ability to open a door For example if a badgeholder starts to enter an antipassback area by swiping his badge then allows the door to close without entering he will not be able to re enter that area because the system has already registered him as In 13 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i Click the Antipassback Grp button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the desired Input Group for an antipassback violation then click Close Duress Grp The input group to trigger when a valid duress code badge read occurs Duress codes can be used with Badge and Keypad or Keypad readers to alert the system that a valid badge read was made under forced conditions or duress Click the Duress Grp button to displa
442. ondition Detected by a Door DOOR 00 1 00 LOBBY B1 FORCED OPEN MONITORING INPUT X DETECTED INPUT GROUP ALARM 00 1 00 LOBBY BI DOOR FORCED OPEN DOOR FORCED DOOR DI OPEN MICRO 0 sel INPUT BOARD 1 ADDRESS 00 sel INPUT GROUP sel INPUT GROUP for FORCED OPEN oA NOTE An Input Group is not selected on the Input form e The use of an Exit Device is recommended e The special situation of Supervised Inputs on a 2SRP or 20DI board is covered in the section oon Input Groups Figure H 5 Door Forced Condition Detected by Door Example of a Problem Condition Detected by a Sensor DI and Triggering Both an Alarm and a Physical Output DO INPUT INPUT GROUP ALARM OUTPUT 00 1 16 LOBBY TEMP 00 1 16 LOBBY A C LOBBY A C FAILURE 00 1 16 LOBBY SENSOR FAILURE TROUBLE LITE BOARD 1 BOARD 1 ADDRESS 16 OUTPUT GROUP ADDRESS 16 sel OUTPUT GRP 00 1 16 LOBBY sel INPUT GROUP TROUBLE LITE sel OUTPUT GRP Figure H 6 Problem Condition Detected by Sensor DI H 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Example of a DI Used to Trigger a Physical Output DO INPUT INPUT GROUP OUTPUT 00 1 17 PARKING LOT 00 1 17 PARKING LOT 00 1 17 PARKING LIGHT SWITCH LIGHTS LOT LIGHT DO 0 MICRO 0 MICRO sel ALARM BOARD 1 BOARD 1 ADDRESS 17 OUTPUT GROUP ADDRESS 17 00 1 17 PARKING sel OUTPUT GRP sel INPUT GROUP LOT LIGHTS sel OUTPUT GRP NOTE A type of schedule called an Output Group Event could also con
443. only one transaction fails it reports its reason for failure while the other reports that it was valid but did not gain access It is possible to detect the one component transaction s failure before the other component transaction has been completely validated In this case the other component transaction will report that it was not completely validated All transaction reports include a time stamp It shows the time at which the access decision was made not when the transaction started Since a double transaction s access decision is made when both component transactions are complete both transactions will report the same time stamp 26 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Double Badge Transaction 26 i Double Badge Configuration To configure a reader for double badge function set the Number Of Badges field on the Devices Readers form to Double Figure 26 1 All readers can be configured to require one or two transactions for granting access In addition the Interval Time field on this form Figure 26 2 must be completed The interval time specifies the number of seconds allowed between stages of the transaction See Chapter 13 Categories Areas Readers and Doors for details on the Readers form a0 u o sc Reader Control n od 9 gt Physical State _ Enabled _ Disabled Qo w Logical State _ Online _ Offline oOo 53 Q Shunting _ Enabled _ Disabled Lo 9 gt Scheduling _ Enabled _ Dis
444. or Outputs Floor lt BLANK Floor2 lt BLANK Floor3 lt BLANK Floor4 lt BLANK Floor5 lt BLANK Floor6 lt BLANK Floor lt BLANK Floor lt BLANK Floor9 lt BLANK Floor 10 lt BLANK Floor 11 lt BLANK ori lt BLANK Floor 13 lt BLANK paT A a ETTA aa roars aT ul roars a Fea EE Figure 22 13 Reader DO Config 3 Click the Reader button and select a reader from the picklist The reader should be defined as an elevator reader 4 For each floor click the appropriate button and select an output from the picklist This type of configuration supports up to 64 floors per micro Click the Refresh Floor Defs button to update the floor labels if changes have been made since the Config window was displayed 22 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control 22 i gt To Set Up Example 2 in a Reader DI DO Configuration 1 In Configuration Type select Reader DI DO 2 Click the Reader DI DO Config button to display the following window Reader DI DO Config T Fire DO after Floor Selection Floor Input Floor Outputs Fooi lt BLANK gt LANK gt 7 BLANK Fiore lt gt gt BLANK Fiora lt gt gt c BLANK Fiora lt fs gt BLANK F or Inp 3 4 lt gt gt BLANK Fiore lt gt LAN gt BLANK Floor lt gt gt or BLANK lt BLANK gt 0 lt ILAN gt BLANK F lt BLANK gt lt AN gt 0 lt BLANK Floor 10 lt BLANK gt lt gt Floor 10 lt
445. or determines which areas that operator can assign to readers and doors See Chapter 6 Permissions and Operators When you assign an area to a door or a reader the categories and controls defined for the area become valid for all doors and readers that belong to that area Some of the controls on the Areas form are also available on the Doors form and the Readers form In some cases this may allow an individual door or reader to have controls that differ from the assigned area Table 13 1 lists the controls that Areas Readers and Doors have in common Table 13 1 Common Control Fields of the Areas Readers and Doors Areas Readers Doors Scheduling Scheduling Scheduling Shunting Shunting Physical State Physical State Logical State Logical State NOTE A setting of Disabled in any of these fields on any of these forms overrides a setting of Enabled in the same field on another form For example if Shunting is Enabled 7l for an area but a reader in that area has Shunting Disabled the Shunting feature will not work for that reader Shunting must be set to Enabled on both the Areas and Readers forms in order for it to work Setup To create an area 1 Select Access then Areas sealy souobaye9 A D o Q O iy gt os s e 2 2 Complete the Areas form For details on each field see The Areas Form on page 13 14 Click Save 4 Click New to add anot
446. or various functions Frame The border surrounding a window consisting of a resize border a window menu button a title bar and window control buttons Function Button Icon based buttons at the top of a form that are used for various functions such as save find delete view or quit See Radio Button Select Button Toggle Button Function Key Keys on a computer s keyboard labelled F1 through F12 that may perform unique functions within a system Highlight A graphic technique that provides a visual cue to the current selection or the current location of the input focus Reverse video is typically used to highlight a selection Host A host is generally a device or program that provides services to some smaller or less capable device or program Host Console The host computer terminal used for AIX functions I Beam A graphic symbol that indicates the location of the mouse pointer in a text entry box See Text Cursor Icon A graphic symbol that represents a function or an iconified window Iconify To minimize a window An icon represents the window See Restore Inactive Window A window that does not have the input focus Informix The relational database management system RDBMS used by the Picture Perfect system See Relational Database Input A digital input DI or a logical condition detected by the microcontroller An input is assigned to an input group Input Field An area of the screen where an oper
447. orcement of Report Permission is enabled through the Control Parameters form only those reports that the operator has permission to access will be displayed Ppsql Report Displays a picklist of SQL reports History Report Displays a picklist of history reports Printer Click to display a picklist of printers 19 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports Chapter 20 Overview This chapter introduces you to Structured Query Language SQL and describes the SOL form s pull down menus scrolling windows pop up picklists and buttons o 2 F A ke le Z This chapter shows you how to generate a typical badge report using the SQL form and SQL statements To get acquainted with SQL statements read SQL Clauses on page 20 14 in this chapter If you are not familiar with SQL use an SQL reference book or select one of the pre loaded reports You can open one of the pre loaded reports and examine the SQL statements so that you can build your own SQL statement for a report Or you can open an existing report save it under a new title and modify the SQL statement to build a new report Prerequisites Use an SQL reference book to create your SQL statements Use standard ANSI syntax SELECT column name column name FROM table name The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites Forms Purpose PRINTER To produce hard copy of report statements or report results P
448. os Form on page 10 18 for details on completing this form The following fields must be set to the given value e Specify None for port assignment primary and secondary since dial up micros call the host on any available port that is compatible same modem type e Click Dial Up and select the modem type of the host s modem Complete the remainder of the Dial Up screen 3 Click Save 4 Toadd another micro click New or Quit to exit Micros Downstream from Dial up Micros For micros downstream from dial up communication micros Ports must be configured before adding or changing a micro and the head end dial up micro must be configured Refer to Table 10 1 for a list of the type of micros that can be downstream 10 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros 10 gt To add a configuration for a micro that is downstream from a dial up micro 1 Select Devices then Micros 2 Complete the Micros form and review the items that directly relate to direct connect micros See The Micros Form on page 10 18 for details on completing this form The following fields must be set to the given value e Click Dial Up and select None on the Callback field Then for the modem type select Downstream Dialup 3 Click Save 4 Toadd another micro click New or Quit to exit Network Micros For network micros network micro ports must be configured before adding or changing a micro gt To add a
449. ou are running a version of Picture Perfect earlier than Picture Perfect 2 0 Refer to the section MicTool on page 11 6 if you are using MicTool to flash your micros Refer to the section eFlash on page 11 8 if you are running Picture Perfect 2 0 or later Flash Download Utility This download procedure can be used with Picture Perfect version 1 3 host systems or later The flash download program to upgrade the EPROMS of a Micro 5 a Micro PX 2000 or Micro PXN 2000 is accessed through the flash utility of Picture Perfect using the command line Features e Flashes Micro 5 PXN Micro 5 PX MicroProx and Micro 5 P micros e Flashes downstream micros Limitations e Cannot edit micro parameter settings such as phone numbers or a micro IP address e Does not provide online help e Micro must be in maintenance mode during the flash download 11 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Flashing Micros 11 i Operation To flash a micro using the Picture Perfect Flash Download Utility 1 Loginas root atthe console 2 To access the Micro Flash EPROM Upgrade menu at the command line prompt type flash Terminal Window Edit Options Picture Perfect u en 2 z Ss e 2 2 Artes ee Othe CE Figure 11 1 Micro Flash EPROM Upgrade Menu 3 Insert a diskette containing the firmware hex files into the disk drive 4 From the Micro Flash EPROM Upgrade menu select E
450. ously Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 17 The Badges Form had this field set to Yes the record will only be sent to those micros that have learned this badge To resend an updated badge record to all micros perform the following steps 1 Set the Download Upon Save field to No 2 Save the record 3 Make any other field changes if needed 4 Set the Download Upon Save field to Yes 5 Save the record If you select No any time a badge record is saved it is only sent to those micros that have learned this badge record which is the normal method of operation This is the default for any new record including those that were copied from an existing record NOTE When a record is changed only the changes are sent down to the micro and not the whole record If a situation arises where a change never gets to a micro then m do the following 1 2 3 4 Undo the changes reverse the change Save the record Make the changes again Save the record Dial up micros are handled according to the dial up settings on the Micros form Temporary Badge Select the Yes radio button if this badge record is to be used as a temporary badge A pool of badges can be created and used repeatedly for this purpose A temporary badge must be expired in order to be reissued Limited Badge Usage Select this feature to allow entry to Limited Usage readers Type a specific number in the Usage Count field Each time the bad
451. ove Record Popup cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeees 14 8 Figure 14 3 Badges Form Top Left 14 11 Figure 14 4 Badges Form Top Right ceeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 14 12 Figure 14 5 Badges Form Top Middle with Seed Counter enabled Acinic far seta th ee 14 13 Figure 14 6 Badge Encode Format Window cceeeee 14 16 Figure 14 7 Badges Form Bottom Right cc eeeeeeeeeee 14 17 Figure 14 8 Badges Form Bottom Left 0 eee 14 19 Figure 14 9 Temporary Categories Form 14 21 Figure 14 10 Badge Form Advanced Scheduling 22 05 14 22 Figure 14 11 Badges Form Bottom Middle 14 24 Figure 15 1 Master Records Window cscceeesteeeeeenees 15 3 Figure 15 2 Generator Form cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 15 4 Figure 16 1 Mode Creation Form cccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeenteeeeeenaees 16 6 Figure 16 2 Mode Command Form cccceccesseeeeeeenteeeeeeenaees 16 7 Figure 16 3 Mode Events Form cccsceeeeseeeeeeneteeeeeeeaes 16 10 Figure 16 4 Runtime Portion of an Events Form 16 12 Figure 16 5 Start End Portion of an Events Form s 16 13 Figure 16 6 Area Events Form TOp ccecssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 16 16 Figure 16 7 Area Events Form Middle 16 17 Figure 16 8 Areas Form Categories Window cceeee 16 20 Figure 16 9 Area Events Form View Window 0 000 16 20 Figure 16 10 Examples Areas Form Cat
452. override scheduled mode changes in an emergency For example if you change to an emergency mode on the day before a scheduled holiday and you permit scheduled mode changes to occur the system will switch to holiday mode as scheduled If you do not permit scheduled changes to occur the system will stay in the emergency mode until you use the Mode Command form to change the mode again Exit Click Exit to close the Mode Command form Change Mode Click Change Mode to tell the system to change to the selected mode and or to allow or disallow scheduled mode changes How to Change Mode by Schedule To have the system return to normal operations when the mode event is over schedule another mode event that activates Normal mode For example the Christmas Holiday mode could be triggered by a Start Christmas mode event scheduled at 5 PM on Christmas Eve then returned to Normal mode by an End Christmas mode event scheduled at 7 AM on the day after Christmas When the system enters a new mode it does not execute events for the new mode that are scheduled to occur before the new mode starts For example if an event scheduled for 7 AM in normal operating mode unlocks the lobby doors but the system does not return to normal mode until 8 AM then the lobby doors will remain locked until the next day at 7 AM Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide NOTE Schedules and Modes 16 l EXCEPTION If communication with the micro is lost
453. ow this line 5 To insert a blank line ABOVE press BELOW press Q 6 At the blank line enter the name and address or address and name depending on the current format of your file 7 Press the key to move from Insert mode to Command mode 8 Repeat steps 4 to 7 for each address you need to enter Remember you need one address for the Host and one for each Workstation When you have completed entering all addresses type ZZ Result This will save the changes to the file and exit the vi editor Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide E 3 Editing the etc hosts File NOTES E 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Alarm Routing and Bumping EJLA Using Picture Perfect Web Browser Overview The Picture Perfect alarm monitor routing feature allows administrators to specify per alarm which X terminals receive the alarm notification With the introduction of Picture Perfect Web browser terminal definitions became virtual Web clients called unix 10 unix 11 and so on and are not assigned to a specific PC workstation but rather to an operator session Each time an operator logs in the next available virtual terminal is assigned to that operator for that session The concept of virtual terminals is what makes it possible to log in to Picture Perfect using a Web browser from any PC on the network As a result of this change in terminal definitions routing alarms to specific terminals was no longe
454. p Delay Time is set to 0 seconds Verify that the exit button is enabled using the DOORS form Verify that the exit button DI is selected using the DOORS form Main Menu An operator has missing items on the Picture Perfect program Verify the operator s Permission Verify that the Permission has the appropriate menu items enabled FIND VIEW UPDATE Alarm Multiple Dis on the same micro trigger but only one input gives an alarm Verify the input group assigned to each input Verify that each input has its own input group in order to report separately Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 23 5 O o N D e h a x ie z o 3 o Troubleshooting Guide Table 33 1 Troubleshooting Chart Continued Problem Action Printer Cannotselectthe printer Verify that the printer is set up defined in the operating system to print Verify that the printer is known to Picture Perfect Verify that the printer is cabled powered and online Workstation The screen is black Move the mouse pointer to awaken the terminal if it is in hibernation screen saver function Verify that the terminal is cabled terminated powered and booted Form Cannot save the record Operator Permission is FIND only for this form there is no SAVE button 33 24 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Changing the Picture Perfect BAJZA Sys
455. port that is already defined Figure 20 9 shows an example of a pre loaded SOL report Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 9 Creating a Badge Report UARD TEM ADIMISTRATOR TPS RESPAWNED UNKNOWN BADGE Figure 20 9 Example of a Pre Loaded SQL Report gt To execute a pre loaded report 1 Select Reports then SQL 2 Select Open from the pull down Reports menu 3 Select the desired report title in the Open Report picklist then click Ok 4 Click Execute Select to execute the query statement that appears in the SQL window and display the data on screen 5 To print the report select Print from the Reports menu choose a printer from the picklist then click Ok to print the report Creating a Badge Report Although the following directions are specific to the badge table a user who is unfamiliar with how to write SOL statements can learn how to use the SQL form to write a typical SQL select statement save the report and print the report See The SQL Syntax Menu on page 20 8 for information on displaying the Table Names and Columns picklists and how to apply these to an SQL statement 20 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 gt To generate a badge report 1 Select Reports then SQL 2 Select New from the pull down Reports menu to clear the SQL form 3 Enter the following SQL reserved words in the SOL window to form the beginning of each SQL clause Us
456. ption and authorize PERMISSIONS operator use OPERATORS INPUT GROUPS To view print and change states of a INPUTS device DOORS What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to view print and change states Access Secure of inputs input groups and doors Access Secure Operations Setup gt To enable Access Secure Operations 1 Select Control then Facility Profile 2 Click the Find button to locate the Facility Profile record to alter or use the existing form to create a new Facility Profile record 3 Click the button next to the Menu label and from the resulting Forms list select Access Secure 17 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Access Secure Operations 17 l Facility Profile betsparky Prev tea Badge Administrator Figure 17 1 Facility Profile Window Click Update to enable this option If this option is not enabled the Access Secure Operations icon will not be available on the Control submenu Click Save to save your changes Click Quit to close the form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 17 3 e xo O o gt n gt iz O O n n O i O Access Secure Operations gt To display the Access Secure form 1 Select Control Access Secure Operations to display the following pop up menu Inputs Input Groups Doors Figure 17 2 Operations Pop Up Menu 2 Click the appropriate bu
457. r you to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence for you to follow An asterisk in front of a field indicates that you must refer to your modem manual for the required command string message or value If a default value appears in a field you can accept that value if the modem type is Hayes compatible 2 ie D 2 kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 5 Modems ms orion IERIE ae ES 2400 1 amp C1 amp D2S0 157 1 86W X3V1 amp C1 amp D2S0 187 18 amp W Figure 4 2 Modems Form Top Description Type a modem description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long that specifies the modem type For example Hayes 2400 This modem description will appear in a picklist on the Micros form and the Ports form so that you can assign a modem type to micros and ports Attention Command Enter the wake up string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters required for the modem to put it into command mode so that it can receive other configuration commands and eventually the hang up command Initialization Command Enter the command string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters used when preparing to dial out or answer 4 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i Deinitialization Command Enter the command string 0 to 30 alphanumeric characters used to de initialize the modem when hanging up Autodialer
458. r a description of each field see Figure 16 1 4 Click Save The Mode Creation Form Use the Mode Creation form Figure 16 1 to define each system operating mode Operating modes are an administrative decision as each facility has unique requirements Examples of scheduled operating modes are Normal mode and Holiday mode Examples of command operating modes are Emergency mode or Fire mode which can be initiated by the operator at any time See Changing Modes on page 16 7 A mode that you can design to provide tighter security in case working conditions change from the routine is Restricted access mode which can be scheduled or commanded After a mode is created on the Mode Creation form you will define its characteristics by using the various Events forms O gt D Q D o 5 a z a f 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 5 Creating Modes Mode Creation bctandromeda PERE SE E EE SS pes Neal EMERGENCY Figure 16 1 Mode Creation Form Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters for Description For example Fire Drill Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles 16 6 Picture Pe
459. r flash files This replaces the default directory of cas flash eflash f lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use instead of the default flash used for direct connect type micros PX n lt filename gt Specifies a flash file to use instead of the default flash used for network type micros PXN m lt micro id gt Specifies the micro or micros to be flashed Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 11 13 eFlash ma Specifies that all active micros in the Picture Perfect database be flashed l lt micro id gt Specifies a micro in a line of micros where the entire line is to be flashed If options are repeated only the last value read from the file is used The exceptions are the m and 1 options which use all specified micros Processing Rules Parameters that control the flashing of the micros during the current execution of eFlash may be included The following two parameters may be included flashwait value in seconds Sets the time that eFlash waits for the micro to actually flash the EPROM The flash of a micro is considered a failure if the flash times out The default is 90 seconds maxflash value in seconds Sets the maximum number of micros that can be flashed simultaneously The actual number of micros that is being currently flashed will always be less than or equal to this value and may be considerably less than this value due to restrictions on flashing multiple micros in the same lin
460. r meaningful because there was no way to know which operator is using which virtual terminal at any given time Sup The Picture Perfect 2 0 Web Browser Version 1 4 allows you to control 2 S D which virtual terminal is assigned to each operator and therefore route wos Picture Perfect alarms to specific operators Seg c 3 U The following example shows a Picture Perfect system with three oS terminals ca a2 25 The terminal setup using traditional X emulation terminals ga a Q 1 Description Johns PC Server johnpc 0 2 Description Marys PC Server mary 0 3 Description Susans PC Server ssmith 0 The same system using Web browser terminals 1 Description Web Client 1 Server unix 10 2 Description Web Client 2 Server unix 11 3 Description Web Client 3 Server unix 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide F 1 Overview NOTE NOTE For a Picture Perfect Enterprise Host primary or backup Redundant Host you define the terminal to use the host name of the server For example if the Picture Perfect server name is pphost you should define the terminals as pphost 10 pphost 11 pphost 12 With the latest version of the Picture Perfect Web Browser you can assign an operator to a virtual terminal and therefore route Picture Perfect alarms to specific operators Continuing from the previous example the terminal definitions now look like this 1 Description Johns Web Client Server unix 2
461. r passing the text portions of messages One limitation of message queues is the total amount of memory the messages in the queue system can occupy Although it is possible to place entire messages on the queue and to allow the receiving processes to read them directly two factors make this impractical First each time a message is to be forwarded to another process a whole new message would have to be created and a memory copy performed This is rather inefficient since much of the CPU time would be spent copying data Second it would be possible to exceed the maximum amount of memory allowable on message queues depending on the size and number of messages on all queues gt O D O D o 9 V a O z D 3 a To overcome this memory for the message is allocated within the shared memory segment and the pointer to this message is passed as the data text portion of the message When the recipient process receives a message it actually receives the address of the data portion of the message With this address it can perform whatever operations are necessary without copying the data into the process local data segment Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 5 Diagnostics Subsystem The Memory Management display shows the number of shared memory blocks currently allocated the number of bytes of shared memory currently in use and the number of bytes currently available Also shown is the system wide message co
462. r sensor for a longer time enter a keypad override code a microcontroller dependent code set on the Micros screen Shutdown To stop running the application and the operating system Status The current condition of something such as a badge or a micro The Status form is used for viewing a micro s current database to verify configuration and scheduling Submenu A series of icon buttons that appear when you click one of the Main Menu buttons A submenu contains options for selection Supported Language A language that can be used in Picture Perfect All languages other than English and French must be translated and made available before they can be used SYN A message from the host that synchronizes the micro s clock System Administrator A full function operator an operator permission without any function restrictions GL 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Glossary Text Box An area of the screen used for text entry A text cursor appears in the box Text Orientation The direction in which a language is read either left or right Latin based languages are read left to right so their Text Orientation is left Hebrew is read right to left so its Text Orientation is right Toggle Button A square button that appears with each item on a list where you can make multiple selections TPS Transaction Processing System the program that communicates with microcontrollers Transaction Microcontroller acti
463. r to Figure 4 16 for the bottom portion of the Parameters form 4 34 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i Figure 4 16 Parameters Form Bottom Schedule Updates Database When a micro runs a schedule a SUP Schedule UPdate message is sent to the host This SUP message gets logged in the cas log sup mmdd log file where mm is the current month and dd the day If this value is set to Yes recommended then the database is updated to reflect the value changed by the schedule Remove Alarm Only if Reset This field will alter the operation of the Remove button in the Alarm Response window If the No button is selected the Remove button will operate normally that is it will always be available If Yes is selected recommended the Remove button will be grayed out unless the alarm is in reset state This means that the operator will be unable to remove the alarm until it has been reset The exception is alarms with the Immediate Reset Input control option set Because these alarms move instantly into reset state the Remove button will always be available 5 a 02 D pl To Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 35 Parameters Enforce Report Permissions These radio buttons are used if you want to restrict report access to certain permission groups By default report permissions will be disabled Select Yes to enable this option Number of Badge Categories Th
464. r who has to use antipassback readers but is not to be governed by them Reset Timed APB Status This button sends a message to the micro to reset the Timed APB status back to Neutral Refer to Figure 14 11 for the bottom middle portion of the Badges form Categories Manage ALL CATEGORIES 0002 Category 0003 Category 0004 Category 0005 Category 0006 Category 0007 Category 0008 Category OADM S amp UWNF 0009 Category 0010 Category 0011 Category 0012 Category 0013 Category 0014 Category Figure 14 11 Badges Form Bottom Middle 14 24 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 j Categories If the Increased Category feature was selected during installation 96 categories of users are available for assignment to a badge Otherwise 32 categories of users are available for assignment This list box contains the active badge categories ordered by slot number To access an area a badge must match at least one category that is assigned to that area Manage Click the Manage button to display the Category Manager window Figure 13 4 from which you may add remove or replace a category in a slot You may also apply filters to the categories that are displayed in the categories list box For more information on Category Management see Managing Category Assignment on page 13 8 sobpeg Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 25 The Badges Form NOTES
465. rary badge and the temporary badge will be activated A pool of badges can be used for temporary reissues To create a pool of temporary badges 1 Select Access then Badges 2 Complete the Badges form Under Control Temporary Badge click the Yes radio button 3 Press Save To issue a temporary badge 1 Select Access then Badges 14 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 i 2 Click Find to search for the permanent badge record for which you are issuing a temporary replacement badge 3 Click the Temp button on the toolbar Result The Issue Temporary Badge window will display 4 Inthe Temporary BID field enter the BID of the temporary badge This number may be entered manually or by swiping a badge through a Wedge reader sobpeg 5 Inthe Number of Hours field enter the number of hours that the temporary badge will be valid 6 Click Issue Changing a Badge gt To change a badge 1 Select Access then Badges 2 Find the desired badge record in one of two ways e When the Badges form appears click Reader Issue Swipe the badge ina console reader then click Find to display the existing badgeholder data or e When the Badges form appears enter search criteria in one or more fields and click Find Click Prev or Next until the correct badge profile appears NOTE A search FIND using indexed fields improves the time required to find the records Some examples o
466. rators and make the default database use Spanish They are entered only after installing the Spanish package buildlang es ES buildmeaning upddb es ES avlang es ES A Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 32 13 Modifying Translations Only use the upddb command when the default database language is being changed In the above example the upddb command is not included unless the default database is being changed to Spanish Modifying Translations At times a language s translations will need to be modified to correct spelling or to make meanings clearer Modify the source text files following the rules defined in Installing Translations on page 32 12 Then re install the language using the commands defined in the Installing Translations section Not all of the commands need to be used e buildlang is only needed when catalog text has been modified e buildmeaning is only needed when database synonyms have been modified e upddb is only needed when default database text has been modified and e avlang does not need to be entered again since the language has already been made available Selecting An Operator Language All operators are associated with a single language This is the language in which the operator works The language is first defined when the operator is created and it can be changed at any time The actual change does not take effect until the next time the operator logs into the system To de
467. rd Global one default facility profile record Global and a permission record System Administrator The System Administrator permission record is by default assigned to the facility Global As you add operators to your system in order to add or modify records in a different facility other than Global the System Administrator permission record must be assigned to that specific facility Table 5 1 Examples of how Facility Profiles work Operator Permission Facility Profile Facility Result Record install System Administrator Global Global This combination allows operator install to perform all functions on all responsible for the allows full access on records assigned to the Global Facility on all forms system administrative all forms functions for the entire system Global Facility X This combination allows operator install to perform all functions on all allows full access on records assigned to Facility X on all forms all forms Global Facility Y This combination allows operator install to perform all functions on all allows full access on records assigned to Facility Y on all forms all forms Global Facility Z This combination allows operator install to perform all functions on all allows full access on records assigned to Facility Z on all forms all forms John Smith Site Administrator Update Faciltly X This combination allows operator J ohn Smith to perform update functions
468. re MMM micro B board and AA address Micro This is a picklist of micros defined on the Micros form Click the Description button select a micro from the picklist and click Close The selected micro that will be used for the generated records is shown beside the Description button 15 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Generator 15 j Facility This is a picklist of facilities defined on the Facilities form By default the generated records are created with the facility that is assigned to the micro for which these records are being added You can override this behavior and have these records created with the facility of your choosing Click the Description button select a facility from the picklist and click Close The selected facility that will be used for the generated records is shown beside the Description button For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Board This is the board number that the reader is connected to in the selected micro Enter one board number from the range 1 through 8 Reader Port Address This is the reader port address as set on the reader board Enter one port address number from the range 0 through 7 Generate Door This tells the generator whether to generate a new door for the reader Select the Yes or No toggle button If you select Yes an input record is generated if Held Open Sensing or Forced Open Monitoring are set to Detected o
469. re Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 3 The SQL Form explains the two pull down menus NOTE The phrase current report means the report that is currently displayed on your m screen The Reports Menu The pull down Reports menu has ten selections Each selection is explained below New Clears the form so you can create a new report Open Displays the Open Report picklist Figure 20 2 from which you can open a predefined report Select the desired report then click Apply Click Ok to exit the window Oo Oee Report Titles Figure 20 2 Open Report Picklist SQL NOTE If report permissions are enabled only the reports that the operator has access to will be displayed Save Saves the current report with the existing title and current changes 20 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 i Save As Allows you to save the current report under a different name with the original report still existing under the previous name The Save Report Query As window Figure 20 3 will appear Type a new name for the current report then click Ok to save it and exit the window Save Repor Query As n 2 m A o O s 2 Figure 20 3 Save Report Query As Window Delete Displays the Delete Report picklist Figure 20 4 so you can delete an existing report Select the desired report then click Delete Click Ok to exit the window This option appears only if you hav
470. re Perfect Main menu as shown in See Figure 3 3 Main Menu and Submenus on page 3 5 Click on the icon as shown in Figure 3 2 above When Picture Perfect is not running the icon background turns red To display the Terminal Emulator Click on the a icon as shown in Figure 3 2 above A terminal emulator is an application that displays a window that allows you to use Unix like commands AIX or Linux to cut and paste text within or between terminal emulation windows The command line prompt is a special character that is displayed in your dt term window after you press etum It can be a lt or other special character A small box or bar called a e iy ES gt fo wn er gt gt a Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 3 Main Menu and Submenus cursor shows where characters will appear in the window when you type something on the keyboard gt To obtain Picture Perfect Help Find and click on the arrow above the General Help icon a as shown above in Figure 3 2 above Then left click on Picture Perfect Help which will appear in a pull up menu gt To access various submenus Press CTRL and right click the mouse button gt To log out Click the xl button for Logout Confirmation as shown in Figure 3 2 above You may select Continue logout or Cancel logout For more information on using other options on the Front Panel refer to the Front Panel Help Ll Main Menu and
471. re any badges can be removed TPS must be running The Picture Perfect database must be up Badges to be removed must have status of Deleted The operator must have permission to remove badges This is set on the Permissions form Options The rmbadge tool takes three command line options a i and p as described below CAUTION The badge removal command line tool rmbadge does not use the Record Remove Maximum and Record Remove Interval set on the Parameters form A s peg Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 9 The Badges Form NOTE Removing a large number of badges using this tool should be done during hours of low activity since it has the potential to queue up a large number of requests to the 7 micros Removing All Badges To remove all badges use the a option For example rmbadge a When removing more than 50 badges you will see an update message on the screen to indicate the progress every 50 badges that are removed Removing Single Badges To remove a single badge use the i option followed by the badge encode number for that badge The format of the badge encode number must match that used on the Badges form This means leading zeroes are significant For example rmbadge i 0000012345 Removing Associated Photo Images If the Image package has been installed you may wish to remove the photo images in addition to removing the badges Use the p option in addition to the
472. re using the alarm shunting function on a door when a valid badge unlocks the door strike and the badgeholder opens the door the system begins to count the number of seconds of Allowable Open Time If the door is still open when this time elapses an associated alarm can occur For details on how to associate an alarm with Allowable Open Time see Chapter 9 Input and Output Groups and Chapter 8 Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms If you are using the monitoring function on a door when a door is forced open an associated alarm can occur immediately NOTE You must define this sensor input on the Inputs form before you can select the F appropriate door sensor input on the Doors form gt To define a door sensor 1 Select Devices then Doors 2 Complete the following fields of the Doors form For details on each field see The Doors Form on page 13 35 e Description e Forced Open Shunt Time e Allowable Open Time e Keypad Shunt Time optional so the badgeholder can use a code to override the Allowable Open Time e Held Open Sensing e Forced Open Monitoring e Input Groups Forced Open Held Open Pre Alarm e Inputs Door Sensor associated with a DI point wired to the door sensor sealy souobaye9 Ps D o Q D S os s e Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 33 Doors Adding or Changing a Door Strike Setting A door strike associated with a reader and or a
473. records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Alarm Instructions The selected Alarm Instructions for this alarm are displayed here The selected messages will appear as instructions to the operator on the Alarm Monitor when this alarm is activated Click the Set Alarm Instructions button to display a picklist Select up to five alarm instructions then click Ok See Figure 8 4 Alarms Form with Color Palette Alarm Instructions and Alarm Routing Picklist on page 8 10 Alarm Routing The selected alarm routing is displayed in the Alarm Routing picklist Figure 8 4 Click the Set Alarm Routing button to display the picklist Select one alarm routing then click Ok The Monitor should always be included in the routing choice of an alarm If an alarm is not routed to the Monitor the operator cannot respond to the alarm Alarm Colors The Alarm Color box of the Alarm form will appear only if you have selected Alarm Description in the Alarm Monitor Color Scheme box Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 8 9 Alarms i Cl g S a m a quit save find view new help Record of 15 Found Description fsa ian 6 2 0 of the Parameters form This box contains the Foreground Index and Background Index buttons Refer to Figure 8 4 for the color palette Foreground Index Click the Foreground Index button to display a palette of colors Select the desired c
474. red The ways in which the operator can exit the pop up are listed below e Cancel Response is ignored and the Process State stays the same e OK Response is saved and the Process State goes to pending The alarm remains on the Alarm Monitor e Remove Response is saved and the Process State goes to complete When the alarm s Condition is reset the alarm is removed from the Alarm Monitor When the alarm s Condition is alarm the alarm remains on the Alarm Monitor Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 23 3 Multiple Access Violations Multiple Access Violations It is possible for the same access violation to occur more than once during a keypad alarm response For instance a door can be forced open then closed and then forced open again all before the keypad alarm response is completed for the first violation In this situation only one alarm appears in the Alarm Monitor The alarm first appears with a count of one and is incremented by each subsequent violation A single valid keypad response resets all occurrences of the violation and the operator responds to all occurrences using the single alarm It is also possible for a door to be forced open and open too long during a single keypad alarm response For instance the door can be held open for too long then closed and then forced open all before a valid keypad response is made for the sensing violation In this situation the violatio
475. required using the Permissions form to describe what function the operator will perform For example System Administrator Site Administrator Badge Administrator or Guard Then assign a facility profile to the permission for each facility required You can assign the same facility profile to multiple facilities and permission records For example you could assign the Monitor facility profile to a Guard permission in Facility X and Facility Y as well as to a Badge Admnistrator in Facility Z 4 Assign the permission to an operator using the Operator form For example an operator may be assigned as a Guard at Facility X with a Monitor profile and at Facility Y with a Full access profile On the following pages we will perform the steps necessary to achieve the result for the operator Jane Doe from Table 5 1 Examples of how Facility Profiles work on page 12 Jane Doe Badge Administrator Update Badges Facility Y This combination allows operator J ane Doe to update all records allows update access assigned to Facility Y on the Badges form to records on the Badges form View Operator Global This combination allows operator J ane Doe to view all records assigned allows view access to to the Global Facility on the Operator form records on the Operator form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 13 Linking Facilities Facility Profiles Permissions and Operators Step 1 Defining Facilities 1 Select Access th
476. ress 1 to obtain onscreen Help for the currently highlighted selection in any of the menus or submenus Picture Perfect Release 1 7 1 4 01 Support Utilities Menu Copyright C 1990 1995 Casi Rusco Inc ties Menu Diagnostics Subsystem Menu Micros Micro Utilities Menu Status Status information from micros Printer Printer Utilities Menu Figure 33 1 Utilities Menu Diagnostics Subsystem The Diagnostic subsystem menu Figure 33 2 has many diagnostics available for troubleshooting TPS Use the following menu selections to view set or clear individual diagnostics 33 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide NOTE F In Case of Problems 33 j Picture Perfect Release 1 7 1 4 01 Support Utilities Menu Copyright C 1990 1995 Casi Rusco Inc Picture Perfect Utilities Menu EEN Diagnostics Subsystem Menu Micros Subsystem Menu Status Printer Process Process control diagnostics Check Check current diagnostic levels Set Set diagnostic levels Unset diagnostic levels Clear in WatchLog Watch diagnostic log Figure 33 2 Diagnostics Subsystem Menu e Process Use Process control diagnostics to view the status of message queues memory and communications and to view information for alarms micros ports and terminals e Check Use Check current diagnostic levels to view the on off diagnostic status for TPS managers and drivers e Set Use the Set and Cl
477. ress Address DI CPU 0 0 31 8RP Board DIP Switch 0 7 0 7 8 15 Micro 2 Address 1 1st 32DI Board Same as 8RP or 16 47 Micro 2 2nd 32DI Board 1st DI Board 1 16 47 3 3rd 32D Board 1st DI Board 2 16 47 k 5 4th 32D1 Board 1st DI Board 3 16 47 6 S ke c a NOTE 1 8RP and Micro 2 board numbers are 1 to 8 To calculate the board number add 1 to the DIP switch address which is a number from 0 to 7 7 2 Up to four 32DI boards can be connected to a Micro 2 or 8RP Each input on the first 32DI board has the same board number as the Micro 2 or 8RP where it is connected Each subsequent 32DI board uses the next sequential board number 3 Every 32DI board after the first one takes an available 8RP or Micro 2 slot 4 On a Micro 4 the Tamper and AC Power Fail inputs may be wired to any available DI points Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 12 11 Inputs NOTE m Table 12 4 Micro 5 Wiring Chart Inputs Element Board DI Reader Exit Number Address Address DI CPU 2RP Board 1 4 0 1 0 1 8 9 20D1 Board 1 4 16 35 1 Optional boards include four 20DI boards 20 supervised input points four 16DO boards 16 output points four 2RP boards 2 reader board and one 8RP board 8 reader board 2 The Micro 5 cabinet has a seven slot capacity Two slots are used by the mandatory Power Communications and CPU boards The remaining five slots may be configured to meet your site requ
478. restart and the Alarm Alert field indicates Y or N whether an alarm alert is currently running on the display Host Records The Host Records screen Figure 33 9 displays information about the system hosts This includes the Host ID Host Name IP Address Last Communications time and yes no flags for Online status ACK Pending Timeout Communications Alarm and Connected 33 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide In Case of Problems 33 Picture Perfect Host Records Remote Hosts Host ID 1 Host Name homeplate IP Addr 192 9 200 100 Port Addr 6101 Last comms 13 11 35 Online Y ACK Pending N Timeout N Comm alarm N Connected lt gt to move through list or lt ESC gt to quit Figure 33 9 Host Records Check The Check Current Diagnostic Levels function on the Diagnostics Subsystem Menu Figure 33 10 shows the current diagnostic level for the TPS Each manager or driver task uses a flag which is either On or Off Current diagnostic levels log OFF lt 8000 schmer OFF lt 4000 stsmer OFF 2000 mreset OFF lt 1000 rsndmg OFF 0800 snddrv OFF lt 0400 revdry OFF lt 0200 moddry OFF 0100 oprmer OFF lt 0080 gt almmgr OFF 0040 bdgmer OFF 0020 prmer OFF lt 0010 dbmer OFF 0008 sndmer OFF lt 0004 revmer OFF lt o002 main OFF lt 0001 5 O w p e h U fe z 2 3 a Press lt RETURN gt to continue fj Figure 33 10 Check Current Diagnostic
479. rfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 l Changing Modes How to Change Mode by Command To change the mode by command 1 Select Control then Mode Command 2 Click New 3 Complete the Mode Command form For a description of each field see Figure 16 2 4 Click Save The Mode Command Form Use the Mode Command form Figure 16 2 to change your system operating mode immediately For example emergency events such as fire accident or work disruption require an immediate change to a different operating strategy Mode Command lets you do this Mode Command cobra NORMAL Figure 16 2 Mode Command Form Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles O gt D a G D 7 5 a z a 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 7 Changing Modes Mode Click the Select Mode button to display the Modes picklist Select the desired operating mode then click Ok Permit scheduled mode changes Select Yes or No to indicate whether you want the system to allow future mode changes to occur as scheduled You can change this option even if you don t change the mode itself Yes Yes allows scheduled mode changes to occur No No allows you to
480. riable is substituted the correct substitution will take place even with the structure change Substitution variables can be moved but must not be altered in any other way pp _mnu src defines menu labels that contain mnemonic alphanumeric characters that are used in menus as hot keys pp_mnu src is divided into sets identified by lines that start with set Each set defines the menu labels for a distinct menu The mnemonic character for a label is the character following a caret When the label is translated the mnemonic character must match a character in the label preceding the caret and must not match any other mnemonic alphanumeric characters in the set An example is set SYM SET HIST TYPE SYM HIST TYPE ALARM Alarm A SYM HIST TYPE BADGE Badge B SYM HIST TYPE OPER Operator o SYM HIST TYPE TOUR Tour T set SYM SET HIST SOURCE The lines between set SYM SET HIST TYPE and set SYM SET HIST SOURCE define a single menu The first label is Alarm and its mnemonic character is A None of the labels within the set have the same mnemonic character Note that other sets can define the same mnemonic alphanumeric characters Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 32 11 Installing Translations 9 The messages with pp font src define the fonts used by a language The messages can contain font aliases or full X Logical Font Descriptions KFLD Each font must define a code set
481. ription field type View Operator Click the box next to the label Menu Result A list of menu items will display Select as a Menu item Control Result In the box below a list of forms will display From the list of forms select Operator For Record permissions select View Click Save Result The View Opeator facility profile record will look similar to the following Facility Profile bctsparky Figure 5 11 View Operator Facility Profile 5 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Facilities and Facility Profiles 5 Step 3 Defining Permissions and Assigning a Facility Profile 1 Select Control then Permissions 2 In the Description field type Badge Administrator 3 Click the Facility button and select Global 4 In the Facility window double click on Facility Y _ Facility Current Profile lt BLANK gt lt BLANK gt lt BLANK gt lt BLANK gt ov Q D 7 Figure 5 12 Facility Window Result A Facility Profile window will display a list of the defined facility profile records H Facility Profile ml Facility Profile GLOBAL FACILITY PROFILE Update ALL Update Badges Update Monitors View ALL View Operator Figure a 3 Facility Profile Window 5 From the list select Update Badges 6 Click Ok 7 Repeat step 4 through step 6 substituting Global in step 4 and View Operator in step 5 Result In the Facility window the Curren
482. rm 22 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control 22 i Defining Readers Required for Reader DO Configuration Reader DI DO Configuration Use the Devices Readers form to define the reader type as an Elevator for each reader used with an elevator in the Picture Perfect system Figure 22 5 See The Readers Form on page 13 22 Number of Badges Single _ Double Toggle _ Yes C No Limited Usage _ Enabled C Diethled Elevator Reader _ Yes C No Figure 22 5 Type Field on Readers Form Defining Outputs Use the Devices Outputs form to define a digital output for each elevator floor button Figure 22 6 This output will light and activate the button for a floor to which access is allowed For more information see The Outputs Form on page 12 3 m p lt fe fe S r 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 9 Elevator Control Setup 000 01 22 ELEVATOR FLOOR 7 Figure 22 6 Outputs Form Configured for Elevator Floor Button 22 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control 22 i Keep the following in mind when defining elevator floor outputs e Atleast one 16 digital output 16 DO DOR board must be configured with an elevator micro e The elevator digital output addresses must be in the 16 to 31 range for each 16 DO DOR board used e For a maximum configuration 64 floors four 16 DO DOR boards must be i
483. rmal Show C Show Right 4 Bottom 3 132 Compressed C Hide Hide Row Spacing 0 Column Spacing 1 Page Length 65 1st Page 1 JoK Apply Heip Figure 19 8 Format Page Window Header Blocks The three text blocks across the top of the window represent three different header sections on the report as designated by the graphic Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 19 9 T a o 5 z p D O 34 7 The History Form NOTE symbol above each The first block is for flush left text the second is for centered text and the third is for flush right text Type text in each block or leave it blank The header will appear on the report with the proper justification Footer Blocks The three text blocks across the bottom of the window represent three different footer sections on the report as designated by the graphic symbol above each The first block is for flush left text the second is for centered text and the third is for flush right text Type text in each block or leave it blank The footer will appear on the report with the proper justification Margins Use the four text boxes in this area to specify the left right top and bottom margin settings of the report The numbers used for the left and right settings indicate number of characters while the top and bottom settings indicate number of lines Paper Width Use the radio buttons in this area to specify both paper width and compres
484. rminals dial up communications see Modems on page 4 4 for configuring modem types for assignment to host and micro ports If this is a network port you will need to complete the Network Micro Ports form See Ports on page 4 10 for more information Terminals The aa utility can be used to configure each workstation with a unique name and Internet address such as 192 9 200 10 wsl Use the Terminals form Figure 4 1 to configure all workstations used by Picture Perfect Setup gt To define a terminal record 1 Select Devices then Terminals 2 Complete the Terminals form For a description of each field see Figure 4 1 3 Click Save The Terminals Form Terminals betandromeda gnaga Brex Neal Command Center Workstation Jemd_ctr 0 Figure 4 1 Terminals Form 4 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i NOTE Description Type any alphanumeric combination 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters for Description For example Command Center Workstation Server In the Server field type the hostname defined during installation in the file etc hosts and append it with 0 zero not the letter O The hostname can be a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters For example if cmd_ctr is the workstation s name in etc hosts the Server field would read cmd_ctr 0 The Server field must be typed in lower case characters If using a graphical
485. rmission Permission to create a new badge record the toggle button labeled Badge Issue on the Permissions form Badge Issue Reader A reader assigned to a workstation used to issue a badge Badge Learn Occurs when a micro checks with the host on an unknown badge and stores that badge information in its database The next time the badge is presented to a reader connected to that micro it will have the needed badge information Badge Reader A device usually located near a door used to read badges When a badge is presented to a badge reader the system reads it and determines whether or not to unlock the door Badge Status Indicates either the intended use of a badge such as permanent or temporary or its current condition such as active or lost Button A button on a mouse pointing device a graphical control button on a window frame or in a menu or picklist that works by clicking it See Mouse Button Function Button Radio Button Select Button Toggle Button Category A lock and key that controls access Each area and badge has one or more assigned categories If a category on a badge matches any of the categories on an area the badge works as a key in readers assigned to that area A category assigned to an area functions as a lock a category assigned to a badge functions as a key Click The rapid press and release of a mouse button without moving the mouse that makes a click sound
486. ro is communicating with the host Online Reader A reader is enabled to release the doorstrike when a valid badge read occurs Access attempts at an online reader can be routed to the Activity Monitor printers and online history Open To display a window Open Too Long See Door Open Too Long Operating Mode The mode associated with a set of schedules that defines system operating specifications Option A selection on a menu Output A physical digital output DO that actuates devices such as a siren a doorstrike or lights which can be triggered by an output group Output Group A group of one or more outputs that can be triggered when activated by an associated input group Packet See ACK Packet Password A special code used during login that determines if an operator is authorized to log into the system Permissions A level of operator permission to perform system functions Each group of operators functions is a permission group that can be assigned to an operator authorized to perform those functions See Login and Password Picklist A window that displays a scrolling list of options for a certain category You may be able to select several or only one of the options on the list depending on the feature in use GL 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Glossary PIN A Personal Identification Number that identifies a person If a facility uses both a keypad and badge reader employees present
487. rom the toolbar click on Find to locate the badge records requiring access to the controlled area 7 Under Badge Categories click a Cat button to assign a M2MR category to the badge 8 Save and exit the Badges form How to Set Up a Modified Two Man Rule M2MR Controlled Space without Door Control gt To set up the area readers 1 From the Main menu select Devices Readers 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the reader record you wish to set up 3 Under Logical Reader Function enable the appropriate radio button APB In APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out NOTE In an area with Occupancy Control enabled All readers in the area must be assigned one of these logical functions APB In m APB Out T amp A In or T amp A Out APB readers must be set to Global Timed APB is not allowed e The logical reader function T amp A In Out is NOT allowed for any reader 4 Under Set Micro verify that all readers in the area are assigned to the same micro 21 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide NOTE NOTE Two Man Rule and Modified Two Man Rule 21 j 5 Under Reader Control Number of Badges verify that all area readers are set to Single 6 Optional If you want to activate a DO such as a blinking light between the first and second required badge swipes under Two Man Rule click the 2MR Output button and select the output to be triggered 7 Save and exit the Readers form gt To
488. roups 08 9 1 OVCLVIEW airan ifn aii etleh bien been a 9 1 PrereguisteS sihri iii aiia iT 9 1 What You Will Be Doing sesesesesessssesssssseseseserresesesess 9 1 Output GrOU PS sereis nsn asesi ireto ata 9 1 SetuP i a e e a E A a aa 9 2 The Outgroups POri iii acicecsscsssjoucsabcreasaeesessetersceass 9 2 Input GLO PS svistasssoisnsstindaeratiasarsadontvsestinenisevaalgedianteds 9 3 DELI sen uE E RARS 9 4 The Input Groups Form ss sssessssesesesisresesesessssesese 9 4 ALO IME CU OS iipitin apagones iti 10 1 COVICLVIOW an e couattreces as A dete nian EE vo uases 10 1 Prereq isiteS cnino uitiin inet EE 10 1 What You Will Be Doing eee cee teens 10 2 Configuring Micro Communications 10 3 POLS EE A E E I eased ET 10 3 Direct Communications MiICcY0 cccccccceesseeeees 10 3 Dial up MEL CIOS 5 scatietains aihts atic aomcnsaiwstniatdvnseete 10 5 Network WNGPOSalcsiiisecctsuceecsstestlenaretvustcctanca see 10 7 Associating Micro Alarms and Output Groups with Input TOU PS lt a sista velshca ta nessevansatursurassoenabenias 10 10 Creating Micro Alaris itsicidchinsinsegaieaus 10 10 Create Input Groups for Micro Error CONG TONG essaiar aa ami cesnieiartes 10 10 Associate Outputs with Micro Error Condition Input Groups sacosiiciaieassanian 10 11 Adding or Change a Micro citictas scetaa scsntuecacesnets 10 11 vi Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Contents Adding Micros essen sreneten esttncta
489. roups Link selected outputs together by assigning the same output group to each output on the Outputs form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 9 1 Output Groups NOTE An output cannot belong to more than one output group but more than one output F can be assigned to one output group Refer to Figure 9 1 for the Outgroups form Setup gt To add an output group record 1 Select Devices then Outgroups 2 Click New 3 Complete the Outgroups form For a description of each field see The Outgroups Form on page 9 2 4 Click Save The Outgroups Form Outi aroups orion Epa aaa fray Next 00 1 00 LOBBY DOOR Figure 9 1 OutGroups Form Description Type a description for each output group up to 30 alphanumeric characters You can write descriptions for output group names to reflect how the outputs in the group function For example 001 0 01 FIRE OUTPUT DEVICE 9 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Input and Output Groups 001 0 02 PERIMETER SURVEILLANCE DEVICE Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist By default the output group record will be assigned the same facility as the micro to which the door is assigned however you do have the ability to St manually re assign an output group s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same b
490. rrect order e To flash a line of micros use eflash 1 lt microid gt where lt microid gt is the ID of amicro suchas 0001 thatis on the line you wish to flash 11 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Flashing Micros 11 j To flash a micro using eFlash from the command line 1 Login as root and open a terminal window 2 At the command prompt enter a command using the following parameters eflash c m01 p cas flash eflash f mspe170 df1 where mspe170 df1 is the micro id Result After the flashing has completed one of the following messages will be displayed Flashing is successful aL fo N io 2 Oo or Flashing is unsuccessful See the log file lt filename gt for details The eFlash Configuration File This is an optional file eflashrc that resides on the host in the root user s home directory The purpose of the file is to allow a Picture Perfect operator to define flashing requirements for the entire system once and then use part or all of the definition to flash or reflash micros as needed This file can be used for scheduling unattended flashing This file can contain a combination of comand line arguments processing rules and comments Command Line Arguments All of the following command line options can be included either one per line or you may concatenate many options per line p lt directory gt Specifies the source directory to search fo
491. rt e The size of a database table is not limited except by disk size Use any SQL reference book to learn how to create SOL statements This chapter shows you one example of a SELECT clause a FROM clause a WHERE clause and an ORDER BY clause used to generate a typical badge report See Creating a Badge Report on page 20 10 The SQL Form The SQL form Figure 20 1 is a workspace for specifying and displaying various reports Select Reports then SQL to display the SOL form Picture Perfect SQL Alarm Report orion ROUTING MESSAGES GUARD YSTEM ADIMISTRATOR Figure 20 1 SQL Form 20 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide NOTE SQL Reports 20 i At the top of the SQL form is a menu bar with pull down menus for Reports and SQL Syntax as well as a menu for on screen Help Below the menu bar is a scrolling text window where you type the SQL statements Below that window is another scrolling window where the report will display if sent to the screen When you finish creating the SQL statements you can either print the report immediately or you can view the report before you print it To print the report select Print from the pull down Reports menu To view the selected data in the report window click the Execute Select button Execute Select Click this button to generate the report which will then appear in the scrolling window at the bottom of the form 2 n A O xo
492. s 14 25 Badge Encode Format Window 14 16 Badge Formats 4 24 Badge Formats Form 4 26 Badge History Size 4 29 Badge Holder Customization 31 1 Badge Limited Usage 14 18 Badge Monitor 28 2 Badge Removal 14 9 Badge Removal Popup 14 8 Badge Report 20 10 Badge Table Values 20 21 Badges Form 14 11 Break Variables 20 19 Bump to Email 7 7 Cc Card Trace 25 1 Card Trace Routing 4 29 Categories 13 6 Categories Form 13 7 Category Assignment 13 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Category Floors Form 22 21 Category Manager 13 8 Change Field 31 8 Changing a Badge 14 5 Check Current Diagnostic Levels 33 13 Clear Diagnostic Levels Menu 33 17 Client Menu 3 20 CMENU 33 1 CMENU Utility 33 2 Color Alarm 8 12 Colors Alarm 4 33 COM Port Device Names for Linux 4 13 Communications 10 3 Control Menu 3 19 Control Outputs Form 29 2 29 4 Controlling an Individual Output 29 4 Controlling an Output 29 2 Customization 14 12 Customizing Badge and Department Screens 32 16 D Database Protection 2 3 Database Synonyms 32 8 Date Format 4 30 Delete 3 10 Delete Report Picklist 19 5 20 6 Deleting a Badge 14 6 DES 10 27 Diagnostics Subsystem 33 2 Diagnostics Subsystem Menu 33 3 Dial Up Window 10 22 Digital Outputs 2 4 Disabling Keypad Alarm Response 23 7 Disabling Pre Alarm 24 1 Door Events 16 30 Door Events Form 16 31 Doors 13 30 Doors Form 13 35 Doors Form Configured for Elevator Door 22 22
493. s a single language for alarm notification and archive notification This language is called the primary language and can be selected by the system administrator An operator using a language different from the primary language will view the notifications in the primary language Picture Perfect does not translate data entered by operators For example an alarm description entered in French is viewed by all other operators in French regardless of what language they are working with The text contained in default database records provided by GE Interlogix CASI can be translated An example is the All Categories category record Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 32 1 Installation Installation During installation NLS support is automatically installed for the Base Tours Image and Alarm Graphics packages When installation is complete the primary language is English the default language and the install operator default System Administrator ID is defined to work in English AIX To enable usage of any of the other provided languages Spanish French Portuguese or Italian they must be installed as follows 1 Insert the Picture Perfect CD ROM drive Log in as root From a command prompt open a terminal window Result You should see a prompt Type the following to shut down Picture Perfect cas bin profile re pperf k Mount the CD ROM by typing the following mntcD or mount v cdrfs
494. s a wire frame to the desired location then release the button gt To shuffle send the window to the front Click the left mouse button on the title bar gt To shuffle send the window to the back Click the right mouse button on the title bar The Window Frame The window frame is the narrow border on all four sides of the window This area can be used to resize the window or to shuffle the window to the front or back gt To resize a window 1 Press hold down the left mouse button anywhere on the frame 2 Drag the frame edge either left right or up down depending on which side of the frame you are using then release the button If you put the mouse pointer on a corner of the frame you can resize both the height and width of the window simultaneously 3 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started 3 l gt To shuffle send the window to the front Click the left mouse button on the frame gt To shuffle send the window to the back Click the right mouse button on the frame The Scroll Bars Scroll bars appear when the contents of the window are too large for the window frame If the contents are wider than the window a scroll bar will appear at the bottom If the contents are longer than the window a scroll bar will appear at the side gt To scroll the window you may use the scroll bars in the following ways 1 Click on the arrow in the direction you want to scrol
495. s of a picklist consist of items you added using other forms For example if you have not added your micros yet using the Micros form the Micros picklist will be empty when you try to assign a micro to a reader using the Select Micro button on the Readers form 9 D i gt o 92 re gt D a A picklist Figure 3 5 is a separate window that displays a scrolling list of options for that button s feature You may be able to select several or only one of the options on the list depending on the feature in use Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 7 Forms Output Group 1 Figure 3 5 Example of a Picklist When the picklist appears click on an item to select it Selecting an item highlights it To assist in the location of an item or series of items use the Filter field Simply enter a search criteria in the Filter field and click on the Refresh button or press Entel The search criteria entered in this field can be a specific match such as 000 0 09 CPU DO GROUP or a pattern such as 002 If only one item is allowed the first one selected will be de selected when you click on another If several items are allowed you can highlight more than one To de select an item click on it again Click the Ok or Close button on the picklist window to accept the selections and dismiss the picklist Your selections will then display on the form by that button Buttons on the picklist window have the fo
496. s picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles The Category Floors Form Use the Category Floors form Figure 22 15 to assign a category to certain floors of each elevator This category is used to establish a match between the badge and the floor when granting access The number of categories assigned to each elevator must not be greater than 128 The number of floors displayed on this form is determined by the Number Of Floors field defined on the Elevator form CategoryFloors bctandromeda EEEEEBES Figure 22 15 Category Floors Form Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Elevator Click the Elevator button to display a picklist of elevators Select the elevator to which you want to assign Category Floors then click Close Category Click the Category button to display a picklist of categories Select the category to which you want to assign floors for this elevator then click Close 22 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control 22 i Select Floors This button is available only after an elevator is selected Click the
497. s the window Does not minimize the window 3 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Getting Started 3 Using the Workspace Menu Click the right mouse button on the root window the background area of the screen to display the Control menu Drag and release the pointer on the selected function Show Graphical Workspace Manager Displays in a graphical format the applications running in each workspace You may drag and drop an application from one workspace to another Application List Displays a list of all applications on all workspaces of the desktop Shuffle Up Shuffles moves one of the lower windows to the top Shuffle Down Shuffles moves the top window to the bottom Refresh Redraws the entire screen Minimize Restore Front Panel Minimizes and restores the Front Panel of the CDE Common Desktop Environment O zd gt 2 er o O Q Restart Workspace Manager Restarts the window manager and re reads configuration files Logout Closes all windows re initializes the window software and displays the Login screen Using the Programs Menu Click the middle mouse button on the root window the background area of the screen to display the Program menu Drag and release the pointer on the selected function CMenu Starts the CMenu program Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 19 Using the Clients Menu DPC Starts the utility which monitors st
498. sactions on a double badge reader See Chapter 26 Double Badge Transaction for details on this feature The time starts after the first transaction Set Micro Click the Select Micro button to display the Micros picklist Select the micro where this reader is wired then click Ok The selected micro is displayed under Set Micro Facility Click the Facility button to display the facility picklist The facility set determines which facility will be able to view the associated badge and trace activity on the Activity Monitor if the Badge and Trace options are selected By default the reader record will be assigned the same facility as the micro to which the reader is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign a reader s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two companies occupying the same building that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Area Click the Area button to display the Areas picklist Select the area that this reader protects then click Close The area that you select should have categories and controls appropriate for this reader Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 23 sealy souoba ye9 Ps D f Q D o f 5 Q s e Readers Terminal If this reader functions as a badge issue reader select a terminal other
499. scription LIKE Cancel Figure 20 10 SQL Syntax for Embedded Variables 20 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide SQL Reports 20 Break Variables A break causes SQL to perform some action such as printing a blank line or performing a page eject There are two variables that can be used to activate this feature They should be placed at the end of the SQL Select statement LINEBREAK The syntax is as follows LINEBREAK lt column number in the select statement gt This causes a break which is a blank line to be printed each time there is a change in the value of the column identified by the lt column number in the select statement gt You should always use ORDER BY lt column number in the select statement gt before issuing a linebreak This will make the linebreaks occur at meaningful places Figure 20 11 shows an example of a linebreak 2 n z3 L xo 5 gt n Picture Perfect Badge Last Access Report orion Usha Unknown David FROM Guy2 11112 11113 Perfect 44444444 cture Perfect 11114 Picture Perfect Picture Perfect Figure 20 11 Example of Linebreak Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 20 19 Break Variables PAGEBREAK The syntax is as follows PAGEBREAK lt column number in the select statement gt This causes a page break which is a page eject to be issued each time there is a change in the value of the column identif
500. se Since it is possible to remove badge records that should be retained you should back up your database A before running this procedure The Remove function button will be on the top of the Badges form if the correct Remove permissions have been set on the Permissions form for the present operator See Figure 6 3 on page 6 5 The Remove function button is used to permanently remove badge records from the Picture Perfect database This process also removes the badge records from all micros that have learned the badges and have the badge records in their database s peg Before any badge can be removed it must have a badge status of Deleted To assign the Deleted status see Changing a Badge Status to Deleted above All badge removal activity is recorded in the operator history table gt To remove a badge 1 Select Access then Badges 2 When the Badges form appears enter a search criteria in one or more fields to locate the badge or badges you want to remove A single badge or group of badges can be removed For example you can search for all badges in a department by identifying that department in your search criteria Select Deleted in the Badge Status box as part of the criteria when using the Find button to select a range of records 3 Click Find Click Prev or Next until the correct badge profile appears The number of badges found is displayed on the top of the Badges form 4 Click the Remove function butt
501. se the appropriate information is given for each The following symbols designate information particular to an operating system Information for an AIX system follows this symbol Information for a Linux system follows this symbol Default Entries During the installation of the software you will be prompted with questions Following the question a default answer may be shown in brackets for example y To accept the default answer you may either press or you may type y and press Enter For clarity in this manual we will instruct you to type y Enter Text you enter Examples of commands show the exact spacing and upper or lower case letters for you to type For example re pperf k Ifan example ends with Enter type the command then press Enter For example re pperf k Enier To reduce the confusion between similar numbers and letters namely the number 1 and the lowercase letter along with the number 0 and the letter O refer to the following list 1234567890 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Notes Provides additional information The following graphic is displayed on the left side of the page m Cc a 5 e z 7 D 5 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 1 3 Related Documentation Item Example Caution Provides information you should know to avoid potential problems before continuing The following grap
502. search criteria to limit the search and then click Find Refer to page 3 9 for more information on using the Find button You may want to review the section What Type of Micro are You Changing on page 10 14 before you modify any of the information 3 Change the information in the fields as needed 4 Click Save 5 Click New to add another micro What Type of Micro are You Changing Before you modify a micro s configuration you may want to check the initial settings There are five fields on the Micro form that determine the type of micro communications being used Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream and Modem Type The table below shows what each field would contain according to the type of communications the micro is using Also refer to Figure 10 7 on page 10 17 10 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros KJ Table 10 2 Determining the Type of Micro Communications Type of Micro Primary Secondary Upstream Downstream Modem Type Communications Port Port Direct Uni Direct NONE Ifa head of If an end of NONE directional Port line micro line micro HOST NONE Otherwise Otherwise anything but anything but HOST NONE or HOST Bi directional Direct Direct Port Ifa head of If an end of NONE Port line micro line micro HOST HOST Otherwise Otherwise anything but anything but HOST NONE or HOST Dial up NONE NONE If a head of If an end of Anything b
503. selected from the list the icon will not be available from the Picture Perfect Main Menu 5 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Facilities and Facility Profiles 5 l The forms displayed are the forms corresponding to the sub menu items for the menu displayed on the right side of the Menu label Select the one you currently want to work with for example Badges Select the appropriate View Update Insert or Delete radio button for each form If none of the buttons is selected the form will not be available to the operator Form Form Permission This section is used to set up the record level permissions for the selected form The four toggle buttons allow you to determine the level of permission of the operator assigned to this facility profile Some of these buttons affect the Field Permission columns on those forms that use field level permissions such as Badges and Doors For example if the Form Permission for Update is toggled off the Field Permission Update column will be cleared and unavailable for selection View Used to determine if the operator will be allowed to view a record associated with the selected form If toggled On the Field Permission View column will be activated on those forms that use field level permissions View is automatically toggled On when the Update Insert or Delete buttons are toggled On If View is toggled Off the Update Insert and Delete buttons are automatical
504. sesesesesserese 4 39 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Contents Facilities and Facility Profiles 5 1 Overviews ue at eit GUE he AR el cao 5 1 What You Will Be Doing i cacc sccesscscostsseasissnvscosanesvis 5 2 Facilites merina a n A A a A Nn 5 2 The Facility FOrM isscsissiiiisisiscisisisisiiniisa 5 3 How to Add or Delete a Facility 0 0 0 cece 5 3 Facility Pr fil sza siinne a emai 5 5 The Facility Profiles Form ssssesssesesessesessesesese 5 6 How to Add a Facility Profile cesses 5 9 Q Facility Set Manager sesssseesesssesrsreresssisrereresesessesese 5 11 3 How to Change the Active Facility 5 11 S Linking Facilities Facility Profiles z Permissions and Operators cuisicscdsariascssraedssiertion 5 12 How to Link Facilities Facility Profiles Permissions and Operators ccceeeees 5 13 Permissions and Operators c000 6 1 OVevi eWoe een disse a A ET 6 1 What You Will Be Dom oitrcivcecanckiissecnreesma teins 6 1 Permission GroupShield ia aaia 6 1 SETUD e a A E A A AA 6 2 The Permission Group Form 6 3 POPMISSIONS zmienna Vee attire ats a dee 6 4 SetU prepa Eaa E EE EE EEEn ces iasen na tae tints 6 4 The Permissions Form ccccccccessssecsssssseceeesseeees 6 5 Operators tma a aE E I TRE 6 9 SetU p e a a A Ea ai a 6 9 The Operators OM vesaivietssenedgeadtatomtaciienies 6 9 Alarm Activity Monitor Routing 7 1 Overview nerra a hele
505. setup the area doors 1 From the Main menu select Devices Doors 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the door record you wish to set up 3 Under Inputs click on Door Sensor and select the appropriate input from the list displayed The door sensor input and the door output must be physically connected to the same micro 4 Save and exit the Doors form gt To enable M2MR without Door Control for the Area pue ajny UeN OML z 2 O a z lo z fe A D In order to perform this function you must have Occupancy Control permission 1 From the Main menu select Access Areas 2 From the toolbar click on Find to locate the area record you wish to set up 3 Under Occupancy Control enable the Occupancy Counting radio button 4 Under Two Man Rule Control enable the radio button labeled Modified Two Man Rule without Door Control 5 Save and exit the Areas form Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 21 11 How to Set Up a Modified Two Man Rule M2MR Controlled Space without Door Control gt To define Categories for M2MR Category Types 1 From the Main menu select Access Categories 2 Define one or more categories groups of people who will access the controlled area and under Modified Two Man Rule Type enable the appropriate radio button None Guest or Team Member 3 Save and exit the Categories form gt To assign M2MR Categories to Areas and Badges
506. should have a summary created Repeat Column Headers Toggle this button On if you want the column headers to be repeated just before the summary lines this is for summary lines above detail only Detail Indent Specify the number of characters the detail lines should indent from the left margin of the report Summary Indent Specify the number of characters the summary lines should indent from the left margin of the report Applies only to flush left summary text Variables The Variables picklist Figure 19 10 displays variable fields that can be pasted into the various text blocks of the Format windows such as the header and footer fields These variables automatically calculate and update specific information such as page number number of detail lines date and time Page Operator Date Date n Time Time n SummaryField SummaryCount RunningCount Figure 19 10 Variables Picklist To paste a variable command into a text block open the desired window and place the cursor in the desired text block Open the Variables picklist and select the desired variable The variable will appear in the text block where the cursor is located The variables can be combined with text For example to display Page Number X where X the running page number of the report you would select the desired header or footer text block and type Page Number Page pasting inthe Page variable command You may a
507. should not activate 9 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Input and Output Groups 9 Open Condition Select Detected to allow this input group to trigger associated outputs when the input group detects an open condition state change This field is for supervised input Select Ignored if this is not a supervised input Short Condition Select Detected to allow this input group to activate associated outputs when the input group detects a short condition state change This field is for supervised input Select Ignored if this is not a supervised input Broadcast State Changes Select Yes to broadcast any input state changes in this input group to all micros on the system Only select Yes if you want the inputs in this input group to trigger outputs on other micros Normally this is set to No Alarm Displays a description of the selected alarm if any associated with this input group Click the Alarm button to display the Alarm picklist Figure 9 4 Select the desired alarm then click Ok When this input group activates the selected alarm triggers Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist By default the input group record will be assigned the same facility as the micro to which it is assigned however you do have the ability to manually re assign an input group s facility This might be desirable in a case where one micro controls more than one facility for instance two
508. sion of type Select a paper width of either 80 or 132 characters based on the printer Select whether the type will be Normal or Compressed Detail Lines The Detail Lines are the rows of data that are found for the report Select whether the report should Show or Hide these lines If you want the report condensed to only show the Summary Lines set Detail Lines to Hide and Summary Lines to Show Summary Lines The Summary Lines are printed before or after related information on the report Select whether the report should Show or Hide these lines If you want the report condensed to only show the Summary Lines set Summary Lines to Show and Detail Lines to Hide If both the Detail Lines and Summary Lines are set to Hide the report will appear blank Row Spacing This controls the spacing of lines between the rows of data If you want the report single spaced set this to 0 If you want the report double spaced set this to 1 19 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide History Reports 19 j Column Spacing This controls the spacing between the columns of data Set this to the number of blank characters you want to have dividing the columns Page Length This field controls the number of lines allowed per page Enter the desired number 1st Page This controls the beginning page number of the report when used with the page number variable command Enter the desired number Summary The Format Summary window
509. so be careful not to overwrite an output group that you want to keep activated 8 Click Save 9 Click New to add another input group event or Quit to exit the Ingroups Events form O gt D Q D o v 5 a z fo a f 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 37 InGroup Events The InGroups Events Form InGroups Events bctandromeda FEB Frey Nene Figure 16 16 InGroups Events Form Description Type an input group Description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long for example Lobby AC Fail Off 17 00 M F Mode Select the mode in which the input group event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned 16 38 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the days of the week that the event will occur Time If the event is a Run Time event select the time of day that the event will start Remember to schedule another event as the pair of this one For example if something is activated every day at 8 AM it must be deactivated at some time later that day At mode start If this is a Start End event click At mode start if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode At mode end If this is a Start End event click At mode end if you want the event to activate at the end of the mod
510. ssages on each message queue Figure 33 4 The display is updated every second To exit the display press sc Picture Perfect Queues Memory Communications Memory Management Communications TPS Mode S Comm XON Y TPS NetMode N Comm XOFF N Comm serial 0583 Message count 0 m Messages Curr High Resend messages 0 Shrd memory used I Send manager 0 0 Shrd memory free Print manager 0 0 Shrd memory total 10240008 Database manager 0 0 Badges processed Console reader 0 0 Msgs processed arr Badge manager 0 0 Start date 02 23 93 Alarm manager 0 0 Start time 07 58 28 Operator manager 0 0 Receive manager 0 0 Send driver 0 0 Status manager 0 0 Network alarm 0 0 Figure 33 4 Queues Memory Communications Screen Messages The processes pass data to each other using message queues The total number of messages allowable on one message queue is equal to the total number of messages allowable system wide and is set to 800 when the system is installed Each process continuously reads its own queue looking for messages addressed to it When a message is found the process performs an action based on the type of message and the data within the message In some cases this results in another message being created and passed to a different process while in other cases the process handles the message itself 33 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide In Case of Problems 33 l An example
511. ssigned to the Global facility Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 19 Linking Facilities Facility Profiles Permissions and Operators The facility lt Global gt here is a reference to the where these records are stored It has no bearing on the facilities this operator can access when assigned this permission Figure 5 17 Operator Form When Jane Doe logs into Picture Perfect e If she selects Facility Y from the Facilty Manager her menu options will look like this Figure 5 18 Example Facility Y Menu Options e If she selects Global from the Facility Manager her menu options will look like this Facility Set Manager Facility Y Figure 5 19 Example Global Facility Menu Options 5 20 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Facilities and Facility Profiles 5 e If she clicks Select All her menu options will look like this jia 7 Unselect All Facility Set Manager _ aa a Close Het m o o Figure 5 20 Example All Facilities Menu Options 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 21 Linking Facilities Facility Profiles Permissions and Operators NOTES 5 22 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Permissions and Operators ees Overview The Picture Perfect system allows you to manage the system capabilities of each operator by assigning them certain permissions For example
512. ssociated alarm when the error condition occurs NOTE Only Trigger on Input non boolean input groups are displayed in the picklists See Boolean Type on page 9 5 of Chapter 9 Input and Output Groups sealy souobaye9 Ps D o Q D S os s e Invalid Grp The input group to trigger when an invalid badge error condition occurs Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 15 Areas Deleted The badge presented has been deleted from the Picture Perfect database Invalid PIN number The PIN number entered in the keypad reader does not match the PIN number in the badge record Category mismatch The category identified in the badge record does not match the area category where the badge read occurred Click the Invalid Grp button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the desired Input Group then click Close Suspended Grp The input group to trigger when a suspended badge read occurs A suspended badge is one that has been identified in its badge record as suspended Click the Suspended Grp button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the desired Input Group for a suspended badge read then click Close Lost Grp The input group to trigger when a lost badge read occurs A lost badge is one that has been reported and identified in its badge record as lost Click the Lost Grp button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the desired Input Group for a lost badge violati
513. ssociated with this door Unlock Time secs The unlock time associated with this door Forced Open Shunt Time secs The forced open shunt time associated with this door Allowable Open Time secs The allowable open time associated with this door lt 2 gt 2 er o c o Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 30 5 Viewing Status by Door 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Door State The door state associated with this door Scheduling States whether the Scheduling field is enabled on the Doors form Held Open Sensing States whether the Held Open Sensing field is selected on the Doors form Forced Open Monitoring States whether the Forced Open Monitoring field is selected on the Doors form Exit Button Asserts Strike States whether the Exit Button Asserts Strike field is enabled on the Doors form Pre Alarm States whether the Pre Alarm field is enabled on the Doors form Keypad Alarm Response States whether the Keypad Alarm Response field is enabled on the Doors form Forced Relock States whether the Forced Relock field is enabled on the Doors form On Door Open States whether the On Door Open field is enabled on the Doors form On Door Close States whether the On Door Close is enabled on the Doors form On Door Unlock Duration States whether the On Door Unlock Duration is enabled on the Doors form Current
514. st two badge holders occupy a given controlled space Modified with Door Control Select this radio button to activate the Modified Two Man Rule mode which restricts badge holder access to a controlled area based on their M2MkR category type The first two badge holders to enter a controlled area must be team members At least two team members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Additionally a team member within the controlled space must press a door release button to allow entry to any subsequent badge holders The door release button must be pressed within the time specified in the Door Release Timeout field or the door will not be unlocked Modified Without Door Control Select this radio button to activate the Modified Two Man Rule mode which restricts badge holder access to a controlled area based on their M2MkR category type The first two badge holders to enter a controlled space must be team members At least two team members must be present in the controlled space until all Guests have exited Categories If the Increased Category feature was selected during installation 32 categories are available for assignment to an area or an area event Otherwise 10 categories are available for assignment This list box contains the active badge categories ordered by slot number To access an area a badge must match at least one category that is assigned to that area 16 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Adminis
515. stem will monitor thousands of badge records transaction history records digital inputs alarm contacts and digital outputs Capacity limits depend on system resources The system supports multiple operator work stations and printers Scheduling features allow time allocations for use of readers and alarms Micro 5 s have the capability to perform the majority of scheduling tasks This provides the user with full scheduling capabilities even when a communication problem has caused the micro and host to temporarily stop talking to each other The user interface is image driven and user friendly Small images called icons are used to visually show the operator what is being selected These icons provide the operator with various options which lead to input screens providing the ability to add change or delete information By assigning operator levels to individuals operators can be restricted in their control of the system They can be denied the authority to change Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 2 1 Operating Features previously set parameters and may be able to view information on a screen but may not be permitted to modify or print out the information All conditions sensed by the system can be assigned unique messages which can be displayed on the computer screen and made available to the operator A sensor on a door can be coded within the system not only to activate an alarm if the door is opened but to notify
516. stics SndMgr Figure 33 11 Set Diagnostic Levels Menu When you Set diagnostics on one or more processes system performance is degraded If you route diagnostics to the log the system uses more disk space Main The Main daemon is the transaction processor s process group leader It is responsible for initializing the various queues semaphores shared data segments and spawning each of the tasks that make up the transaction processing system If a task abends abnormally ends for any reason the Main daemon determines which task it was checks the integrity of the message queues sleeps 5 seconds and respawns the task that failed Most of output from the Main daemon is logged regardless of the diagnostics level due to the importance of this task RcvDrv The receive driver is the only task for which more than a single instance of itself can exist Each port attached to a micro has a 33 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide In Case of Problems 33 l dedicated receive driver This eliminates the need for polling and software multiplexing The receive driver diagnostic shows an acronym for the message type and a hexadecimal dump of each message The entry is made immediately after packet decryption On a busy system this represents an enormous amount of data therefore this diagnostic should be used sparingly Each receive driver process passes its messages to a single receive manager queue for fur
517. sult A list of all available categories in alphabetical order will display If a category has been assigned a slot the slot number will be displayed beside it 2 Select the desired category Result The next available slot will be highlighted 3 Select the slot to which you want to assign it Result The highlight will move to the new slot 4 Click Add Result The category list on the Areas form will be refreshed and will display the new category and the slot number to which it was assigned 5 Click Close to return to the Areas form gt To remove a category from a slot 1 Click the Manage button to display the Category Manager window Result A list of all available categories in alphabetical order will display If a category has been assigned a slot the slot number will be displayed beside it 2 Select the category or slot you wish to remove sealy souoba ye9 Result The slot to which the category is assigned or the category to which the slot is assigned will be highlighted Ps D f Q D o f 5 Q s e Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 11 Categories 4 Click Remove Result The category list on the Category Manager window will be refreshed and the category will be displayed with no slot number beside it Result The category list on the main form will be refreshed and the category will no longer be displayed Click Close to return to the ma
518. t See Picklist Locale A language and the location in which it is used All languages in Picture Perfect are defined in terms of locale Each language has a unique locale identifier Picture Perfect uses the locale identifiers defined by AIX Refer to Chapter 32 National Language Support for a list of locale identifiers Location Cursor A graphic symbol that marks the current location of the keyboard input focus for selection Typically this symbol is a box that surrounds the current object The location cursor is sometimes known as the selections cursor Login The procedure used by operators to identify themselves to the system To use the system an operator must log in with a Login Id and Password The Login Id is associated with a Permissions level that defines the functions an operator can perform A Password provides secondary validation for that operator Logout A security procedure that protects the system from unauthorized use When an operator logs out the system displays the Login screen and requires the next operator to log in Maximize To enlarge a window to full screen size Menu A list of choices often indicated by a group of icon buttons The Main Menu lists major functions of the system A Main Menu option may lead to a submenu or to a form See Pull down Menu Pop up Menu Submenu and Form Message Transaction information that the system displays See also Alarm Message Micro See Microcontro
519. t 5 PM event to define a 24 hour cycle for that door Both events are scheduled for weekdays only The door does not require a runtime schedule for weekends because the door locks at 5 PM on Friday and remains locked until Monday at 8 AM when the unlock door event occurs unless someone manually unlocks the door Runtime events can be used to allow certain people access to an area at certain times such as with multiple shifts of workers You can assign an area certain categories from 8 AM to 5 PM and other categories for later shifts or for weekends Each shift must have its own category which must be on the appropriate badges To do this set up a series of Area Events that change categories After you set the days and the time for each la 5 D a D o te 5 a fo a D 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 11 Scheduling Events event category change to occur the events continue to occur on a weekly cycle The fields that control runtime events appear on each of the events scheduling forms Area Events Reader Events Door Events Alarm Events Ingroups Events Outgroups Events Backup Events or Report Events Refer to Figure 16 4 for the runtime portion of the Events form ane C Time 07 00 Figure 16 4 Runtime Portion of an Events Form To set up a runtime event 1 Select Schedule then the Events form that you want to define 2 Specify the parameters for this event E
520. t Profile column will reflect the newly selected profile In our example the Facility window will now look like this Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 17 Linking Facilities Facility Profiles Permissions and Operators Figure 5 14 Current Profile Column 8 Click Save Result The Badge Administrator record will look similar to the following Figure 5 15 Permissions Form 5 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Facilities and Facility Profiles 5 Step 4 Assign the Permission to an Operator 1 Select Control Operator 2 Inthe User Name field type Jane Doe 3 Inthe Employee ID field type 33333 4 Inthe Login Id field type jdoe 5 Click the Country button and select English in US ov Q D 7 6 Click the Permission button and select Badge Administrator lt GLOBAL gt Permission Select a Permission Record Site Administra Site Administrator lt Facility X gt Site Administrator lt Facility Z gt System Administrator lt GLOBAL gt Filter cose Refresh Cancel Help Figure 5 16 Operator Permission Window 7 Click Close to return to the Operators form 8 Click the Facility button and select Global 9 Click Close to return to the Operators form 10 Click Save Result The operator Jane Doe has the permission of Badge Administrator which allows her to update all badge records assigned to Facility Y and to view all operator records a
521. t n gt alarms to file lt filename gt This message will be displayed if the entire list of buffered alarm messages was successfully written out to the disk Cannot open file lt filename gt to save alarms This message will be displayed if the entire list of buffered alarms could not be written to the file the almsave file will subsequently be removed Error saving alarms to file lt filename gt This message will be displayed if the entire list of buffered alarms could not be successfully written to the file the almsave file will subsequently be removed alarm buffer lt n gt alarms restored This message will be displayed if the list of buffered alarm messages is restored when TPS starts alarm buffer lt file gt was corrupt 0 alarms restored This message will be displayed if the list of buffered alarm messages could not be restored when TPS starts Auto Logout xidle This feature provides a mechanism for logging operators off of their X Terminals if there is an extended period of inactivity Operator activity can be achieved by any of the following three events e Mouse movements e Button clicks e Keystrokes By default the auto logout feature is disabled The auto logout feature will have to be configured before it can be used The required configuration can apply to all Picture Perfect operators global or it can apply to individual operators If an X Terminal has been idle for a given amount of time then the
522. t the dialog 31 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide National Language Support fez 32 Overview This chapter describes Picture Perfect s National Language Support NLS which allows operators to view text and enter data in their native language n i Ke xo fe z D at O 5 gt a c te Q D Picture Perfect supports multiple languages at a single installation Each operator is restricted to a single language but different operators can use different languages For example one operator can work in English while another works in Spanish and yet another works in French Each operator is restricted to a single language at a time but they can change languages For example the English operator can switch to Spanish Limitations Picture Perfect supports English French Spanish Danish German Finnish Icelandic Italian Dutch Norwegian Portuguese Swedish and Italian Of these languages only English French Spanish Portuguese and Italian text are provided by GE Interlogix CASI Users must translate the English text into another supported language before that language can be used All items available from the main Picture Perfect menu support NLS Not all Picture Perfect utilities support NLS some facilities intended for system administrators are restricted to English Examples of English only utilities are ppinstal11 dpc cmenu eFlash and the log files Picture Perfect use
523. tegories are set on the Badges form to be enabled at a certain date and time and expire at a certain date and time Temporary Category Interval The temporary category scheduling interval in minutes This field is read only and is set during installation Temporary categories are scheduled on the hour then after each interval specified by this value For example if this field is set to 30 minutes the default value temporary categories are scheduled on the hour and on the half hour Temporary Category Offset This field indicates the time that temporary category scheduling will begin For example if this field is set to 5 minutes the default value temporary category scheduling will begin 5 minutes prior to each Temporary Category Interval time This field is read only and is set during installation Alarm Monitor Color Scheme Select one of the two radio buttons depending on how you want to implement alarm color Processing State Select this button if you want all alarms of one state to be of the same color The Processing States are Active Bumped Notified Remote Pending and Completed For example if you want all Active alarms to be white text on a red background and all Completed alarms to be white text on a green background select this button See Alarm Color Processing State on page 8 11 Alarm Description Select this button if you want to select text and background colors on an individual alarm basis
524. tem Host Name Although it is not recommended to change the host name or IP address of a Picture Perfect system the steps detailed in this section must be followed in order to do so These steps apply to Picture Perfect standalone systems Picture Perfect Enterprise host subhost systems and Picture Perfect Redundant systems Before beginning review the rules and restrictions listed below Rules and Restrictions e All Systems The chhostname program must be run as root e All Systems If your Picture Perfect System uses a name server then the network administrator will have to update the name server e All Systems Picture Perfect must not be running when the chhostname program is invoked e Enterprise Network Host and Subhost Systems Picture Perfect must be running on each remote machine If you want chhostname to update the remote files add the hostname of the machine whose name is being changed to rhosts file on all remote machines Or you can choose to update the remote files manually See the Picture Perfect Enterprise System Guide for more details on verifying the host names and IP addresses in the system e Redundant Systems Picture Perfect must be running on the other machine If the other machine is not up then it will have to be updated manually See the Picture Perfect Redundant System Administration Guide for more details on verifying the host names and IP addresses in the system 1N ld 94 Bui
525. ten to the language s meaning dat file This file is located in a subdirectory of cas nls sre which has the same name as the language s locale Writing the changes to meaning dat ensures that they will be preserved during patches and upgrades Invocation NOTE You must have root permission to use this tool To invoke the User Customization Tool 1 Bring up anew window 2 Ifyou did not loginas root change to root permission by typing su root Type cas bin profile Cc 7 D 5 7 e fe 3 N A m j 4 To invoke the tool type usrest Note that usrest does not take any arguments Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 31 3 User Interface User Interface Main Window The main User Customization window Figure 31 4 is the focal point of user activity Its components are described below Menu Bar The menu bar contains three buttons Exit Save and Help Exit Button Select this button to exit the application When unsaved customizations exist a dialog is activated which prompts the user as to whether or not the changes should be saved The user can select Yes to save the changes and exit select No to exit without saving the changes or select Cancel to cancel the attempt to exit Figure 31 4 User Customization Window Save Button Select this button to save customizations If the save fails an error dialog will be activated describing the error Help Button
526. ter Available temporary slot E Hep Cose eae Figure 13 4 Category Manager Window Slots This grid contains all the category slots Permanent category slots which have been assigned a category and are therefore no longer available for selection are highlighted in red Available permanent category slots are shown in white Temporary category slots that are currently assigned a temporary category schedule are highlighted in yellow Available temporary category slots are shown in off white These slots should not be used for permanent assignments Categories This is a list of all available categories in alphabetical order Categories which have already been assigned have their slot number indicated to their left Active categories assigned to a temporary category schedule have a letter T after their slot number sealy souobaye9 A D f Q D S Q w 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 9 Categories Filter Enter a search criteria in the Filter field and click on the Refresh button or press Enter The search criteria entered in this field can be a specific match such as West Lobby ora pattern such as Parking Lot Add Click on this button to add a permanent category to a slot The category list on the Badges form will be refreshed and will display the new category This button is enabled when an available category and an empty slot number are selected
527. ters long for example social security number Address 1 through Address 5 Type the badgeholder s address up to 40 alphanumeric characters per field The Address 1 through Address 5 field names can be changed using the User Customization tool See Chapter 31 User Customization Phone Type the badgeholder s phone number up to 16 characters You may type dashes or spaces between digits in the Phone field Refer to Figure 14 4 for the top middle portion of the Badges form Figure 14 4 Badges Form Top Right Badge Encode Number This field contains the unique encoded number of the badge See Issuing a Permanent Badge Four Methods on page 14 2 for details on this procedure This field is View Only when the Seed Counter feature and the Copy to BID option are enabled as shown in Figure 14 5 14 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 i poo1000040 s peg Figure 14 5 Badges Form Top Middle with Seed Counter enabled Pin Type a personal identification number 1 to 10 digits long for the badgeholder to use with a badge and keypad reader Reissue Count This view only field is visible if the seed counter option is enabled during installation This is the number of times the badge has been reissued using Access Vision A new badge will set the Reissue Count to 00 Subsequent reissues of the badge will increment the number storing it to the badge Reissued records re use
528. th them 22 12 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Elevator Control 22 i The Elevators Form Use the Elevators form Figure 22 8 to select the type of elevator configuration define the number of floors assign the elevator to a previously defined elevator micro or reader and then tie previously defined outputs and inputs in the case of Reader DI DO configurations to the corresponding floors Perform this setup for each of the access controlled elevators in your facility Elevators bctandromeda Figure 22 8 Elevator Form Description Type the name of the elevator in the Description box for example Lobby East Wing 1 West Wing 3 Define Floors Click the Define Floors button to specify the number of floors and the floor labels names which in turn will determine how many floor buttons will display for that elevator on the configuration screen a p lt o er fe 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 22 13 Elevator Control Setup Number of Floors Floor Descriptions al Increment Floors Starting Floor Number Floor 1 Floor 2 Increment Value Floor 3 Floor 4 Floor 5 Floor 6 Floor 7 Floor 6 Floor 9 Floor 10 OK Cancel Decrement Floors Starting Floor Number Decrement Value Floor 11 Increment Floors Decrement Floors Figure 22 9 Floor Description Window Number of Floors
529. the operator using the screen where the breach occurred and what action to take Alarms can be given priorities for action in the event that multiple alarms occur All alarms are provided with an audio display tone to alert security personnel of severe conditions The system maintains a history file of all occurrences reported by its Micro 5 s access attempts alarms etc Management reports are available to provide the System Manager with the activities within the system any time on demand The program is personalized by the customer to his specific requirements and configuration by simple pop up windows and menus An operator can change the size and position of a screen The system uses a state of the art relational database management system RDBMS which allows the operator to query the database using menu driven forms These forms allow the operator to specify data fields requested logical relationships between the fields and the order in which the fields are to be selected Once the request for data is made and the data is found the operator can then scroll through data backwards and forwards If desired the operator can print the requested data by selecting the appropriate option The system architecture uses a distributed approach comprised of Micro 5s and the host processor On an AIX system all terminals are graphics terminals except the host console which could be a character based terminal AIX On a Linux syst
530. the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu Inputs The Inputs on Micro selection allows you to send an input status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the micro ID where the input request is sent press Enter and wait about 30 seconds for the screen to display information If the screen scrolls too rapidly press m S to suspend and Ga Q to restart the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu Input Groups The Input Groups on Micro selection allows you to send an input group status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the micro ID where the input group request is sent press Ente and wait about 30 seconds for the screen to display information If the screen scrolls too rapidly press a S to suspend and a Q to restart the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 33 19 5 O N D h UV s ie z D 3 n Status Information from Micros Mode The Mode on Micro selection allows you to send an mode status request to a specific micro When the system prompts you enter the micro ID where the mode request is sent press Enter and wait about 30 seconds for the screen to display information If the screen scrolls too rapidly press G S to suspend and a Q to restart the output Press to quit and return to the previous menu Outputs The Outputs on Micro selection
531. the records in the badge micro reader door input input groups output and output group tables that are using the facility to be deleted to the Global Facility ID of 1 Select New Facility for Related Records Allows the operator to pick a new facility for the records in the badge micro reader door input input groups output and output group tables that are currently using the facility to be deleted Selecting this option will cause a picklist to display allowing you to choose a new facility for those related records 5 Click Ok 5 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Facilities and Facility Profiles 5 Facility Profiles NOTE A facility profile is a way of defining an operator s record and field level access permissions for the Picture Perfect forms This feature allows an administrator to grant an operator a different level of permission for each set of records Facility to which he has access For example an operator may be assigned the facility profile Global at the one facility which allows full access to all forms and the facility profile Update Badges at another facility which restricts access to updating records on the Badges form The default facility profile Global is created during installation and when paired with a facility gives an operator full access to the associated database records Full access is defined as being able to view update insert and delete at the record
532. the sensing violation is reset by closing the door U F gt 3 Z e O e 5 Pre Alarm Notification Methods There are three methods of Pre alarm notification e An alarm can be sent to the host which if routed will be displayed on the Alarm Monitor e An audible warning signal can be activated e A combination of the above an alarm and an audible warning signal Disabling Pre Alarm Pre alarm can be disabled in the following ways Do not configure a Pre alarm input group for a door Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 24 1 Disabling Pre Alarm e Disable Pre alarm on the Devices Doors form e Configure the door with an Allowable Open Time less than or equal to one minute e Disable the Pre alarm input group This entirely disables the Pre alarm by preventing the Pre alarm input group and its associated alarm and outputs from changing state e Disable the Pre alarm input group s alarm This only disables Pre alarm notification It does not affect the outputs associated with the Pre alarm input group e Disable the Pre alarm input group s associated output groups and or outputs This only disables the Pre alarm outputs it does not affect Pre alarm notification When a Pre alarm is associated with more than one output they can be individually disabled using the separate outputs and output groups Disabling a door s ability to detect a sensing violation will not ca
533. ther routing SndDrv The send driver writes messages to specific ports based on micro addresses by matching up the destination micro with its port Like the receive driver the diagnostic shows an acronym for the message type followed by a hexadecimal dump of the message itself RcvMgr The receive manager routes messages passed to it from the receive driver to the appropriate manager task Messages are routed to the badge manager bdgmgr database manager dbmgr alarm manager almmgr send manager sndmgr and status manager stsmgr During normal operation the only log entries made by the receive manager are an acronym representing the message type received Entries are also made for database calls that fail In such cases the SQL error code can be used to determine the cause of the failure O D O D o 9 V a O z D 3 a A micro coming out of alarm state sends a message that becomes a log entry micro n is now responding SndMgr Programs needing to send messages to micros do so by passing their messages to the send manager The send manager translates these messages into data packets recognized by the micro After the message has been translated it is passed to the send driver which does the actual writes to the ports The send manager is also responsible for expanding broadcast messages into separate messages for each port Only one broadcast message per port to which at least one micro is
534. they can be run together or separately Each report type will have a prefix in the log file to indicate its execution History reports will have a prefix of hist and SQL reports will have a prefix of ppsql 19 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide History Reports 19 j Setup gt To schedule a History Report 1 Define your query and report format through the History form Figure 19 1 and save it under the desired name 2 Select Schedule then Report Events to display the Report Events form 3 Type the description of this report 4 Enter the time this report is to run and select the days on which it is to run 5 Click the History Report button to display a picklist of history reports Select the desired report then click Close The Report Events Form Report Events bctandromeda gogas29 Frey Next T D o e lt A ke ie gt a Figure 19 11 Report Events Form History Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 19 17 Scheduling a History Report Definition Type the description of this report Time Enter the time this report is to run and select the days on which it is to run Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records ina specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Report Type If Enf
535. thout moving the mouse See Click Downstream A relative position on a communication line originating at a host computer for example the second micro on a line is downstream from the first micro See Micro Drag To press and hold a mouse button while moving the mouse pointer Duress Code A special PIN number used on a keypad reader to signal emergency situations See the Parameters form Enabled Reader A condition in which a reader is enabled to read badges An enabled reader can be online or offline See Online Reader and Offline Reader Encryption The encoding of data for security purposes by converting standard data code into a proprietary code ENQ An inquiry message to poll a micro to see if it is responding Facility A facility is a partitioning of the records of the database of the security system Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide GL 3 Glossary Facility Profile A facility profile is a permission set that an operator can access assigned to a facility ENQ An inquiry message to poll a micro to see if it is responding Firewall A firewall is a set of related programs located at a network gateway server that protects the resources of a private network from users from other networks Foreground Window A window in front of another window Form An electronic data entry worksheet used to enter find view or update data A form may have input fields pop up picklists and pushbuttons f
536. time when the badge should expire on its expiration date The system invalidates the badge when the expiration date and time occur Type the colons if the system time format requires them For no expiration time leave blank Return Date If the badge is being returned enter the date when the badge is returned Type the slashes if the system date format requires them Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 14 19 The Badges Form Return Time If the badge is being returned type the time when the badge is returned Type the colons if the system time format requires them Access DatelAccess Time Indicates the date and time that the last access was granted to this badge The system supplies this data Do not over type data in this field For no access date time leave blank Last Access NOTE F The system tracks the badge and displays information about when it was last used This reflects information captured as of the moment the badge record was displayed Reader Indicates which reader last granted access to this badge The system supplies this data Do not over type data in this field Unless the door is actually opened this field is not updated User Fields NOTE m User 1 through User 40 Type information up to 40 alphanumeric characters in one or more user fields to identify the badgeholder for example license tag number The number of user fields that appear on the Badges form is deter
537. tion Select this button if the output should reset after the number of seconds specified in the Duration field There is a possible alarm override for a duration reset See Chapter 8 Alarm Activity Messages and Alarms For example you may want an output to reset on duration if the output device is a door strike and you want it to stay on for a limited duration of time Reset on Input Select this button if the output should reset as soon as the input resets NOTE If neither Reset On Duration nor Reset On Input is selected the output stays on If Reset On Input is selected the door does not unlock with a valid badge m read 12 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Inputs and Outputs 12 j Inputs Physical inputs such as sensors or detectors must be described to the system Use the Inputs form to define where each input point is connected how it is wired to activate what kind of state changes activate it how long it remains detected before it activates which input group is associated with it and where messages about this input are routed Use the Inputs form Figure 12 4 to define the characteristics of each physical input point Setup gt To add an input 1 Select Devices then Inputs 2 Click New 3 Complete the Inputs form For a description of each field see The Inputs Form on page 12 9 4 Click Save The Inputs Form The following is a list of fields that may require additional
538. tion anyway or make the necessary associations before saving the door again but Keypad Alarm Response does not function correctly unless those associations are made While it is possible to configure a Picture Perfect system to have more than one reader associated with one door and for one reader to be connected to more than one doorstrike output Keypad Alarm Response does not support this configuration Keypad Alarm Response can be incorporated into scheduling For instance if a reader is scheduled to change between being a Badge Only reader and a Badge and Keypad reader for a door with Keypad Alarm Response enabled alarms occurring during the badge only state will not require a keypad alarm response while those occurring during the badge and keypad state will require it If an alarm occurs during the badge and keypad state but has not yet been responded to when the schedule change goes into effect the reader will remain in the Keypad Alarm Response mode until proper response is made then the reader will change to the badge only mode See The Doors Form on page 13 35 and also see Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes Exit Button Asserts Strike _ Enabled _ Disabled Pre Alarm _ Enabled _ Disabled Keypad Alarm Response _ Enabled _ Disabled Forced Relock _ Enabled _ Disabled Figure 23 3 Keypad Alarm Response Field on Doors Form Enabling a Badge Use the Access Badges form Figure 23 4 to enable a badge for Keyp
539. tivate in groups INPUTS when an alarm condition occurs OUTPUT GROUPS To allow outputs to trigger in groups OUTPUTS when associated inputs activate What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to select the outputs you want to control through input groups output groups or individual outputs If you select Input Groups Output Groups or Outputs from the Control Outputs form Figure 29 1 a picklist appears where you select a single input group output group or output Clicking on the corresponding icon brings up the associated output group or output with radio buttons for turning all outputs in the group on or off If you want to turn single outputs in the group on or off click the Group button to display a picklist where you can use radio buttons to turn individual outputs on or off Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 29 1 Controlling an Output from an Input Group NOTE F Outputs orion afe E quit input groups output groups outputs help Input Group lt BLANK Output Group lt BLANK Output lt BLANK Figure 29 1 Control Outputs Form If you select Outputs from the Control Outputs form a picklist appears where you can select an individual output to turn on or off Each transaction is recorded in operator history Controlling an Output from an Input Group When you select an input group and click the Input Group button a window displaying all associated output groups will
540. tivity and badge activity to selected destinations Printer Monitor or History Log See Routings on page 4 21 of Chapter 4 Initial Setup for details on this The routings that you define on the Routings form appear in the Routings picklist on the Areas Doors and Alarms forms If the current routing on a form includes the History Log the activities defined on that form are captured in history If there is no current routing assigned the activity routes to the default routing as defined on the Parameters form If the default routing does not include the History Log in its setting the activity will not be captured in history The Routings picklist on the Inputs form is for diagnostics only m o ro lt A fo a Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 19 1 The History Form The History Form NOTE NOTE The History form is a workspace for specifying and displaying various history reports Select Reports then History The Badge History New Report form Figure 19 1 appears The menu bar on the History form has six pull down menus plus a Help menu To display a menu click on the menu name and hold down the mouse button To select an option drag the mouse pointer to the desired option and release the button Use the Help menu for on screen information about each of the features Badge History New Report Report Type Source Format Execution Font Help Figure 19 1 History For
541. tons 3 7 Reader Events 16 25 Readers 13 21 Readers Form 13 22 Real Time Monitoring 2 3 Recovering the Entire System 18 13 Red Hat Linux 7 2 Operating System 2 5 Redundant System option 2 4 Related Documentation 1 1 Relational Operators 20 17 Remove Record Popup 14 8 Removing A Single Alarm 27 6 Removing Badge Records 14 7 Report Events Form 19 17 20 25 Report Menu 19 2 Reports 2 4 Reports Menu 20 4 Responding to An Alarm 27 3 Responses Form 8 4 Responses Picklist 27 4 Restore Window 18 11 Restoring the Database 18 10 Resume 3 14 Route Definitions 7 3 Route Definitions Form 7 3 Route Points 7 4 Route Points Form 7 5 Route to Email 7 6 Routing Card Trace 4 29 Routings Form 4 21 Runtime Events 16 11 S Save 3 9 Save Report As Window 19 4 Save Report Query As Window 20 5 Saving a History Report 19 16 Schedules 2 3 Scheduling a History Report 19 16 Scheduling an SQL Report 20 23 Scheduling Backups 18 8 Scheduling Elevator Free Access 22 21 Scroll Bars 3 17 Secure 17 1 Selection Buttons 3 7 Set Diagnostic Levels Menu 33 14 Setup Procedures 3 26 Shutting Down 3 24 Source Menu 19 5 SQL Clauses 20 14 SQL Form 20 2 SQL Names Picklist 20 8 SQL Syntax 20 18 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Index 3 SQL Syntax Menu 20 8 SQL Variables 20 18 Start End Events 16 12 Starting Picture Perfect 3 21 Status By Area 30 3 Status by Micro 30 2 Status Form 30 2 Status Information from Micros 33
542. top portion of the Parameters form Setup gt To define system parameters 1 Select Control then Parameters 2 Complete the Parameters form For a description of each field see The Parameters Form on page 4 27 3 Click Save To implement the system parameters you have changed perform shutdown and restart procedures using the command line see Shutting Down the Entire System and Starting Picture Perfect on page 3 21 The Parameters Form The following is a list of fields that may require additional information for you to complete The list is in the order that the fields appear on the form There is no required sequence for you to follow NOTE Fields marked with an asterisk are parameters that should only be changed as F directed by your support representative 2 i r kc Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 27 Parameters Parameters orion HEE oe NODE 1 1750 2000 Figure 4 13 Parameters Form Top Node Name Node name of the host normally set to NODE 1 Xon Threshold The number of queued messages that control TPS message buffering Xon must be smaller than Xoff Xoff Threshold The number of queued messages that control TPS message buffering Xoff must be larger than Xon Shared Memory Size The size KBytes of shared memory used Diagnostic Buffer Size The size KBytes of the diagnostic buffer 4 28 Picture Perfect 2 0 A
543. tput Groups NOTE If Toggle is set to Yes and Authorization Required is set to Yes photos are displayed for invalid transactions but not valid transactions See Swipe and 7 Show Control on page 13 26 Limited Usage Selecting Enabled defines the reader as a limited usage reader which will only grant access to a badgeholder for the number of times specified in the Usage Count field of the Badges form There is no limit to the number of readers that can be defined as limited usage readers See Chapter 14 Badges for related information The count must be manually reset Elevator Reader Selecting Yes defines the reader as an elevator reader A maximum of 16 readers on a micro can be configured as elevator readers See Chapter 22 Elevator Control for related information sealy souobaye9 Ps D o Q D o S os s e Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 29 Doors Doors Use the Doors form to define how each door operates Depending on the features that it should have you may want to associate the door with an area and with inputs input groups and outputs so that the system can process door status information and operate optional door hardware or alarm devices The Doors form links all access and control features of the physical door The Doors form fields required for activation of particular features are listed with those features below NOTE To ensure proper operation when
544. tration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 Manage Click the Manage button to display the Category Manager window Figure 13 4 on page 13 9 from which you may add remove or replace a category in a slot You may also apply filters to the categories that are displayed in the categories list box For more information on Category Management see Managing Category Assignment on page 13 8 You can assign categories to an area and then schedule Area Events to change the categories depending on access requirements Categories are position sensitive so be careful not to overwrite categories that should remain intact For example e An area event can change the categories on an area for a specific time to control which badge holders have access to the area during that time If you assign a different category to each computer operator shift then you can control when certain staff members can access the computer room Set up area events that add and change the categories from the area e A series of area events that add and change a single category can control the time frame in which a contractor s job is performed For example one area event adds a category to the R amp D Lab at 4 00 PM to allow the cleaning crew access another area event replaces the category at 4 30 PM to restrict the time spent in this area You can use the same strategy to restrict access to a computer vault where daily backups are stored The categories on an area
545. trigger all the outputs associated with that output group or you can trigger individual outputs associated with it This does not generate an alarm Figure 29 2 shows the progression of windows from the Control Outputs form The output is turned on for the time specified in the output s duration field gt To control an Output from an Input Group 1 Log in as an operator with permission to control outputs Select Control then Outputs Click the Output Group button to display a picklist of output groups Select the desired output group then click Close Click the Output Groups icon A window displaying buttons for that output group appears Selecting the Output Group button will display all associated outputs Beside each Output button are on off radio buttons e Use the appropriate radio button to either turn on or off all of the outputs in that group then click Ok e To turn individual outputs in a selected output group on or off click the button displaying the name of the output group to display another window This window lists the outputs of that group individually with separate on off radio buttons for each Use the appropriate radio button for each output then click Ok Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 29 3 O fo 5 o To ie 5 os a Controlling an Individual Output Outputs orion Figure 29 2 Progression of Windows in Control Outputs Form Controlling an I
546. trol the parking lot lights in the example above aL o o Q o 3 a Figure H 7 DI Used to Trigger DO Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide H 5 ised Inputs to a 2SRP or 20DI Example of the Door Exit DI and Sense DI Set Up Using Supervised Inputs to a 2SRP or 20D Example of the Door Exit DI and Sense DI Set Up Using Superv Joop y Bulusdo jnouWM wieje Jadwe y s1366 q 24y YM Buedwe e wee y Bule661 noyyim JOOP y suado s nb u yx JO peal BHpeq pljeAY dno19 jnduj 3y UO uonipuoo NAdO pue LHOHS S 99 9p SIEMYOS JOSP9q SJINJOIg 24 USUA LON 193130 LYOHS X dH95 LNdNI las 193130 N3d0 X 0 ssayaqdy lL QHu Oa d 9 LNdLno 188 0 OHOIN J8N35 4000 16 488071 00 1 00 Way Ty las INdni Yad WL dd9 LNdNI 8S dNOY9 LNdNI 8 55348400Y L Qdu og 0 OHOIN I 11x3 18 48807 80 00 193130 LYOHS X Indnl 193130 NadO X n gk ANODAL YD 1a yooa 1a Lixa Lg 48801 00 L 00 AHOO9IALYD dd9 LAd LNO laS 0 s5S53400Y an ino e a 0 OHOIN Waya las dnows LNdLNO CBU pijea 438188 La A9907 00 b 00 La A9907 00 4 00 La A9907 00 1 00 a Anao aaa a yood INdLno dows LNdNI avay 490d ANYA Figure H 8 Door Exit DI and Sense DI Setup Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide H 6 Alarms Initiated by Micros MICRO INPUT GROUP SELECT INPUT GROUP ALARM G mi e D ico 2 o 3 a Figure H 9 Alarms Initiated by Micros Alarms Initi
547. ts access to a controlled area based on the badge holders M2MR Category Type Additionally a Door Control option can be enforced which after access has been granted to the first two badge holders requires a door release button to be pressed before access is granted to any subsequent badge holders M2MR Category Type There are three M2MR Category Types assigned through the Categories form e None Access to an M2MR controlled area will not be permitted while 21 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Two Man Rule and Modified Two Man Rule 21 j M2MR control is enabled By default any existing or new categories are assigned this category type e Guest A Guest is not allowed entry to an M2MR controlled area unless two 2 Team Members are already present in the area e Team Member If the M2MR controlled area is empty a Team Member is allowed entry only with a second Team Member Additional Team Members can enter individually after the initial two 2 Team Members are present in the M2MR controlled area Furthermore at least two 2 Team Members must be present until all Guests have exited CAUTION If the micro controlling an M2MR area resets it will automatically reset the occupancy count to zero Therefore in the unlikely event that this occurs while the area is occupied the system administrator must disable Two Man Rule A evacuate the area and then reinstate M2MR Modified Two Man Rule without Door Control
548. ts as soon as the door closes The change has no effect until the current violation ends Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 23 7 Disabling Keypad Alarm Response NOTES 23 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Pre Alarm Notification Chapter 24 Overview Pre alarm Notification informs users that a sensing violation is about to occur The warning notification method can vary It can be set to trigger an output such as a horn or a light and or send a signal to the Alarm Monitor Pre Alarm Function Pre alarm is activated one minute before a sensing violation occurs on an open door and will not function if the Allowable Open Time for that door is less than one minute The length of the Pre alarm interval will always be one minute since it is not user configurable Pre alarm can be reset by a valid reader transaction or by closing the door Otherwise it resets when the sensing violation occurs Activating the Pre alarm means activating the Pre alarm input group Resetting the Pre alarm means resetting the Pre alarm input group When a valid reader transaction occurs while waiting for the Pre alarm to activate its timing is restarted During the one minute interval between the Pre alarm and the sensing violation a valid reader transaction will restart the timing and reset the Pre alarm When the one minute Pre alarm interval expires the Pre alarm resets and the sensing violation activates Typically
549. tton Inputs Input Groups or Doors The applicable window will display See Sample Access Secure Window on page 17 5 3 From one of the lists displayed select the item whose state you wish to change by highlighting it Multiple selections may be made An item can be deselected by clicking on it a second time 4 Click on the appropriate Change State arrow button Result A confirmation box will pop up 5 Select Yes to continue or No to cancel the operation Result Yes will cause the system to update the database for the selected records reflect the change in state on the appropriate form inform the micros of the change and refresh the two list boxes to reflect the new changes 6 Click on the Close button 7 Click Quit in the Access Secure Operations pop up menu to exit and close any open windows 17 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Access Secure Operations 17 l Sample Access Secure Window Below is an example of an Access Secure window and an explanation of each component InputGroups Current State Access Current State Secure 00 1 00 READER ALARM HISTORY OVERFLOW HOST TO MICRO 0 COMM FAIL DOOR FORCED OPEN EEFE ORE INVALID BADGE DOOR HELD OPEN DGE Change State to Secure SUSPENDED BADGE UNKNOWN BADGE almmgr bdgmgr 9 a 3 2 a So o oO Filter Filter M Bt cee eee Refresh Cancel Print Refresh Cancel F
550. tton is selected the alarm will be assigned the facility of the door reader input or micro displayed in the Location column 4 36 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Initial Setup 4 i Departments Use the Departments form Figure 4 17 to define a department The department names entered here form a picklist that will be used on the Badges form to assign a department to each badge Setup gt To define a department record 1 Select Access then Departments 2 Complete the Departments form For a description of each field see The Departments Form on page 4 37 3 Click Save The Departments Form m Departments bctandromeda saaa Figure 4 17 Departments Form 5 a i D pl To Description Enter the identification name of the department to be added up to 30 alphanumeric characters Division Enter the division of the company to which the department reports Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 4 37 Departments Location Enter the physical location of the department such as Building A Manager Enter the name of the department manager User Fields The User1 and User2 field names can be changed using the User Customization Tool described in Chapter 31 User Customization Set Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a
551. ttons page forward or backward in the report window one page 65 lines default at a time The Page Up and Page Down buttons are only available when they are not grayed out If the Page Down button is gray this means you are currently looking at the last page you re at the end If the Page Up button is gray this means you are currently looking at the first page you re at the beginning T m o lt A D fo D Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 19 13 Viewing a History Report Viewing a History Report NOTE NOTE gt To view a History Report Select Reports then History The Badge History New Report form Figure 19 1 appears Select the history type Alarm Badge or Operator from the radio button list on the pull down Type menu The current form displays the default selections for history type badge and for report function new To define a new report select New from the pull down Report menu To open an existing report select Open from the Report menu If you open an existing report the report is already formatted so you can skip the following formatting steps and just view the report Or you can reformat the report using the Format menu options apply the new format criteria and then save the report under the existing name or a new name Select the history source Database Diskette or Tape from the radio button list on the pull down Source menu Use the Format for
552. tup To create an alarm event 1 2 3 Select Schedule then Alarm Events Enter a description for this event Set the time for this event to occur either by selecting days of the week and typing a time or by selecting At Mode Start or At Mode End Click the Select Mode button to display the Modes picklist Select the desired mode for this event then click Ok Click the Select Alarm button to display the Alarms picklist Select the alarm that this event should control then click Ok Specify whether the alarm should be Online or Offline If the message destination of this alarm should be changed by this event click the Routing button to display the Routings picklist Select the desired routing then click Close Click Save Click New to add another alarm event or Quit to exit the Alarm Events form O gt D Q D o v 5 a z fo a f 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 33 Alarm Events The Alarm Events Form Alarm Events bctandromeda ajaaa 2 fray Nene Figure 16 15 Alarm Events Form Description Type an alarm event Description up to 30 alphanumeric characters long for example Door Held Offline 08 00 M F Mode Select the mode in which the alarm event will occur An event will not take place if it is not assigned to a mode and it will only occur in those modes to which it is assigned Days of the Week If the event is a Run Time event select the
553. ture cas bin chkfs sh A shell script that determines if any file systems exceed a given usage percentage The output is written to cas log chkfs 1log To run this script log in as root and type chkfs sh followed by the filesystem names If no file system is specified it will check cas db text chkfs cfg If no file system is specified in chkfs cfg the default will be to check all file systems cas db text chkfs cfg A configuration file containing the following parameters D 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Table D 3 File System Monitor Configuration MAXUSAGE A global usage percentage which a file system must exceed For example MAXUSAGE 90 FS A list of file systems that are checked For example FS cas log tmp MSG A message displayed in the popup For example MSG Your file system has exceeded 90 utilization INGRP An input group record id for an alarm generated set up by default For example INGRP 20 cas bin infopopup A binary file that extracts the message to be displayed on the popup cas db text cron tab Runs chkfs sh every 10 minutes cas bin almsim A binary file that generates the alarm for chkfs sh cas bin terminalpopup A shell script that determines which terminals are defined in the database and calls infopopup for each of these terminals Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide D 5 gt Q lt o O D a O
554. ture Perfect configuration transaction and historical data stored on the hard disk of the host computer or the resident memory of a microcontroller See Distributed Database and Relational Database Date Format The order that the system requires for month day and year Devices Physical peripherals such as disks tapes printers networks and serial port adapters for modems and lines of microcontrollers Use the Devices menu to configure printers ports and communication lines Digital Input A physical sensing device used to monitor an electronic contact connected to a microcontroller Also called a DI Digital Output A physical control device used to turn on off an electronic contact connected to a microcontroller Also called a DO Distributed Database Resident database downloaded to a microcontroller that allows independent decision making and faster response time Door A database record that links the logical functions of a door with the door strike output exit button and door sensor inputs Door Forced Open A logical alarm caused when the door opens without a valid badge read and the door contact reports the door open state PSI 1 x0 13 Door Open Too Long A logical alarm caused when a door unlocked by a valid badge read remains open longer than the Allowable Open Time a shunt time that starts when the door contact reports the door open state Double Click To click a mouse button twice in rapid succession wi
555. ty number 1 to 5 digits long If the 8RP board loses communication with the micro s CPU board access can still be granted to all badges with a facility code that matches this field If this field is left empty the 8RP will grant access to all badges while in this degraded mode This applies only for 8RP boards in a Micro 2 or Micro 4 Shunt Code Optional Type a shunt code 1 to 10 digits long With Shunting Enabled on the Area and Reader forms this code entered on a keypad allows a badgeholder to prop a door open for the time specified on the Doors form without triggering a door held open alarm Alarm Response Code Optional Type an Alarm Response Code 1 to 10 digits long With Keypad Alarm Response Enabled on the Doors form this code entered on a keypad allows an authorized badgeholder to respond to and reset an active alarm This Alarm Response Code must be different from the Shunt Code on the Micros form See Chapter 23 Keypad Alarm Response Badge History Threshold Type the percentage at which the micro triggers the Badge History Overflow input group to notify the host that its Badge Transaction table has reached this percentage of capacity Alarm History Threshold Type the percentage at which the micro triggers the Alarm History Overflow input group to notify the host that its Alarm Transaction table has reached this percentage of capacity Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 19 Adding or Chan
556. ty3 Last comms 08 30 07 On primary port On backup port Online Resetting ACK Pending Timeout Comm alarm Call now Dialing micro Connected Resend messages ee i a a ia lt gt to move through list or lt ESC gt to quit Figure 33 7 Micro Status Each page of this screen lists information for up to three Micro IDs in three columns Each column uses these fields Micro ID Displays the micro s identification number Next in line Displays the ID number of the downstream micro Pri Port Displays the primary port of the micro Sec Port Displays the secondary port of the micro Last comms In the case of a downstream micro this field shows the last time a non ACK packet was received from the micro In the case of a port group leader first micro in the port group the micro responsible for acknowledging messages for all other micros on the line this field shows the last time any packet was received including ACK packets an acknowledgment that the last message was received The reason for the difference is that the port group leader acknowledges packets bound for other group members so it cannot be assumed that since the packet was acknowledged that the destination micro is responding the port name field to alert the operator For example modem ports are not initialized but information for modem ports also displays on this screen 33 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Port Records In
557. u are currently viewing select Print You can print a new report without saving the report To save time when printing a long report set Execution to Manual before opening the report This setting is also preferred when reading data from a tape Saving a History Report To save a new report select Save As on the Report menu and type a report name To save an existing report that you have reformatted click Save To save a reformatted report under a new name click Save As and type the new name the old report still exists with its old name The Save functions on the Report menu do not save the selected format criteria unless the criteria is already applied using the Ok or Apply functions on each Format form Scheduling a History Report If there are certain history reports that you want to run at specific times you can use the scheduling feature to run these automatically The scheduled report will follow the day and time settings specified on the Report Events form Figure 19 11 All error messages and completion messages generated as a result of the scheduled report process are written to a log file in the cas 1log directory called log mmdd where mmdd system date example log 0302 March 2nd You must check the log file for messages after the scheduled report process has executed since there are no pop up window messages associated with this feature This scheduling feature can be used for both History and SQL reports and
558. uide 27 5 Removing A Single Alarm HOST TO MICRO 0 COMM FAIL TEM ADIMISTRATOR UARD RD CaTa SECURITY DISPATCHED SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR CONTACTED Figure 27 6 Alarm Response Window with Logged and New Responses Removing A Single Alarm To clear a single alarm that is in a reset condition click the Remove button in the Alarm Response window The system logs the alarm and its responses and deletes it from the Alarm Monitor NOTE The Alarm Response window may now be configured to have the Remove function button unavailable unless the alarm is in reset state or has the alarm control Immediate Reset Input set done on the Devices Alarm form The configuration is F determined by the Remove Alarm Only If Reset parameter in the Control Parameters form The default is No indicating the Remove function button is always available When set to Yes the Remove function button will be grayed out when unavailable 27 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Monitoring Alarms 27 l HOST TO MICRO 0 COMM FAIL NOTIFY SYSTEM ADIMISTRATOR DISPATCH GUARD izfreidus 04 04 01 17 10 call 911 zfreidus 04 04 01 17 11 SECURITY DISPATCHED Enter new response SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR CONTACTED ssnst Figure 27 7 Alarm Response Window with Remove Function Disabled Purging A Single Alarm To clear a single alarm that is NOT in a reset condition click the Purge button in the Alarm Response window
559. uilding that use separate doors for entry exit For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Enabled Select Yes to allow this output group to activate when triggered by an input group Select No to prevent the outputs in this output group from activating when triggered by an input group Input Groups Before defining individual inputs you must create input groups to which individual inputs can be assigned Input groups trigger output groups when all or any of the inputs assigned to the group are detected Input groups are needed for physical inputs such as readers and sensors and for logical events determined by the system or micro Logical Input Events for a micro are Badge History Overflow Alarm History Overflow Upstream Communication Failure Downstream Communication Failure Reader Communication Failure Logical Input Events for an area are Invalid Badge Unknown Badge Lost Badge Suspended Badge Antipassback Violation Duress o Q O c c oo 9 x O 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 9 3 Input Groups Logical Input Events for a door are e Door Held Open e Door Forced Open e Door Pre alarm Setup gt To add an input group 1 Select Devices then Ingroups 2 Complete the Ingroups form for each input Define how the input group activates whether a single input in the group activates the group or i
560. unt the resend transmission window size the current outbound message serial number and the total number of messages processed since the system was Started If the system wide message count exceeds 75 of the system s capacity the message count is displayed in red If the amount of shared memory used is greater than 50 of the total bytes in the shared data segment the shared memory is displayed in red Communications Under normal circumstances the COMM XON flag is ON Y and the COMM XOFF flag is OFF N When the total number of messages on all queues exceeds the XOFF Threshold specified in the system configuration record these flags values are reversed and the host micros accepts no more messages from the micros This allows the system to process the messages on the queues well before the system becomes overridden with traffic No messages are lost since the micros continuously resend their traffic until messages are accepted again NOTE The system exceeds the transaction threshold only in extreme circumstances F Note and closely monitor each occurrence Chronic message overrun may be caused by e XON XOFF threshold that is too low Set the transaction on off thresholds using the Parameters screen obtained from the Control icon on the Picture Perfect Main menu For the RISC System 6000 host settings are 1750 2000 e Malfunctioning printer or print spooler e Extreme lack of memory Alarms Flags Devices Counts
561. up e network e network dial up All of these options are explained in the sections that follow However each one can be configured as a nonexistent micro which means the micro does not need to be on the system to configure it Adding Micros Non existent Micros To configure a micro as non existent the Configure field on the Micro form should have Non existent selected Direct Connect Micros For direct connect micros ports must be configured before adding or changing a micro Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 11 Adding or Change a Micro gt To add a direct connect micro 1 Select Devices then Micros 2 Complete the Micros form with special attention to the items below See The Micros Form on page 10 18 for details on completing this form The following fields must be set to the given value e For the primary port you must select a direct port e For bi directional micros you must also select a secondary port which must be a direct port e Click on the Dial Up button and select a modem type of None Leave the remaining fields on this Dial Up screen blank 3 Click Save 4 Toadd another micro click New or Quit to exit Dial up Micros For dial up communication micros modems and ports must be configured before adding or changing a micro To add a dial up micro 1 Select Devices then Micros 2 Complete the Micros form with special attention to the items below See The Micr
562. uration file B 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide One of your standard TPS processes Number of times a process can csndmgr almmgr etc respawn before an alarm is generated a value of 0 means that no alarm will be generated 7 tps proc input group id respawn threshold failover threshold Input Group Id for a host Number of times a process can generated alarm respawn before a failover occurs ona SULEIVY SdL redundant system a value of 0 means that no failover will occur cas db text tps cfg sample This is an un initialized sample configuration file containing the TPS processes that are not designed to respawn Processes such as nwmdrv snddrv etc are designed to respawn and therefore will not be included in this file Icas bin tps_cfg sh This shell script will create a TPS alarm and input groups for the TPS processes listed in the sample configuration file This program can only run if the cas db text tps cfg file does not exist Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide B 3 Configuration Files NOTES B 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Firewall Configuration Appendix C This appendix describes the ports used by the Picture Perfect system and how to configure your system for use through a firewall In order to establish communications through a firewall it is necessary to allow for the appropriate protocols to pass through the firewall on the appropriate
563. ure Area Manager SAM and Access Vision through the addition of Facilities Facility Profiles and field level permissions For more information on this new feature see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles E Mail Alarm Routing The e mail interface provides an alternative routing system for Picture Perfect alarm messages Picture Perfect alarm information can now be routed to an external e mail address alphanumeric pager or message capable cellular phone For more information on this new feature see Chapter 7 Alarm Activity Monitor Routing Seed Counter Badge production capabilities have been enhanced to provide support for a seed counter This new feature provides a way to automatically generate a unique Id number for each badge For more information on this new feature refer to the following e Chapter 14 Badges e Picture Perfect Installation Guide Chapter 6 and Appendix G Documentation e The Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide can be viewed in its entirety using the Xpdf Viewer e Other related Picture Perfect manuals are available in pdf format on the Picture Perfect 2 0 CD 2 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide System Overview 2 l HTML Help Picture Perfect 2 0 delivers a browser independent HTML based help with a sophisticated easy to use user interface that includes a table of contents index related topics and full text search i lt N a o 3 0 lt D s
564. uring certain hours and days of the week See Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes for more ways to use categories For example scheduling categories on areas to control when badgeholders can access an area or scheduling how long a contractor is allowed access to each area to control where and when the job starts and ends sealy souoba ye9 A D Q D o O 3 Q s e bp Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 5 Categories Categories are position sensitive if you plan to schedule categories assign categories in a consistent order See Area Events on page 16 14 of Chapter 16 Schedules and Modes Categories Use the Categories form see Figure 13 2 to create descriptions of each group of people who use the facility Categories describe users by type title group or shift Then associate each category with one Permission Group The categories form a picklist that is used on the Areas Badges Generator and Area Events forms NOTE F A facility map helps identify categories of people who require access The permission assigned to an operator determines what categories that operator can assign See Chapter 6 Permissions and Operators Setup gt To create a category record 1 2 Select Access then Category Click New Complete the Category form For a description of each field see The Categories Form on page 13 7 Click Save Click New to add a
565. urned off at some time later that day At mode start If this is a Start End event click At mode start if you want the event to activate at the start of the mode 16 26 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 l If this is a Start End event click At mode end if you want the event to activate at the end of the mode At mode end Facility Click the Facility button to display the facilities picklist Selecting a facility will allow the administrator to restrict operator access to those records in a specific facility For more information see Chapter 5 Facilities and Facility Profiles Reader Select the reader where the event will occur Figure 16 13 Reader Events Form Bottom Reader Online Offline Readers that have a physical state of Enabled on the Readers form allowed to read badges can be set Online or Offline O gt D a G D 7 5 a z a 7 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 27 Reader Events For example To prevent all access to a room yet record all access attempts use a reader event to set that room s reader Offline Number of Badges There are two badge controls available Single and Double Single means only one valid badge is required Double means that two complete valid and distinct transactions are required Physical Reader Type There are four ways to define the physical reader type of a reader Badge Only
566. usual failure reports the keypad response feature also reports the following e Invalid alarm response code e Badge is not authorized for keypad response e Door is not secured the door is physically open Operator Response Operators respond to alarms requiring keypad alarm response in the same manner as any alarm associated with a physical input The only difference is that the keypad alarm response resets the alarm rather than a physical change in an input AA 0 DO N lt 38 5a o gt N g 3 The vehicle for operator response is the Alarm Monitor Its operation is not changed by keypad alarm response The Alarm Monitor presents information to the operator on each alarm that is routed to it The information includes the alarm s Condition and Process State Condition e Alarm Alarm is logically on e Reset Alarm is logically off When the violation first occurs its Condition is alarm and its Process State is active When a valid keypad response occurs the violation s Condition goes to reset Process State e Active No alarm response has been made e Pending Partial alarm response has been made e Complete Final alarm response has been made Selecting the alarm on the Alarm Monitor pops up a window which displays the alarm s instructions and allows the operator to enter a response The instructions are the only means of notifying the operator that keypad alarm response is requi
567. ut line micro line micro NONE or HOST NONE DOWNSTREAM DIALUP Otherwise Otherwise anything but anything but NONE or NONE or HOST HOST Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 10 15 Adding or Change a Micro Table 10 2 Determining the Type of Micro Communications Continued Type of Micro Primary Secondary Upstream Downstream Modem Type Communications Port Port Downstream from Dial NONE Anything but If an end of DOWNSTREAM up NONE or line micro DIALUP and the HOST NONE Callback field is set to NONE Otherwise anything but NONE or HOST Refer to Table 10 1 Dial up Micro Downstream Support on page Dial up Micro Downstream Support on page 10 5 Network Network NONE Ifa head of If an end of NONE Port line micro line micro HOST NONE Otherwise Otherwise anything but anything but HOST or NONE or NONE HOST Network Dial up Network NONE If a head of If an end of If a head of line Port line micro line micro micro Anything HOST NONE but NONE or DOWNSTREAM Otherwise Otherwise DIALUP anything but anything but HOST or NONE or Otherwise NONE HOST DOWNSTREAM DIALUP 10 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Micros Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem Primary Port Secondary Port Upstream Downstream Modem Primary Port
568. ut able to read badges pass badge data route and archive access messages and activate associated alarms Routings Routings for selected badge activities valid invalid suspended lost unknown antipassback in an area can be routed to one or all destinations log monitor printers For example e For after hours in a high security area you can set up an area event that routes all badge activity to the Activity Monitor or O gt D a G D 7 5 a z a 7 e You can set up an area event to route selected activities to a printer or to online history files to be examined later Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 16 17 Area Events NOTE Two Man Rule These radio buttons are enabled only if the operator has Occupancy Control permission granted To leave Two Man Rule unaffected when the event is triggered none of the radio buttons should be selected If the micro is unable to activate a scheduled Two Man Rule event an alarm Schedule did not run will be sent to the Alarm Monitor This could occur if the area configuration changed since the schedule was set up For example if the Logical Reader Function of a reader in the area was inadvertently changed to Normal the micro would be unable to activate the schedule Disabled Select this radio button to deactivate Two Man Rule mode Standard Select this radio button to activate the standard Two Man Rule mode which ensures that at lea
569. utomatically set up for you when you create the Terminal record for the Access Vision client workstations in Picture Perfect NOTE When creating the terminal record for an Access Vision client workstation the Server field in the Terminal form must be filled in with the exact computer name of the client workstation in F order for Access Vision to retrieve the correct Workstation Id Sequential Counter The Sequential Counter is a global counter that is incremented each time a new badge is created or reissued The range is determined by the number of digits allocated to the counter Reader Issue Click the Reader Issue button to allow the Badge Encode Number to be entered by swiping a badge in a local console reader assigned to the terminal used to issue the badge A prompt advises you when to swipe the badge The badge encode number will appear in the Badge Encode Number box This field is disabled when the Seed Counter feature and the Copy to BID option are enabled For more information on this feature see Seed Counter Method on page 14 4 14 14 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Badges 14 i NOTE When Reader Issue is used the Badge Encode Format field will have no effect on the badge encode number BID displayed The BID displayed will E always be the actual full BID read from the badge If Save is clicked then the BID entered will be checked against the badge encode format to ensure it satisfies its specific
570. utput group triggers and associated output devices operate in this case a siren Remember to define the duration of the output using the Outputs form 16 40 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes 16 Output Groups Events An output group event can enable or disable a specific output group and or change its state to off or on for the period of time entered in the Time field of the Output form associated with this output group Use the Outgroups Events form Figure 16 17 to define output group events for each mode Defining an event requires you to select a mode set the time of the event select an output group and specify one or more changes to the output group Setup gt To create an output group event 1 Select Schedule then Outgroups Events 2 Enter a description for this event 3 Set the time for this event to occur by selecting a time by selecting days of the week and typing a time or by selecting At Mode Start or At Mode End 4 Click the Select Mode button to display the Modes picklist Select the desired mode for this event then click Ok 5 Click the Select Output Group button to display the Outgroups picklist Select the output group that this event should control then click Ok 6 Specify whether the output group should be Enabled 7 Specify whether the output state of this output group should be On or Off 8 Click Save 9 Click New to add another output
571. utputs assigned to floors See Figure 22 6 Outputs Form Configured for Elevator Floor Button on page 22 10 Method 2 During a set period of time a button may be selected This amount of time in which the entry is accepted after a valid badge swipe is set using the Devices Outputs form The same duration time should be used for all digital outputs See Figure 22 6 Outputs Form Configured for Elevator Floor Button on page 22 10 Elevator Access for All Categories A badge that has the All Categories category assigned to it will be allowed access to all floors defined for the elevator regardless of whether the All Categories category is present on the area Free Access Floors There are two methods of allowing free access to particular elevator floors One method requires a badge swipe the other does not need a badge at all Free Access for All Badges Free access for all badges allows any badge that has access to the elevator reader to have free access to designated floors The wild card category is used as an elevator category on the Category Floors form to designate which floors are free access To set up a wild card category you must select All Categories from the Category picklist and assign the free access floors to it See Figure 22 16 Select Floors Form on page 22 21 This allows a badgeholder to gain access to the free access floors as long as the badge is authorized for the elevator reader 22 6 Picture P
572. uts orion Route Definition Routing Select Route Definition Select Routing routedef3 PARALLEL PRINTER Filter Filter Facility lect Facility 254 1 0 Filter Filter Refresh Cancel Help 5 D a o 5 a fe 5 z a Figure 12 5 Inputs Form with Picklists Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 12 15 Inputs NOTES 12 16 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers ees and Doors 1 3 Overview The Picture Perfect system supports readers that control access to doors and areas An area contains a group of one or more readers and doors Categories assigned to the area act as locks A badge used with a reader acts as a key to a door if one of the categories on the badge matches one of the categories in the area Prerequisites The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites Forms Purpose PRINTER To log alarms to a printer and display on a console ROUTINGS TERMINALS PERMISSION GROUPS To authorize operators to respond to alarms assign PERMISSIONS categories to areas and areas to readers and doors OPERATORS INPUTS To allow door inputs and door outputs to activate INGROUPS OUTPUTS OUTGROUPS ROUTE DEFINITIONS To allow area activity monitor routing for ROUTE POINTS badge activity What You Will Be Doing This chapter shows you how to create areas of access control how to assign categories that
573. ve data on a regular schedule such as once a week This task can then be incorporated into your normal backup procedure The Force Rollover option takes data in the primary table and transfers it to the temporary table even if the primary table is not full The Force Rollover option will only be displayed on the Backup window if the data currently in the temporary table has already been archived This prevents unarchived data from being destroyed when new data overwrites it This data will however be overwritten when the primary table becomes full 18 2 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Backup and Restore 18 gt To review the primary tables 1 Click the middle mouse on the root window background area of the screen to display the Programs menu 2 Select the option History Dates Htc Dates Window Edit Options Help This program gives you some idea as to how full the history tables are and reports the earliest and latest dates and times of the current history tables These tables are still being written to and are not archivable until they are full Searching badge history please wait There are currently 13 badge history records capacity is 50000 start date 11 06 2002 10 32 56 end date 11 06 2002 10 53 39 Searching operator history please wait There are currently 30 operator history records capacity is 10000 start date 11 06 2002 09 59 13 end date 11 07 2002 16
574. vity TTY In Unix based operating systems any terminal at all sometimes used to refer to the particular terminal controlling a given job Also the name of a Unix command which outputs the name of the current controlling terminal Unlock Time The length of time a door latch is to remain unlocked after a valid badge read or after an exit button activates This time allows the badgeholder to open and pass through the door Upstream A relative position on a communication line originating at a host computer For example the second micro on a line is upstream from the third micro because the second micro is relatively closer to the host Window A framed display that contains all or part of a menu submenu form picklist monitor or message See Background Window Window Frame See Frame PSI 1 x0 13 Window Manager A program that controls the size placement and operation of windows on the workspace The window manager includes the functional window frames that surround each window object and may include a separate menu for the workspace Window Menu The menu that displays when the window menu button is clicked The window menu typically contains selections for restoring moving sizing minimizing maximizing and closing the window Workstation An X Terminal that displays the forms that the operator uses to interact with the system connected to the host computer using an Ethernet or Token ring LAN Local Area
575. vity message Activity Monitor orion ES B 4 Badge Monitor Monitor Control l Operator Monitor Tour Monitor l Swipe and Show Monitor OK Cancel Help Figure 28 1 Activity Monitor Window with Monitor Control Picklist B BADGE EXPIRED 10 31 02 17 24 EMP 1212 A Smith RDR 1 1 009 2E LOBBY DOOR 2 1 AREA BLD 1 2 3 LOBBIES Figure 28 2 Example of a Badge Activity Message The following is a description of each part of the activity message above B Indicates badge activity BADGE EXPIRED The badge status 01 28 93 09 10 Date and time the badge was read 28 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Monitoring Activity 28 l EMP 4 The badgeholder s employee ID A Smith The badgeholder s initials and last name RDR 1 1 009 2E LOBBY DOOR 2 1 The description of the reader that read this badge AREA BLD 1 2 3 LOBBIES The description of the area where the reader is located Operator Monitor The system records operator activities such as an operator changing the database or commanding the mode to change The system can log this activity and the operator s ID See Display Flags on page 4 30 of Chapter 4 Initial Setup gt To view operator activity 1 Select Monitors then Activity 2 Click the Outputs button to display the Monitor Control pop up window 3 Select Operator Monitor from the Monitor Control pop up window 4 Click Ok Figure 28 3 shows a
576. which supports the language Since IS08859 1 supports Western European languages the English font descriptions can be used for all supported languages 10 Messages that need translation will end with T The T should be removed when the message is translated SYM _ERR COULD NOT OPEN Cannot open 1 s T becomes SYM ERR COULD NOT OPEN Impossible d ouvrir 1 s Installing Translations Translations must be installed before an operator can use them The following commands install translations They are used after a language is first translated and after the translations are modified Only operators with root permission can use the commands Note that only English is installed during Picture Perfect base or language package installation buildlang The buildlang command is used to build a language s catalog files and the resource files that use catalog messages Any user with root permission can invoke this tool by typing the following at the command line buildlang locale where locale is the locale identifier of the language being built The following example builds the catalogs and resource files for Spanish cas bin profile buildlang es_ES buildmeaning The buildmeaning command builds the database meaning table with the database synonyms defined for all languages on the system It uses the meaning dat file found in every subdirectory of cas nls src Any user with root permission can invoke this too
577. wise leave blank Note that a terminal can only be assigned to one reader Click the Terminal button to display the Terminals picklist Select the desired terminal then click Close A reader can only be assigned to one terminal Valid InGroup Select an input group to be triggered when a valid badge is swiped through this reader Click the Valid Ingroup button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the desired input group then click Close NOTE Only Trigger on Input Individual which are non boolean input groups are displayed in the picklist See Boolean Type on page 9 5 To allow doors to open for valid badges be sure to assign an input group that is associated with the output group that controls the appropriate door strike output Invalid InGroup Select an input group to be triggered when an invalid badge is swiped through this reader Click the Invalid Ingroup button to display the Ingroups picklist Select the desired Input Group then click Close Two Man Rule Click 2MR Output to open a list box from which you may optionally select an output to associate with an indicator such as a blinking light The indicator device is activated when the first of two valid badge reads for entry or exit from a two man ruled enabled area has occurred at the reader When the indicator device is activated the second person should present their badge at the reader before the timeout period expires in order to unlock the door to permit entr
578. ws you to monitor the progress of a security officer as he or she tours the facility premises at specified intervals and to obtain hardcopy reports that show a tour history Support Services GE Interlogix and its Business Partners offer a full range of customer support services including site surveys installation supervision systems acceptance and training with total turnkey installation capabilities Services are options at the discretion of the customer Training is extensive and all inclusive It provides for the needs of customer personnel at all levels management technical and system operations Classes are conducted by expert training personnel and provide extensive hands on experience i lt N e 3 0 lt D s D GE Interlogix offers a Protection Plan that provides a full range of maintenance options after the one year factory warranty or the 90 day software warranty expires The Protection Plan provides customers with all program updates and provides an emergency hotline for ongoing system support What s New Red Hat Linux 7 3 Operating System Red Hat Linux 7 3 delivers cutting edge technologies new features and updated core components while improving ease of use and maintenance Red Hat Linux is a flexible versatile solution for several types of deployments from secure Web serving to personal productivity workstations AIX 5 1L Operating System As an open UNIX solution AIX 5L
579. xample it is possible to define a double transaction badge and keypad antipassback in reader Reader status requests will display the reader s current Number of Badges definition 26 4 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Monitoring Alarms Chapter 2 Overview The Alarm Monitor displays incoming alarms and their priority count status and time of occurrence Alarms display on the Alarm Monitor in order of their priority When an alarm occurs the system beeps and displays a pop up window to notify the operator The operator displays instructions for the alarm by selecting the alarm from a list on the Alarm Monitor The operator records a response to an alarm either by selecting pre written alarm responses from the Alarm Response window or by typing a response If your system has the optional Network Alarm Notification feature the network alarm notification window displays on a designated terminal usually one of the host consoles when an alarm with network priority goes beyond the allowed operator response time fa Prerequisites 8 The following Picture Perfect forms are prerequisites amp gt Forms Purpose 2 3 PRINTER To log alarms to a printer and display on a console n ROUTINGS TERMINALS PERMISSION GROUPS To authorize operators to respond to alarms PERMISSIONS OPERATORS INPUT GROUPS To allow inputs to activate when an alarm condition INPUTS occurs OUTPUT GROU
580. xed value of 6768 Micro 5 Flash Download TCP Fixed value of 7777 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide C 1 Setting a Fixed Port for the Client Server Task The customer security group must choose a fixed port number typically between 5000 and 8000 for this communication path For the purposes of explaining the procedure let us assume that port 5555 was chosen Follow this procedure to set a fixed port for the client server task 1 Log onto the host Picture Perfect system as the root user and shut down Picture Perfect by entering re pperf k 2 Edit the etc services file with any editor such as vi or emacs 3 Go to the bottom of the file and enter the following line pesrv 5555 tcp where 5555 is the chosen port number The line should look similar to the others in that file 4 Exit the editor saving the changes 5 Reboot the system Changing the Fixed Port Used by the License Manager Task The customer security can use the existing fixed port value of 6769 for access through the firewall If that value is not acceptable a different value can be used by following the procedure below For purposes of explaining the procedure let us assume that port 8888 was chosen 1 Log onto the host Picture Perfect system as the root user while Picture Perfect is running 2 Enter the command query tps_daemons to locate the entry that starts the client server task The entry should look like this 181
581. xtract to transfer new EPROM data from the diskette to the hard drive Result The floppy drive device path will be displayed 5 Press to start the extract The new EPROM information will be transferred to the hard drive Result When the extract is complete a summary of the information appears similar to the following Floppy drive Directory cas flash m5p140 Version Info M 5P Ver 1 40 Direct Optimized 454784 bytes Non Optimized 620099 bytes Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 11 3 Flash Download Utility 6 Press any key to return to the Micro Flash EPROM Upgrade menu 7 Once the new EPROM information is transferred to the hard drive select Start from the Micro Flash EPROM Upgrade menu The Start option allows the new EPROM files to be flash downloaded to any or all of the Micro 5s Micro PX 2000s or Micro PXN 2000s on the system regardless of whether the micros are dial up direct or network Result The Begin Flash Download form appears All system micros Micro 4 Micro 5 and Micro PX 2000 series are displayed under the Micro Map column and all micro types can be selected however the flash download will only execute on Micro 5s Micro PX 2000s or Micro PXN 2000s Selecting Micro 4s will not affect the downloading process to the selected Micro 5s Micro PX 2000s or Micro PXN 2000s Terminal BE i iii Sennaa i ie i Figure 11 2 Begin Flash Download
582. y Profiles Permissions Occupancy Control Set the Occupancy Control toggle button to on to allow the number of persons in a controlled space to be monitored as well as activation of Two Man Rule enforcement The standard Two Man Rule 2MR when enabled requires that at least two authorized badge holders occupy a controlled space at the same time the Modified Two Man Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 6 5 Permissions Rule M2MR further restricts access to controlled space based on specific M2MR category types Enable Remote Login Set the Enable Remote Login toggle button on to have the ability to log in through the Picture Perfect Web Browser application from a remote terminal System Permissions Set the System Permissions toggle button to On to permit an operator to use the operating system There are three system permission functions available First this operator has the ability to bring up additional windows and log on to the system console Second this operator has in addition to the Workspace menu accessed by clicking the right mouse button on the root window and the Clients menu accessed by clicking the left mouse button on the root window access to the Programs menu which is accessed by clicking the middle mouse button on the root window Third this operator has the use of a Purge button on the alarm monitor Toggle the System Permissions button to Off to restrict access Normally oper
583. y be created to limit the way an operator may access records in a particular facility Since there are numerous relationships between the different sections of this form we recommend you follow the sequence of steps below when completing the form 1 Select Control then Facility Profile Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 5 9 Facility Profiles 9 From the toolbar click New In the Description field enter a unique text description to decribe the facility profile For example Update Badges Click the box next to the label Menu Result A list of menu items will display These menu items correspond to the Main Menu icons of Picture Perfect for example Access Monitors Devices and so on Select a Menu item Result In the box below a list of forms will display These forms correspond to the icons displayed when you click the selected Main Menu icon of Picture Perfect For example if you selected Access as the menu item the resulting forms would be Areas Badges Categories and so on Select the form with which you wish to work Set the desired Record permissions View Update Insert or Delete If the form selected in step 6 was Badges or Doors set the desired Field permissions View or Update Repeat step 6 through step 8 for each form in the selected Menu item 10 Repeat step 5 through step 8 for each Menu item 11 Click Save 5 10 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide F
584. y or exit from the area The indicator is deactivated when a timeout or second valid badge read or invalid badge read occurs at the reader The Two Man Rule Output is a digital output DO point configured to control the indicator device The value in the drop down list may only be changed by an operator with Occupancy Control permission granted 13 24 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 i e e iS we C C Figure 13 10 Readers Form Bottom Right Logical Reader Function Select the desired Logical Reader Function for this reader Normal Used to grant access into an area Anti Passback In Used to log a badgeholder in when entering Anti Passback Out Used to log a badgeholder out when exiting Time and Attendance In Out Used to log a badgeholder in and out using the same reader such as the Model 100 Weigand reader by swiping the card the normal way for in and reversing the card or turning the card backwards for out nd Time and Attendance In Used to log a badgeholder in at the start of a work shift Time and Attendance Out Used to log a badgeholder out at the end of a work shift se sy salobe e5 A oO o Q O 7 gt Q w n APB Type If the Logical Reader Function is set to APB In or APB Out select the desired APB Type for this reader Picture Perfect 2
585. y that Picture Perfect is Stopped or Running on page 3 22 Verify that Picture Perfect is Stopped or Running e Verify that Picture Perfect has stopped or started by typing ipes If INFORMIX and TPS are running the output would appear similar to the following first AIX is shown followed by Linux NOTE F TPS is recognized by the KEY ending in 400 for shared memory and 401 for semaphore For example 0x00000400 and 0x00000401 AIX IPC status from dev mem as of Tue Mar 25 13 47 29 EST 1997 T ID KEY MODE OWNER GROUP Message Queues q 24576 0x00000401 Rrw rw rw root system q 24577 0x00000402 Rrw rw rw root system q 24578 0x00000403 rw rw rw root system q 24579 0x00000404 rw rw rw root system q 24580 0x00000405 Rrw rw rw root system q 24581 0x00000406 Rrw rw rw root system q 24582 0x00000407 rw rw rw root system q 24583 0x0000040a rw rw rw root system q 24584 0x0000040b Rrw rw rw root system q 24585 0x0000040c Rrw rw rw root system q 24586 0x0000040d Rrw rw rw root system q 24587 0x0000040e Rrw rw rw root system q 24588 0x0000040f rw rw rw root system q 24589 0x00000410 Rrw rw rw root system q 24590 0x00000411 rw rw rw root system q 24591 0x00000412 Rrw rw rw root system q 24592 0x00000413 Rrw rw rw root system q 16401 0x4107001c Rrw rw root printq Shared Memory m 28672 0x52564801 rw rw informix informix m 24577 0x00000400 rw rw rw root system m 2 Ox0d05f0fd rw rw rw
586. y the Ingroups picklist Select the desired Input Group for a duress code entry then click Close NOTE Do not assign a reader s valid input group to one of the above groups This will result F in an unlocked door Occupancy Control Categories Manage Occupancy Counting C Enabled _ Disabled Occupancy Count p Reset Two Man Rule Control _ Disabled _ Standard _ Modified with Door Control _ Modified without Door Control Door Release Timeout Ei iia Set Routings Permission Group Valid Routing lt BLANK gt Permission Group lt BLANK gt Invalid Routing lt BLANK gt Suspended Routing lt BLANK gt Lost Routing lt BLANK gt Unknown Routing lt BLANK gt Antipassback Routing lt BLANK gt Route Definition lt BLANK gt Figure 13 6 Areas Form Bottom sealy souobaye9 Ps D f Q D S Q s e Occupancy Control Occupancy Counting The ability to control occupancy counting is available only if the operator has Occupancy Control permission granted When enabled Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 13 17 Areas it allows the number of persons in a controlled space to be monitored The occupancy count is reset to zero and the two man rule radio buttons are enabled When disabled the two man rule mode is forced to Disabled and the two m
587. yed an existing record and made changes to it this new version will replace the old record in the database Find F3 Locates specific data records based on selection criteria entered into any of the fields This is useful if you want to change the data of an existing record If you click Find without entering any search criteria the system will find all of the data records in that table such as all the badge records if you are using the Badges form The number of Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 3 9 Using Function Buttons NOTE records found for the search will be displayed below the function buttons Use the Prev and Next buttons to view the individual records If the Prev button is grayed out that means you are currently viewing the first record If the Next button is grayed out that means you are currently viewing the last record Symbols can be used to help delimit the search For instance the asterisk can expand the search in either direction around a string of characters e Ifyou type Son the system will find records such as Sonesta Sonya Sonny e Ifyou type son the system will find records such as Robinson Jackson Nelson e Ifyou type son the system will find records such as Masonry Seasonal Johnson Other symbols and their functions include the following Equal to no symbol required Not equal to Greater than Less than Match string Match a single character Logical and Log
588. you have specified your data click Ok Depending on the history type currently selected in the Type menu alarm badge or operator the Query window will vary Use the Help button on each of the windows for information on the various fields 19 6 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide History Reports 19 Badge Encode Number 3 Last Name Category PIN Number Reader Employee Number Department Floor Number 0 loor Num Personnel Type Date and Time From Through Logic TF Normal F APB In F APB Out Cancel Figure 19 6 Badge Query Window Column This option displays the Format Columns window Figure 19 7 which is used to designate specific columns fields of information to be included in a report After the desired columns have been selected from a picklist for display in the report you then specify which columns are to control the sorting order of the data found and whether that should be done in ascending or descending order You can also control the width of each column on the report When you have specified your report information click Ok Depending on the history type currently selected in the Type menu alarm badge or operator the All Columns picklist of the Columns window will vary Use the Help button on the window for additional information on the various fields T D o e lt A ke ie gt a Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 19 7 The History For
589. you must click the Description button in the Area box and choose an existing area description from the Areas picklist This existing area is assigned to the reader gt To generate records 1 Select Control then Generator 2 Complete the Generator form Figure 15 2 for each record 3 Click the Execute Gen function button to place the records into the database 4 Click New to generate another reader record Joyeiauas Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide 15 7 The Generator Form NOTES 15 8 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Schedules and Modes Chapter 16 Overview Schedules allow you to change a variety of operational characteristics based on mode day of week and time of day Using the Schedule feature you can specify when you want a particular type of change to occur That change will remain in effect until overridden by another schedule or mode event or manually changed by an operator The Picture Perfect system supports multiple modes of operation such as Normal Holiday and Emergency When you initially set up the system make sure that all the values and schedules that you define for readers doors areas etc are associated with your normal operating mode Weekdays and weekends occur within your normal operating mode so the system does not need a unique weekend mode An evening mode is not required either as the normal mode can contain schedules for multiple shifts
590. ype is Daily NOTE Holding down the key and selecting a schedule type will set all the A schedule types Z Week Days From the Advanced window you can restrict the days of the week that a temporary category will be enabled A week day that is selected means that the schedule can run on that day A week day that is not selected prevents the schedule from running on that day By default all days of the week are selected NOTE Holding down the key and selecting a day sets Monday Friday or Saturday Sunday Antipassback Status When used in conjunction with antipassback readers the Antipassback status of a badge plus a category match regulate its ability to open a door For example if a badgeholder enters an antipassback area without using his own badge such as by following someone else through the open door that person will not be able to exit that area with his own badge because the system never registered him as having entered that area Likewise if a person exits an antipassback area without using his badge he cannot re enter that area since the system has not registered his exit Antipassback status is global meaning the system will register whether someone is in or out but it does not regulate the status on a per reader basis For example someone can badge in at an antipassback reader in one room follow someone out of that room and into another antipassback controlled room without using his own badge and the
591. ystem Flow Diagram ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeetees H 1 Valid Badge Read Flow Diagram H 2 Comm Failure Detected by Micro H 3 Bad Badge Detected by Area H 3 Door Forced Condition Detected by Door H 4 Problem Condition Detected by Sensor DI H 4 DI Used to Trigger DO eeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteteeeteaas H 5 Door Exit DI and Sense DI Setup H 6 Alarms Initiated by Micros ceeeeeeenteeeeeeeneee H 7 Alarms Initiated by Areas ceeeseeeeeeeenteeeeeeenaes H 7 Alarms Initiated by Doors n H 7 xxii Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Using This Manual Chapter Purpose This manual provides instructions for initial setup and configuration of the system and for configuration changes to an existing system It also contains information for operating the system once it is installed Who Should Read this Manual This manual is intended for system administrators who are responsible for the planning and implementation of the system design and who perform system configuration and setup using Picture Perfect forms that are accessible only to the master level operator Operators using the system should read the chapters which relate to their duties The material in this manual has been prepared for persons responsible for and familiar with the security needs of the customer facility NOTE If you have a previous version of this manual you may
592. zation Required Select Yes to designate a reader that will display a photo in a popup window beside the Activity Monitor see Figure 28 1 and require an operator to unlock a door Select No to designate a reader that will display a photo in a popup window beside the Activity Monitor see Figure 28 1 and will unlock a door without operator intervention The Yes and No buttons are not available unless Swipe and Show is Enabled Access cannot be granted through readers defined as Authorization Required while communications to the micro are down 13 26 Picture Perfect 2 0 Administration Guide Categories Areas Readers and Doors 13 Select the desired physical reader type for this reader Physical Reader Type Badge Only A reader used only to read badges using a badge swipe Keypad Only A reader used only as a keypad where in lieu of a badge swipe the badge encode number must be entered using the keypad Press or enter the badge encode number then press Badge and Keypad A badge reader used in conjunction with a keypad where a PIN a duress code a shunt override code or an alarm response code can be entered in addition to the badge swipe See the procedures for each type of code below e PIN or Duress Code 1 Swipe the Badge 2 Press or enter the PIN or Duress Code then press e Shunt Override Code 1 Press or enter the Shunt Code then press 2 Swipe the Badge 3 Press or

Setup

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents